BlackbaudNetCommunityTM
Blackbaud NetCommunity User Guide

121107
©2007 Blackbaud, Inc. This publication, or any part thereof, may not be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, storage in an
information retrieval system, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Blackbaud, Inc.
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate. Blackbaud, Inc.,
assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions in this manual. In no event will
Blackbaud, Inc., be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from
any defect or omission in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of damages.
In the interest of continuing product development, Blackbaud, Inc., reserves the right to make improvements
in this manual and the products it describes at any time, without notice or obligation.
All Blackbaud product names appearing herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of Blackbaud, Inc.
All other products and company names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective holder.
BBNC5.1-2007

CHAPTER 1
Blackbaud
NetCommunity
In This Chapter
"Blackbaud NetCommunity Users" on page 1
"Navigate in Blackbaud NetCommunity" on page 4
"Program Basics" on page 5
Blackbaud NetCommunity provides your organization with a website program for users of all levels. You
can create web pages with multiple layers of layout, template, and page design. You can generate and send
an email to an individual or a group, set security for each section of the program using roles you define,
and track statistics about your website usage. Website users can also make a donation or register for an
event with online forms you create. In addition, Blackbaud NetCommunity integrates data between your
website and other Blackbaud products, such as The Raiser's Edge. Website users enter information into
areas of your website such as profiles and donation forms that you download to another Blackbaud
program. This documentation is for the administrative side of Blackbaud NetCommunity. The
administrative side consists of the Web Site, Email, and Administration sections. Together, these sections
contain the tools you need to create your organization's website.
Blackbaud NetCommunity Users
Depending on your role in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you will perform different tasks to fulfill your
website needs. For example, if you are the Site Administrator, your job in Blackbaud NetCommunity is
most likely to create new web pages from start to finish and assign roles to Blackbaud NetCommunity
users. If you are the Director of Special Events, your job may be to update last year's Golf Tournament
web page with this year's golf tournament information. If you are the Data Entry Manager for The Raiser's
Edge, your job is to download information from the website and integrate the information with The
Raiser's Edge. Lastly, your constituents use Blackbaud NetCommunity directly from your website.

.
2
C HAPTER 1
Warning: Your organization should assign full Administrator rights to only a select number of users.
These users should be knowledgeable in all areas of website design and Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Certain areas, such as Site Explorer, are crucial for your website. A small change can affect multiple web
pages. This functionality saves your organization a lot of time and effort. However, if a change is incorrect,
you have to spend time and effort to correct the change. We strongly encourage you to establish security
that limits general users' access to these areas.
Constituents perform tasks such as registering for events, joining memberships, and making donations.
Once a constituent submits these tasks, you can download the information to The Raiser's Edge. This
section outlines possible main user roles in Blackbaud NetCommunity and provides a roadmap for the
main tasks each role performs in the program.
Blackbaud NetCommunity User Tasks
A a wide range of users perform tasks in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Many tasks are captured in the user
roles of a Blackbaud NetCommunity administrator, a website designer, a user from The Raiser's Edge who
also uses Blackbaud NetCommunity (most likely someone in the Development office), and a constituent.
Review the following picture to become familiar with the tasks you can perform, depending on your user
role.
For details about these tasks, see "Security" on page 223, "Web Traffic Reports" on page 120, "Website"
on page 29, and "Parts" on page 39.
Integration Tasks
Some individuals (most likely in development) at your organization may have responsibilities that are
common to both Blackbaud NetCommunity and The Raiser's Edge. For example, your events data entry
person may also be responsible for updating the events page on your website.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
3
If the roles for your job are similar to this, review the following diagram for an example of integration
between Blackbaud NetCommunity and The Raiser's Edge. If you have rights to create and edit parts or
pages of your website, this diagram helps you get started in the program and understand how the
integration process works.
For details about the tasks a user of Blackbaud NetCommunity and The Raiser's Edge can perform, see
"Pages" on page 31, "Templates" on page 35, "Parts" on page 39, "Messages" on page 177, and The
Raiser's Edge user guides.
The Raiser's Edge Data Entry User
If you are responsible for The Raiser's Edge data entry, you should periodically download information
entered through your website.

.
4
C HAPTER 1
The following diagram explains where data downloads to The Raiser's Edge. The diagram does not
include all transaction types.
For details about the tasks a Raiser's Edge data entry user performs, see "The Raiser's Edge
NetCommunity Page" on page 329 and your Raiser's Edge user guides.
Navigate in Blackbaud NetCommunity
Blackbaud NetCommunity contains the commands necessary to complete all website functions. You can
customize your website to fit your organization's needs by using Web Site, Email, and Administration.
Learning to navigate in Blackbaud NetCommunity is the first step in using the program to its fullest
potential.
Navigation Bar
The navigation bar is located on the left side of the page. If you need additional space on your computer
screen when you make changes to your website, click Hide Navigation Bar on the NetCommunity
toolbar. Hiding the navigation bar in Blackbaud NetCommunity is workstation specific. For example, if
Jane hides the navigation bar on her workstation and Joe later logs into Blackbaud NetCommunity on the
same workstation, the navigation bar remains hidden.
Blackbaud NetCommunity Toolbar
The Blackbaud NetCommunity toolbar, located at the top left of the screen, contains buttons you can use
throughout Blackbaud NetCommunity. The main buttons are Home Page, Preview Site, History, Hide
Navigation Bar, and Log Out.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
5
If you hide your navigation bar, the toolbar changes. The buttons then become Home Page, Preview Site,
History, Web Site, Email, Administration, Help, Show Navigation Bar, and Log Out.
Action Bar
The action bar contains buttons for you to use on a specific screen. Several of these buttons remain on most
screens, for example, Delete. However, some buttons on the action bar are specific to a particular screen,
for example, Copy Template on an existing Templates screen.
Filter List By
Near the top of each page, you can select a category or enter search criteria to narrow the list that appears
for pages, parts, email, templates, layouts, users, or roles. Click Go to display the narrowed-down list.
Toggle Between Blackbaud NetCommunity and Your Live
Website
If you are in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you can click Preview Site on the Blackbaud NetCommunity
toolbar to access your live website. This is helpful when you update web pages. You can make changes to
the page, save the information, and go directly to the live site to view the changes with the click of one
button.
If you have Supervisor or edit rights to that page, toolbar buttons appear on your live website that take you
directly to Blackbaud NetCommunity. This way, if you notice a mistake on your site, you can immediately
access the administrative side of Blackbaud NetCommunity to make the correction. To do this, click Edit
this page, History, or Home Page on the Blackbaud NetCommunity toolbar. When you click Edit this
page, Blackbaud NetCommunity opens to the Page Designer screen for the web page in Site Explorer. To
access your most recently opened parts, click History. When you click Home Page, a menu appears with
Web Site, Administration, Email, and Help so you can access the area of the program you need. You can
access only areas to which you have rights.
Internet Explorer Buttons
To navigate back and forth between screens in Blackbaud NetCommunity, use the Back and Forward
arrow buttons on your Internet Explorer toolbar. All other buttons in Internet Explorer control Internet
settings.
Program Basics
Throughout Blackbaud NetCommunity, you can perform similar tasks from different parts. For example,
in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you use a powerful HTML editor to format and layout several features, such
as email, newsletters, and content on web pages. You can use a search screen from different parts to help
find and select data to use, such as a constituent query to use to create a Directory part or an appeal for a
Donation form.

.
6
C HAPTER 1
HTML Editor
Blackbaud NetCommunity provides a powerful HTML editor so you can format and lay out content for
your web pages. With the HTML editor, you can update content easily and safely while you maintain
control over the website design and content.
Before you begin to create content in the HTML editor, you should design custom stylesheets to create
unique elements such as colors, font types and sizes, and spacing for your website. For more information
about stylesheets, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
You can use the HTML editor in various modes, depending on your HTML experience and where in the
program you access the HTML editor.
· Normal Normal mode works similar to a standard word processing application. To create content in
Normal mode, click Normal.
By default, when you enter content in Normal mode, pressing ENTER on your keyboard creates a 
tag in the HTML content to indicate the start of a new paragraph. Pressing SHIFT + ENTER on your
keyboard creates a tag to indicate a single carriage return in the content. Your system administrator
can adjust this configuration in Administration.
· HTML If you have experience with HTML, you can click HTML and create or edit your content's
HTML source code. You cannot use HTML mode to embed your own form via HTML in the HTML
editor. We recommend you put the form on a page that is not stored in Blackbaud NetCommunity but
can be referenced in an iFrame. For more information about including customized forms in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, contact Blackbaud's Professional Services at solutions@blackbaud.com.
· Preview In Preview mode, you can view the content as it appears on the web page. To view the HTML
editor content in the read-only Preview mode, click Preview. To adjust the content, return the HTML
editor to Normal or HTML mode.
Preview mode is not available for the HTML editor in Email. To view a preview of an email, click the
Preview button on the toolbar. The Preview screen appears.
HTML Editor Functions
The following tables explain the functions and menus available on the toolbar of the HTML editor in
Normal mode and HTML mode. Depending on the mode in which you use the HTML editor, not every
function and menu may appear.
Note: On your website, the user can use an HTML editor with a limited set of these functions on some
parts. With the HTML editor, the user can also insert an image or a link.
Buttons on the Toolbar
Review the following table to learn about the HTML Editor buttons.
Icon
Function
Description
Print
To print the current content, click Print. The Print screen appears. Specify the
printer and print preferences, and click Print. The program sends the print job
to the selected printer and the Print screen closes.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
7
Icon
Function
Description
Preview
To preview the current content, click Preview. The Preview screen appears and
displays a preview of the current content.
When you access the Preview screen from the HTML Editor outside Email, you
can adjust the screen resolution of the previewed content. To view the page at
different monitor aspect ratios, click Size: 540x480, 800x600, or 1024x768.
The Width and Height fields display the selected the screen resolution for the
selected size.
To print a hard copy of the preview, click the Print button. The Print screen
appears.
To close the Preview screen, click Cancel.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Find and
To find and replace text in the content, click Find and Replace. The Find and
Replace
Replace screen appears. In the Find what field, enter the text to search for in
the content. To replace found text with other text, in the Replace with field,
enter the text to substitute in the place of the found text. Specify whether to
search for a whole word or for the same case of text.
To search for the Find what text, click Find Next. To replace found text with
the text entered in the Replace with field, click Replace. To replace all
instances of the Find what text, click Replace All.
To close the Find and Replace screen, click Cancel.
Clean Up
To clean up the content and remove unnecessary tags from the HTML, such as
HTML
 or , click Clean Up HTML. The Clean Up HTML screen
appears. Click the applicable button to clean up the HTML. You can Remove
all HTML tags, Remove all word specific markup, Clean up cascading
style sheets, Clean up tags, and Clean up tags.
To close the Clean Up HTML screen, click Cancel.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Spell Check
To check the spelling of the content, click Spell Check. The Spell Check screen
appears. If the HTML editor finds a misspelled word, the word appears above
the Change To field. In the Change To field, enter the correct spelling of the
word, or select the correctly spelled word in the Suggestions box.
To replace a selected word with the Change To word, click Replace. To
replace all instances of a misspelled word, click Replace All. To not replace a
word the Spell Check screen displays, click Ignore. To not replace any
instances of a word, click Ignore All. To add a selected word to the HTML
editor's dictionary, click Add.
To close the Spell Check screen, click Cancel.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Undo
To undo the last operation in the content area, click Undo. The previous
operation in the content area is undone.
To undo the most recent series of operations, click Undo repeatedly.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Redo
To redo an undone operation in the content area, click Redo. The most recently
undone operation is reinstated.
To redo the most recently undone series of operations, click Redo repeatedly.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Cut
To temporarily remove selected text from the content, such as to paste
elsewhere in the content, click Cut. The selected text is removed from the
content.
Copy
To duplicate selected text from the content, such as to paste elsewhere in the
content, click Copy. The selected text is copied, and you can paste it repeatedly
throughout the content.
Paste
To insert cut or copied text at a selected position in the content, formatted as
when it was cut or copied, click Paste. The formatted text appears at the
selected location in the content.

.
8
C HAPTER 1
Icon
Function
Description
Paste plain text To insert cut or copied text at a selected position in the content, without the
format of when it was cut or copied, click Paste plain text. The plain text
appears at the selected location in the content.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Paste From
To insert text that was cut or copied from Microsoft Word at a selected position
word
in the content, click Paste From word. The text appears at the selected location
in the content, without the proprietary HTML of Word. The text format in the
HTML editor may differ from the format in Word.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Delete
To completely remove selected text from the content, click Delete. The selected
text is removed from the content. You cannot paste deleted text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert
You can link selected text in the content to another web address or page. When
Hyperlink
you select the text to link, Insert Hyperlink is enabled. If the text is written in
a format that Blackbaud NetCommunity recognizes as a web address or page,
such as www.blackbaud.com, the link formats automatically. To link selected
text to another web address or page, click Insert Hyperlink. The Create Page
Link screen appears. For information about a page link, see "Create Page Link"
on page 25.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Remove Link
To remove an existing hyperlink from selected text in the content, click
Remove Link. The hyperlink removes from the selected text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Add image map To add an image map to a selected image in the content area, click Add image
map. The Add image map screen appears. From the Add image map screen,
you can add hot spots and hyperlinks to the image, increase or decrease the
magnification of the image, and adjust the size of the image. For more
information about the image map, see "Image Map" on page 13.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert Image
To insert an image, such as your organization's logo, click Insert Image. The
Select Image from the Images Library screen appears so you can select the
image to insert. For information about how to insert an image, see "Insert
Image" on page 24.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Break
To insert a line break at a selected location in the content, click Break. The
HTML editor adds a tag at the selected location.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert
To insert a paragraph at a selected location in the content, click Insert
Paragraph
Paragraph. The HTML editor adds a tag at the selected location.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert Print
To insert a printed page break at a selected location in the content, click Insert
Page Break
Print Page Break. The HTML editor adds a division with an attribute of
PAGE-BREAK-BEFORE: always at the selected location.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert today's
To insert the current date at a selected location in the content, click Insert
date
today's date. Today's date, in the "Day, Month, Date, Year" format, appears at
the selected location in the content.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert the
To insert the current time at a selected location in the content, click Insert the
current time
current time. The current time, in the "HH:MM:SS AM/PM" format, appears
at the selected location in the content.
This function is available only in Normal mode.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
9
Icon
Function
Description
Special
To insert a special character at a selected location in the content, click Special
characters
characters. The Special characters screen appears.
Specify the special character font to use, and, in the Special characters frame,
select the character to insert. The special character appears at the selected
location in the content.
To close the Special characters screen and not insert a special character in the
content, click Cancel.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Universal
To enter international text or characters at a selected location in the content,
Keyboard
click Universal Keyboard. The Universal Keyboard screen appears.
Click the desired language in which to type, and use the keys on the screen to
enter the text or characters. To scroll through the available languages, click kb+
or kb-.
To insert the text or characters and close the Universal Keyboard screen, click
Insert. To cancel the text or characters and close the Universal Keyboard
screen, click Cancel.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert groupbox To insert a group box at a selected location in the content, click Insert
groupbox. The HTML editor adds a <fieldset> tag at the selected location.
You can adjust the size of the group box as necessary.
Replace the default "Title", with an HTML tag of <legend>, with the desired
caption and enter the desired paragraph text in the group box.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Help
To access a description of the HTML editor features, click Help. The
Blackbaud NetCommunity help file appears.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert Table
To insert a table at a selected location in the content, click Insert Table. The
Draw Table grid appears. You can design a simple table with up to six columns
and four rows.
In the Draw Table grid, highlight the desired number of rows and columns and
click the grid. The table appears at the selected location in the content.
To design a table with specific design or layout, click Table Wizard. The table
Properties screen appears. On the Properties screen, you can specify the table
layout, design, and font. For more information about table properties, see
"HTML Editor Table and Line Properties" on page 14.
To edit the design or layout of an existing table, double-click the table. The
Properties screen appears. For more information about table properties, see
"HTML Editor Table and Line Properties" on page 14.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert Row
To insert a row above a selected row in a table, click Insert Row Above. The
Above
added row appears in the table.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert Row
To insert a row below a selected row in a table, click Insert Row Below. The
Below
added row appears in the table.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Delete Row
To remove a selected row from a table, click Delete Row. The selected row is
removed from the table.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert Column
To insert a column to the left of a selected column in a table, click Insert
to the Left
Column to the Left. The added column appears in the table.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert Column
To insert a column to the right of a selected column in a table, click Insert
to the Right
Column to the Right. The added column appears in the table.
This function is available only in Normal mode.

.
10
C HAPTER 1
Icon
Function
Description
Delete Columns To remove a selected column from a table, click Delete Columns. The selected
column is removed from the table.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert Cells
To insert a cell in a selected row of a table, click Insert Cells. The added cell
appears in the selected row.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Delete Cells
To remove a cell from a selected row of a table, click Delete Cells. A cell is
removed from the selected row.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Row Properties To edit the properties of a selected row, click Row Properties. The Properties
screen appears. For more information about row properties, see "HTML Editor
Table and Line Properties" on page 14.
To save the row properties and close the Properties screen, click OK. To cancel
the row properties and close the Properties screen, click Cancel.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Cell Properties
To edit the properties of a selected cell, click Row Properties. The cell
Properties screen appears. For more information about cell properties, see
"HTML Editor Table and Line Properties" on page 14.
To save the cell properties and close the Properties screen, click OK. To cancel
the cell properties and close the Properties screen, click Cancel.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Merge cells
To merge a selected cell with the cell on its right, click Merge cells right. The
right
selected cell merges with the cell on its right.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Merge cells
To merge a selected cell with the cell below it, click Merge cells down. The
down
selected cell merges with the cell below it.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Split cells right
To split a selected cell into columns, click Split cells right. The selected cell
splits into columns.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Split cells down To split a selected cell into rows, click Split cells down. The selected cell splits
into rows.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert
To insert a horizontal line at a selected location in the content, such as to divide
Horizontal Line areas on your webpage, click Insert Horizontal Line. The horizontal line
appears at the selected location, and the Properties screen appears. For
information about the tabs on the Properties screen, see "HTML Editor Table
and Line Properties" on page 14.
To save the line properties and close the Properties screen, click OK. To cancel
the line properties and close the Properties screen, click Cancel.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Visible Borders To turn the visibility of a selected table's borders on or off, click Visible
Borders.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Select All
To select all the content, click Select All.
Select None
To deselect all selected content, click Select None.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
11
Icon
Function
Description
Bold
To make selected text bold, click Bold. The HTML editor adds a 
tag around the selected text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Italic
To italicize selected text, click Italic. The HTML editor adds an tag
around the selected text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Underline
To underline selected text, click Underline. The HTML editor adds an tag
around the selected text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Left Justify
To align selected text to the left, click Left Justify. The HTML editor adds an
attribute of align=left to the selected division.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Center
To align selected text to the center, click Center. The HTML editor adds an
attribute of align=center to the selected division.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Right Justify
To align selected text to the right, click Right Justify. The HTML editor adds
an attribute of align=right to the selected division.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Justify Full
To fully justify selected text, click Justify Full. The HTML editor adds an
attribute of align=justify to the selected division.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Justify None
To not justify content text, click Justify None. The HTML editor removes any
align attribute from the selected division.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Remove Format To remove the format from selected text, click Remove Format. The selected
text appears as plain text. The HTML editor removes any special format
attributes from the selected text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Font Color
To change the color of selected text, click Font Color and select the color from
the palette that appears. The HTML editor adds a tag with the selected
color around the text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Highlight
To highlight selected text, click Highlight and select the color of the highlight
from the drop-down palette.The HTML editor adds a tag with the
selected background color around the text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert
To insert a numbered list at a selected location in the content, click Insert
Numbered List
Numbered List. The HTML editor adds an <ol> tag at the selected location.
The first list item begins with "1." and appears at the selected location. When
you press ENTER on the keyboard, the subsequent list item is numbered
sequentially. To end a numbered list, click Insert Numbered List again.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Insert
To insert a bulleted list at a selected location in the content, click Insert
Unordered List Unordered List. The HTML editor adds an <ul> tag at the selected location.
The first list item appears with a bullet at the selected location. When you press
ENTER on the keyboard, the subsequent list item automatically begins with a
bullet.To end an unordered list, click Insert Unordered List again.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Indent Text
To increase the indent of a selected line of text, click Indent Text. The HTML
editor adds a <blockquote> tag around the selected paragraph.
If you increase the indent of a bulleted item on an unordered list, the bullet
changes to indicate a secondary relationship with the bulleted item above it.
This function is available only in Normal mode.

.
12
C HAPTER 1
Icon
Function
Description
Outdent Text
To decrease the indent of a selected line of text, click Outdent Text. The indent
is decreased.
If you decrease the indent of a bulleted item on an unordered list, the text
becomes plain text, or the bullet changes to indicate a closer relationship with
the bulleted item above it.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Superscript
To superscript selected text, click Superscript Text. The HTML editor adds a
Text
 tag around the selected text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Subscript Text
To subscript selected text, click Subscript Text. The HTML editor adds a
 tag around the selected text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Strikethrough
To strike a line through selected text, click Strikethrough Text. The HTML
Text
editor adds a <strike> tag around the selected text.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Upper case
To change selected text from lower case to upper case, click Upper case.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Lower case
To change selected text from upper case to lower case, click Lower case.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Menus on the Toolbar
Review the following table to learn more about the HTML Editor menus.
Menu
Function
Description
Font menu
The Font menu lists common fonts that appear correctly on most
web browsers. To change the font applied to selected text, select a
font from the Font menu. The font of the selected text changes to the
selected font.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Size menu
To change the size applied to selected text, select the size from the
Size menu. The size of the selected text changes to the selected size.
This function is available only in Normal mode.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
13
Menu
Function
Description
CSS Class menu To apply a custom CSS class to selected text, you can select the
desired class from the CSS Class menu. From this menu, you can
select any custom class that starts with a dot (".") from the applied
stylesheet.
This function is available only in Normal mode.
Merge Fields
To add merge fields for personalized information from The Raiser's
menu
Edge to the HTML content, you can select the field from the Merge
Fields menu. To expand the list, click the + next to a field category.
Image Map
In Normal mode, you can add an image map to a selected image in the content area. With an image map,
you can add hot spots and hyperlinks to the image, increase or decrease the magnification of the image, and
adjust the size of the image.
Add an image map
1. In the content area, select the image to map and click Add image map on the toolbar. The Add
Image Map screen appears and displays the selected image.
2. Adjust the image as necessary.
The table below explains the functions available on the Add image map screen.
Icon
Function
Description
Add hot
You can insert a hyperlink to another web address or page in an image. Before you
spots
insert the hyperlink in an image, you must define the area of the image, or "hot
spot", the website user must click on to access the linked web address or page.
To add a hot spot to the image, click Add hot spots. A square appears to indicate
the hot spot. Move the hot spot to the location on the image. You can adjust the
height and width of the hot spot.
Insert
To link a selected hot spot to another web address or page, click Insert
Hyperlink
Hyperlink. The Create Page Link screen appears. For information about a page
link, see "Create Page Link" on page 25.
Zoom In
To increase the image size as it appears on the Add image map screen, such as to
magnify a specific section of the image, click Zoom In.

.
14
C HAPTER 1
Icon
Function
Description
Zoom Out
To decrease the image size as it appears on the Add image map screen, click
Zoom Out.
Best Fit
To display the image so it maximizes the space available on the Add image map
screen, click Best Fit.
Actual Size
To display the image at its actual size on the Add image map screen, click Actual
Size.
3. To save the image map and return to the content area, click Update.
HTML Editor Table and Line Properties
When you use the HTML editor in Normal mode, you can easily design complete tables, single rows and
cells of tables, and horizontal lines such as to divide a web page. You can also adjust the properties of these
items as you design them. When you adjust the properties of a table, row, cell, or line, you can specify
many of its characteristics, including the size, styles, and color. For information about the HTML editor,
see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
You can quickly create a standard table, or you can easily adjust the attributes of a table to create a
complex table. To insert a table at a selected location in the content area, click Insert Table on the toolbar.
You can use the Draw Table grid or the Table Wizard to design the table. With the Draw Table grid, you
can specify a table with up to six columns and four rows. With the Table Wizard, you can specify the table
layout, design, and font.
To use the Table Wizard to design the table to add, click Table Wizard. The table Properties screen
appears. Use the tabs of the Properties screen to design the table and its rows and cells. We recommend
only users familiar HTML and CSS style elements adjust the properties on tabs other than the Table
Wizard tab.
· "Table Wizard Tab" on page 15
· "Table Tab" on page 16
· "General Tab" on page 21
· "Style Builder Tab" on page 22
To adjust the properties of a row in a table while in Normal mode, you can also select the row in the table
and click Row Properties on the toolbar. The row Properties screen appears. Use the tabs of the Properties
screen to design the row. We recommend only users familiar HTML and CSS style elements adjust the
properties on these tabs.
· "TR Tab" on page 18
· "General Tab" on page 21
· "Style Builder Tab" on page 22
To adjust the properties of a cell in a table while in Normal mode, you can also select the cell in the table
and click Cell Properties on the toolbar. The cell Properties screen appears. Use the tabs of the Properties
screen to design the cell. We recommend only users familiar HTML and CSS style elements adjust the
properties on these tabs.
· "TD Tab" on page 19
· "General Tab" on page 21
· "Style Builder Tab" on page 22

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
15
To insert a horizontal line at a selected location in the content area, click Insert Horizontal line on the
toolbar. The line Properties screen appears. Use the tabs of the Properties screen to design the horizontal
line. We recommend only users familiar HTML and CSS style elements adjust the properties on these tabs.
· "HR Tab" on page 20
· "General Tab" on page 21
· "Style Builder Tab" on page 22
Table Wizard Tab
On the Table Wizard tab, you can specify the layout of the table and adjust the layout and properties of the
cells.
In the Table layout field, you can select the basic layout of the table. You can select to create a table with
one, two, or three columns; a table with a header, right or left row, top right or top left column, and body;
or a three-column table with a header and footer.
The Table Designer frame displays the table with the selected layout. Under Cell Properties, you can
adjust the properties of a selected row or cell in the table.
· To adjust the properties of a row in the table, select a cell in the row to adjust and click Row Properties.
The row Properties screen appears. For information about the tabs on the row Properties screen, see
"HTML Editor Table and Line Properties" on page 14.
· To adjust the properties of a cell in the table, select the cell to adjust and click Cell Properties. The cell
Properties screen appears. For information about the tabs on the cell Properties screen, see "HTML
Editor Table and Line Properties" on page 14.
· To adjust the size of a cell in the table, select the cell to adjust and, in the Width and Height fields, enter
the pixel dimensions to use for the cell.

.
16
C HAPTER 1
· To decrease or increase the number of columns in the table, click the - and + buttons next to Columns.
· To increase or decrease the number of columns spanned by a cell in the table, select the cell to adjust and
click the - and + buttons next to ColSpan.
· To decrease or increase the number of columns, use the - and + buttons next to Rows.
· To increase or decrease the number of rows spanned by a cell in the table, select the cell to adjust and
use the - and + buttons next to Span.
Table Tab
On the Table tab, you can adjust the characteristics of the table and its cells. We recommend only users
familiar HTML and CSS style elements adjust the properties on the Table tab.
In the Table frame, you can specify the attributes of the table.
·In the Cell spacing field, enter the amount of space to appear between cells of the table.
·In the Cell padding field, enter the amount of space to appear between the ruled line and the content of
a cell in the table.
·In the ID field, you can assign a unique identifier to the table.
·In the Border field, enter the width, in pixels, of a border around the table. To display the table with no
border, enter "0".
·In the Background color and Border color fields, enter the colors of the background and border of the
table. You can enter the standard color name or hexadecimal value, or you can select the color from the
drop-down palette.
·In the Rules field, select which ruled lines appear between cells of the table. You can select to display all
lines, no lines, or only those between rows or columns.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
17
· To collapse the table borders into a single border, mark Collapse table border. If you do not mark this
checkbox, the table borders are detached, as in standard HTML.
·In the Summary field, you can enter a summary of the table, such as for speech-synthesizing or
non-visual browsers.
· To display a caption at the top of the table, next to Caption, click Insert. To remove the table caption,
click Delete or delete its code in HTML mode.
· To define a group of rows at the top of the table as a header, next to Thead, click Insert. To remove the
table header, click Delete.
· To define a group of rows at the bottom of the table as a footer, next to Tfoot, click Insert. To remove
the table footer, click Delete.
In the General frame, you can specify additional attributes for the table, such as size, alignment, and
whether to apply a class from the cascading style sheet (CSS).
· To apply a CSS class to the table, in the Css Class field, enter the class to apply.
·In the Width and Height fields, enter the dimensions of the table. You can enter the dimensions in pixels
(px) or as a percentage (%).
·In the Alignment field, select the alignment of the table. You can select Left, Center, Right, or Not Set.
·In the Text-align field, select the alignment of text in the table. You can select Left, Center, Right,
Justify, or Not Set.
· To float the table within another element, in the Float field, select whether the table appears to the left or
right of the element.
·In the Title field, you can enter a title to appear for the table.

.
18
C HAPTER 1
TR Tab
On the TR tab, in the Row Properties frame, you can define the attributes of a row in the table. We
recommend only users familiar HTML and CSS style elements adjust the properties on the TR tab.
·In the Width and Height fields, enter the dimensions, in pixels, of the row.
·In the Alignment field, select the horizontal alignment of the content in the row. You can select Left,
Center, Right, or Not Set.
·In the Vertical Alignment field, select the vertical alignment of the content in the row. You can select
Top, Middle, Baseline, Bottom or Not Set.
·In the Background color and Border color fields, enter the colors of the background and border of the
row. You can also specify a different color for the top and left borders than the bottom and right borders
of the row. In the Border color light field, enter the color for the top and left borders. In the Border
color dark field, enter the color for the bottom and right borders. You can enter the standard color name
or hexadecimal value, or you can select the color from the drop-down palette.
· To apply a CSS class to the row, in the Css Class field, enter the class to apply.
·In the ID field, you can assign a unique identifier to the row.
·In the Title field, you can enter a title to appear for the row.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
19
TD Tab
On the TD tab, in the Cell Properties frame, you can define the attributes of a cell in the table. We
recommend only users familiar HTML and CSS style elements adjust the properties on the TD tab.
·In the Width and Height fields, enter the dimensions, in pixels, of the cell.
·In the Alignment field, select the horizontal alignment of the content in the cell. You can select Left,
Center, Right, or Not Set.
·In the Vertical Alignment field, select the vertical alignment of the content in the cell. You can select
Top, Middle, Baseline, Bottom, or Not Set.
·In the Background color and Border color fields, enter the colors of the background and border of the
cell. You can also specify a different color for the top and left borders than the bottom and right borders
of the cell. In the Border color light field, enter the color for the top and left borders. In the Border
color dark field, enter the color for the bottom and right borders. You can enter the standard color name
or hexadecimal value, or you can select the color from the drop-down palette.
· To apply a CSS class to the cell, in the Css Class field, enter the class to apply.
·In the ID field, you can assign a unique identifier to the cell.
·In the Title field, you can enter a title to appear for the cell.

.
20
C HAPTER 1
HR Tab
In the Insert Horizontal Line frame on the HR tab, you can specify the attributes of the horizontal line,
such as the size, width, and color. We recommend only users familiar HTML and CSS style elements
adjust the properties on the HR tab.
·In the Width field, enter the width of the field. You can enter the width as a percentage or as a specific
pixel measurement.
·In the Alignment field, select the alignment of the horizontal line. You can select Left, Center, or Right.
·In the Color field, enter the color of the horizontal line. You can enter the standard color name or
hexadecimal value, or you can select the color from the drop-down palette.
·In the Shade field, select the whether to display the line as a solid color or as a shaded color.
·In the Size field, select the thickness of the line. You can select the line to be between 1 and 10 pixels
thick.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
21
General Tab
In the Attributes frame on the General tab, you can specify general attributes of the table, such as size,
alignment, color, and whether to apply a Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) class. We recommend only users
familiar HTML and CSS style elements adjust the properties on the General tab.
· To apply a CSS class to the table, in the Css Class field, enter the class to apply.
·In the Width and Height fields, enter the dimensions, in pixels, of the table.
·In the Alignment field, select the alignment of the table. You can select Left, Center, Right, or Not Set.
·In the Text-align field, select the alignment of text in the table. You can select Left, Center, Right,
Justify, or Not Set.
· To float the table within another element, in the Float field, select whether the table appears to the left or
right of the element.
·In the Font Color and Highlight fields, enter the colors of the text and background of the table. You can
enter the standard color name or hexadecimal value, or you can select the color from the drop-down
palette.
·In the Title field, you can enter a title to appear for the table.

.
22
C HAPTER 1
Style Builder Tab
On the Style Builder tab, you can adjust the style attributes of the font, text, background, border, and layout
used in the selected table or its cells. We recommend only users familiar HTML and CSS style elements
adjust the properties on the Style Builder tab.
To define the style characteristics of font used in the table or its cells, click Font. In the System font field,
select "Not Set". The remaining options are enabled. You can specify the font's family, style, size, and
color. The box at the bottom of the screen displays a sample of the font with the selected attributes.
Note: To view the default font characteristics of text, in the System font field, select the text to view. You
can select Caption, Icon labels, Menu text, Messagebox, Small caption, or Status bar. A sample of the
selected text appears at the bottom of the screen.
·In the Font Family field, enter the font type to use.
·In the Decoration frame, specify whether to display the font with an underline or overline or as
strikethrough text.
·In the Style frame, specify whether the font is bold or italic. In the Capitalization field, select whether
the text appears in all uppercase, all lowercase, or with only the first letter of each word capitalized.
·In the Size frame, select the size of the font. You can select a standard description, such as "large", or
enter a specific size.
·In the Color field, enter the color of the font. You can enter the standard color name or hexadecimal
value, or you can select the color from the drop-down palette.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
23
To define styles used for text in the table or its cells, click Text. You can specify the alignment, spacing,
and flow of the text. The box at the bottom of the screen displays a sample of the text with the selected
attributes.
·In the Alignment frame, select the alignment of the text in the table or cell. In the Horizontal field,
select the horizontal alignment of the text. You can select Left, Right, Center, or Justify. In the Vertical
field, select whether to display the text as subscript or superscript. In the Justification field, select the
justification of the text, such as "distribute".
·In the Spacing frame, enter the spacing between letters and text lines. To specify spacing, select "Not
Set" and enter the distance to use for spacing. To use the default spacing, select "Normal".
·In the Text flow frame, specify how the text flows on the screen. In the Indentation field, enter the
distance to use for indented text. In the Text direction field, select whether to display text from left to
right or from right to left. In the Writing mode field, select whether to flow text horizontally or
vertically.
To adjust the styles used for the background of the table or its cells, click Background. You can adjust the
background color or image of the table.
·In the Color field, enter the background color of the table or cell. You can enter the standard color name
or hexadecimal value, or you can select the color from the drop-down palette.
·In the Background image frame, adjust the image that appears as the background of the table or cell. In
the Url field, enter the location of the image to use as the background. To browse to its location, click
the ellipsis. To remove a specified image, click Remove.
In the Tiling field, select whether to tile the image and in what direction: horizontal, vertical, or both. In
the Scrolling field, select whether the background image is fixed or scrolls.
In the Position frame, enter the vertical and horizontal position of the image. You can select a standard
position or enter a specific position.
To define the styles used for the border of the table or its cells, click Border. You can specify the margin,
padding, and style of each border.
·In the Borders frame, select the border to design. You can select to apply the selected styles to all
borders or only the top, bottom, left, or right border.
·In the Border frame, define the style for the selected border. In the Margin and Padding fields, enter
the amount of space to appear around the border and between the border and the table.
In the Border field, enter the thickness of the border. You can enter a specific size or select a standard
description, such as "Thin".
In the Style field, select the appearance of the line used by the border, such as "dotted" or "double". In
the Color field, enter the color of the border. You can enter the standard color name or hexadecimal
value, or you can select the color from the drop-down palette.
To define the styles used in the layout of the table or its cells, click Layout. You can define the position
and float attributes, size, and clipping of the layout.
·In the Layout frame, select the style attributes of the layout.
In the Position field, select whether the position of the layout is absolute or relative to its parent element.
In the Display field, select whether to display the table or cell as a block box, an inline box, or a block
box inside an inline box.
In the Float field, select whether to float the table or cell and to the left or right of the surrounding
content.
In the Clear field, select how the table or cell appears after a floated element. You can select to have the
table or cell appear before the left-floated elements, right-floated elements, or both left- and right-floated
elements. To have the floated element flow around the table or cell, select "None".

.
24
C HAPTER 1
·In the Size frame, enter the size of the top, left, height, and width of the table or cell.
· If, in the Position field, you select "Absolute", in the Clipping frame, enter the coordinates of the four
corners that create the rectangle, offset from the top left corner of the screen, that defines the visible area
of the table or cell.
·In the Misc frame, in the Overflow field, select how to manage content that does not fit in the table or
cell. You can select whether to use scrollbars or clip the content.
In the z-index field, enter the order of the table or cell on the z-axis. The higher the number you enter,
the higher the position on the z-axis.
In the Page-break-before and Page-break-after fields, select whether to force a page break before or
after the table or cell.
To adjust the style of the cursor or filter used with the table or cell, click Other.
·In the Cursor field, select how the cursor appears when it passes over the table or cell. You can select
Default, Move, Text, Wait, or Help.
·In the Filter field, enter the filter effect attribute to apply to the table or cell, such as "blur" or
"dropshadow".
Search Screen
In Blackbaud NetCommunity, you may need to select data from the database to create parts for your
website. For example, can select a constituent query to use to create a Directory part or an appeal for a
Donation form on your Blackbaud NetCommunity website. To help find and select data to use, the
program provides a search screen specific to the type data you need. On the Search screen, you can enter
search criteria to help find the data. The criteria options available depend on the type of data needed.
Use the search screen to select data
Search results that appear in the grid must match all the criteria you enter. We recommend you search
by one or two of the most helpful criteria types. If you add too much criteria information, you can
prevent the data you want from appearing.
1. On the search screen, enter the criteria to use to find the data. The criteria options available depend
on the type of data you need.
To search the database for all data of that type, leave the criteria fields empty.
2. Click Search. The program searches the database for data that meet the criteria entered and
displays the results in the grid.
3. If the search returns multiple pages of results, use the First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons to
navigate through the pages of results.
4. In the grid, find the data to use and click Select next to its listing. You return to the previous
screen.
Insert Image
From the HTML editor and several parts, such as the Navigation Buttons part, Weblog part, and User
Photo Form part, you can use the Insert Image function to select an insert an image from the Image
Library.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
25
Note: On your website, if the user clicks the Insert Image button on the HTML editor, an Insert Image
screen appears. From this screen, the user can insert an image and load or edit existing images. You can
configure the user's Image Library, including image approval, in "System Options" on page 234. For
information about Image Library, see "Image Library" on page 38.
Insert an image
1. On the Edit Part screen, click the Image button. The Select Image from Image Library screen
appears.
To search the database for all data of that type, leave the criteria fields empty.
2. Click Search. The program searches the database for data that meet the criteria entered and
displays the results in the grid.
3. If the search returns multiple pages of results, use the First, Previous, Next, and Last buttons to
navigate through the pages of results.
Note: To add a new image to Image Library, on the Select Image from Image Library screen, click
Add Image. Image files must be of a *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, or *.jpeg file type. For more information,
see "Image Library" on page 38.
4. In the grid, find the data to use and click Select next to its listing. You return to the previous
screen.
Create Page Link
From the HTML editor and several parts, such as the Event Registration Form or Menu part, you can link
the page to a personal page or another web page.
Note: On your website, if the user clicks the Insert Hyperlink button on the HTML editor, an Insert Link
screen appears. From this screen, the user can add a link to another web page. If the user has a personal
page on your website, the user can also link to it.
Insert a link
1. On the Edit Part screen, click the Link or Insert Link button. The Create Page Link screen
appears.
2. Select whether to create or remove a link from the part.
· To create a link to another Blackbaud NetCommunity web page, select Create Link to
NetCommunity Page and click the Click here to select a page link. The Select a Page screen
appears. Select the option next to the page you want and click OK. You return to the Create
Page Link screen.
· To create a link to an Email Preferences page or a Home page, Login page, or Privacy page
defined in System Options, select Create Link to Special Page. In the Page field, select the
page to link.
· To create another type of link, select Create Other Type of Link. In the Type field, select the
type of link to create. For example, select "ftp:", "http:", or "telnet". In the URL field, enter the
exact path to the page to link to the event registration form.

.
26
C HAPTER 1
· To remove an existing link from the part, select Remove existing link.
3. In the Target field, enter where the linked page opens. For example, to open the link in a new
window, enter "New window".
4. Click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen.
Constituent Codes
A constituent code tells you why a constituent is in your database. For example, you select a constituent
code from The Raiser's Edge, such as Friend, to associate with users who donate on your website. You can
select additional constituent codes from The Raiser's Edge to associate with other constituents, such as
Event Participant or Volunteer. This way, when a user submits data on your website for processing to The
Raiser's Edge, you efficiently track the reason each constituent is in your database.
In Blackbaud NetCommunity, there are two ways to download constituent codes to The Raiser's Edge.
· You can select constituent codes for new constituents in NetCommunity Options. Once a transaction is
processed, these constituent codes automatically apply to new constituent records.
· When you create certain part types, you can select to associate a constituent code with the part. When
the website user submits data for the part, the constituent code defaults in the transaction.
Automatically Apply Constituent Codes
From Options on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, when you select a constituent code for
New Constituents, the constituent code downloads automatically to The Raiser's Edge for all new
constituent records processed from Blackbaud NetCommunity. The code does not download to existing
constituent records.
Tip: Selecting a constituent code for New Constituents is optional. In The Raiser's Edge, to query on new
records created from Blackbaud NetCommunity, we recommend you select a constituent code in New
Constituents.
If you select a constituent code for the Matching Gifts option, the constituent code downloads
automatically to The Raiser's Edge for all new organization records processed from a matching gift
donation.

.
B LACKBAUD N ET C OMMU NITY
27
Constituent Codes on a Transaction screen
From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, the Sign-Up Requests, Donations, Volunteer
Requests, and Event Registrations transaction types include a constituent code field. The constituent code
in the field defaults in both new and existing records in The Raiser's Edge.
The constituent code in this field defaults from the Constituent Code field on the Edit Part screen in Parts.
For example, Online is the constituent code for Donations transactions. When the Donation Form part was
created, Online was selected in the Constituent Code field.
Tip: If the constituent code on the transaction screen is the same code as the New Constituents constituent
code, the code is not duplicated on the Bio 2 tab in the constituent record in The Raiser's Edge. If the
constituent codes are different, both codes download to the new constituent record.
You can download the constituent code to The Raiser's Edge constituent record. You can also select a
different constituent code for the constituent. To prevent the constituent code from downloading to The
Raiser's Edge, delete the code from the field.
Constituent Codes and NetCommunity Part Types
Review the following information for details about the Constituent Code field on various part types in
Blackbaud NetCommunity.
· User Login -- The code applies to new and existing constituent records and is specific to each User
Login part. For example, you can create separate login parts for subsites you create, such as multiple
chapters. The constituent code for a login part may be Atlanta Member.
The constituent code you select for this part defaults to the Transaction Constituent Code frame in
Sign-up Requests on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge for processing. The code selected
for New Constituents in NetCommunity Options also downloads to The Raiser's Edge for new
constituents. However, if the constituent code on the User Login part and in New Constituents is the
same, the code is not duplicated on the record in The Raiser's Edge.
· Donation Form -- The constituent code applies to new and existing constituents.
This is the same for the donation steps in a Personal Page Manager and a Fundraiser part.
· Event Registration Form -- The constituent code applies to new and existing event registrants.

.
28
C HAPTER 1
· Fundraiser -- This part contains two Constituent Code fields. The first field, located on the Step 2:
Fundraiser Options screen, downloads automatically to new and existing records in The Raiser's Edge.
This constituent code is typically used if you consider the fundraiser participant constituency to be
different than a regular Blackbaud NetCommunity user constituency.
These constituent codes do not appear in the Fundraiser transaction on the NetCommunity page in
The Raiser's Edge. However, after you process the transaction, they appear automatically on the Bio 2
tab in the constituent record.
The second Constituent Code field, located on the Step 6: User Login Form screen, applies to users
who register for the Fundraiser that are not yet members of your site. This constituent code defaults to
the Transaction Constituent Code frame on the Sign-up Requests transaction on the NetCommunity
page in The Raiser's Edge.
This is the same for the two Constituent Code fields in a Personal Page Manager part. The first field is
on the Step 1: Personal Page Options and Administrator Roles screen. The second field is on the Step 2:
User Login Form screen for a Personal Page Manager. It applies to users who sign up using the personal
page registration.
· Membership Form -- The constituent code applies automatically to new and existing constituent
records. This includes members or gift of membership recipients. This constituent code does not appear
in the Memberships transaction on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. However, after you
process the transaction, it appears on the Bio 2 tab in the constituent record.
· Volunteer Opportunity -- The constituent code downloads for volunteers who sign up for a job online.
The code applies to existing constituent records.

CHAPTER 2
Website
In This Chapter
"Website Overview" on page 30
"Site Explorer" on page 31
"Image Library" on page 38
"Parts" on page 39
"Layouts" on page 121
"Stylesheets" on page 123
In Blackbaud NetCommunity, you create web pages in Web Site. To modify web pages, you can design
page layout, create and use templates, and add and remove part type information and images. Most likely,
Blackbaud NetCommunity users who create web pages are site administrators with Supervisor rights. This
section contains information about how to create and edit the parts for your web pages in Web Site.

.
30
C HAPTER 2
Website Overview
The diagram depicts how to construct a Blackbaud NetCommunity web page from beginning to end.
Stylesheets, Layouts, and templates sections are for Administrator use only. Most likely, you will not need
to create new layouts and templates for a new web page; you will use existing ones. If you have edit rights,
you can create and update web pages and part types. The Administrator must assign these security rights to
user roles. For information about security, see "Security" on page 223.
Web Site contains multiple sections. Each plays a major part when you construct and design a web page.
Site Explorer -- You can store each web page and template individually in Site Explorer with quick
access to each page. In Site Explorer, you can create, edit, and delete pages for your website and view the
URL path for each page. To create a web page, you must add content parts from Parts to your page in Site
Explorer.
Note: Templates are the framework for your website and establish consistency throughout your site.
Administrators can create, edit, and delete templates in Site Explorer. When you create new web pages,
you can start with an existing template.
Image Library --Use Image Library to add, delete, and approve images for your website. In addition,
view a preview of an image to make sure it appears on the screen correctly. Images must be saved as a
*.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg or *.jpeg file. An image does not appear on your website until you add it to a web page.

.
WEBSITE
31
Parts -- Use Parts to create, edit, and delete reusable content information, such as a user login and user
profile form. A content part does not appear on your website until you add it to a web page. To create a
web page, you must add parts from Parts to your page in Site Explorer. You can also assign security rights
to roles for each content part in Parts.
Note: With some parts and layouts, you use a powerful HTML editor to format and lay out several
features, such as email, newsletters, and content on web pages. With the HTML editor, you can update
content easily and safely while you maintain control over the website design and content.
Layouts -- Administrators use Layouts to design and place elements on your web page, such as content
and images. Customize each page by inserting rows, adding bullets, and adjusting font size and style.
Stylesheets -- Administrators use stylesheets to create unique elements such as colors, font types and size,
and spacing for your website. Stylesheets, written in Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) format, are easier to use
than other methods such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet, your website uses Blackbaud
NetCommunity default stylesheets. You can create custom stylesheets in Stylesheets that override a
Blackbaud NetCommunity default style.
Site Explorer
In Site Explorer, you create, edit, and remove web pages and templates made up of reusable part types.
This way, you can easily customize pages and templates to fit the needs of your website. The Page
Designer screen contains editable regions, based on the template you select, so you can add existing or new
parts. You can also edit and remove content parts on your web page.
Think of Site Explorer as the "shell" for your website. The program stores each page and template
separately here, so you can quickly access each piece. Although you can manage your parts in Parts, it is
easier to work with them in Site Explorer because you can preview a page and see how parts fit together.
We strongly recommend you create and update content parts while you work on the page in Site Explorer.
You can establish security rights for Blackbaud NetCommunity users for pages and templates. This
protects secure web pages, web pages that are more complicated in design, and pages that are used
repeatedly on your website.
Pages
To create a web page, you must add part types to your page. The Page Designer screen contains editable
regions, based on the template you select, so you can add existing or new parts. You can also edit or
remove parts on your web page. Although you can manage your parts in Parts, it is easier to work with
them in Site Explorer because you can preview a page and see how parts fit together. We strongly
recommend you create and update content parts while you work on the page in Site Explorer.
You can establish security rights for Blackbaud NetCommunity users for each page. This protects secure
web pages, web pages that are more complicated in design, and pages that are used repeatedly on your
website.
Note: For more information about security in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Security" on page 223.
Create a new web page
1. From Web Site, click Site Explorer. The Site Explorer screen appears.
2. On the action bar, click New Page. The New Page screen opens on the Properties tab.

.
32
C HAPTER 2
3. In the Page Name field, enter a name for your web page, such as "Class of 2010". This page name
is so Blackbaud NetCommunity users can quickly identify the page in Site Explorer.
Note: If you need additional space on your computer screen, click Hide Navigation Bar on the
Blackbaud NetCommunity toolbar.
4. In the Display Name field, enter the page title to appear on the web page, such as your
organization's name. For more information, see "System Options" on page 234.
5. In the Template field, select the existing template on which to base your new web page. For more
information about how to create a template, see "Templates" on page 35.
6. In the Folder field, click Select Folder to select an existing folder in which to store your web
page. When you select a folder for the web page, you can find the page and its associated web
pages easily in Site Explorer.
Note: Web Site is the root folder in Site Explorer. You cannot edit this folder. To add a new folder
to Blackbaud NetCommunity, click Create a new folder on the Folders tab action bar. You cannot
add folders as you create a new page. If you need a new folder for a new page, first add the folder.
7. Select the Security tab.
8. In the grid, assign view, edit, delete, and change security rights for each role. The Role column
displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For more information about security, see "Security"
on page 223.
After you save your page, an embedded URL field appears above the Page Security grid. The
program automatically assigns a location for your web page. When you add links to this page on
other web pages, it is helpful to refer to the URL information here.
9. To save your web page, click Next. The Page Designer screen appears with your new page and the
selected template design. For information about the Page Designer screen, see "Edit web page
design" on page 33.
Edit web page properties
Site Explorer stores each web page separately. This way, you can customize each page to fit the needs
of your website. When you search for an existing web page to update, use the Search tab. In the All or
part of a page name field, you can enter a partial name to search for a page. To search for a page that
uses a specific part type, use the Pages containing part type field. In the Page types to include field,
you can select to search all pages, web pages only, or templates only.
1. From Web Site, click Site Explorer. The Site Explorer screen appears.
2. On the action bar, click New Page. The New Page screen opens on the Properties tab.
3. For the web page to edit, click Properties in the Action column. The Page Properties screen opens
on the Properties tab.
Note: To create a new web page based on an existing web page, click Copy Page on the action bar.
The Copy Page screen appears. In the New Page Name field, enter a new name and click Save on
the action bar. For more information about how to create new web pages, see "Create a new web
page" on page 31.
4. Make the changes for the Name, Template, or Folder fields.

.
WEBSITE
33
You cannot edit the Web Site folder. It is the root folder in Site Explorer.
Warning: To edit the template, click Template Designer on the action bar on the Page Designer
screen. It is important to remember if you edit an existing template, you change the template for all
web pages that use it. To update a web page with its own specific template, you can make a copy of
an existing template that is similar to your needs. Click Template Designer on the action bar. The
existing Templates screen appears. Click Copy Template and make the changes for the web page.
If there is not an existing template to use for your template, you can create a new one. For more
information about creating new templates, see "Templates" on page 35.
5. In the embedded URL field at the bottom of the page, you can view the URL information for the
web page.
6. Select the Security tab.
7. In the grid, you can edit view, edit, delete, and change security rights for each role. The Role
column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For more information about security, see
"Security" on page 223.
8. To save your changes on the Page Properties screen, click Save and Close. You return to the Site
Explorer screen. For information about how to edit the Page Designer screen, see "Edit web page
design" on page 33.
Edit web page design
To design a web page, you must add parts to your page. The Page Designer screen contains editable
regions, based on the template you select, so you can add existing or new parts. You can also edit or
remove content parts on your web page. Although you can manage your parts in Parts, it is easier to
work with them in Site Explorer because you can preview a page and see how the parts fit together. We
strongly recommend you create and update content parts while working on the page in Site Explorer.
In the View As field, select a role to view how a website user in that role sees the page you are
designing. For example, you can select a "Class of 1988" role to see how a website user from that class
views the page. If you enter a date in the on date field, the web page uses the Scheduled Publishing
information from Part Properties to display the page as it would appear on that particular date. For
information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227. For information about part publishing, see "Create a
part" on page 46.
1. From Web Site, click Site Explorer. The Site Explorer screen appears.
Note: The Page Properties screen displays the page name, template, folder, security, and URL
information. To access this, click Page Properties on the action bar.
2. To edit an existing page, click Edit in the Action column. The Page Designer screen appears.
To create a new page, first save the page properties. For more information about page properties,
see "Create a new web page" on page 31.
3. To insert an existing part, click Insert. The Select a Part screen appears.
a. On the Select a Part screen, use the search tools to search for an existing part. For example, in
the Part Type field, select the part type to add to the template. To search for a part, enter a
partial name in the Name field. At the bottom of the Select a Part screen, narrow the number
of parts to view on the screen in the Results Per Page field. If you know the page number
where the part is stored, select it in the Page field.
b. To select the part, click beside the name of the part you need.

.
34
C HAPTER 2
c. Click OK. The part appears on the web page.
Note: Based on the template you select, your Page Designer screen contains multiple editable
regions for you to select to add existing or new parts.
4. To create a new part for the page, click Create. The New Part screen appears. For information
about how to create parts, see "Create a part" on page 46.
5. To edit an existing part, click Edit. The Edit Part screen appears.
6. To view the properties for a part, click Properties. The Part Properties screen appears. For
information about properties, see "Edit a part" on page 47.
7. If the page contains a Fundraiser part, click Quick Links. A menu appears and displays links to
the Fundraiser Page Element parts and the Email Template used for the Fundraiser. To quickly
access a part or template, click its link.
8. To conserve space on your design screen, click Minimize this part. This button minimizes the
part display.
To maximize the part, re-click the button (which appears as down arrows).
9. To quickly move parts to other areas of the web page, click Drag to move this part and drag and
drop the part to another area of the page.
Note: To remove a part, click Remove.
10. To view the page properties on the Page Designer screen, click Page Properties on the action bar.
11. To view the web page, click Preview on the action bar.
Make sure the web page contains the information you want. To close the page, click the "X" in the
top right corner.
12. Administrator Step: To edit the template design, click Template Designer on the action bar.
Warning: It is important to remember if you edit an existing template, you change the template for
all web pages that use it. To create a web page that is specific to only one template design, but
similar to an existing one, click Template Designer to save time. The existing Templates screen
appears. To copy and save a new template based on the one you selected for your web page, click
Copy Template on the action bar.
13. Administrator Step: To edit the stylesheet, click Stylesheet on the action bar. Remember, if you
edit an existing stylesheet, you change the style for all web pages that use it.
When you use a stylesheet other than the Blackbaud NetCommunity system default stylesheet, the
Stylesheet button appears on the action bar. For more information, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
14. To create a new web page from an existing web page, click Copy Page on the action bar.
15. The program automatically saves your information. To continue with the next task in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, navigate to the area you need.
To return to the main Site Explorer screen, click Return on the action bar.

.
WEBSITE
35
Templates
Templates are the framework for your website. When you create and design templates, Blackbaud
NetCommunity users have consistent website components from one page to the next. If you are a site
administrator and you must create a new web page that is completely different from any page you currently
have, you will most likely create a new template. For example, for the first time, your organization wants
to add an online donor recognition page. You want to create a virtual wall similar to the way you include
information in your newsletters. To add this to your website, you require a new page that is different from
existing ones. You must start from the beginning. In Site Explorer, the design of your template becomes
the main component for this new donor recognition web page. To save time and effort during the template
design, you can add pieces from other areas of Blackbaud NetCommunity such as Layouts, Parts, and
Image Library.
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a select
number of users for this section. General users should not access templates. Any change can affect multiple
web pages. We strongly encourage only users knowledgeable in all areas of website design and Blackbaud
NetCommunity perform the tasks in this section.
Create a template
Once you create a template, you can use the template repeatedly to save time and effort. For more
information about editing an existing template, see "Edit template properties" on page 36.
1. From Web Site, click Site Explorer. The Site Explorer screen appears.
2. Click New Template. The New Template screen opens on the Properties tab.
3. In the Template Name field, enter a name for your template, such as "Donor Recognition", so
Blackbaud NetCommunity users can quickly identify the file in Site Explorer. This name is for
internal use and does not appear on your website.
4. In the Layout field, select a layout to use for your template.
Note: The template layout is crucial for your website users. Layout is the design and placement of
important elements of your web page. The layout includes where you place content, graphics, and
navigation buttons. To create a new layout, see "Layouts" on page 121.
5. In the Folder field, click Select Folder to select an existing folder in which to store your template.
When you select a folder for the template, you can find the template and its associated templates
easily in Site Explorer.
Note: Web Site is the root folder in Site Explorer. You cannot edit this folder. To add a new folder,
click Create a new folder on the Folders tab action bar. You cannot add folders as you create a
new template. If you need a new folder for a new template, first add the folder.
6. Select the Security tab.
7. In the grid, assign view, edit, delete, and change security rights for each role. The Role column
displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For more information about security, see "Security"
on page 223.
After you save the template, a Pages using this template box appears. The box displays your web
pages that use the template. If no pages use the template, a "This template is not being used by any
pages" message appears.

.
36
C HAPTER 2
8. Click Next. The Template Designer screen appears. For more information about the Template
Designer screen, see "Edit template design" on page 36.
Edit template properties
To search for an existing template, use the Search tab in Site Explorer. In the All or part of a page
name field, you can enter a partial name to search for a template. To search for a template that uses a
specific part type, use the Pages containing part type field. In the Page types to include field, you
can select to search all pages, web pages only, or templates only.
1. From Web Site, click Site Explorer. The Site Explorer screen appears.
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a
select number of users for this section. General users should not access templates. Any change can
affect multiple web pages. We strongly encourage only users knowledgeable in all areas of website
design and Blackbaud NetCommunity perform the tasks in this section.
2. For the template to edit, click Properties in the Action column. The Template Properties screen
opens on the Properties tab.
3. Make the changes for the Template Name, Layout and Folder fields.
You cannot edit the Web Site folder. It is the root folder in Site Explorer.
To select a different layout from Layouts, click Template Properties on the action bar. In the
Layout field, select the new layout.
Note: If you need additional space on your computer screen, click Hide Navigation Bar on the
Blackbaud NetCommunity toolbar.
4. In the Pages using this template box, view the web pages linked to the template. The box is for
informational purposes only.
5. Select the Security tab.
6. In the grid, assign view, edit, delete, and change security rights for each role. The Role column
displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For more information about security, see "Security"
on page 223.
7. To save your changes on the Template Properties screen, click Save and Close. You return to the
Site Explorer screen. For information about how to edit the Template Designer screen, see "Edit
template design" on page 36.
Edit template design
Templates are the framework for your website. Because of the time, research, and detail involved when
you create a template, you should base a new web page on an existing template when possible. You can
edit and update an existing template to fit your web page needs, or you can create a copy of an existing
template on which to base a new template. The Template Properties screen displays the template name,
layout, folder, pages using this template, and security information. To access this, click Template
Properties on the action bar.
1. From Web Site, click Site Explorer. The Site Explorer screen appears.

.
WEBSITE
37
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a
select number of users for this section. General users should not access templates. Any change can
affect multiple web pages. We strongly encourage only users knowledgeable in all areas of website
design and Blackbaud NetCommunity perform the tasks in this section.
2. To edit an existing template, click Edit in the Action column. The Template Designer screen
appears. Based on the selected layout, your Template Designer screen contains multiple editable
regions for you to select to add existing or new parts.
If you create a new template, first save the page properties. For more information about page
properties, see "Create a template" on page 35.
Note: To create a new template from an existing one, click Copy Template on the Template
Designer screen. The Copy Template screen appears. In the New Template Name field, enter a
new name and click Save on the action bar.
3. To insert an existing content part, click the Insert button. The Select a Part screen appears.
a. On the Select a Part screen, use the search tools to search for an existing part. For example, in
the Part Type field, select the part type to add to the template. To search for a part, enter a
partial name in the Name field. At the bottom of the Select a Part screen, narrow the number
of parts to view on the screen in the Results Per Page field. If you know the page number
where the part is stored, select it in the Page field.
b. To select the part, click next to its name.
c. Click OK. The part appears on the template.
Note: In the View As field, select a role to view how a website user in that role sees the template.
For example, you can select a "Class of 1988" role to see how a website user from that class views
the template. Depending on your security, this may be different than someone in the Supervisor
role. For more information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
4. To create a new part for the template, click Create. The New Part screen appears. For information
about how to create parts, see "Create a part" on page 46.
5. To edit a part, click Edit. The Edit Part screen appears. For information about how to edit parts,
see "Edit a part" on page 47.
Note: To remove a part, click Remove.
6. To view properties, click Template Properties on the action bar.
7. To view the web page, click Preview on the action bar.
8. To select a different layout from Layouts, click Template Properties. In the Layout field, select
the new layout.
To change your layout, click Layout Designer on the action bar. It is important to remember if you
edit an existing layout, you change the layout for all web pages that use it. To create a template that
is specific to only one layout design but similar to an existing one, click Layout Designer. The
existing Layouts screen appears. To copy and save a new layout based on the one you selected for
your web page, click Copy Layout on the action bar. For information about editing layouts, see
"Design a layout" on page 122.

.
38
C HAPTER 2
9. The program automatically saves your information. To continue with the next task in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, navigate to the area you need.
To return to the main Templates screen, click Return on the action bar.
Image Library
Image Library stores images for your website. After you save an image, you can use the image repeatedly
on your web pages. For example, you can save an image of your volunteers who work on the latest project.
You can upload the image to your Welcome page, the Volunteers page, and the What's Happening page.
You can approve images and photos uploaded to your website by users before they are published. In
System Options, you can require approval before publishing uploaded images. In the User Image Options
frame, mark Require approval for all images uploaded by users. When a user uploads an image to a
profile page, you must approve the image before users can view it on your site. In System Options, you can
also set a maximum number of images or a maximum image size each user can load. For more
information, see "System Options" on page 234.
Save an image for the first time
Image Library stores each image separately within a category. To search for an existing image, use the
Search tab in Image Library. In the All or part of the image name field, you can enter a partial name
to search for an image. To search for an image contained on a specific part type, use the Type of image
field. In the Approval status field, you can select to search by All, Approved, or Unapproved images.
In Selected images categories, mark the checkbox beside the category in which to search for an
image.
1. From Web Site, click Image Library. The Image Library screen opens on the Categories tab.
2. On the action bar, click Add Image. The Add Image screen appears.
3. In the Upload a new image from field, click Browse to search for your image on your hard drive
or computer network. The Choose file screen appears.
Image files must be of a *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpg, or *.jpeg file type.
4. Select the image to load and click Open. The file name appears in the Upload a new image from
field.
5. In the Image Name field, the file name of the selected image appears. If necessary, change this
name so users can quickly identify the file in Image Library. This name does not appear on your
website.
6. In the Image Caption field, enter text to appear for slideshow images.
7. In the Image Category field, mark the checkbox beside the existing category in which to store the
image. When you select a category for the image, you can easily find it and its associated images
in Image Library.
To add a new image category, enter the name in the And/or new category field. The program
saves the image using the new category you enter. After you save the image, the new category
appears on the Categories tab.

.
WEBSITE
39
Note: When Require approval for all images uploaded by users is marked in System Options,
images the website user loads are saved as unapproved. Until the administrator approves an image,
it is visible only to the user who loads it. To other users, an unapproved image appears as a "Photo
Not Available" graphic.
8. In the Approval field, if the image is appropriate for your website, mark Approved. When you
mark Approved, the image is available on the website.
Tip: After you save an image, you can open the website user record from Image Library. In the
Images frame on the right, click Click here to open this user's record on the image. The user
record in Administration, Users opens.
9. In the Preview frame, the image you select in the Upload a new image from field automatically
appears. Verify the image is the one you want.
10. To close and save the image, click Save and Close. The program saves the image in the Images
frame on the right. You return to the Categories tab.
Update an image
You can replace and rename images in just a few steps. If you include an image on multiple web pages,
you can update the image file in Image Library once for all pages. Image files must be of a *.bmp,
*.gif, *.jpg, or *.jpeg file type.
1. From Web Site, click Image Library. The Image Library screen appears.
2. In the Images frame on the right, click Click here to edit image properties under the image to
edit. The Add Image screen appears.
Note: To search for an existing image, use the Search tab in Image Library. In the All or part of
the image name field, enter a partial name to search for an image. To search for an image
contained on a specific part type, use the Type of image field. In the Approval status field, select
to search by All, Approved, or Unapproved images. In Selected images categories, mark the
checkbox beside the category in which to search for an image.
3. Change the image properties as necessary. For example, add a new image, edit the name of the
image, or change the approval status.
4. In the Original File Location field, view where the original image is saved.
5. In the URL field, view the web page that contains the image.
6. To close and save the image, click Save and Close. You return to Image Library.
Parts
In Parts, you can write, edit, and delete content for your website. For example, to include your
organization's mission statement on your site, you can write the statement in Parts and include your
organization's logo in the part. Other part type examples include navigation buttons, user profile forms,
event registration forms, and frames. After you save a part, you can display the information on as many
web pages as you want. This section contains information about how to create parts for your website. For
information about how to update an existing part, see "Edit a part" on page 47.

.
40
C HAPTER 2
Part Types
This section briefly describes each option in Parts. Procedures exist for commonly used content tasks.
Note: Content does not appear on your website until you add the content to a web page in Site Explorer. To
create a web page, you must add content parts from Parts to your page in Site Explorer. For more
information about pages, see "Pages" on page 31.
Anonymous Newsletter Subscription With the Anonymous Newsletter Subscription part, website
visitors can subscribe to a specific newsletter without becoming a registered user on your website. Because
the subscriber does not create a user account, no sign-up transaction or constituent record is created in The
Raiser's Edge. For more information, see "Anonymous Newsletter Subscription" on page 48.
Change User ID/Password With the Change User ID/Password part, website users can change their
user IDs and passwords in the Blackbaud NetCommunity database without affecting the user IDs and
passwords for integrated Blackbaud programs. For more information, see "Change User ID/Password" on
page 48.
Chapter Links With the Chapter Links part, you can add links on the website home page, which
managers and members can click to access a chapter site. A manager or member only views the links to
chapters in which he is a member. We recommend you create only one Chapter Links for your Chapter
Manager part. For more information, see "Chapter Links Part" on page 257.
Chapter Manager With the Chapter Manager part, you can include "subsites" within your website. You
can use a Chapter Manager part to create separate web pages for local or regional chapters. For example,
an alumni association can use the part to create web pages for individual alumni classes or the different
colleges established at one school, such as the College of Architecture. Your Blackbaud NetCommunity
site contains the Chapter Manager part. However, the Chapter Manager part groups its pages together in a
separate subsite organization. For more information, see "Chapter Management" on page 253.
Chapter Page Element With the Chapter Page Elements part, you can add sections to a dynamic web
page that can be customized for a chapter manager's use. These web pages are personal pages for the
manager. Individuals who support the manager visit the page to learn more about the manager's
involvement with your chapter and to make donations. Web pages that use Chapter Page Element parts
also contain static sections that are other parts in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Use these sections to create
defaults for your organization that you want on every chapter manager's personal page. For more
information about Chapter Page Elements, see "Page Element Types" on page 83.
Class Notes With the Class Notes part, alumni can add notes to their class notes web page. You can
create a class notes page for each graduating year. Each page includes the same Class Notes part. For
security reasons, you can have only one Class Notes part. Once you create a Class Notes part, the option is
removed from the Part type field on a New Part screen so another cannot be created. If you mark Require
Approval when you create the part, users with edit rights must approve class notes on the web page before
they appear online.
Note: You can download the notes alumni add about themselves to the Notes tab of their constituent record
in The Raiser's Edge. This helps you know more specifics about your constituents. For more information,
see "Class Notes" on page 388.
Directory With the Directory part, website users can browse constituent information from your database
in The Raiser's Edge. For example, you create and save a query for the Class of 2000 in The Raiser's Edge.
You use this query to create a directory in Blackbaud NetCommunity. You can include the fields website
visitors can use as a search tool, such as First Name and Gender. You can also select the fields to appear
on your web page if the user's search finds results. For example, you can select to display First Name,
Last Name, Address Line 1, City, and State for your Directory page results. For more information, see
"Directory" on page 50.

.
WEBSITE
41
Discussion Group With the Discussion Group part, you can create an electronic bulletin board for
interactive discussion by your website users. For example, you can create a Reunion 2010 Discussion
Group for your alumni to participate in discussions, such as to plan events and arrange to meet with old
friends. On this electronic bulletin board, website users can submit new topics or add responses to an
existing topic. Your organization can create multiple Discussion Group parts to post on your website.
Users with manager rights can approve and delete topics. For more information, see "Discussion Group"
on page 52.
Documents With the Documents part, you can easily upload documents of any type to your website and
share the information. For example, you can upload a Microsoft Word document (*.doc file type) of your
board meeting minutes. You can include a message to appear on the website page to provide details about
the information the document contains. For your board meeting minutes Word document, you can include
"Board Meeting minutes from 05/05/2007. If you have questions or comments, please call the office."
Users with manager rights can approve and delete uploaded documents. For more information, see
"Documents" on page 54.
Donation Form With the Donation Form part, website users can donate to your organization through
your website. When you create a Donation Form part, you select the constituent code, fund, and giving
levels for your web donations. When you select a Donation Form part for your web page, a standard
donation form appears and uses the selected constituent code, fund, and giving level information. The
Donation Form part also contains an Acknowledgement tab. On this tab, you can create a standard email to
send to donors who use the donation form. You can also integrate your web donations with The Raiser's
Edge. For more information, see "Donation Form" on page 55.
Email Forwarding Form With the Email Forwarding Form part, website users can establish an email
address that never changes. With this part, users can sign up and create a lifelong email address that is
forwarded to an address they select. If their address changes, they can change the forwarding address and
other users never know and do not need to keep up with changes. To allow users to create their own
forwardable email address, mark User-Editable Life-Long Email Address. To configure your
organization's email forwarding email domain, review the Technical Requirements document provided by
Blackbaud Professional Services.
Note: The program shares email forwarding data between the Email Forwarding Form part and the Email
Forward tab on a user record in Users. You can set up address forwarding information for a website user on
the Email Forward tab. The website user can change the addresses from the Email Forwarding Form part
on a web page. For information about the Email Forward tab, see "Edit a user record" on page 225.
Email Reports With the Report (Email) part, you can create reports about email sent through Blackbaud
NetCommunity. For more information, see "Email Reports" on page 59.
Event Calendar With the Event Calendar part, you can add calendars to your website. The Event
Calendar part can:
· Act as a standalone calendar. For example, the academic departments at your school manage their own
calendars on your website. Each department can create and maintain a separate Event Calendar part for
its calendar.
· Work as a sub-calendar that feeds events to a larger organizational calendar. For example, your website
has a main calendar that lists events for all areas of the school. With an Event Calendar Group part, each
departmental calendar can feed events from its Event Calendar part into the main calendar for the
school. For more information, see "Event Calendar" on page 60.
Event Calendar Group With the Event Calendar Group part, you can create a top-level calendar that
receives events from smaller sub-calendars created with Event Calendar parts. For example, the academic
departments, athletic department, and alumni association at your school each maintain a calendar on your
website. Your website has a main calendar that includes events for all areas of the school. The departments
and alumni association use Event Calendar parts to create their own calendars. You can then create an
Event Calendar group for the main school calendar and assign the department and alumni calendars as
sub-calendars of that group. For more information, see "Event Calendar Group" on page 63.

.
42
C HAPTER 2
Event Calendar Highlights With the Event Calendar Highlights part, you can display short descriptions
of upcoming or prior events on any web page. The display includes the event name, date, and time and may
also include a link to the event calendar where the user can view more details about the event. You can
select which calendar events feed into the highlights display and the period of time they are included. For
more information, see "Event Calendar Highlights" on page 63.
Event Registration Form With the Event Registration Form part, website users can register for events
online. This information links directly to information in The Raiser's Edge. For more information, see
"Event Registration Form" on page 64.
Formatted Text and Images With the Formatted Text and Images part, you can include text and images
from Image Library on your web pages. To write general text information for your website, select this for
your content. When site users access web pages that use this part, the URL for the page begins "http". For
more information, see "Formatted Text and Images" on page 70.
Formatted Text and Images (Secured) With the exception of requiring Secure Sockets Layer (SSL),
the Formatted Text and Images (Secured) part has the same functionality as the Formatted Text and Images
part type. With the Formatted Text and Images (Secured) part, you can include secured text and images
from Image Library on your web pages. To write secured text information for your website, select this for
your content. When site users access web pages that use this part, the URL for the page begins "https".
If you do not want to secure information for this part type, use Formatted Text and Images. The tasks to
create the Formatted Text and Images (Secured) and the Formatted Text and Images part types are the
same. For more information, see "Formatted Text and Images" on page 70.
Frame With the Frame part, you can store a live web page from another website on your site. This part is
helpful when you migrate from one website to a new one. For example, you can store pages from your
organization's old website in a frame for your Blackbaud NetCommunity site.
Fundraiser With the Fundraiser part, you can generate an interactive set of web pages that drives
volunteers, participants, donors, solicitors, and others to your site. This part brings awareness to a
particular cause and typically centers around an event. Using a Fundraiser part, you can designate a
recipient fund from The Raiser's Edge for the fundraiser, allow solicitors and visitors to sign up as captains
or team members, select customizable parts for participants to select when they design personal pages, and
link a donation page where visitors contribute. In addition, you can link events to your fundraiser and
generate welcome, acknowledgement, and forgotten password email. The Fundraiser part contains many
more features. To prepare, plan, and take advantage of all features available for your organization, it is
important you review the information about the fundraiser. For more information, see "Team Fundraising"
on page 273.
Fundraiser Dashboard With the Fundraiser Dashboard part, you can display current information about
the progress of a fundraiser on your website. The dashboard contains a series of graphs to display
information such as donation totals, best performing participants and teams, a breakdown of online and
offline gifts, event pricing and totals, and email activity. For more information, see "Fundraiser Dashboard
Part" on page 304.
Fundraiser Reports With the Report (Fundraiser) part, you can create a summary report about the
progress of multiple fundraisers. The report displays information graphically in a 3-D bar graph chart,
textually in table format, or both. For more information, see "Fundraiser Reports" on page 306.
Fundraiser Page Element With the Fundraiser Page Element part, you can add sections to a Fundraiser
part that are customizable for a participant's or solicitor's use. These web pages are personal pages for the
participant. Supporters visit the page to learn more about your organization and the participant's
involvement with the organization. When you create a Fundraiser part, you select the Fundraiser Page
Element parts to include on your site. When you select multiple Fundraiser Page Element part, you can
offer participants a personal page of their preference. For more information, see "Page Element Types" on
page 83.

.
WEBSITE
43
Giving History With the Giving History part, you can create and display the giving history for a donor
on your website. The Raiser's Edge stores the data for the Giving History part. You select the filters for the
gift information contained in the Giving History part type. For example, you can select filters for gift type,
campaign, fund, and appeal. You can also select to display soft credits. Once the donor logs into your
website, the Giving History appears based on the user's authenticated user ID and password. On your
website, gifts appear in order from the newest to oldest. The gift date, gift type, payment method, and gift
amount appear for the donor to view.
Job Board With the Job Board part, you can create an area on your website so users can post and search
job postings. When you create this part, you customize the name, captions, and messages for the Job
Board. Users with manager rights can approve and delete postings. For more information, see "Job Board"
on page 71.
Macromedia Flash Files With the Macromedia Flash Files part, you can create specific content in
which to store a file and reuse it on multiple web pages. For example, you can use this part to convert
pages from your old website to your Blackbaud NetCommunity website.
Note: Blackbaud NetCommunity requires Macromedia Flash File version 7.0.19.0.
Membership Form With the Membership Form part, you can design a membership web page and solicit
for new members on your website. When you design the membership page, you decide the membership
categories for which to advertise online. You can create links to renew existing memberships, allow gifts
of membership, and customize the confirmation message for your web users. For more information, see
"Membership Form" on page 73.
Menu With the Menu part, you can create a menu that appears when users moves the mouse over the
toolbar on your website. For example, when you visit www.blackbaud.com and moves the mouse over the
Training link, a menu appears with selections such as Classroom Training and Online Training. With
the Menu part, you can create this menu form. To indicate to the site user that a submenu appears from a
menu, you can include glyphs (graphics). For more information, see "Menu" on page 78.
Navigation Button With the Navigation Button part, you can create or edit a navigation bar. Buttons on
a navigation bar honor Blackbaud NetCommunity security settings. For example, if you have a Board
Members Only page, only website users logged in as a Board Member can view a button on the navigation
bar used to access this page. For more information, see "Navigation Buttons" on page 80.
News Reader With the News Reader part, you can display Really Simple Syndication (RSS) or Atom
content on your website. These are XML-based formats used to distribute web information. For example,
if your organization is health-related, you can create a web page for health tips and include a News Reader
part that includes news headline feeds from other health-related websites. The News Reader part and RSS
or Atom content provide a way to automatically include these headlines on your website.
Blackbaud NetCommunity supports RSS versions 0.9, 1.0, and 2.0 and Atom version .3. Send an email to
Blackbaud NetCommunity Support at bbncsupport@blackbaud.com for more information. For more
information about how to create a News Reader part, see "News Reader" on page 82.
Personal Notes With the Personal Notes part, you can display contents from the Notes tab of a
constituent record in The Raiser's Edge on your site. You can display all note types or a select group of
note types. Using this part, a site user searches notes for himself or other constituents. In addition, the user
can manage his personal notes, such as to add, edit, or delete a personal note on his record. A user cannot
change a note for another constituent. For more information, see "Personal Notes" on page 97.
Personal Page Element With the Personal Page Element part, you can add dynamic sections to a web
page that is customizable for individual use. These web pages become personal pages for any website user
to whom you grant rights. Individuals who create personal pages using Personal Page Element parts have
multiple reasons for the page. For example, someone who is ill would like to create a care page for family
and friends to visit. When someone has a personal page on your site, other people who support or know the
individual visit the personal page to learn more about his or her relationship with your organization. For
more information, see "Page Element Types" on page 83.

.
44
C HAPTER 2
Personal Page Manager With the Personal Page Manager part, you can create templates so website
users can create personal pages. Personal pages are personalized pages supporters can set up on your
website to help communicate information about your organization's mission. Personal pages can contain
several features, including weblogs, news readers, photo galleries, report abuse actions, comment boards,
and simple or rich text. For more information, see "Personal Pages" on page 311.
Poll Most website users are familiar with a poll or survey posted on a website. A poll may ask a trivia
question or who they predict to win a race. Once the website user submits an answer, the program
calculates results which then appear on the site. With the Poll part, you can create this feature on your
website.
Warning: Poll responses are limited to 255 characters. If you expect long poll answers, we recommend
you enter a pixel (px) size in the Chart Image Width field. If you enter an image width less than a poll
response, the response is truncated in the image. To correct this, adjust the pixel size in the Chart Image
Width field.
With the Poll part, you can enter your poll or survey question, the text to display on the submit button,
whether to use a pie chart or bar chart to display the results, and, if required, the possible answers for the
poll or question. To prevent skewed polling results, once a website user responds to a poll, these fields are
disabled in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Profile Display With the Profile Display part, you can create a read-only user profile that displays
biographical, address, and contact information. You select which fields of information to include on the
profile. The profile can display information for only the logged-in user, or it can link to a directory so it
displays information for any person selected in the directory. For more information, see "Profile Display"
on page 99.
Quick Search With the Quick Search part, you can search other Blackbaud NetCommunity parts:
Formatted Text and Images, Formatted Text and Images (Secured), Discussion Group, Event Calendar,
Job Board, and Weblogs. When you add a Quick Search part to your web page, a text box with a search
button appears so site users can search for information on your website. You must select the page on which
search results appear. To use a Quick Search part in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you must have Microsoft's
Full-Text Search on your web server. For more information, see "Quick Search" on page 101.
Note: The primary difference between the Quick Search and Search parts is the way results appear on your
site. With a Quick Search part, you select a web page for results to appear on. With a Search part, results
appear automatically below your Search part. You can add a Quick Search part to a web page template.
However, we recommend you not add a Search part to a template.
Search With the Search part, you can search other Blackbaud NetCommunity parts: Formatted Text and
Images, Formatted Text and Images (Secured), Discussion Group, Event Calendar, Job Board, and
Weblogs. When you add a Search part to your web page, a field name, text box, and search button appear
so site users can search for information on your website. Search results appear automatically below your
Search part on the web page. To use a Search part in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you must have
Microsoft's Full-Text Search on your web server. For more information, see "Search" on page 102.
Slideshow With the Slideshow part, you can create a slideshow presentation of graphics on your website.
For more information, see "Slideshow" on page 104.
Survey With the Survey part, you can create an online survey for your website visitors. You can add
several types of survey questions in multiple formats and download constituent survey responses to
The Raiser's Edge. For more information about the Survey part, see "Survey" on page 105.
Targeted Content With the Targeted Content part, you can display specific information on a web page
depending on who reads it. User roles define who sees the part. For more information, see "Targeted
Content" on page 107.

.
WEBSITE
45
User Education Profile With the User Education Profile part, website users can update their education
information online. You select the fields of information to appear on the display and on the update form.
For more information, see "User Education Profile Form" on page 108.
Note: If you use Alumni Tracking for The Raiser's Edge, use the Education Profile Form.
User Email Preferences Form With the User Email Preferences Form part, you can add a subscription
page on your website. With this form, a user can subscribe to or unsubscribe from specific email lists or
mark a checkbox to opt out of all email from your organization. If you set "Everyone" security for the part,
nonmembers and members who are not logged in can access this subscription form. The email lists that
appear are determined by email templates with Subscription/Newsletter marked. When email is
generated from subscription templates, the designated email list and users who mark User Email
Preferences Form to subscribe receive the email. For more information, see "User Email Preferences
Form" on page 110.
User Interests Form With the User Interest Form part, you can create a web page that captures a website
user's interests. The interests that appear on your form default from table attributes in The Raiser's Edge.
For example, you can have a constituent attribute called "Interests" with a data type of "table" in The
Raiser's Edge. This attribute appears on the User Interests Form.
You can download the information website users select from Blackbaud NetCommunity to the The
Raiser's Edge. You can use this information to raise funds and create awareness for your organization. For
example, if many website users select Wine Tasting on your User Interests Form web page, you can host a
wine-tasting event in your community.
Note: In the Interests Attribute field in System Options, make sure to select The Raiser's Edge attribute to
map to for downloads. For more information, see "System Options" on page 234.
User Login With the User Login part, you can control the areas users access on your website. When a
user logs in, the user login determines to which roles the user belongs and which features the user has
security rights to access. You can create separate login parts for any subsite you create, such as a subsite
for chapters.
You can add forms to the user login for new user registrations, forgotten passwords, and forgotten user
IDs. You can also create email to send to users to acknowledge their registration or to provide a forgotten
password or user ID. For more information, see "User Login" on page 112.
User Photos Form With the User Photos Form part, you can create or edit a website profile page with
images. With the User Photos Form part, a website user can select a photo from her Image Library to
publish on her profile page. For example, you can enable alumni to include photos in their website profile.
A website user can upload a photo to her Image Library and use the User Photos Form to publish it on a
profile page. For more information about Image Library, see "Image Library" on page 38.
Tip: In System Options, you can select to require approval before the program publishes uploaded images.
In the User Image Options frame, mark Require approval for all images uploaded by users. When you
include the User Photos Form on a profile page and a user uploads a photo, you must approve the photo in
Image Library before it appears on your site. In System Options, you can also set a maximum number of
images or a maximum image size a user can load. For more information, see "System Options" on
page 234.
When you design the User Photos Form, you can specify a default caption to appear when the user does not
enter a caption for a photo. You also select the image category and set the maximum display height and
width for uploaded photos. You can also specify where to direct website users after they use the User
Photos Form part.

.
46
C HAPTER 2
User Profile Form With the User Profile Form part, website users can enter biographical information on
your website Profile page. To track current information and solicit the user for a donation, you can
download the information the user enters to The Raiser's Edge. For example, Jane Compton is a member
of the Class of 1988 and she visits your website for the first time. As a part of this first-time process, she
navigates to your Profile page and enters her full name, current address, and spouse information. You can
download the information she enters on your website directly to The Raiser's Edge. For more information,
see "User Profile Form" on page 114.
Volunteer Opportunity If you use Volunteer Management for The Raiser's Edge, you can use the
Volunteer Opportunity part to display a list of jobs on your website. A website user can learn about your
volunteer jobs, sign up for a job, and enter data relative to the job. For example, the volunteer can provide
emergency contact information, special skills, and needs and inform you of medical needs. For more
information, see "Volunteer Opportunity" on page 115.
Volunteer transactions appear on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. When The Raiser's Edge
downloads a volunteer transaction, the data appears on the Volunteer tab of the website user's constituent
record. The Raiser's Edge automatically creates a job assignment for the user. For more information, see
"Volunteer Requests" on page 371.
Weblog With the Weblog part, you can create an area on your website to collect or share information
that pertains to your organization. This ranges from your organization's news to appeals sent to your
alumni to links to other related websites. Blackbaud NetCommunity users and website users who have
security rights can update a Weblog part. For more information about security, see "Security" on page 223.
For information about how to create a Weblog part, see "Weblog" on page 118.
Web Traffic Reports With the Report (Web Traffic) part, you can create reports with statistics about
your website's traffic. For more information, see "Web Traffic Reports" on page 120.
Create and Edit Part Properties
When you include a part on multiple web pages, you can edit and update the part once for all pages. If you
create a new part and want to make sure you keep the look of the part (such as font size and style for text)
consistent with the rest of your website, make a copy of the existing content. You easily retain the bulk of
information required to create new content.
The procedures in this section inform you how to create a part and edit properties for a part. For more
information about how to design a part, see the individual part's section. For a complete list of parts, see
"Part Types" on page 40.
Create a part
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen opens on the Properties tab.
2. On the action bar, click New Part. The New Part screen appears.
After you save the part type, the information on the New Part screen becomes the Part Properties
screen.
3. In the Part Name field, enter a name for your content, such as "Mission Statement", so Blackbaud
NetCommunity users can quickly identify the information in Parts. This name is for internal use
and does not appear on your website.
4. In the Part Description field, enter any additional information to identify the part.
5. In the Part Type field, select a part type, such as "Formatted Text and Images". This is the type of
content to include text information for a web page. Once you save the part, you cannot change the
part type.
6. To make the part available within a certain time frame, mark Activate. When you mark this
checkbox, the date fields are enabled.

.
WEBSITE
47
Note: If you do not mark Activate, no time limits exists for the part.
a. In the Publish Date field, enter the date and time the part first becomes available on your site.
b. In the Expiration Date field, enter the date and time the part becomes unavailable on your
site.
If an expired part exists on a live web page on your site, the part does not appear. The other
parts on the page dynamically fill the space where the expired part previously appeared.
Note: After you save the part type, a Pages using this part box appears to display your web pages
that use the part. If no pages use the part, a "This part is not being used by any pages" message
appears.
7. Select the Security tab.
8. In the Part Security grid, assign view, edit, delete, and change security rights for each role. The
Role column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For more information about security,
see "Security" on page 223.
9. Click Next. The part design screen appears. For information about how to design part types, see
"Part Types" on page 40.
Edit a part
When you search for existing content to update, use the search tools available in Blackbaud
NetCommunity. For example, at the top of the Parts screen, select a type in the Part Type field to
narrow your search. In the Name field, you can enter a partial name to search for content. At the
bottom of the Parts screen, you can narrow the number of pages to view on the screen in the Results
Per Page field. If you know the page number in Parts where your information is stored, select it in the
Page field.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: To create a new part based on an existing part, click Copy Part in the Action column on the
Parts screen. The Copy Part screen appears. In the New Part Name field, enter a new name and
click Next. The Edit Part screen appears so you can make the changes required. For more
information about how to create new content, see "Create a part" on page 46.
2. For the part to edit, click Properties in the Action column. The Part Properties screen opens on the
Properties tab.
3. Make the changes for the Part Name or Part Description fields. The Part Type is embedded. You
cannot change the part type from the one originally selected.
Note: The Pages using this part box displays your web pages that use the part. The information is
for informational purposes only. If no pages use the part, a "This part is not being used by any
pages" message appears.
4. Select the Security tab.
5. In the Part Security grid, assign view, edit, delete, and change security rights for each role. The
Role column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For information about security in
Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Security" on page 223.

.
48
C HAPTER 2
6. To save your changes on the Page Properties screen, click Save and Close. You return to the Parts
screen. For information about how to edit the Page Designer screen, see "Edit web page design" on
page 33.
Anonymous Newsletter Subscription
With the Anonymous Newsletter Subscription part, you can offer a newsletter to which website visitors
can subscribe without becoming a registered user on your website. Because the subscriber does not create
a user account, no sign-up transaction or constituent record is created in The Raiser's Edge. Typically, you
may want to enable anonymous subscriptions for a particular newsletter, such as an introductory
newsletter, that may lead the subscriber to become more involved with your organization, at which point
he becomes an active user and constituent.
On the web page, the Anonymous Newsletter Subscription part appears as a box where users can enter
their names and email addresses and click a button to subscribe.
Design Anonymous Newsletter Subscription
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Anonymous Newsletter Subscription part.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Newsletter field, select the newsletter to which users can anonymously subscribe.
4. In the Form title field, enter the text to appear at the top of the Anonymous Newsletter
Subscription part on your website, such as "Get the Newsletter!".
5. In the After subscribing navigate to field, select the web page, such as a Welcome or Thank You
page, to appear after the site user clicks Subscribe.
a. Click Click here to select a page. The Select a Page screen appears.
b. Select the web page to appear after the website user clicks Subscribe.
c. Click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen.
Note: If you do not select a web page in the After subscribing navigate to field, the website user
returns to the Anonymous Newsletter Subscription part after he clicks Subscribe.
6. To save this part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Change User ID/Password
With the Change User ID/Password part, website users can change their user IDs and passwords in the
Blackbaud NetCommunity database without affecting the user IDs and passwords for other integrated
Blackbaud programs. On the website, the user can update the user ID, password, and password reminder.

.
WEBSITE
49
Design Change User ID/Password
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information defaults
automatically to the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar or in the
Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Change
User ID/Password.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Heading field, enter the text to appear at the top of your Change User ID/Password form,
such as "Change User Login".
4. In the Change User ID/Password grid, select the fields to appear on your Change User
ID/Password form. You can select to display the User ID, Password, Confirm Password,
Reminder Phrase, and Time Zone fields. For details about the grid, see "Change User
ID/Password Grid" on page 49.
5. In the After update navigate to field, select the web page to appear after the website user changes
the user login and password.
a. Click Click here to select a page. The Select a Page screen appears.
b. Select the web page to appear after the website user changes the user name and password.
c. Click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen.
Note: If you do not select a web page in the After update navigate to field, the Home Page
selected in System Options automatically appears after the website user changes the user name or
password.
6. To save this part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Change User ID/Password Grid
The table provides information about the options in the Change User ID/Password grid.
Blackbaud NetCommunity
Option
Notes
Administrator or Website User?
Include
Blackbaud NetCommunity
Mark the checkbox next to the fields to include on
your Change User ID/ Password form.
Field
N/A
Displays the default field name for your Change
User ID/ Password form.
Editable
Blackbaud NetCommunity and
To enable other users to edit the field, mark this
website
checkbox.
Required
Website
To make a field required on the Change User
ID/Password form, mark this checkbox.
Alternate Caption
Blackbaud NetCommunity
To edit a field name, enter a new name in this
column. For example, you may want to call the
User ID field User Name.

.
50
C HAPTER 2
Directory
With a Directory part, your website users can contact each other. To publish directories on your website,
select queries to pull constituent information from The Raiser's Edge. For example, you create and save a
query for the Class of 2000 in The Raiser's Edge. You can use this query to create a directory in Blackbaud
NetCommunity. You select the fields website users can use as a search tool, such as Last Name and
Gender. You can include multiple-value fields such as organization Type, Donor Category, and
Retirement Date. You can also provide links in the directory to constituent personal pages.
Note: The directory search can return up to 500 results that match the criteria entered by a site user.
You also select the fields to appear on your web page when the user's search produces results. For
example, you can select to display First Name, Last Name, Address Line 1, City, and State fields for
your directory results. The field you list first for results links to the constituent's published profile
information.
Design Directory
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information defaults
automatically to the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar or in the
Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Directory.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Directory title field, enter a name for the directory, such as "Class of 2000 Directory".
4. In the Records to Include frame, specify the records to include in the directory.
a. The Limit to query field displays the selected query of records included in the directory. By
default, "All Constituents" appears.
Tip: For a query to appear as a selection, you must first create it in The Raiser's Edge. When you
create a new query, you may need to refresh Blackbaud NetCommunity for it to appear as a
selection. To refresh, select View, Refresh from the menu bar.
To include information from all constituents in your database in The Raiser's Edge, leave the
default "All Constituents". To select another existing constituent query to use as the
directory, click Change. The Query Search screen appears. For information about how to use
the Search screen, see "Search Screen" on page 24.
b. In the Include field, select the type of constituent records to include in the directory. You can
select "Both Organizations & Individuals", "Individuals Only", or "Organizations Only".
5. In the Search Form frame, in the Split search fields into field, select how many columns of
search fields to appear in the criteria table. You can display up to five columns.

.
WEBSITE
51
To process a search while the user browses your Directory part, mark Load unfiltered results
when this part is loaded. When you mark this checkbox, the directory search processes before the
user enters criteria and clicks Search on your website.
6. In the Results frame, set up how to display search results on your Directory part.
a. In the Show navigation controls field, select where the navigation buttons should appear.
You can select "Above the results", "Below the results", or "Both above and below the
results".
b. The directory search can return up to 500 results that match the criteria entered by a site user.
In the Results per page field, select the maximum number of results to appear on a page
when a site user searches the directory. You can display up to 50 results per page.
c. In the No records found message field, enter the message to appear if no records meet the
search criteria the user enters to search the Directory on your website. By default, the
message "No directory entries match your criteria" appears.
d. Directory results link to a page on your website. In the Linked profile page field, select the
page to which the link should go. The field you list first in the Listing Fields box becomes the
link to the page you select in Linked profile page field.
e. You can link individual constituents included in the results to an associated Team Fundraiser
or Personal page. In the Include a page link for field, select the page to which to link
individual constituents in the directory results.
7. In the Fields to Include frame, select the fields the user uses to search the directory, such as First
Name or Last Name. Right-click and drag the field from the Profile Fields box to the Search
Form Fields box, or select the field in the Profile Fields box and click the right arrow to move it
to the Search Form Fields box.
Note: The system administrator selects the attributes available under Constituent Attributes and
Education Attributes in "System Options" on page 234.
To arrange the placement of a field in the Search Form Fields box, select the field and click the
Up or Down button.
Note: The fields in the Search Form Fields list and the Listing Fields list do not have to match.
8. Select the fields to appear when the search finds a match. To select a field, right-click and drag it
from the Profile Fields box to the Listing Fields box. To move a field from the Profile Fields box
to the Listing Fields box, you can also select it and click the right arrow.
To arrange the placement of a field in the Listing Fields box, select the field and click the Up or
Down button.

.
52
C HAPTER 2
Warning: The listing field you put first for results acts as a link to the constituent record.
However, if, on the User Profile Form, the field's data is marked Privacy Editable and the user
selects to hide the data, no link exists. For example, if you select to list First name first, and the
user selects to hide First name data, no link appears.
While you can link every field, the field you place first in the Listing Fields box automatically
links to the page you select in the Linked Page field. For example, you select to display the
alumni's last name, first name, birth date, address, and whether they want to receive email. In this
case, the last name is the link. When results appear, to indicate the last name is a link, it is
underlined and changes color when you drag your mouse over it. When a website user clicks the
alumnus's last name, the published profile information for that constituent appears.
9. To save this part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Discussion Group
Select the Discussion Group part type to create an electronic bulletin board so website users can participate
in interactive discussions. For example, you can create a Reunion 2007 Discussion Group for your alumni
to plan events and arrange to meet with old friends. Website users can submit new topics or add responses
to existing topics in this electronic bulletin board. Your organization can create multiple Discussion Group
part types to post on your website.
If you have manager security rights, you can approve and delete messages and topics posted to the website.
Additional buttons also appear on messages for discussion group managers. To block the content of a
message without affecting replies to the message, click Block. To delete a message and all replies to the
message, click Prune.
Design Discussion Group
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Discussion Group.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Group Name field, enter the main topic of discussion you want to generate, such as
"Reunion 2007".
4. In the Post New Topic Message box, enter the message to display on your website for users to
read more information about the discussion topic. For example, enter "Post a new topic for the
Reunion 2007 discussion group. Feel free to start a discussion about a reunion event or meeting
with friends at your favorite old college hang-outs!".
Note: The website user's message box for postings is limited to 3000 characters.
5. In the Post New Reply Message box, enter the message to display on your website for users who
post a message. For example, enter "Thank you for participating in the Reunion 2007 discussion!
We look forward to seeing you on campus!"

.
WEBSITE
53
6. If you mark Require approval for topics and messages added to this group, topics and
messages posted by user roles with Can Manage rights appear on your website immediately. A
user with manager rights must approve other topics.
Warning: If you do not mark this checkbox, all topics appear immediately on your website.
7. In the Security Rights frame, assign Can Manage rights to roles for discussion group users.
Note: Managers can approve or delete any messages and topics added to groups. Additional
buttons appear on messages for managers. To block the content of a message without affecting
replies to the message, click Block. To delete a message and all replies to the message, click
Prune. For more information about how to manage a discussion group, see "Manage Discussion
Group" on page 53. For information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
8. In the Spelling Correction frame, customize messages on your website for users who participate
in the discussion group.
a. In the Topic With Errors Message box, enter the message to appear if a website user posts a
new topic with spelling errors.
b. In the Topic With No Errors Message box, enter the message to appear if a website user
posts a new topic without any spelling errors.
c. In the Reply With Errors Message box, enter the message to appear if a website user post a
response to an existing topic with spelling errors.
d. In the Reply With No Errors Message box, enter the message to appear if a website user
posts a response to an existing topic without spelling errors.
9. To save this part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Manage Discussion Group
If you are a user with Can Manage rights, you have additional options with the Discussion Group part
type. These options are available when you log into your website with your manager role.
1. Using your manager role with Can Manage security rights, log into your organization's website.
2. In the upper right corner of your Discussion Group part, the View field appears. In this field, select
which postings to view. You can select "All", "Approved Only", or "Pending Approval".
Note: If Require Approval for Topics Added to This Group is unmarked on the Edit Part:
Discussion Group screen, Approve does not appear on your website for users with manager roles.
However, the View field and Delete remain available.
3. To approve a message or topic, click Approve in the same row as the message or topic to approve.
This makes the information available for all website users to view and respond.
4. To delete a message or topic, click Delete in the same row as the message or topic to remove. This
permanently removes the information from the website.
5. To block the content of a message without affecting replies to the message, click Block in the same
row as the message to block.

.
54
C HAPTER 2
Note: When you click Block, the button changes to Unblock. To recover the message, click
Unblock.
6. To delete a message and all its replies, click Prune in the same row as the message to prune. The
program deletes the only the selected message and its replies. Any messages posted in the topic
prior to the pruned message remain.
7. To exit the web page, log out of the website or click Go to Blackbaud NetCommunity on the
Blackbaud NetCommunity toolbar to enter the administrative side of the program.
Documents
Using the Documents part, you can easily upload documents of any type to your website and share the
information. For example, you can upload a Microsoft Word document (*.doc file type) of your board
meeting minutes. You can include a message to appear on the website page that provides details about the
information the document contains. For your board meeting minutes Word document, you can include
"Board Meeting minutes from 05/05/2007. Please call the office if you have questions or comments."
The ability to upload documents is based on security rights. For example, users with manager rights can
approve and delete documents. For more information about security, see "Security" on page 223.
Design Documents
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information defaults
automatically to the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar or in the
Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Documents.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Title field, enter a name to identify the documents.
4. In the Message field, enter the message to appear on the website page, such as to provide details
about the documents or instructions for site users.
5. In the Upload Button field, enter the text to appear on the button the website user clicks to upload
documents to your website.
6. In the Maximum File Size field, enter the enter the maximum size of a document to store on your
site. The size is stored in kilobytes. By default, the maximum file size is typically 4096 KB.

.
WEBSITE
55
Warning: To prevent possible Denial of Service attacks, there is a limit to the size of the files you
can upload. The default is typically set to 4096 KB, but the system administrator can adjust it up to
10,000 KB. We do not recommend you go over this size. The administrator can specify this limit
in the Web.Config file. For example, to increase the file size, add
maxRequestLength="8192" (where 8192 is the file size) to the <httpRuntime
useFullyQualifiedRedirectUrl="true" /> key. For very large files, increase the
website timeout setting. For example, to increase the timeout setting, add
executionTimeout="120" (where 120 is the duration in seconds) to the <httpRuntime
useFullyQualifiedRedirectUrl="true" /> key. Before you maximize the document
file sizes or website timeout settings, visit http://support.microsoft.com/?id=295626 and review
the Microsoft Knowledgebase article.
7. Specify whether uploaded documents require approval before they appear on your website.
· If you mark Require Approval, documents posted by user roles with Manage rights appear on
your website immediately. Other documents must be approved by a user with manager rights.
· If you do not mark Require Approval, all documents appear immediately on your website.
8. In the Security Rights frame, specify which roles have upload and manage rights for the
Documents.
a. In the Upload column, mark the checkbox for each role allowed to upload documents. These
roles cannot edit or delete documents. To automatically assign upload rights to all roles, mark
Upload at the top of the column.
Note: If the part is marked Require Approval, documents are pending until a user with Manage
rights approves them. A user with Upload rights can view his or her pending documents, but not
those of other users with Upload rights. Only users with Manage rights can view all pending
documents.
b. In the Manage column, mark the checkbox for each role allowed to add, edit, and delete
documents. If the part is marked Require Approval, these roles can approve documents. To
automatically assign management rights to all roles, mark Manage at the top of the column.
For information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
9. To save this part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Donation Form
For a new Donation Form part, you select the constituent code, fund, and giving levels to use for web
donations. When you select a Donation Form part for your web page, a canned donation form appears
using the constituent code, fund, and giving level information you select.
The Donation Form part also contains an Acknowledgement tab. On this tab, you can create a standard
email to send to donors who donate via your website. For more information about generating and sending
an email, see "Email" on page 163.
When you download gifts from your website, you can create new gift records for the donations in The
Raiser's Edge. Gift data from the website integrates with gifts in The Raiser's Edge. This data includes
information such as amount, credit card number, billing address, an option to give anonymously, and
comments.
Design Donation Form
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.

.
56
C HAPTER 2
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information defaults
automatically to the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar or in the
Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Donation Form.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Constituent Code field, select a constituent code to assign to donors in The Raiser's Edge
database. For more information about how to select constituent codes in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
4. In the Button Text field, enter the text to appear on the button that submits the donation to your
organization. For example, enter "Submit" or "Donate Now!". The button appears at the end of the
donation page.
5. In the Payment Methods frame, mark the payment types donors can use to contribute to your
organization. You can mark Direct Debit and Pledge (Bill me later).
Note: The Donation Form part automatically includes Credit Card as a payment method for
donors.
6. In the Donor Options frame, select which options to make available to donors on the donation
form.
a. To allow a company to donate, mark Allow Corporate gifts. When you mark this checkbox,
This donation is on behalf of a company appears on the donation form for a representative
from a company to mark.
b. To allow donors to give anonymously, mark Allow Anonymous gifts. When you mark this, I
prefer to make this donation anonymously appears on the donation form for the donor to
mark.
c. To allow donors to enter comments on your site, mark Allow Comments. If you mark this
checkbox, the program downloads comments to the Attributes tab on a gift record in The
Raiser's Edge.
d. To allow donors to provide matching gift company information, mark Allow Matching gifts.
When you mark this checkbox, My company will match my gift appears on the donation
form for the donor to mark. Donors can mark the checkbox and enter the company name in a
Company field. If you use MatchFinder Online, Look it up appears next to the checkbox.
Visitors click the link to access MatchFinder Online and search for the company.
MatchFinder Online contains information about matching gift companies, such as the
minimum and maximum gift details and match ratio. Data from MatchFinder Online
integrates with The Raiser's Edge.
Note: Send an email to solutions@blackbaud.com for information about MatchFinder Online
purchasing options.
For information about downloading matching gift information to The Raiser's Edge, see
"Download donations - single transaction process" on page 354. For information about
matching gifts in The Raiser's Edge, see the The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.

.
WEBSITE
57
7. To allow donors to contribute regular recurring gifts, in the Recurring Gifts frame, mark Allow
Recurring gifts.
To allow the donor to select the frequency of the recurring gift, select General. When you select
this, a Frequency field appears on your website. In this field, donors can select to make a
contribution every week, month, quarter, or year. Once the website user selects a frequency, start
and end date fields appear on the web page.
Warning: If a constituent donates a recurring gift and selects a start date that is not today's date,
the transaction downloads to The Raiser's Edge. However, the transaction is not sent to your bank
merchant when the donor submits the recurring gift. The merchant receives the transaction from
the batch output you send to your bank for processing from The Raiser's Edge. For more
information about bank merchants, see "Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
To define the recurring gift frequency, select Specific. The Custom Frequency frame appears.
a. Select "Weekly", "Monthly", "Quarterly", or "Annually" as the frequency.
b. In the On field, select the day of the week on which the recurring gift is donated.
c. To add the frequency to the donation page, click Add Frequency.
To add multiple frequency options to the donor web page, select the custom frequency setting
and click Add Frequency for each option.
d. After you click Add Frequency, Allow Donor to enter Ending Date appears. To allow
donors to enter the end date for the recurring gift, mark this checkbox.
8. To create a tribute section on the donation form, in the Tribute Gifts frame, mark Allow Tribute
gifts.
Note: If you use Honor/Memorial Tracking in The Raiser's Edge, use the Tribute Gifts frame.
a. To remove the Description field from the tribute section on the web page, mark Hide
Tribute Description field.
b. If you do not mark the Hide Tribute Description field checkbox, in the Description Text
field, enter text to appear at the beginning of the Tribute Information frame on your
donation form, such as "This gift is made in honor of someone special."
c. To allow the donor to select the tribute, select General.
Mark all tribute type checkboxes to include in the tribute section on the donation form. The
tribute types listed are the entries in the Tribute Types table in The Raiser's Edge.
d. To have all tributes from the donation form go to a specific tribute, select Specific. When you
select this, Honor/Memorial appears with a Tribute field.
To select an honor or memorial individual from The Raiser's Edge, click Honor/Memorial.
A search screen appears so you can search for the individual.
In the Tribute field, select the tribute type and description to use. Information in this field is
from the Honor/Memorial tab in the The Raiser's Edge. The selections are a combination of
the data from the Tribute type and Description fields.

.
58
C HAPTER 2
Note: When you include tribute information on your donor page, Mail a letter on my behalf
automatically appears on the page. When a donor marks this checkbox, name and address fields
appear for the donor to enter this information. You can use this information in a tribute letter.
9. In the Designations frame, to select a fund for gifts, click Add Fund in the Fund column. The
Fund Search screen appears so you can select a fund. For information about how to use the Search
screen, see "Search Screen" on page 24.
a. In the Display Name field, enter the name of the fund as it will appear on the website.
By default, the text entered in the Fund Name field in The Raiser's Edge appears as what you
enter in the Display Name field.
b. If the user does not select a fund, and this is the fund in which to apply the gift, mark the
checkbox in the Transaction Default column.
For each additional fund to make available on your Donation Form, click Add Designation.
Another row appears in the grid for you to repeat these steps. If you add multiple funds, you
provide a list of funds from which donors can select the fund to which they want to donate.
c. To allows users to write in a fund other then the ones provided, mark Allow Other
designation.
d. To include in the list the funds the donor has previously contributed to, mark Include
Donor's prior gift designations.
If you mark this checkbox, the list displays funds from the donor's last 50 gifts.
e. To allows users to donate to multiple funds, mark Support Multiple designations.
Tip: When more than one fund exists in the Designations frame, Support Multiple designations
appears.
When you mark this checkbox, Add to Cart appears on your website. Similar to purchasing
items from a store, users select the multiple funds to which to donate.
10. To select a giving level for your donors, click Add Giving Level in the Giving Levels frame.
When you include giving levels and also mark Support Multiple designations, each donation
made to a fund is considered for the giving level. For example, if a $500 donation is required for
Gold status, and a donor donates $250 to the 2008 Annual Fund and $250 to the Building
Equipment Fund, the donor does not receive Gold status. If the gift is one $500 donation to the
2008 Annual Fund, the donor receives the Gold giving level status.
a. In the Display Name field, enter the name of the giving level as it will appear on the website.
b. In the Amount field, enter the gift amount for which the giving level applies. You can enter
the start amount or both the start and end amounts.
c. To include a blank $ Other field on the Donation page, mark Allow Other amount.
11. To select an appeal for the gift, click Add Source in the Sources frame. With this information,
your organization can manage how donors learn about donating through the website.
a. To include an appeal, click Add Appeal in the Appeal column. The Appeal Search screen
appears so you can select an appeal. For information about how to use the Search screen, see
"Search Screen" on page 24.
b. In the Display Name field, enter the name of the appeal as it will appear on the website.

.
WEBSITE
59
By default, the text entered in the Appeal Name field in The Raiser's Edge appears as what
you enter in the Display Name field.
c. If the user does not select an appeal, and this is the appeal in which to apply the gift, mark the
checkbox in the Transaction Default column.
For each additional appeal to make available on the Donation Form, click Add Source.
Another row appears in the grid for you to repeat these steps. If you add multiple appeals, you
provide a list of appeals from which donors can select.
12. In the Attributes frame, mark the checkbox beside the gift attribute you want in the Display
column. To make the attributes required, mark the checkbox in the Required column. To change
the text of the attribute on your donation page, enter the text to display in the Caption field.
Note: When you download a gift to The Raiser's Edge, some gift attributes can automatically add
to the gift record. These attributes include NetCommunity Comments, NetCommunity Corporate
Donation Contact, NetCommunity Email Source, NetCommunity Email Source ID,
NetCommunity Page, and NetCommunity Page ID. You do not view these gift attributes in the
Attributes frame or on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. Once the gift downloads to
The Raiser's Edge, you can view the information on the gift record.
These are gift attributes from The Raiser's Edge. Gift attributes are stored on the Attributes tab of
a gift record. To add a new attribute, create it in The Raiser's Edge.
13. In the Merchant Account frame, select the merchant account to use to process credit cards. For
example, select your IATS account.
The system administrator sets up merchant accounts in Administration. For information, see
"Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
14. Click Next. The Acknowledgement Email screen appears.
15. Create an acknowledgement email for website users who use the donation form to donate to your
organization. For information about how to design a donation acknowledgement email, see
"Design an acknowledgement email for a transaction" on page 201.
Tip: When you edit a Donation Form part, you can also click Acknowledgement Email on the
action bar to access the Acknowledgement Email screen. For information about how to design an
email to acknowledge an email registration, see "Design an acknowledgement email for a
transaction" on page 201.
16. To save the email, click Save and Close. You return to the Edit Part screen.
17. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Email Reports
Using the Report (Email) part, you can create reports for your website about email sent through Blackbaud
NetCommunity.
Email Revenue Summary -- The Email Revenue Summary displays the amount of donations collected
through a link in the email to a donation page. Website users can filter the report results by date range,
message type, and revenue type.

.
60
C HAPTER 2
Email Activity Report -- The Email Activity Report displays details for each email sent including the
email title, type, sender's name, and date sent. Other details include the number of opened and bounced
email, and the number of page visits generated by each email. The report also contains a bar graph which
shows the total number of opened, bounced emails, and page visits for all emails included in the report.
Website users can filter the report results by email type, date range, and action.
This table explains the items included in the Email Activity Report.
Type
Type of message sent -- Email, Acknowledgement, Newsletter, or Fundraiser, or
Chapter
Sent
Number of emails sent
Opened
Number of emails sent that were tracked as opened
Bounced
Number of emails sent that were not delivered successfully
Page Visits
Number of web page visits generated by a link in the email
Design Email Reports
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Report
(Email).
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Report Type field, select the type of report to create. Select Email Revenue Summary or
Email Activity Report.
To view a pop-up preview of the report, click on the report type. For more information about report
types, see the introduction to "Email Reports" on page 59.
4. In the Report Title field, select the title to use for the report.
· To use the report's name for the title, select Default.
· To enter a custom report title, select Other and enter the title in the field.
5. To display the report title above the report, mark Show Report Title.
6. To save the report, click Save and Close. You return to the Report (Email) design screen.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Event Calendar
You can use the Event Calendar part to add a calendars to your website. Event Calendar parts can:
· Act as standalone calendars. For example, the academic departments at your school manage their own
calendars on your website. Each department can create and maintain a separate Event Calendar part for
its calendar.
· Work as sub-calendars that feed events to a larger organizational calendar. For example, your website
has a main calendar that lists events for all areas of the school. With the Event Calendar Group part, each
departmental calendar can feed events from their Event Calendar parts into the main calendar for the
school. For more information about Event Calendar Groups, see "Event Calendar Group" on page 63.

.
WEBSITE
61
You can use Event Calendar part properties to manage who views and manages each calendar. For
example, a school may have a sub-calendar of faculty events that only users assigned to Administrator or
Faculty roles can view or edit. You can also use Event Categories to manage the types of events added to
the calendar and who manages them. For example, a soccer calendar may have categories such as
Registration, Practice, and Games, and only users in the Coaches role have rights to add, edit, or delete
events in these categories.
Calendar managers can create recurring events. When you edit recurring events, the manager can select
whether to change all occurrences in the series, only the selected occurrence, or all future occurrences in
the series including the selected occurrence. When you change an occurrence of an event, you cannot later
make that occurrence part of a recurring series.
Calendar managers can select a time zone for the event. If an event does not have a specific time zone, the
logged-in user's time zone setting determines the date and time displayed for the event. For anonymous
users or any user who does not have a time zone specified, the event displays the time and date based on
the system's setting. If your website users are all in the same time zone, we recommend managers leave the
time zone field blank. If your website users are in multiple time zones, we recommend you set the time
zone to the user's setting.
Calendar managers can to add Google or Yahoo! map links to event locations. They can use the HTML
editor to add pictures and hyperlinks and to format text.
Website users have three views of the calendar: the Calendar View, the List View, and Published Events.
· The Calendar View displays a large monthly calendar. Dates with scheduled events are colored and list
the events that occur that day. Users can click Filter Events to customize the categories of events that
appear. Event names are hyperlinked so users can click them to read more information about the event.
In this view, icons indicate whether an event is recurring, occurs in a specific time zone, or lasts longer
than one day.
· The List View displays a list of all the events scheduled for the selected period of time. Event names are
hyperlinked so users can click them to read more information about the event. Users can filter events by
date or click Filter Events to select the types of events to view.
· If you enable the RSS (Really Simple Syndication) Event Publishing capabilities, calendar managers can
post "stories" in a weblog form with details about upcoming events. Site users can click Published
Events to view the calendar weblog. Posted events also appear in site search results.
To cancel an event, a manager can mark Mark Canceled. In the List View and Calendar Highlights, the
event title is appended with "- Canceled". In the Calendar View, the event name is struck through. For the
calendar weblog, "Update" or "Removed" is added to the title, and readers who subscribe to the calendar
weblog receive an updated calendar event posting through their RSS feed.
Design Event Calendar
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Event
Calendar.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In Calendar Title field, enter a name for the calendar.

.
62
C HAPTER 2
4. In the Event Categories frame, select which event categories to associate with the calendar. Once
you add a category, click Assign rights to the category. The Event Category Security screen
appears so you can assign security rights to roles for the event category. For example, a Soccer
calendar may have the Registration, Practice, and Games categories, and only users in the Coaches
role can add, edit, or delete events in these categories. For information about how to add event
categories, see "Code Tables" on page 242.
5. In the Uncategorized Events Management Rights frame, mark which roles have rights to
manage any events not associated with a category.
6. To include a weblog for the Event Calendar part, mark RSS Event Publishing. Additional fields
for the weblog appear.
a. In the Title field, enter a title for the weblog.
b. In the Link URL field, enter a website address news readers can use to link to the calendar
weblog. Also, if your website has a News Reader part, add this link to your news reader so it
displays new events when they are posted. For more information about the News Reader part,
see "News Reader" on page 82.
c. In the Description field, enter a description for news readers about the types of events posted
on the calendar. For example, if your organization supports environmental advocacy, enter
"Upcoming Local and National Events Supporting the Environment".
To view the information you enter in this field, click XML for the calendar weblog. Using the
above example, the XML information for your description reads
"<description>Upcoming Local and National Events Supporting the
Environment</description>".
d. In the Copyright field, enter a copyright notice for the weblog, if you have one.
e. In the Editor's Email field, enter the email address for the person responsible for the content
of calendar postings.
f. To approve weblog posts before they appear on your site, mark Moderated.
7. To add a picture to the calendar weblog, click Select Image in the Image Properties frame. The
Select Image from Image Library screen appears. For information about how to insert an image,
see "Insert Image" on page 24.
8. In the Link URL field, enter the web address to open when a user clicks the image. The link can
access another page on your site or an outside website.
9. In the Security Rights frame, define which roles have post and manage rights for the weblog.
a. In the Can Post column, mark the checkbox for each role allowed to post to the weblog.
These roles cannot edit or delete postings. To automatically assign posting rights to all roles,
mark Can Post at the top of the column.
Note: If the list is marked Moderated, posts are pending until a user with Can Manage rights
approves them. A user with Can Post rights views his or her pending posts, but not those of other
Can Post users. Only users with Can Manage rights view all pending posts.
b. In the Can Manage column, mark the checkbox for each role allowed to add, edit, and delete
weblog postings. If the list is marked Moderated, these roles can approve postings. To
automatically assign management rights to all roles, mark Can Manage at the top of the
column.
For information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.

.
WEBSITE
63
10. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Event Calendar Group
You can use the Event Calendar Group part to add create a top-level calendar that receives events from
smaller sub-calendars. For example, the academic departments, athletic department, and alumni
association at your school each maintain a calendar on your website. Your website also has a main
calendar that includes events for all areas of the school. In this scenario, the departments and alumni
association create their own calendars with the Event Calendar part. You can then create an Event
Calendar group for the main school calendar and assign the department and alumni calendars as
sub-calendars of that group. For more information about the Event Calendar part, see "Event Calendar" on
page 60.
Design Event Calendar Group
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Event
Calendar Group.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In Calendar Group Title field, enter a name for the calendar group.
4. In the Sub Calendars frame, mark each calendar whose events to include in this group. The Event
Calendar part creates the available sub-calendars. For more information, see "Event Calendar" on
page 60.
5. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Event Calendar Highlights
You can use the Event Calendar Highlights part to display short descriptions of upcoming or prior events
on any web page. The display includes the event name, date, and time and may also include a link to the
event calendar, where the user can view more details about the event. You can select which calendars'
events feed into the highlights display and the period of time they are included.
Design Event Calendar Highlights
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Event
Calendar Highlights.

.
64
C HAPTER 2
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Event Source frame, mark the calendars whose events to include in the display.
4. To include a section that displays highlights of upcoming events, mark Show Upcoming Events.
a. In the Upcoming Events Title field, enter a title for the upcoming events section.
b. In the Show next [ ] field, select the period of time to include events in the display, such as
events that occur within the next 5 days or next month.
5. To include a section that displays highlights of previous events, mark Show Recent Events.
a. In the Recent Events Title field, enter a title for the recent events section.
b. In the Show previous [ ] field, select the period of time to include events in the display, such
as events that occurred within the previous 5 days or previous month.
6. In the More Events URL field, enter a URL to another page on the website or to a separate site
that contains more information about events. If you add a URL, More Events appears on your
website.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Event Registration Form
To allow website users to register for events online, you can create and edit event registration forms. You
can link your online events to event records in The Raiser's Edge and download the online registration
information directly to event records in The Raiser's Edge.
Note: If you use The Raiser's Edge Events Management, use the Event Registration Form part type.
When members register for events online, you can allow relationships in The Raiser's Edge to appear as
selections as participants, making online registration easy for your members and adding personal details to
their registration form.
Design Event Registration Form
For optimal performance, include only one Event Registration Form part for each web page.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Event
Registration Form.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.

.
WEBSITE
65
3. In the Helplets frame, enter custom text to appear on the Event Registration forms to help website
users understand how to use the form.
a. In the Screen field, select the form to create help text for. You can select "Selection",
"Prices", "Attendees", "Register Now", or "Acknowledgement".
b. In the box, enter the text to appear on the form. To format the content's appearance and
layout, use the HTML editor. For more information about the HTML editor, see "HTML
Editor" on page 6.
c. Once you create help text for one form, select another form type in the Screen field. The
program automatically saves changes for the first form, and an asterisk appears next to the
form name to indicate it has saved help content.
4. In the Fund from The Raiser's Edge frame, select the fund with which the event is associated in
The Raiser's Edge. To select a fund, click Select. The Fund Search screen appears so you can
select a fund. For information about how to use the Search screen, see "Search Screen" on page 24.
Tip: A red asterisk designates a required field. When information is missing from any of these
fields, you cannot save the form.
To replace the selected fund with another fund, click Change. The Fund Search screen appears so
you can select a different fund.
When you download information to The Raiser's Edge, registration fees paid online through this
form apply directly to the designated fund. For more information, see "Event Registrations" on
page 374.

.
66
C HAPTER 2
5. In the Giving Options frame, specify whether to allow website users to provide matching gift
claims through the website. When you mark Allow Matching gifts, My company will match my
gift appears on the web page. Site visitors can mark this checkbox and enter the company name in
a Company field.
If you use MatchFinder Online, Look it up appears next to My company will match my gift on
the web page. Visitors can click the link to access MatchFinder Online and search for the company
entered in the Company field. MatchFinder Online contains information about matching gift
companies, such as the minimum and maximum gift details and match ratio. Data from
MatchFinder Online integrates with The Raiser's Edge. For information about how to purchase
MatchFinder Online, please send an email to solutions@blackbaud.com.
For information about how to download matching gift information to The Raiser's Edge, see
"Event Registrations" on page 374. For information about matching gifts in The Raiser's Edge,
see the The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.
6. In the Required Fields frame, mark the checkbox for each field you want to make required on the
registration form. To ensure you download complete constituent information into The Raiser's
Edge, we recommend that you make all of these fields required.
7. In the Constituent Code field, select a constituent code to apply to registrants not in the database
in The Raiser's Edge. If a registrant signs up for events on the website but does not already exist in
The Raiser's Edge, The Raiser's Edge creates a new record and assigns the constituent code you
select here when you commit the downloaded event information. For more information about how
to select constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.

.
WEBSITE
67
Note: If a registrant already exists in the database, The Raiser's Edge updates the constituent
record with gift and event data with the downloaded event information.
8. In the Captions frame, for each button or label listed, enter the text to appear on the Event
Registration form.
9. In the Registration Options frame, select whether to display the event information and selection
as two pages. If you include a second page, the website user selects the events for which he wants
to register on one page and enters registration quantity and pricing information on another page.
To allow the website user to select both events and registration options on one page, mark Exclude
the first Event Info/Selection page from registration.
Note: If your Event Registration form includes one or few events, we recommend you mark
Exclude the first Event Info/Selection page from registration to minimize steps for your
registrants. If your Event Registration form includes multiple events, a second event information
and selection page may be helpful to your website users.
10. To display a progress status bar for the user to view during the event registration, mark Display
progress indicator.
If you do not mark Exclude the first Event Info/Selection page from registration, a five step
progress indicator appears at the top of the event registration form for the user.
· Step 1: Start -- This is the Event Selection page. Information about each event appears,
including the description, date, and time of the event from The Raiser's Edge. On this page, the
website user selects the events to which to register.
· Step 2: Prices -- This is the Quantity and Pricing page. The pricing options and units for the
selected events appears. On this page, the website user enters the quantities of event units to
register.

.
68
C HAPTER 2
· Step 3: Attendees -- This is the Attendees page. On this page, the website user enters who will
attend the selected events and selects any participant attributes you add to the Event Registration
form.
· Step 4: Register -- This is the Payment page. A summary of the event registration appears. On
this page, the website user verifies the registration options selected are correct and enters any
billing and payment information.
· Step 5: Finish -- This is the Confirmation page. A summary of the billing and payment
information appears.
Note: If you mark Exclude the first Event Info/Selection page from registration, Step 1: Start
does not appear on the progress indicator. The progress indicator displays the event registration as
four steps: Prices, Attendees, Register, and Finish. In a four step registration, the user selects the
events and enters the quantities of event units as part of the Prices step.
11. In the Events from frame, select the event from The Raiser's Edge to use.
Tip: The Raiser's Edge does not need to be open when you select an event.
To add an event to the field list, click Add Event. The Event Search screen appears so you can
select an event. For information about how to use the Search screen, see "Search Screen" on
page 24.
You can use this event registration form for more than one event. To add another event to the form,
click Add Event and select an additional event.
12. For each event selected for the event registration form, set up how its registration appears on the
form.
a. In the Event Name field, select the event registration to set up.
b. In the Display Name field, enter the name of the event as it will appear on the website.
By default, the text in the Event Name field in The Raiser's Edge appears in the Display
Name field.
c. In the Display Description field, enter the description of the event as it will appear on the
website.
By default, the text entered in the Description field in The Raiser's Edge appears as what you
enter in the Display Description field.
d. The Capacity field displays the capacity for the selected event, as entered in The Raiser's
Edge. To limit how many registrants can sign up for the event using the event registration
form online, mark Do not allow registrations beyond capacity.
e. To display any relationship records linked to a member's constituent record in The Raiser's
Edge for selection in participant fields, mark Display individual relationships as available
participants.

.
WEBSITE
69
For example, Mark Adamson has a constituent record in The Raiser's Edge. His wife Vicki
has a relationship linked to Mark's constituent record. If you mark Display individual
relationships as available participants, when Mark registers for the Annual Golf
Tournament on your website, Vicki's name appears in the drop-down list when Mark assigns
participants. He can select Vicki or enter another name.
f. In the Pricing Options frame, select the prices to appear on the registration page for each
event unit. To display a listed price, mark its checkbox in the Include column.
In the Description field, enter the text to appear on the registration page for the event unit,
such as "Individual" or "Couple".
In the Participants/Unit column, enter the number of people allowed for the unit.
In the Max Units column, select the maximum number of each unit allowed for each
registration. By default, this value is "4".
To allow participants to register for an event unit anonymously, mark its checkbox in the
Allow Anonymous? column. When you mark this checkbox, the Name field is not required
when the website user registers for the event unit.
In the Price (Gift Amount) and Receipt Amount columns, data from the Prices tab of the
event record in The Raiser's Edge appears and is disabled. You cannot change this
information in Blackbaud NetCommunity. To change the price or receipt amount, edit the
event record in The Raiser's Edge.
g. In the Attributes frame, select the participant attributes to appear on the event registration
page. To display a participant attribute, mark its checkbox in the Display column.
One-per-record attributes with a type of Date, Text, Number, Currency, and Yes/No can be
used in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Table type attributes are available without being marked
as one per record. Fuzzy Date and Constituent Name type attributes are not available in
Blackbaud NetCommunity.
To make a selected attribute required, mark its checkbox in the Required column.
To change the text of the attribute on the registration page, in the Caption field, enter the text
to appear.
Note: When you download an event registration to The Raiser's Edge, The Raiser's Edge
automatically adds the Online registrant? participant attribute on the participant record. You do not
view this attribute in the Attributes frame or on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Once the event registration downloads to The Raiser's Edge, this information appears on the
Attributes/Notes tab of the participant record. "Online registrant?" appears in the Category
column, "Yes" appears in the Description column, and "NetCommunity" appears in the
Comments column.
To add a new attribute, create it in The Raiser's Edge. For information about attributes, see
The Raiser's Edge Configuration & Security Guide.
h. In the Page Link frame, to add a link to another web page, click Link. The Create Page Link
screen appears. For information about how to create a page link, see "Create Page Link" on
page 25.

.
70
C HAPTER 2
13. In the Merchant Account frame, select the merchant account to use to process credit card
transactions received through the event registration form, such as your organization's IATS
merchant account.
The system administrator sets up merchant accounts in Administration. For more information, see
"Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
14. Click Next. The Acknowledgement Email screen appears.
15. Create an acknowledgement email for website users who use the event registration form to register
for an event. For information about how to design an event registration acknowledgement email,
see "Design an acknowledgement email for a transaction" on page 201.
Tip: When you edit an Event Registration Form, you can click Acknowledgement Email on the
action bar to access the Acknowledgement Email screen. For information about how to design an
email to acknowledge an email registration, see "Design an acknowledgement email for a
transaction" on page 201.
16. To save the email, click Save and Close. You return to the Edit Part screen.
17. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Formatted Text and Images
To include text and images (in Image Library) on your web pages, use the Formatted Text and Images part.
For example, to include your mission statement with your organization's logo on multiple pages of your
website, use the Formatted Text and Images part to create this content. You can also use the Formatted
Text and Images part to create a footer for your website that includes your webmaster's contact
information.
On the Options tab of the Formatted Text and Images part, you can specify whether website users can copy
the content from your Blackbaud NetCommunity site, such as from a personal page, to use on another web
page for social networking. For example, the site user can copy the HTML code necessary for the content
on her personal page to appear on a family website or weblog.
You can add Formatted Text and Images parts to each web page in Site Explorer. For more information
about how to add content parts in Site Explorer, see "Site Explorer" on page 31.
With Blackbaud NetAdvocacy, you can download advocacy action data to The Raiser's Edge. This data
includes alerts, email information, and attributes. Blackbaud NetAdvocacy is used with Capwiz
subscription service to include pages on your site where users can email influential individuals (such as
Congressional, state, and local officials) to encourage their influence on particular causes, such as grant
funding for a nonprofit. To include links to landing pages on your Blackbaud NetCommunity site for
advocacy functionality, use the Formatted Text and Images part. In addition, when you send advocacy alert
email from Blackbaud NetCommunity, the advocate's actions automatically link to their record in
The Raiser's Edge once the action is complete. For information about how to use Blackbaud NetAdvocacy
and Capwiz and to set up action alerts on your site, see your Capwiz Site Control page.

.
WEBSITE
71
Warning: You cannot use HTML to embed your own form via HTML in a Formatted Text and Images
part. We recommend you put the form on a page that is not stored in Blackbaud NetCommunity but can be
referenced in an IFRAME tag. For more information about how to include customized forms in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, contact Blackbaud's Professional Services at solutions@blackbaud.com.
Design Formatted Text and Images
To secure the content for formatted text and images, use the Formatted Text and Images (Secured) part
type. This part type uses Secure Sockets Layer (SSL). When site users use this part to access web
pages, the URL for the page starts with "https". To design a Formatted Text and Images (Secured) part
type, follow the same steps in this procedure.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Formatted Text and Images.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. Select the Content tab.
4. In the HTML editor content area, enter the content and format its appearance and layout. For
example, you can manually enter or copy and paste your organization's mission statement. For
more information about the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
5. To allow site users to copy and paste the content's HTML code:
a. Select the Options tab.
b. Mark Enable HTML Code Publishing.
c. In the Help Text field, enter custom text to appear on the web page to help site users
understand how and why to copy the HTML code. By default, the message "Copy and Paste
the following code where you would normally publish HTML content" appears.
6. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Job Board
The Job Board part creates an area on your website for users to post and search job postings. With this part
type, you can customize the name, captions, and messages for the job board. Users with manager rights can
approve and delete postings.
Tip: To post a job, a website user must log into your site. However, a user does not have to log in to search
for a job posting.
You can display a Job Board part on any Blackbaud NetCommunity web page. The initial landing page
includes the job board name and hyperlinks that link website users to the appropriate search or post web
page of the job board. You can customize additional messages to explain job board functionality to your
website users.

.
72
C HAPTER 2
Design Job Board
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Job
Board.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Board Name field, enter the name for the job board for your website, such as "Working at
ABC Learning Center". This field is required and limited to 225 characters.
4. In the Legend Message box, enter the message to appear below the name of your job board, such
as "The Working at ABC Learning Center job board provides a way to post your organization's job
openings as well as search for current available jobs posted to this site." This field is required and
limited to 225 characters.
5. In the Search Link Caption field, enter the information to appear when a website user moves the
mouse over the search hyperlink, such as "Click here to search for available jobs". This field is
required and is limited to 150 characters.
6. In the Search Message box, enter a message that appears under the search hyperlink and explains
to website users the purpose of this section, such as "Search available jobs by entering specific
criteria you would like to have in a job." This field is required and is limited to 225 characters.
7. In the Post Link Caption field, enter the information to appear when a website user moves the
mouse over the post hyperlink, such as "Click here to add a job posting". This field is required and
limited to 150 characters.
8. In the Post Message box, enter a message that appears under the post hyperlink and explains what
website users can do in the job posting section, such as "Add a job posting for your organization".
This field is required and limited to 225 characters.
9. In the Post Job Message box, enter the information to appear at the top of the actual job posting
form, which appears when a website user enters information for the available job. For example,
enter "Post your job using this form. To preview your post, click Preview. To add your job posting
to the website immediately, click Post Job." This field is required and is limited to 225 characters.
Note: The Post Job form website users use to create a job post contains standard job criteria fields.
For example, job type, description, and salary range are included on the form. The website user has
the option to post the company name and a name and email address for the applicant to contact. A
red asterisk designates required fields on the form.
10. If you mark Require Approval for Posts Made to This Board, jobs posted by user roles with
Can Manage rights appear on your website immediately. A user with manager rights must approve
other job postings.

.
WEBSITE
73
Warning: If you do not mark Require Approval for Posts Made to This Board, all topics appear
immediately on your website.
11. In the Role grid, you can assign Can Manage rights for the job posting users. Managers can
approve or delete any postings added to the website. For more information about roles in
Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Roles" on page 227.
12. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Membership Form
With the Membership Form part, you can design a membership web page and solicit for new members on
your website. When you design the membership page, you decide the membership categories for which to
advertise online. You can create links to renew existing memberships, allow gifts of membership, and
customize your confirmation message for web users.
Note: If you use The Raiser's Edge Membership Management, use the Membership Form part type.
The Membership Form in Blackbaud NetCommunity creates and displays multiple pages on your website.
· The first page, which you can select not to display on your website, is Current Membership. This
displays a website user's current membership information for review.
· The second page (or the first, if you do not display Current Membership) is the Join/Renew page. This
page contains the available membership categories you select to display on your website.
· After this, your website user comes to the Cards/Guest Pass page. You do not have to give your members
the option for additional cards and guest passes. You can select not to display this page on your website.
· The next page is Transaction. It displays the member name and financial information.
· The last page is for the acknowledgement message. When you generate an acknowledgement in the
Membership Form part type, you can select to display the message on your web page for the site user to
read once the membership is submitted. At the same time, Blackbaud NetCommunity automatically
sends an acknowledgement email to the member.
To generate a Membership Form part type from the beginning, start with the Design the Current
Membership page procedure. Once you complete the steps in this procedure, follow the remaining
procedures for this part type to create your Membership Form.
Design the Current Membership page
The first page is Current Membership, which you can select not to show. The Current Membership
page displays a website user's current membership information for review. Only active and lapsed
memberships appear on the page. Dropped memberships do not appear.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: If you use The Raiser's Edge Membership Management, use the Membership Form part.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Membership Form.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.

.
74
C HAPTER 2
3. In the Title field, enter the title for the membership screens on your website, such as "Smith
Museum Membership Program".
4. To display the member's current membership, mark Show Current Membership(s).
If you do not mark this checkbox, the Membership Form starts with the Join page on your website.
For more information, see "Design the Join/Renew page" on page 74
5. To allow your members to view program and subcategory information, mark Include Program
and Include Subcategory.
6. In the Caption field, enter the text to appear on your website to explain what is being viewed, such
as "Your Current Membership Information".
7. In the Message box, enter any additional information to provide for your site users, such as "If you
have questions about your current membership, please contact us at 323-555-5555."
8. In the Join Button and Renew Button fields, enter the text to appear on each button, such as "Join
Now" and "Renew Now", respectively.
9. In the Program - Category table, mark the current memberships to appear on your website. For
any memberships to appear, mark the checkbox in the Show column. To designate the
memberships to allow for renewals, mark the checkbox in the Allow Renew column.
10. To display current benefits for your memberships, mark Show Benefits. Additionally, to show
details of the benefits, mark Show Quantity, Show Total Value, Show Comments, or Show
Notes.
Note: The Raiser's Edge determines the available membership benefits.
If you mark Show Benefits and the member selects to waive benefits, a message appears on your
website to inform the member that benefits are waived.
Design the Join/Renew page
The second page (or the first, if you do not display Current Membership) is the Join/Renew page. This
page displays the available membership categories you select for your website. This way, a website
user can select the membership to join or renew from the available category list.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: If you do not display the Current Membership page, your member cannot renew a
membership on your Membership Form part. For more information about Current Membership,
see "Design the Current Membership page" on page 73.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Membership Form.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. To allow members to make a pledge, mark Accept Pledges. When you mark this checkbox, "Bill
Me Later" appears on the Transaction page of the Membership Form. For more information about
the Transaction page, see "Design the Transaction page" on page 76.

.
WEBSITE
75
4. To allow members to enter comments, mark Allow Comments. When you mark this checkbox, a
text box appears on the Transaction page. You can download the information directly to
The Raiser's Edge. The membership record in The Raiser's Edge stores any comments a member
enters.
If you mark Allow Matching gifts, My company will match my gift appears on the page. Site
visitors can mark this checkbox and enter the company name in a Company field. If you use
MatchFinder Online, Look it up appears next to the checkbox. Visitors click the link to access
MatchFinder Online and search for the company. MatchFinder Online contains information about
matching gift companies, such as the minimum and maximum gift details and match ratio. Data
from MatchFinder Online integrates with data in The Raiser's Edge. Send an email to
solutions@blackbaud.com for information about how to purchase MatchFinder Online.
For information about how to download matching gift information to The Raiser's Edge, see
"Memberships" on page 391. For information about matching gifts in The Raiser's Edge, see
The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.
5. In the Required Fields frame, mark the checkbox for each field you want to make required on the
membership form. To ensure you download complete constituent information into The Raiser's
Edge, we recommend that you make all of these fields required.
6. In the Constituent Code field, select a constituent code to add for any new members not already
in your Raiser's Edge database. Your website users do not view this information. You can
download the information directly to The Raiser's Edge. For more information about selecting
constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
7. To allow website users to purchase gifts of membership, mark Allow gifts of membership. When
you do this, you have several selections for this type of membership giving. You can select a
specific constituent code for these membership recipients and allow the donor to decide whether
the member or the donor receives the benefits and renewal notices. You can also include a text box
on your website so donors can include a special message for the gift of membership recipient.
8. In the Button Text field, enter the text to appear on the button for users to click to purchase a gift
of membership, such as "Give a gift of membership".
Note: The button user click to purchase a gift of membership appears on the Current Membership
page. When users click this button, the Join/Renew page appears.
9. When you mark Allow additional donations, an additional contribution field appears on your
website. For members who contribute an additional donation, in the Raiser's Edge Fund field,
select the fund to credit. You can download the gifts directly to The Raiser's Edge.
10. To track why a website user joins the membership, mark Include Join Reasons. In the box below,
mark the reasons to show as possible answers for your website users, such as Interested in
supporting the program.
Note: The Raiser's Edge determines the available join reason information.
11. To track why a website user renews a membership, mark Include Renew Reasons. In the box
below, mark the reasons to show as possible answers for your website users, such as Special
Interest.
12. In the Join Message box, enter a message that appears when the website user clicks your join
button, such as "Welcome to the ABC Museum!".

.
76
C HAPTER 2
13. In the Renew Message box, enter a message that appears when a website user clicks your renew
button, such as "Welcome Back!".
14. In the Submit Button field, enter the text to appear on your submit button, such as "I want to join
now!".
Design the Cards/Guest Pass page
An individual membership Cards/Guest Pass page on your site uses the information created in this
procedure. If you create the Membership Form part for the first time, the information in this section
does not appear on the Membership Form until you select a membership in the Raiser's Edge
Memberships to Include frame in step 3 of the "Design the Transaction page" on page 76 procedure.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Membership Form.
Note: Card and guest pass creation is not a onetime task for the Membership Form. To provide this
for your website users, you must create card and guest pass information for each membership
category included on your Membership Form.
3. In the Cards/Guest Pass details frame, enter additional card and guest pass information.
4. Mark Allow member to specify the card/guest pass information so members can request
additional cards and guest passes.
5. In the Message box, enter the text to appear for the website user to read, such as the maximum
number of cards each primary member should have.
6. To allow members to identify who the additional cards or guests are, mark Allow member to
specify the names and relationships of additional members.
You can designate the maximum number of additional members to allow for and select the
relationship types to include as options for your website users. The Raiser's Edge determines the
available relationship types.
Design the Transaction page
The Transaction page displays options for your member to join or renew a membership, request
additional cards and guest passes, and view benefit information.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Membership Form.
Note: When a website user completes the Membership Form on your website, the Transaction
page is completed before the membership card information. For more information about cards, see
"Design the Cards/Guest Pass page" on page 76.
3. In the Raiser's Edge Memberships to Include frame, select the membership to appear on your
website.
a. Click Insert New. The Raiser's Edge Membership Categories screen appears.
b. Beside the membership category to include on your website, click Select. The Raiser's Edge
Membership Categories screen closes, and you return to the Membership Form part type.

.
WEBSITE
77
Note: You must add each membership category separately for your Membership Form part.
To remove a membership category from your website, click Remove next to the category name
selected in the Membership Category field.
4. For each membership category you select, membership category data appears on the Membership
Form part design screen. The Raiser's Edge stores this data. View the integrated data and select
whether to include the program and subcategory information (if it exists) on your website, enter a
text message, and enter a dues amount.
5. Select The Raiser's Edge fund to which to credit the dues amount. You download the gifts directly
to The Raiser's Edge. For more information about how to download information into The Raiser's
Edge, see "The Raiser's Edge NetCommunity Page" on page 329.
6. To allow your members to view subcategory information, mark Include Subcategories.
7. In the Caption field, enter the text to appear on your website to inform the member that the
subcategory is being viewed, such as "Membership Subcategory".
Next to the membership subcategories to appear on your website, mark the checkbox. The
membership record in The Raiser's Edge determines the available subcategories.
8. To allow members to identify who the additional cards or guests are, mark Allow member to
specify the names and relationships of additional members.
Benefits appears next to the membership category on your website. To view benefit details, the
site user can click this link.
9. Mark Show Quantity, Show Total Value, and Show Comments to display these details for the
benefits of your membership categories. The Raiser's Edge determines the available membership
benefit information.
10. In the Benefits Form Message box, enter the text to appear on the Benefits screen. When a user
clicks Benefits, the text appears on the screen that appears under the membership category name.
11. To display benefit notes on the Benefits screen, mark Show Benefit Notes.
12. In the Show Benefit Notes box, enter the text to appear below the benefit details. When a user
clicks Benefits, the text appears below the benefit information from The Raiser's Edge that
appears.
13. In the Merchant Account frame, select the merchant account to use to process credit cards, such
as your IATS account.
The system administrator sets up merchant accounts in Administration. For more information, see
"Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
14. Click Next. The Acknowledgement Email screen appears.
15. Create an acknowledgement email for website users who use the membership form to join or
renew a membership. For information about how to design a membership acknowledgement
email, see "Design an acknowledgement email for a transaction" on page 201.
Tip: When you edit a Membership Form, you can click Acknowledgement Email on the action
bar to access the Acknowledgement Email screen. For information about how to design an email
to acknowledge a membership transaction, see "Design an acknowledgement email for a
transaction" on page 201.
16. To save the email, click Save and Close. You return to the Edit Part screen.

.
78
C HAPTER 2
17. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Menu
With the Menu part, you can create a menu that appears when website users moves the mouse over the
toolbar on your website. For example, when you visit www.blackbaud.com, a menu appears when you
moves the mouse over Training with selections such as Classroom Training and Distance Learning.
With Blackbaud NetCommunity, you can create this menu form.
You create the Menu part in two steps. One step is to add the menu definitions, such as Home, Support,
and About Us. From each main menu definition, you can define submenus. You can also include glyphs
(graphics) to indicate to the site user that a submenu displays from a menu option.
Note: The order in which you create the Menu part does not matter. You can either create menu definitions
or write the CSS information for the Menu part type first.
The other step in Menu part creation is to create the style and format of your menu. For example, you can
add a specific color and font for your menu to show when a website user moves the mouse over the menu.
To perform this step, you include CSS (Cascading Stylesheet) information for the Menu part.
Design a Menu definition
When you create a menu definition, you add the menu options to appear on your website. This menu
provides a main source of navigation for your website. Site users use these menus to navigate to the
web page they need. From each main menu definition, you can define submenus. You can also include
glyphs (graphics) to indicate to the site user that a submenu displays from a menu option.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Menu.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. To add the first menu item, select Menu Definition and click Add menu item. The Edit Part
screen for Menu appears.
Tip: To move a menu definition out of its parent menu, select the menu and click the left arrow
button. To sort menu definitions, select a menu and click the down arrow button.
4. In the Selected Item Properties frame, in the Text field, enter the name of your menu item, such
as "Support".
The text you enter in this field is the actual menu name that appears on your website. For example,
the Training menu that appears on www.blackbaud.com would be entered as "Training" in this
field.
5. In the Tooltip field, enter the information to appear when a website user moves the mouse over the
text you entered in the Text field, such as "Support ABC University".

.
WEBSITE
79
6. To add a link to another web page, click Link on the toolbar. The Create Page Link screen appears.
For information about how to create a page link, see "Create Page Link" on page 25.
Tip: The Link button is enabled when you select the text to link. If text is written in a format that
Blackbaud NetCommunity recognizes as a web address or page, such as www.blackbaud.com, the
link formats automatically.
7. The Target field on the Edit Part screen is for informational purposes only. To change the
information, click Link. For information about how to create a page link, see "Create Page Link"
on page 25.
8. In the Glyph Padding field, enter the amount of space, in pixels, to allow between the text on your
menu option and the graphic.
9. For each required menu definition, add additional menu items.
· Select Menu Definition and click Add menu item on the left side of your screen. Repeat the
procedure from the Selected Item Properties frame step.
Note: You can continue to build your Menu part type, creating as many menus and submenus as
necessary. To create this drill-down menu, follow the same pattern. Select the menu or submenu
from which to generate a submenu. To create the submenu definition, click Add menu item.
· To add a submenu item, select the menu item from which to generate the submenu and click
Add menu item. For example, to add the submenu options of Make a Donation from the
Support menu, select Support and click Add menu item. Repeat the procedure from the
Selected Item Properties frame step.
10. To save the menu definition, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design the Menu using CSS
The second step of Menu part creation is to create the style and format of your menu. For example, the
system administrator can add a specific color and font for your menu to appear when a website user
moves the mouse over the menu. To perform this step, you include CSS (Cascading Stylesheet)
information for the Menu part.
1. In the Menu Orientation field, select "Horizontal" or "Vertical".
2. In the Menu CSS box, enter the CSS text to use for your menu. This includes styles such as color,
font, and text size. You can configure multiple properties.
backgroundColor
borderColor
borderstyle
borderWidth
color
fontFamily
fontSize
fontStyle
fontWeight
3. In the Item CSS box, enter the CSS text to use when you change the entire menu. Any changes
included in the Item CSS box affects the main menu and submenu items.
4. In the Mouseover Item CSS box, enter the CSS text to use for the tooltip box that appears when a
website user moves the mouse over a menu, such as CSS text to make the tooltip yellow.

.
80
C HAPTER 2
5. In the Active Item CSS box, enter the CSS text to use when a site user is on the web page of the
menu item that was accessed. For example, if a user selects the Support menu item on your
website, the Support page appears. From this page, the Support menu item is now the "active
item".
6. In the Submenu Item CSS box, enter the CSS text to use for any submenus for your main menu.
You may want to simply use the same CSS text in the Menu CSS box.
Tip: Use the glyph graphic to indicate that a submenu exists for the menu, such as an arrow
graphic. When you create the menu definition, you enter the space between the menu text and the
graphic, or "glyph padding". For more information, see "Design a Menu definition" on page 78.
7. To include a graphic for the menu, click Submenu Glyph. The Select Image from Image Library
screen appears. For information about how to insert an image, see "Insert Image" on page 24.
8. In the Glyph Location field, select whether to display the glyph on the right or left of the menu
text.
9. To allow users to click a menu item before the submenu opens, mark Click to open submenus. If
you do not mark this checkbox, a submenu opens when a user moves the mouse over the menu
item.
10. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Navigation Buttons
To create a new navigation bar, use the Navigation Buttons part. Buttons on a navigation bar follow the
Blackbaud NetCommunity security settings. For example, if you have a Board Members Only page, only a
website user logged in as a board member can view a button on the navigation bar used to access this page.
Design Navigation Buttons
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Navigation Buttons.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Orientation field, select the orientation to display the navigation bar on your web page.
· To display the navigation bar from left to right, select "Horizontal".
· To display the navigation bar from top to bottom, select "Vertical".

.
WEBSITE
81
Tip: Use the up and down arrows to sort your navigation buttons in the order they will appear on
your web page.
4. In the Preview with Stylesheet field, select the stylesheet to use for your navigation bar. For
example, to use the Blackbaud NetCommunity stylesheet, select "System Default". For more
information about stylesheets, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
5. To add a button for your navigation bar, click Add Item. The Navigation Bar Item screen appears.
6. In the Caption field, enter the information to appear in a yellow box when your website user
moves the mouse over a navigation bar button.
Warning: All images used for navigation bar buttons must be previously created and saved using
graphics software such as Microsoft Photo Editor. These images cannot be created in Blackbaud
NetCommunity.
To not use images for a navigation bar button, add a linked heading for navigation. In the Caption
field, enter the heading to link. The heading you enter appears on your web page and is linked
automatically. To select the web page to which to link, complete the next step in this procedure.
7. In the Page field, click the binoculars to select the web page on which the navigation bar appears.
The Create Page Link screen appears. For information about how to create a page link, see "Create
Page Link" on page 25.
8. In the Default Image field, view the image that automatically appears when your website user
accesses the web page, before the website user moves the mouse over or clicks the button.
To select a default image, click the Image button. The Select Image from Image Library screen
appears. For information about how to insert an image, see "Insert Image" on page 24.
9. In the Hover Image field, view the image that appears when your website user moves the mouse
over the button on the navigation bar but does not click the button.
To select a hover image, click the Image button. The Select Image from Image Library screen
appears. For information about how to insert an image, see "Insert Image" on page 24.
10. In the Selected Image field, view the image that appears when your website user clicks the button
on the navigation bar.
To select a selected image, click the Image button. The Select Image from Image Library screen
appears. For information about how to insert an image, see "Insert Image" on page 24.
11. To save the images for your navigation bar and close the Select Image from Image Library screen,
click OK.
To cancel the addition of the images for the navigation bar, click Cancel.
The images you select appear on the Design tab for you to view.
12. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
82
C HAPTER 2
News Reader
The News Reader part type allows the system administrator to display Really Simple Syndication (RSS)
content or Atom content on your website. These are XML-based formats used to distribute web
information. For example, if your organization is health related, you can create a web page for health tips
and include a News Reader part type that includes news headline feeds from other health-related websites.
Using RSS or Atom and the News Reader part, you can include these headlines on your website
automatically.
Blackbaud NetCommunity supports RSS versions 0.9, 1.0, and 2.0 and Atom version .3. Send an email to
Blackbaud NetCommunity Support at bbncsupport@blackbaud.com for more information.
Design News Reader
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for News
Reader.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Feed URL field, enter the website address that contains the XML content to display on your
website. Typically, sites that share this content display an orange XML icon that is a hyperlink to
their website's feed.
4. In the Display only the [ ] most recent articles field, enter the number of recent articles to display
on your News Reader part. For example, to display five articles, enter "5". To display all recent
articles, leave the default "0" in the field.
5. To designate a number of breaks per web page, mark Use paged output, with [ ] articles per
page. In the with [ ] articles field, enter the number of outputs, or breaks, to display on the News
Reader part.
If you do not mark this checkbox, the articles appear on one web page.
6. To display only the article title, mark Display only the headlines in this feed.
7. To include any graphics from the other website feed, mark Display any graphic associated with
this feed.
If you do not mark this checkbox, the complete article appears on the News Reader part.
8. To include the date the feed posts to your website, mark Display the date for each posting, if
available.
9. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
WEBSITE
83
Page Element Types
To add sections to a web page that are dynamic and customizable for an individual's use, create page
element parts. Blackbaud NetCommunity contains multiple page element part types for the end users of
personal pages. These part types are "Chapter Page Element Parts" on page 258 for chapter managers,
"Fundraiser Page Elements Parts" on page 276 for a solicitor or participant for a fundraiser, and "Create
Personal Page Elements" on page 313 for anyone who wants to create a personal page on your site. One
example is someone who is ill and wants to create a care page for family and friends to visit. With web
pages that contain page elements, the pages have customization parts (the page element types) for use on a
personal level.
When someone has a personal page on your site, other people who support or know the individual can visit
the personal page to learn more about his relationship with your organization and make donations. Web
pages with page elements also contain static sections that are other parts in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Use
these sections to create defaults for your organization to appear on every personal page. For example, use
the static parts to include your mission statement, graphics, or any other information to appear on every
personal page.
When you create a page element part, you select the type of page element to appear on a personal page.
The chart lists every page element type and the page element parts in which they are available. For
example, for a Fundraiser or Personal Page Element, you can select a Comments element type. Page
element types create various forms of customizable parts for pages. For information about each page
element type, review the procedure that applies to the type.
Chapter Page
Fundraiser Page
Personal Page
Page Element Type
Element
Element
Element
Action
X
X
X
Comments
X
X
Directory
X
Donor List
X
Event Calendar
X
News
X
X
News Reader
X
X
Page Links
X
Personal Notes
X
Photos
X
X
X
Profile
X
X
Rich Text
X
X
X
Team List
X
Text
X
X
X
Thermometer
X
Design Action for Page Elements
To include a Report Abuse button on a web page for a Chapter Manager, Fundraiser, or Personal Page
Manager part, you can create an Action page element type. Site visitors can click this button to report
activity that is inappropriate for your site. When a visitor clicks this button, your Blackbaud
NetCommunity administrator automatically receives an email notification about the inappropriate
activity.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.

.
84
C HAPTER 2
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appear on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Action".
Note: You can include the Action page element in a Chapter Manager, Fundraiser, or Personal
Page Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the action section on the page.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements, such as to change the text on the Report Abuse button.
CSS is easier to use than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet,
your website uses Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about
CSS, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
6. In the Details frame, depending on the personal page type you create, such as Chapter Page
Element, different selections appear in the Display As field. For more information about this field,
review the chart and steps.
Chapter Page
Fundraiser Page Personal Page
Element
Element
Element
Details frame, Display As
Chapter Console Link Team Page Link
Report Abuse
field
Report Abuse
Report Abuse
7. In the Display As field, if you create the Action page element for a Chapter Manager part, select
"Chapter Console Link". This creates a navigation link for content and data managers to click to
access his Home page on your chapter site. The link appears only for managers contained in a role
with rights to manage the chapter content or data. When you select "Chapter Console Link", a
Link Text field appears. Enter the text to appear as a hyperlink on your chapter site, such as "My
Console Manager". Managers of the site click the link to access the Home page.
If you create the Action page element for a Fundraiser part, select "Team Page Link". This creates
a navigation link to direct the site visitor to the solicitor's team page. When you select this, a Text
field appears on your site for the participant to enter link text for his personal page, such as "Click
here to visit my page". If the solicitor is really a participant and not on a team, the link to the team
page does not appear.
If you create the Action page element for a Personal Page Manager part, select "Report Abuse" to
include a Report Abuse button on the personal web page. Additional fields appear.
a. In the Display Text field, enter the text to appear on the button on your website, such as
"Report Website Offense".
b. In the Email field, enter your Blackbaud NetCommunity administrator's email address. This
address does not appear on your site. However, if a user clicks the Report Abuse button on
your site, your Blackbaud NetCommunity administrator automatically receives an email
notification about the inappropriate activity.
c. In the Confirmation Message field, enter the text to appear for a site user who clicks the
Report Abuse button. The default text is "This page has been reported to the administrator".

.
WEBSITE
85
8. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Comments for Page Elements
To allow page owners to add a comments section to their personal page, create a Comments page
element type. When a personal page has this functionality, friends and family of the personal page's
"owner" can post comments, public or private, to the page.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Comments".
Note: You can include the Comments page element in a Fundraiser or Personal Page Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the comments section on the page.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements, such as to change the text on the Post a Message button.
CSS is easier to use than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet,
your website uses Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about
CSS, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
6. In the Details frame, in the Default Title field, enter a title for your comments box on your
website.
a. To allow visitors to create private comments, mark Allow Private Messages.
b. To include the date a comment is made, mark Show Date.
In the field beside the checkbox, enter a column header name for the date. The default column
name is Date.
c. To allow comments entered to appear on your site, mark Show Message.
In the field beside the checkbox, enter a column header name for the comment. The default
column name is Message.
d. To display the site visitor's name on your site, mark Show Author.
In the field beside the checkbox, enter a column header name for the site visitor name. The
default column name is Author.
e. In the Post Caption field, enter the text to appear on the button site users click to post a
comment, such as "Leave a message for me".
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
86
C HAPTER 2
Design Directory for Page Elements
To allow chapter managers to access directories on chapter pages, use the Directory page element type.
This directory contains a list of the names in the Members role in the Chapter Manager part. For more
information about this role, see "Chapter Management Roles" on page 255.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Directory".
Note: You can include the Directory page element in a Chapter Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the directory section on the page.
5. In the Linked Profile page field, select the page to which the link should go from the list of web
pages. Only pages that contain a Profile Display part appear in the drop-down list.
Note: We recommend you link to a web page that contains a Profile Display part with a Directory
source. For more information about a Profile Display, see "Profile Display" on page 99.
The field you put at the top of the Listing Fields list becomes the link to the page you select in the
Linked Profile Page field.
6. In the Directory Title field, enter a name for the directory.
7. In the No Records Found Message field, enter a message to appear on screen if no records meet
the member's directory search criteria. By default, this message is "No directory entries match
your criteria".
8. To process a search while a user browses your Directory page, mark Auto Search.
The search processes before a user enters criteria and clicks Search on your website.
9. In the Results Per Page field, select the number of names to return on a page when a site user
searches the directory.
10. Right-click and drag fields from the Profile Fields box on the left and drop them in the Search
Form Fields box on the right. You can also select the field and click the right arrow to move it.
Select fields the user can search by, such as First Name or Last Name.

.
WEBSITE
87
Note: The system administrator selects the attributes available under the Constituent Attributes
section on the "System Options" on page 234 page in Administration. On the website,
multiple-value attribute fields, such as Organization type, become drop-down boxes with the
multiple attributes available as selections.
To arrange the order of fields in the list, click the Up and Down buttons.
11. To select which fields appear when the search has found a match, right-click and drag fields from
the Profile Fields box to the Listing Fields box. The field you put first in the list links to the page
you select in the Linked Profile Page field.
For example, you select to list the alumni's last name, first name, birth date, address, and whether
they want to receive email. In this case, the last name is the link. When results appear, the last
name has a line underneath it and changes color when you move your mouse over it to indicate it is
a link. When a website user clicks the last name link, the published profile information for that
directory member appears.
12. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Donor List for Page Elements
To include a list of donors on a participant's personal web page for a Fundraiser part, create a Donor
List page element type. When you include a Donor List on a page, there is no customizable part for the
participant to edit. However, this list allows you to recognize donors on your site.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Donor List".
Note: You can include the Donor List page element in a Fundraiser part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the donor list section on the page.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements, such as colors, fonts and styles, and spacing for your part.
CSS is easier to use than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet,
your website uses Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about
CSS, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
6. In the Details frame, select the order of appearance for the donor names.
a. In the Sort By field, select whether to sort by date or amount or in ascending or descending
order.
b. In the Name Format field, select whether to display the full first and last names or by initial
only.

.
88
C HAPTER 2
c. To display comments the donor enters on the donation page, mark Display Comments.
d. To display the gift donation amount, mark Display Amount.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Event Calendar for Page Elements
To include a calendar on your chapter site, create an Event Calendar page element type. Managers use
the calendar to post event dates and information to a web page.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Event Calendar".
Note: You can include the Event Calendar page element in a Chapter Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the event calendar section on the page.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements, such as a border around an image. CSS is easier to use
than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet, your website uses
Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about CSS, see "Stylesheets"
on page 123.
6. In the Calendar Title field, enter a name for the calendar.
7. To add a weblog to the events calendar, mark RSS Event Publishing. Additional options appear.
a. In the Title field, enter a title for the weblog.
b. In the Link URL field, enter a website address news readers can use to link to the weblog.
Note: If your website has a News Reader part, you can add the website address you enter in the
Link URL field to your news reader so it displays new events when they post. For more
information about the News Reader part, see "News Reader" on page 82.
c. In the Description field, enter a description for news readers about the types of events posted
on the calendar. For example, if your organization supports environmental advocacy, enter
"Upcoming Local and National Events Supporting the Environment".
To view the information you enter in this field, click XML for the weblog. For the above
example, the XML information for your description reads "<description>Upcoming
Local and National Events Supporting the
Environment</description>".

.
WEBSITE
89
d. In the Copyright field, enter a copyright notice for the weblog, if you have one.
e. In the Editor's Email field, enter the email address for the person responsible for the content
of calendar postings.
f. In the Image Properties frame, click Image to add a picture. The Select Image from Image
Library screen appears. For information about how to insert an image, see "Insert Image" on
page 24.
g. In the Link URL field, enter the web address to open when a user clicks the image. The link
can access another page on your site or an outside website.
h. In the Security Rights frame, to assign your website members rights to edit the news weblog
posts, mark Allow members to add, edit, and delete posts. For more information about
roles in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Roles" on page 227.
8. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design News for Page Elements
When you add a News page element type to a personal page, users can include news on their page. For
example, a user who is ill creates a personal page that contains a News page element part. She can
write her own news article about her sickness for the personal page, or she can include links to news
articles from other websites to create awareness about her type of sickness.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "News".
Note: You can include the News page element in a Chapter Manager and Personal Page Manager
part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the news section on the page.
5. In the Details frame, in the Title field, enter a title for your news weblog. This name appears on
the personal page.
a. In the Link URL field, enter the website link that news readers such as NewsGator use to link
to your site. This link should direct the website user to your news weblog or a general
information page about your organization.
b. In the Description field, enter any additional information as required. For example, if your
organization supports environmental advocacy, enter "Check weekly for updates". To view
the information you enter in this field, click XML for the weblog. For this example, the XML
information for your description reads "<description>Check often for weekly
updates</description>".
c. In the Copyright field, enter a copyright notice for the news, if you have one.

.
90
C HAPTER 2
d. In the Editor's Email field, enter your email address or the person who is responsible for the
content of your weblog.
6. In the Image Properties frame, click Image to add a picture. The Select Image from Image
Library screen appears. For information about how to insert an image, see "Insert Image" on
page 24.
7. In the Link URL field, enter a link to another website so you can share valuable information from
that website with your site users.
8. In the Security Rights frame, to assign your website members rights to edit the news weblog
posts, mark Allow members to add, edit, and delete posts. For more information about roles, see
"Roles" on page 227.
9. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design News Reader for Page Elements
With the News Reader page element type, you can display Really Simple Syndication (RSS) content or
Atom content on personal pages. These are XML-based formats used to distribute web information.
For example, if your organization is health related, users can create a personal page for health tips and
include a News Reader part that displays news headline feeds from other health related sites. With RSS
or Atom and the News Reader part, you can include these headlines on personal pages automatically.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "News Reader".
Note: You can include the News Reader page element in a Chapter Manager and Personal Page
Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the news reader section on the page.
5. In the Feed URL field, enter the website address that contains the XML content to appear on your
website. Typically, sites that share this content display an orange XML icon that is a hyperlink to
their website's feed.
Note: Blackbaud NetCommunity supports RSS versions 0.9, 1.0, and 2.0, and Atom version .3.
Send an email to Blackbaud NetCommunity Support at bbncsupport@blackbaud.com for more
information.
6. In the Display only the [ ] most recent articles field, enter the number of recent articles to display
on your news reader. For example, to display five articles, enter "5". To display all recent articles,
leave the default "0" in the field.

.
WEBSITE
91
7. To designate a number of breaks per web page, mark Use paged output, with [ ] articles per
page. In the with [ ] articles field, enter the number of outputs, or breaks, to appear on the news
reader.
If you do not mark this checkbox, the articles display on one web page.
8. To display the article title only, mark Display only the headlines in this feed.
If you do not mark this checkbox, the complete article displays on the news reader.
9. To include any graphics from the other website feed, mark Display any graphic associated with
this feed.
10. To include the date the feed posts to your website, mark Display the date for each posting, if
available.
11. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Page Links for Page Elements
For users who have multiple personal pages, you can add Page Links to a personal page element to
create a list of links to the personal pages that are public.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Page Links".
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the personal page element.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements, such as a border around an image. CSS is easier to use
than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet, your website uses
Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about CSS, see "Stylesheets"
on page 123.
Note: You can include the Page Links page element in a Personal Page Manager part.
6. In the Default Title field, enter a default title for the list of links.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Personal Notes for Page Elements
To display contents from the Notes tab of a constituent record in The Raiser's Edge on your site, create
a Personal Notes page element. This creates a list of notes for a user on a personal page in the Personal
Page Manager part. You select the note types to appear on the page.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.

.
92
C HAPTER 2
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Personal Notes".
Note: You can include the Personal Notes page element in a Personal Page Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the notes section on the page.
5. In the Topics to Include frame, mark the checkbox beside the note topic to include on your web
page.
The Notepad Type table in The Raiser's Edge determines the available note topics. To add or edit
a note topic, do this in The Raiser's Edge.
a. In the Display As column, enter the information to appear for the note topic on the web page.
b. To allow users to create more than one note topic, mark Multiple Submissions Allowed.
If you do not mark this checkbox and the user has multiple note topics of the same type
existing on a constituent record, all notes can appear in note search results.
6. In the Heading frame, in the Default Title field, enter a name for the web page.
7. In the Default Instructions field, enter content to inform the user how to search for a note. Leave
the default instructions, or write your own instructions.
8. In the Listing Options frame, in the No records found message field, enter the message to appear
when a user does not have notes to display. Leave the default text, or write your own text.
To allow users to update their personal notes, mark Allow users to edit/update their own notes.
9. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Photos for Page Elements
To upload graphics for a personal page, create a Photos page element. You can upload graphics for
individual use on a personal page, or you can upload a series of graphics to create a slideshow. Your
organization can upload all the graphics for personal pages and allow a user to select the images she
wants, or you can allow a user to upload an image of her choice. When you create a Photos page
element, you must select a default image to appear on the page. If a user does not upload an image to
the Photos part on her personal page, the default image appears.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.

.
WEBSITE
93
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Photos".
Note: You can include the Photos page element in a Chapter Manager, Fundraiser, and Personal
Page Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the photos section on the page.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements, such as a border around an image. CSS is easier to use
than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet, your website uses
Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about CSS, see "Stylesheets"
on page 123.
6. Upload each image.
a. In the Details frame, click Add Image. The Select from Images screen appears so you can
select and upload the image. For more information about how to insert an image, see "Insert
Image" on page 24.
b. To make the uploaded image the default image, mark Default. The default image appears
when a user does not select one.
Note: You must select one default image for the page.
c. To include a caption with the image, in the Caption frame, mark Display Caption.
In the Default field, enter default text for the caption to appear below the image. To allow the
user to enter the caption text, leave this field blank.
7. In the Image frame, enter the maximum dimensions for an image in your slideshow in the
Maximum Height/Width [ ] px field. This setting defines the height and width of the boundary
that contains the image but does not directly alter the size of the images.
Warning: An image's number of pixels cannot exceed the number you enter in the Maximum
Height/Width [ ] px field. For example, if you have an image that is 200 pixels and set this
boundary to 500 pixels, the image does not increase to 500 pixels. Conversely, if you have an
image that is 500 pixels and set the height/width size to 200, the image shrinks to fit that boundary.
8. In the Slide display interval (seconds) field, enter the number of seconds to display an image
before the next image in the slideshow appears.
Tip: The default time for an image to appear in a slideshow is five seconds.
9. To allow users to upload personal images to your site, in the Image Upload frame, mark Allow
Uploads.

.
94
C HAPTER 2
Note: If a user has rights to upload an image and does so, the default image you select in the
Details frame may be overwritten.
a. In the Image Category field, select an existing category in which to store your image. When
you select a category for the image, you can find it and its associated images easily in Image
Library.
To add a new image category to Blackbaud NetCommunity, enter its name in the add New
Category field. The program saves the image in the new category.
b. In the Maximum File Size field, enter the maximum size, in kilobytes, of an image to store
on your site.
c. In the Maximum Uploads Per User field, enter the maximum number of graphics to appear
in a slideshow on a page.
10. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Profile for Page Elements
To allow personal page owners to create profiles of the individuals who visit their personal pages, add
a Profile page element to a Fundraiser or Personal Page Element part.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Profile".
Note: You can include the Profile page element in a Fundraiser and Personal Page Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the profile section on the page.
5. In the bottom right box, enter the content to appear on the profile. Drag and drop the fields from
the tree view to the right box.
6. To format the email content's appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. For more information
about the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
WEBSITE
95
Design Rich Text for Page Elements
To add a hypertext link, a remote photo hosted on another server, or formatted text to a personal page,
create a Rich Text page element. When you add include the Rich Text page element, remember that it
provides a lot of power to the owner of the page. The program automatically removes IFRAME and
SCRIPT tags from Rich Text page elements, but the potential remains for site abuse. With a Rich Text
page element, page owners can link to or display inappropriate content. However, visitors of the page
cannot edit the page element. When you use the Rich Text page element for remote photos, you can
only link to an existing image URL. You cannot upload images.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Rich Text".
Note: You can include the Rich Text page element in a Chapter Manager, Fundraiser, and Personal
Page Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the rich text section on the page.
Note: Details are not available for the Rich Text page element because it is not editable for visitors
of the personal page.
5. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Team List for Page Elements
To include a list of team members on a participant's personal web page, create a Team List page
element. If the participant is not a member of a team, the list does not appear on your site.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information defaults
automatically to the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar or in the
Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Team List".

.
96
C HAPTER 2
Note: You can include the Team List page element in a Fundraiser part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the team list section on the page.
Tip: When you include a Team List page element on a Fundraiser personal page, there is no
customizable part for the participant to edit. However, you can recognize team members on your
site.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements such as colors, fonts and styles, and spacing for your part.
CSS is easier to use than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet,
your website uses Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about
CSS, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
6. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Text for Page Elements
To allow users to enter general content text on a personal page, create a Text page element.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Text".
Note: You can include the Text page element in a Chapter Manager, Fundraiser, and Personal Page
Manager part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the text section on the page.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements such as colors, fonts and styles, and spacing for your part.
CSS is easier to use than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet,
your website uses Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about
CSS, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
6. In the Details frame, in the Maximum Length field, enter the maximum number of characters for
the customizable text.
7. In the Default box, enter any default text to include in the part, such as a welcome message. The
maximum number of characters count includes the text you enter in this field.
8. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
WEBSITE
97
Design Thermometer for Page Elements
To allow solicitors to include a thermometer graphic on a Fundraiser personal page, create a
Thermometer page element. The thermometer visually shows progress toward the solicitor's goal.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Page
Element.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Display As field, select "Thermometer".
Note: You can include the Thermometer page element in a Fundraiser part.
4. In the Display Name field, enter a name for the thermometer section on the page.
5. In the CSS box, enter Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) text to override the default style of this element.
Use CSS text to create unique elements such as colors, fonts and styles, and spacing for your part.
CSS is easier to use than other methods, such as HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet,
your website uses Blackbaud NetCommunity default stylesheets. For more information about
CSS, see "Stylesheets" on page 123.
6. In the Details frame, in the Default Color field, select a default color for the thermometer.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Personal Notes
To display content from the Notes tab of a constituent record in The Raiser's Edge on your site, create a
Personal Notes part. You can select all note types to appear on the site or select a group of note types to
appear. With this part, a site user can search notes for himself or for other constituents. In addition, a user
can manage his personal notes. Managing notes includes the ability for a user to add, edit, or delete a
personal note on his record. A user cannot make changes to a note for another constituent.
The Personal Notes part can create two pages on your website. The first page is a display page for notes.
This page contains an area to search for notes. The second page, if created, is the manage page, where users
can make changes to personal notes.
If a user changes a personal note, the data downloads to the Notes tab in The Raiser's Edge as a profile
update transaction. For more information about how to download note information, see "User Profile
Updates" on page 345.
Design Personal Notes
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Personal
Notes.

.
98
C HAPTER 2
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, you must first save the part properties. For more information about part
properties, see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Topics to Include frame, mark the checkbox beside the note topic to include on your web
page.
The Notepad Type table in The Raiser's Edge determines the available note topics.To add or edit
a note topic, do this in The Raiser's Edge.
a. In the Display As column, enter the information to appear for the note topic on the web page.
b. To allow users to create more than one note topic, mark Multiple Submissions Allowed.
If you do not mark this checkbox and the user has multiple note topics of the same type
existing on a constituent record, all notes can appear in note search results.
4. In the Display Notes field, to create a web page to search for note information, mark Available.
To mark this page as the default page for personal notes on your website, select Default.
5. In the Heading frame, in the Title field, enter a name for the web page. Remember that this creates
the display page for notes.
a. When both Display Notes and Manage are marked Available on the Edit Part screen, the
Tab caption field appears. In this field, enter the text to appear at the top of the page. Leave
the default text, or write your own text. When the user is on the Manage page, this text
becomes a link. The user clicks the link to access the Display page.
b. In the Instructions field, enter content to instruct the user on how to search for a note. Leave
the default instructions, or write your own instructions.
6. In the Search Options frame, select the note search features.
a. To filter a note topic search, select a query in the Limit to query field. To choose an existing
constituent query from The Raiser's Edge, click Change.
b. In the Split search fields into [ ] columns field, select the number of search field columns to
appear in the criteria table. You can display up to five columns.
c. To process a search while the user browses the web page, mark Load unfiltered results
when this part is loaded. When you mark this checkbox, the search processes before the user
enters criteria and clicks Search on your website.
d. Select the fields the user can use to search notes, such as First Name or Last Name. To select
a field, right-click and drag it from the Profile Fields box to the Search Form Fields box. To
move a field from the Profile Fields box to the Search Form Fields box, you can also select
it and click the right arrow.
Tip: To display only a list of notes on your web page and not note search fields, mark Load
unfiltered results when this part is loaded and do not include fields in the Search Form Fields
box.
The system administrator selects the attributes available under Constituent Attributes in
"System Options" on page 234 in Administration. On the website, multiple-value attribute
fields, such as Organization type, become drop-down boxes with the various attributes
available as selections.

.
WEBSITE
99
To arrange the placement of a field in the Search Form Fields box, select the field and click
the Up or Down button.
7. In the Listing Options frame, in the No records found message field, enter the message to appear
if no records meet the search criteria the user enters in a note search. By default, "No notes match
your criteria" appears.
a. In the Show navigation options field, select where to display the navigation buttons when
the search finds results. You can select "Above the results", "Below the results", or "Both
above and below the results".
b. In the Results per page field, select the maximum number of results to appear on a page
when a site user searches notes. You can display up to 50 results per page.
Search results sort by the date the note was last changed in The Raiser's Edge. To view this
date, select File, Properties on the notepad for the screen. Notes with the same modify date
sort by name. Notes with the same modify date and name sort by note topic.
Warning: Note text formatting in The Raiser's Edge does not convert to the Personal Notes part
on your web page.
c. To allow users to update their personal notes, mark Allow users to edit/update their own
notes in search results.
8. In Manage field, to create a second page for the Personal Notes part so users can manage notes,
mark Available. To mark this page as the default page for personal notes on your website, select
Default.
Note: To manage notes, users must first log into your Blackbaud NetCommunity website. Changes
the user makes do not appear on the website until they are approved on the NetCommunity page in
The Raiser's Edge. If a new user registers for your site, the user cannot manage notes until
The Raiser's Edge processes the sign-up transaction. For more information, see "Sign-Up
Requests" on page 337.
9. In the Heading frame, in the Title field, enter a name for the second personal notes web page.
Remember that this creates the manage page for notes.
a. When both Display Notes and Manage are marked Available on the Edit Part screen, the
Tab caption field appears. In this field, enter the text to appear at the top of the page. Leave
the default text, or write your own text. When the user is on the Display page, this text
becomes a link. The user clicks the link to access the Manage page.
b. In the Instructions field, enter content to instruct the user how to manage the personal notes.
Leave the default instructions, or write your own instructions.
10. In the Listing Options frame, in the No records found message field, enter the message to appear
if no records meet the search criteria the user enters to search notes on the web page. By default,
the message "You have no notes at this time" appears.
11. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Profile Display
To create a read-only user profile that displays biographical, address, and contact information, use the
Profile Display part. You select which fields of information the profile includes.

.
100
C HAPTER 2
Note: For more information about how to create an editable profile display form, see "User Profile Form"
on page 114.
You can use the Profile Display part to display information for only the logged-in user or to link to a
directory so it displays information for any person selected in the directory. For more information about
directories, see "Directory" on page 50.
Warning: You cannot use HTML to embed your own form via HTML in a Profile Display part. Consider
putting the form on a page that is not stored in Blackbaud NetCommunity, but can be referenced in an
IFRAME tag. Contact Blackbaud's Professional Services at solutions@blackbaud.com for more
information about customized forms in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Design Profile Display
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Profile
Display.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Source field, select the profile type to appear when the website user clicks the link.
· "Current User" -- Select this to display the profile for the logged-in user.
· "Directory" -- Select this if this profile part is added to a page linked to a directory. When a
profile is linked to a directory, users can click a field in the directory to display the profile for
the selected person. For more information about directories, see "Directory" on page 50.
4. Select whether to create Profile Design part content for an individual or organization constituent.
Note: You create Profile Design part content for individual and organization constituents
separately.
· To design content to appear for an individual constituent, select the Individuals tab.
· To design content to appear for an organization constituent, select the Organizations tab.
5. To enter and format the profile content's appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. You can add
merge fields for personalized information from The Raiser's Edge to appear. For more information
about the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
6. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
WEBSITE
101
Quick Search
To use the Quick Search part, you must have Microsoft Full-Text Search on your web server. If you do not,
the part does not appear in Blackbaud NetCommunity. This part can search other parts: Formatted Text
and Images, Formatted Text and Images (Secured), Discussion Group, Event Calendar, Job Board, and
Weblogs.
Note: You can select to install Full-Text Search when you install SQL Server. For general information
about Full-Text Search, see your SQL Server documentation. For information about how to implement
Full-Text Search with Blackbaud NetCommunity, see the Blackbaud NetCommunity Installation and
Upgrade Guide.
Learn About Quick Search
The Quick Search part is a text box with a search button that appears on the web page for site users to
search for information. Due to its small size, it is useful to include on a web page template to add search
functionality on pages throughout your site. The search text box has a limit of 255 characters.
Because the part does not have room to display search results, you must select a web page for the results to
appear on. The web page must contain a Search part. This part is large enough to display search results
similar to Google. The first line is a hyperlink to the web page. The next several lines provide a preview of
the text that contains the word or phrase a user searched on. Words or phrases used in the search appear in
bold.
Note: The primary difference between the Quick Search and Search parts is how results appear on your
site. With the Quick Search part, you select a web page for results to appear on. With a Search part, results
appear automatically below the Search part. You can add a Quick Search part to a web page template;
however, we recommend you not add Search parts to a template.
The parts available for a quick search are indexed by part. For example, a Formatted Text and Images part
contains "boy". On the same page, a Discussion Group part contains "scout". If a user enters "boy scout"
in the search field, results do not appear because the same part does not contain both words.
Warning: When the Quick Search part performs a search, the search includes all pages that contain a
searchable part in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Therefore, the potential exists for a user's search results to
return your unfinished web pages. To prevent this, establish security for the unfinished page that grants
only the applicable Blackbaud NetCommunity administration users with edit and view rights.
The Quick Search part uses "stem" search. When a user enter a word in the search field, the search results
include the word plus its plurals and verb tenses. For example, if a user searches for "run", the search
results return parts that contain the words "run", "ran", and "running". The search also accepts certain
operators and wildcards in the search text box. You can use the asterisk, quotation marks, and the minus
sign in the Quick Search part.
Operator
Function
Asterisk (*)
Begins with (For example, enter "donat*" to return results such
as donate, donating, donation.)
Quotation marks (" ")
Whole phrases (For example, "Become a Member Now"
returns results that contain the entire phrase.)
Minus ( - )
All words in search box minus preceding word or words (For
example, "event registration -form" searches for "event" and
"registration", but excludes results that contain "form").

.
102
C HAPTER 2
When a site visitor performs a search with the Quick Search part, role security is upheld. For example, a
web page contains the Formatted Text and Images part with the phrase "Board Member Personal
Addresses". Only users in the Board Member role have access to this page. A user with Donor role rights
searches for "board member + addresses". This page is not returned in the search results because users of
the Donor role cannot access the page. For information about security, see "Security" on page 223.
Design Quick Search
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Quick
Search.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appear on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar or
in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Search Button Caption field, enter the text to appear on your search button, such as "Go".
If you do not enter text for the button in the field, the button does not appear on your site. To
process search results, site users press ENTER on the keyboard after they enter search information
in the text field.
4. To select the web page on which search results appear, click Click here to select a page. The
Select a Page screen appears. Select the option beside the page on which to display search results
and click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen and the web page name appears.
5. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Search
To use a Search part, you must have Microsoft Full-Text Search on your web server. If you do not, the part
does not appear in Blackbaud NetCommunity. This part can search other parts: Formatted Text and
Images, Formatted Text and Images (Secured), Discussion Group, Event Calendar Job Board, and
Weblogs.
Note: You can select to install Full-Text Search when you install SQL Server. For general information
about Full-Text Search, see your SQL Server documentation. For information about how to implement
Full-Text Search with Blackbaud NetCommunity, see the Blackbaud NetCommunity Installation and
Upgrade Guide.
Learn About Search
When you add a Search part to your web page, a field name, text box, and search button appear on the page
for site users to search for information on your website. Results appear below the Search part similar to
Google. The first line is a hyperlink to the web page. The next several lines provide a preview of the text
that contains the word or phrase a user searched on. Words or phrases used in the search appear in bold.

.
WEBSITE
103
Note: The primary difference between the Quick Search and Search parts is how results appear on your
site. With the Quick Search part, you select a web page for results to appear on. With the Search part,
results appear automatically below your Search part. You can add a Quick Search part to a web page
template; however, we recommend you not add a Search part to a template.
The parts available for a search are indexed by part. For example, a Formatted Text and Images part
contains "boy". On the same page, a Discussion Group part contains "scout". If a user enters "boy scout"
in the search field, results do not appear because the same part does not contain both the words.
Warning: Administrator Note: When the Search part performs a search, the search includes all pages that
contain a searchable part in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Therefore, the potential exists for the user's search
results to return your unfinished web pages. To prevent this, establish security for the unfinished page that
grants only the applicable Blackbaud NetCommunity administration users with edit and view rights.
The Search functionality uses "stem" search. When a user enter a word in the search field, the search
results include the word plus its plurals and verb tenses. For example, if a user searches for "run", the
search results return parts that contain the words "run", "ran", and "running". The search also accepts
certain operators and wildcards in the search text box, such as asterisks, quotation marks, and minus signs.
Operator
Function
Asterisk (*)
Begins with (For example, enter "donat*" to return results such
as "donate", "donating", "donation".)
Quotation marks (" ")
Whole phrases (For example, "Become a Member Now"
returns results that contain the entire phrase.)
Minus ( - )
All words in search box, minus preceding word or words (For
example, "event registration -form" searches for "event" and
"registration", but excludes results that contain "form").
When a site visitor performs a search through the Search part, role security is upheld. For example, a web
page contains the Formatted Text and Images part with the phrase "Board Member Personal Addresses".
Only users in the Board Member role can access this page. A user with Donor role rights searches for
"board member + addresses". This page is not returned in the search results because users of the Donor
role cannot access the page. For information about security, see "Security" on page 223.
Design Search
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Search.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Title field, enter a name for your Search part. This title appears on your site.
4. In the Description field, enter additional text to appear for Blackbaud NetCommunity users to
read, such as "Search Job Postings".
5. In the Search Button Caption field, enter the text to appear on your search button, such as "Go".

.
104
C HAPTER 2
If you do not enter text for the button in the field, the button does not appear on your site. To
process search results, site users press ENTER on the keyboard after they enter search information
in the text field.
6. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Slideshow
To include a slideshow presentation of graphics on your website, you can create a Slideshow part. The
slideshow can present graphics in a specified or random order. You can add navigation buttons so website
users can start and stop the slideshow and move forward and backward between pictures. If the image has
an assigned caption, it appears below the image and above the navigation buttons.
Design Slideshow
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Slideshow.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. To display images in the slideshow in random order, mark Random display order.
4. To include buttons below the slideshow, mark Show navigation buttons.
This table includes the navigation buttons available for the Slideshow part.
Button
Function
Play
Pause
Forward
Back
Stop
5. To enter the maximum dimensions for an image in your slideshow, mark Fixed height/width for
all images: [ ] pixels and enter the number of pixels. This setting defines the height and width of
the boundary that contains the image but does not directly alter the size of the images.
An image's number of pixels cannot exceed the number you enter in this field. For example, if you
have an image that is 200 pixels and set this boundary to 500 pixels, the image cannot increase to
500 pixels. Conversely, if you have an image that is 500 pixels and set the height/width size to 200,
the image shrinks to fit that boundary.

.
WEBSITE
105
Note: There is no limit to the number of photos you can include in a slideshow.
6. In the Slide display interval (seconds) field, enter the number of seconds to display an image
before the next image in the slideshow appears. The default amount is five seconds.
7. Click Add Image. The Select Image from Image Library screen appears. For information about
how to insert an image, see "Insert Image" on page 24.
8. To change the order of or remove images in the slideshow, click Move up, Move down, or Delete.
9. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Survey
With the Survey part, you can create surveys to learn more about your website users. You can view a
summary of responses, view response details, clear responses, and refresh the survey results on the Edit
Part screen. These selection appear as buttons after a user submits a response.
You can download survey responses to constituent records in The Raiser's Edge. The Raiser's Edge
downloads only responses from constituents who log into the website. When you click Clear Responses
on a Survey part, an additional transaction appears on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
When you process this transaction, The Raiser's Edge deletes prior responses to the cleared survey from
the constituent records. Survey responses are not visible on constituent records, but you can create
constituent queries in The Raiser's Edge to view or report on survey responses. For more information, see
"Surveys" on page 395.
Warning: After a user submits a response, you cannot edit questions for a survey.
You can add several types of survey questions in multiple formats.
Choice - One Answer (Vertical) -- Select this to ask a question that allows respondents to select an
answer from a vertical list. To allow respondents to enter an answer that is not provided, you can add an
Other selection.
Choice - One Answer (Horizontal) -- Select this to ask a question that allows respondents to select an
answer from a horizontal list.
Choice - One Answer (Dropdown) -- Select this to ask a question that allows respondents to select one
answer from a drop-down list. To allow respondents to enter an answer that is not provided, you can add an
Other selection.
Choice - Multiple Answers (Vertical) -- Select this to ask a question that allows respondents to select
multiple answers from the vertical list. To allow respondents to enter an answer that is not provided, you
can add an Other selection.
Choice - Multiple Answers (Horizontal) -- Select this to ask a question that allows respondents to select
multiple answers from a horizontal list.
Matrix - One Answer Per Row -- Select this to ask a question and arrange possible answers in columns.
The respondent can select one answer per row.
Matrix - Multiple Answers Per Row -- Select this to ask a question with possible answers arranged in
columns. The respondent can select multiple answers per row.
Matrix - Multiple Answers Per Row (Dropdown) -- Select this to ask a question with possible answers
arranged in columns. The respondent can select multiple drop-down answers per row.
Open Ended - One Answer -- Select this to ask a question that allows one text answer no longer than a
single field. You can define the maximum number of characters a respondent can use in his answer.

.
106
C HAPTER 2
Open Ended - Multiple Answers -- Select this to ask a question that allows multiple text answers no
longer than a single field. You can define the maximum number of characters a respondent can use in his
answer.
Open Ended - Essay -- Select this to ask a question that allows a text answer longer than a single field.
You can define the maximum number of characters a respondent can use in his answer.
Open Ended - Constant Sum -- Select this to ask a question that requires a numerical answer. You can
define an amount all answers must total.
Open Ended - Date -- Select this to ask a question that requires a date as an answer. The respondent can
enter the date in the field or click the calendar button to select the date.
Presentation - Text -- Select this to add text to the survey, such as a message to thank the respondent for
taking the survey.
Presentation - Image -- Select this to add an image with text to the survey. The text can describe the
image, or you can leave the text box blank and add questions that refer back to the image.
Presentation - Page Break -- Select this to add a page break between survey questions.
Design Survey
1. From the Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Survey.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Title field, enter a name to appear on your web page for your survey.
4. In the Subtitle field, enter additional text about the survey for website users to read.
5. In the Submit Button Text, Next Button Text, and Previous Button Text fields, enter the text to
appear for these navigation buttons. You can use the default values or enter different text for each
button.
6. In the On Submit Message box, enter a message that appears when the user clicks Submit.
7. To add a Show Survey Results button after the user submits his response, mark Allow
respondents to view survey results.
8. In the Survey is frame, select the survey's current status.
· In Test Mode -- Select this to test the survey. The program does not record survey responses
entered during test mode.
· Open -- Select this to allow respondents to take the survey.
· Closed -- Select this to close the survey. If you mark Allow respondents to view survey
results, a Show Survey Results button appears instead of questions.
In the Survey Closed Message box, enter a message to appear to notify users when the survey
is closed.
9. To add a question, click New Question. The Add Survey Question screen appears.

.
WEBSITE
107
Note: When you select a question type, a sample appears in the Sample frame.
10. In the Question frame, in the Type field, select the type of question to add. The options that
appear in the Question and Answers frames depend on the selected question type. For more
information about question types, see "Survey" on page 105.
11. In the Question field, enter the question to ask.
12. To not have the program automatically number the survey questions, mark Skip Auto
Numbering.
13. To require respondents to answer the question before they can submit the survey or move to the
next page of a multi-page survey, mark Answer Required.
14. In the Answers frame, enter possible answers on separate lines. Enter the first answer choice in the
box and press ENTER on your keyboard. On the second line, enter the second answer choice and
press ENTER. Continue until you have entered all possible answers.
15. To display answers in random order, mark Display in random order.
16. If you select an open-ended question type, in the Limit Answers to [ ] characters field, enter the
maximum number of characters a respondent can enter in his answer.
17. If you select a choice question type, Other appears. To add Other as an answer choice with a text
field for respondents to enter their response, mark this checkbox and, in the Limit Answers to [ ]
characters field, enter the maximum number of characters a respondent can enter in his answer.
18. If you select a matrix question type, the Answer Columns frame appears. Enter answer column
names on separate lines.
19. To display columns in random order, mark Display in random order.
20. If you select a "Matrix - Multiple Answers per Row (Dropdown)" question type, in the Number of
Dropdowns field, select the number of columns to appear. In the Heading fields, enter a heading
for each column. In the Choices box, enter answer choices for each column on separate lines.
21. If you select a "Presentation - Text" question type, in the Text box, enter the text to appear.
22. If you select a "Presentation - Image" question type, in the Question box, enter the text to appear.
To insert an image, click Add Image. The Select Image from Image Library screen appears. For
information about how to insert an image, see "Insert Image" on page 24.
23. Click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen and the new question appears at the bottom of the
screen.
24. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Targeted Content
With the Targeted Content part, you can display specific information on a web page, depending on who
reads it. User roles define who sees the part. For example, you want your Major Donors to see a donation
form designed specifically for them, but you want all other members to see the standard donation form.
Create a targeted content piece and put it on your Donations page. When a major donor logs into the site
and accesses the Donations page, he sees the information designed for him. When a regular member logs
into the site and selects Donations, he sees the standard donation form. However, the regular member still
sees a complete page, with no missing information.
Design Targeted Content
1. From the Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.

.
108
C HAPTER 2
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Targeted
Content.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Primary Part frame, select a part to appear on the web page for a targeted audience. For
example, you want only major donors to see specific information.
a. Click Select a Part. The Select a Part screen appears.
b. Select the part to appear for the targeted audience, such as "Major Donor Donation Form".
c. Click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen. The Targeted Roles field in the Primary Part
frame displays the roles associated with the selected part. The roles determine who sees the
targeted content when they log into the website and access the web page that includes the
targeted content part.
For example, the Major Donor Donation Form you selected has view rights set for the 10,000
Club user role. When members of this role log into the website and access the Donations
page, they see a form designed specifically for them that other user roles do not see. Major
donors do not know other members see a different page.
4. In the Default Part frame, select a part to appear for all other users who access this page.
a. Click Select a Part. The Select a Part screen appears.
b. Select the part to appear for users who are not the target audience, such as "Standard
Donation Form".
c. Click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen. Roles that have view rights set on the Standard
Donation Form see the standard form when they log into the website and access the
Donations page. Regular members do not know that major donors see a different form.
For more information about Roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
5. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
User Education Profile Form
With the User Education Profile Form part, you can create profile forms for users to update their education
information online. You select the fields of information that appear on the display and update forms. The
user can specify which items of profile information are public, which all users can view; or private, which
only the user can view. We recommend you use the User Education Profile part on password-protected
pages only.
Note: You can update the database for The Raiser's Edge with changes users make on the update form.
Design User Education Profile Form
1. From the Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.

.
WEBSITE
109
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for User
Education Profile Form.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Primary Alumni frame, specify whether users can edit or delete their primary alumni
education records.
· To allow users to edit their primary alumni education records, mark Allow users to edit the
Primary Alumni Education record.
· To allow users to delete their primary alumni education records, mark Allow users to delete the
Primary Alumni Education record.
4. To allow users to add new non-primary alumni education records, mark Allow users to add new
education records.
5. To allow users to delete their non-primary alumni education records, mark Allow users to delete
existing education records.
6. In the Message to display when there are no education records box, enter the text to appear on
the form when the user has no education record.
7. In the Education record field options frame, set up the Education and Education Attributes
sections of the User Education Profile form.
a. In the Section field, select the section type to set up. Select "Education" or "Education
Attributes".
b. In the Heading field, enter the text to appear at the top of the section. For example, for the
Education section, enter "My Education".
c. In the Fields grid, select the fields to include in the section and other options.
Option
Function
Show in grid
Mark the checkbox next to each field to include in the profile display
grid.
Show in Edit/Details Form
Mark the checkbox next to each field to include on the update form.
Field
This column displays the fields from The Raiser's Edge you can
include in the section.
Editable
To allow the user to edit a field, mark this checkbox. If you do not
mark this checkbox, the field appears in the profile, but the user cannot
change its value.
Required
To make a field required, mark this checkbox. If you mark this
checkbox, the user must select or enter a value for the field to complete
the form.
Privacy Editable
To allow users to hide a field on the profile display grid, mark this
checkbox. For example, if you mark this checkbox for GPA, users can
select whether to display their GPA on the profile.
Use Code Table
If a field has code table values, this checkbox appears. If you mark this
checkbox, the field on the form displays the code table values from
The Raiser's Edge. If you do not mark this checkbox, the user must
enter a value in the field.

.
110
C HAPTER 2
Option
Function
Editable Codes
If a field has code table values, this checkbox appears. To allow users
to enter values other than a code table value, mark this checkbox. On
the form, an Other field appears next to the field so users can enter a
value other than those provided.
Alternate Caption
To edit a field name, enter a new name in this column. For example,
you may want to call the Frat/Sorority field Fraternity/Sorority.
8. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
User Email Preferences Form
With the User Email Preferences Form, website users can easily subscribe or unsubscribe from email lists
or select to receive no email. Web pages created with the User Email Preferences Form enable
nonmembers and members who are not logged in to click a link and update their subscription preferences.
The User Email Preferences Form appears for users who access it from a link in an email, regardless of
whether they are members or log into the site. However, if a user accesses the form from the website, it
appears only if he is a logged-in member.
Warning: In each email you send, you must include a link to the page of your website that contains this
form. For more information, see "Email" on page 163.
When a website user marks the opt-out checkbox on this form, The Raiser's Edge marks Requests no
email on his constituent record when it processes the user profile update. If, on a subscription page, a
website user selects to receive two email subscriptions but not the other three subscriptions available on the
page, he "opts out" of the other three subscriptions. This applies only to subscriptions presented together in
the same content part on a web page.
To have at least one web page where users can subscribe or unsubscribe from email lists, you must allow
the Everyone user role edit and read security rights for at least one User Email Preferences Form you
create. You can also create other User Email Preferences Form parts that do not have Everyone security set
and require a login, but you must set at least one part for everyone.
Email lists with Subscription marked determine the email lists that appear for selection when you create
the form. When you generate email using a subscription list, users who marked User Email Preferences
Form to subscribe receive the email, in addition to the designated email list.
Note: Subscriptions are a special type of email list targeted to recipients derived from Raiser's Edge
queries. Blackbaud NetCommunity sends subscription email to all constituents on the assigned lists, plus
additional subscribers and minus explicit unsubscribers and users with Requests No Email marked in their
user profile. The program does not duplicate messages for users who are both on a list and a subscriber or
for multiple users with the same email address.
Design User Email Preferences Form
1. From the Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for User
Email Preferences Form.

.
WEBSITE
111
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Title field, enter a name for the email preference.
4. To select which page appears for website users after they update their subscription information, in
the After update navigate to field, click Click here to select a page. The Select a Page screen
appears.
Select the option beside the page and click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen. If you do not
select a page, the page selected as the Home Page in System Options appears for the website user.
5. In the Titles frame, enter the text to appear on your website in the title bar of your opt out section
for chapter email, regular email, and notification email. For example, for the opt out section for
chapter email, enter "Chapter List Subscriptions".
·In the Chapter Email List Title field, enter the text to appear for chapter email.
·In the Email List Title field, enter the text to appear for regular email.
The program automatically configures email lists under the opt out section. Blackbaud
NetCommunity groups "Chapter Manager part name - Chapter name List" for the email list. For
example, "Alumni Chapter Manager - San Diego List" is the Chapter Manager part named
(Alumni Chapter Manager) - Chapter name (San Diego) List.

.
112
C HAPTER 2
·In the Notifications Title field, enter the text to appear for Team Fundraising notification email.
For more information about notification email, see "Notifications" on page 216.
6. In the Opt-Out frame, customize the instructions that appear for the opt out section of the User
Email Preferences form. In the Opt-Out Instructions field, enter the text to appear for the
Opt-Out checkbox on the website, such as "To no longer receive email from us, mark the
checkbox."
For verification purposes, if a user selects to opt out of an email list, the user is asked to enter his
or her email address. If the email address is not registered with Blackbaud NetCommunity, the user
cannot opt out of the email list.
7. In the Subscriptions frame, customize the instructions that appear for the subscriptions section of
the User Email Preferences form. In the Subscribing Instructions field, enter the text to appear
for the subscription checkboxes for the multiple email lists on the website.
8. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
User Login
To control the areas users can access on your website, you can create a User Login part. When a user logs
in, the user login determines which roles the user belongs to and which features the user has security rights
to access. You can create separate login parts for any subsites you create. For example, you may have a
subsite for chapters or schools. The Fundraiser part has its own user login. For more information about
how to create the user login for a Fundraiser, see "Step 6: User Login Form" on page 291.
You can add forms to the user login for new user registrations, forgotten passwords, and forgotten user
IDs. You can also create email that users receive to acknowledge their registration or that contain their
forgotten password or user ID.
Multiple users can use the same email address when they sign up for your site. This makes it easy for an
entire family to sign up for a fundraiser or other event. If a family shares an email address and one user
forgets his password or user name, the reminder email sent to the shared address contains all user names
associated with the email address separated by semicolons, with passwords masked with asterisks.
Design User Login
1. From the Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for User
Login.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Helplets frame, enter custom text to appear on the Login, New User Registration, or
Forgotten Password/User ID forms to help website users understand how to use these forms.
a. In the Screen field, select the form to create help text for. Select "Login", "New User
Registration", or "Forgotten Password or User ID".
b. In the box, enter the text to appear on the form. To format the content's appearance and
layout, use the HTML editor. For more information about the HTML editor, see "HTML
Editor" on page 6.

.
WEBSITE
113
c. Once you create help text for the first form, in the Screen field, select another form type. The
program automatically saves changes for the first form, and an asterisk appears next to the
form name to indicate it has saved help content.
4. In the Captions and Properties frame, enter a title for the user login form and text for the
hyperlink that directs users to the login form. To include forms for new registrations, forgotten
passwords, and forgotten user IDs, enter a title in the Form Title field and a name in the
Hyperlink field, and mark Enabled.
We recommend you disable new registrations only if you import records from other Blackbaud
programs into Blackbaud NetCommunity. Imported users are registered automatically, so they do
not need to register a second time with the User Login part.
Note: Once you create a login page with the User Login part, select it in the Member Login Page
field in the Registration and Login Options frame of System Options. For more information, see
"System Options" on page 234.
5. In the Constituent Code field, select the constituent code to assign to users who use this form on
your website. For more information about how to select constituent codes in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
6. In the Navigation frame, select the web page that appears for users after they log in, log out, or
register.
· By default, the Login, Logout, and New User Registration forms are set to Sample Default Page.
This is the page selected as the Home Page in System Options.
· To change the web page selected for a form, click Change for that form. The Select a Page
screen appears where you choose a different page.
· To remove the web page selected for a form, click Remove for that form. The page is removed
and Click here to select a page appears. If you do not select a page, users are directed to the
page selected for the login form.
7. In the Additional Fields frame, select the biographical information fields to include on the new
user registration form.
a. In the Fields grid, mark the checkbox in the Include column for each field to appear on the
form. To make the fields required, mark the checkbox in the Required column. If the
checkbox in the Include column is marked, the Address block and Gender fields are
automatically required.
b. To include attribute fields on your registration form, mark the checkbox in the Include
column for each attribute field to appear on the form. To make the attributes required, mark
the checkbox in the Required column.
The Raiser's Edge provides these are constituent attributes. To add new attribute for your
part, create it in The Raiser's Edge. For example, you can use a constituent attribute to track
t-shirt sizes for participants. To track this information, create a t-shirt size attribute. If you
know an attribute exists in The Raiser's Edge, but do not see it, check System Options to
verify the attribute is available in Blackbaud NetCommunity
8. In the Role Assignment frame, mark the checkbox in the Member column for each role to assign
to users who sign up through this User Login part.
9. To create a reminder email to send to members who click Forgotten Password/User ID, click
Forgotten Password/User ID Email on the action bar. The Forgotten Password/User ID Email
screen appears. Use the merge fields to include the password, reminder phrase, and/or the user ID.

.
114
C HAPTER 2
10. To create an email to send to new users after they register, click New User Registration Email on
the action bar. The New User Registration Email screen appears. Use the merge fields to include
the password, reminder phrase, and/or user ID.
For information about how to create an email, see "Design an email message" on page 178.
11. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
User Profile Form
The User Profile Form is a simple way to generate a form to capture the biographical information
necessary for your website's user profile page. You can download the information the user enters to The
Raiser's Edge so you can maintain current information and solicit the user for a donation.
For example, Jane Compton is a member of the Class of 1988 and she visits your website for the first time.
As part of this first-time process, she navigates to the user profile page and enters the information you
selected to appear on the User Profile Form part, such as her full name, current address, and spouse
information. You can download the information she enters on your website directly to The Raiser's Edge.
When you design a Directory part, you can link it to another page. If the linked page contains a User
Profile Form part, the user can click a field in the directory listing to view the profile for the selected
person. When a profile form is linked to a directory, users can edit their own profile but not those for
relations. For more information about the Directory part, see "Directory" on page 50.
Design User Profile Form
1. From the Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for User
Profile Form.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the After update navigate to field in the Profile Edit Form Design frame, select the web page
that appears for a website user after she submits her profile information. To select the web page,
click Click here to select a page. The Select a Page screen appears. Select a page and click OK.
You return to the Edit Part screen.
If you do not select a page, the user returns to the profile form after she submits profile
information.
4. Add each section to the user profile form as required.
a. In the Section field, select the section to add. Select "Bio", "Preferred Address", "Business",
"Phones and Email", "Spouse", "Constituent Attributes", "Primary Alumni", "Education
Attributes", or "User Login".

.
WEBSITE
115
Note: For constituent attributes to have multiple table entries on the profile form on your website,
they must be accessible from The Raiser's Edge. On the navigation bar, click Administration,
System Options. In the Attributes frame, mark the checkbox for the constituent attribute to
include in Blackbaud NetCommunity. For more information, see "System Options" on page 234.
b. In the Heading field, enter the text to appear at the top of the section. For example, for the
Bio section, enter "Personal Information".
To specify the order of sections, add a number to the beginning of each section heading. For
example, if you select "Preferred Address" in the Section field and enter "2. Preferred
Address" in the Heading field, the Preferred Address section appears second in the profile.
c. In the Fields grid, select the fields to include in the section and select options about the
selected fields.
Option
Function
Show in grid
Mark the checkbox next to each field to include in the user profile
display grid.
Show in Edit/Details Form
Mark the checkbox next to each field to include on the update form.
Field
This column displays the fields from The Raiser's Edge you can
include in the section.
Editable
To allow the user to edit a field, mark this checkbox. If you do not
mark this checkbox, the field appears in the profile but the user cannot
change its value.
Required
To make a field required, mark this checkbox. If you mark this
checkbox, the user must select or enter a value for the field to complete
the form.
Privacy Editable
To allow users to hide a field, mark this checkbox. For example, if you
mark this checkbox for the Birth date field, users can select whether
their birth date appears on the profile.
Use Code Table
If a field has code table values, this checkbox appears. If you mark this
checkbox, the field on the form displays the code table values from
The Raiser's Edge. If you do not mark this checkbox, the user must
enter a value in the field.
Editable Codes
If a field has code table values, this checkbox appears. To enable the
user to enter a value other than a code table value, mark this checkbox.
On the form, an Other field appears next to the field so users can enter
a value other than those provided.
Alternate Caption
To edit a field name, enter a new name in this column. For example,
you may want to call the Birth date field the Birth date
(mm/dd/yyyy) field.
5. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Volunteer Opportunity
If you use Volunteer Management for The Raiser's Edge, you can create a Volunteer Opportunity part to
show a list of jobs on your website. A website user can learn about the volunteer jobs, sign up for a job
position, and enter data that is relevant to the position. For example, the volunteer can provide emergency
contact information, special skills and needs, and medical needs.

.
116
C HAPTER 2
Note: For more information about volunteers and jobs in The Raiser's Edge, see the Records section in the
Raiser's Edge help file.
The Volunteer Opportunity part creates multiple volunteer pages. The first page, the job list page, contains
a list of volunteer jobs at your organization. The second page, the job details page, appears after a user
selects a job on the job list page. The job details page displays information about the selected job, such as
its description, start date, and position. The third page is the volunteer sign-up form. This page appears
after the user clicks the sign-up button on the job details page. The user completes this form to submit to
your organization.
Volunteer transactions appear on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. When The Raiser's Edge
processes a volunteer transaction, the data appears on the Volunteer tab on the user's constituent record
and a job assignment for the user appears on the job record. For more information, see "Volunteer
Requests" on page 371.
Design Volunteer Opportunity
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Volunteer Opportunity.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Constituent Code field, select a constituent code to add for volunteers in your database in
The Raiser's Edge. For more information about how to select constituent codes in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
4. In the Volunteer Type field, select a volunteer type to assign to the user, such as Coordinator or
Gift Shop Staff. A volunteer type denotes the capacity in which a volunteer serves your
organization. The Raiser's Edge determines the volunteer types available in this field.
5. In the Job List frame, in the Title field, enter the title for the job list. Leave the default part name,
or enter your own title, such as "Outside Volunteer Jobs". This title appears at the top of the first
volunteer web page.
Note: The Job List frame creates the first volunteer page.
a. In the Instructions field, enter content to instruct the user on how to use the job list page.
Leave the default instructions, or enter your own.
b. To select a job query from The Raiser's Edge that contain the jobs to appear in the job list for
this part, click Change. The Query Search screen appears. For information about how to use
the Search screen, see "Search Screen" on page 24.

.
WEBSITE
117
Tip: For a query to appear as a selection, you must first create it in The Raiser's Edge. When you
create a new query, you may need to refresh Blackbaud NetCommunity for it to appear as a
selection. To refresh, select View, Refresh from the menu bar.
c. In the box under the Jobs to Include field, enter the text to appear on the page if the query
does not return job results, such as "There are no volunteer jobs at this time. Please check
back next month". Leave the default message, or enter your own.
d. Under Specify how you'd like the list to appear, specify how job results appear on the page.
Select the number of jobs to appear per page, whether page links for the job appear above or
below the results (or both), whether the job start and end dates appear, whether users can
search the list, and whether to use the field names from The Raiser's Edge.
In the box under Allow this list to be displayed, enter the text to appear if no jobs match the
user's job search, such as "Please search our volunteer jobs again! Your criteria did not return
any jobs." Leave the default message, or enter your own.
6. In the Job Detail frame, in the Instructions field, enter content to instruct the user on how to use
the job details page. These instructions appear at the top of the page after a user selects a job on the
job list page. Leave the default instructions, or enter your own.
Note: The Job Detail frame creates the second volunteer page.
a. In the Button Text field, enter the text to appear on the button that creates the sign-up form
for the job the user selects. You can leave the default text or write your own button text.
b. To display the field names as they appear in The Raiser's Edge, mark Use field names from
The Raiser's Edge.
c. In the Display column, mark the checkbox beside the volunteer attribute to appear. To change
the text of the attribute on your donation page, enter the text in the Caption field.
7. In the Volunteer Sign-Up Form frame, in the Instructions field, enter content to instruct the user
on how to use the sign-up page. These instructions appear at the top of the page after the user
clicks the sign-up button on the job detail page.
If the Minimum age field on the job record in The Raiser's Edge contains an age, a required Date
of Birth field appears after the instructions.
Note: The Volunteer Sign-Up Form frame creates the third volunteer page.
In the Button Text field, enter the text to appear on the sign-up button. This button submits the
sign-up form to your organization. You can leave the default text or write your own button text.
Tip: To sign up for a job, the user must be registered to your website.
8. To store volunteer emergency contact information in The Raiser's Edge, mark Emergency
Contact Information. To make this a required field on the sign-up form, mark Require
emergency contact name and phone number.
9. To display a Vehicle section on the sign-up page, mark Vehicle Information.

.
118
C HAPTER 2
In the Available Checkbox Caption field, enter text to appear beside the vehicle checkbox on the
sign-up page. Leave the default text, or enter your own. On the sign-up page, a Vehicle Type field
appears with this checkbox. The Volunteer Vehicle Type table in The Raiser's Edge determines
the selections in this field.
10. To include an additional information section on the sign-up page, mark Additional Information.
a. In the Section Title field, enter the text to appear at the top of the additional information
section. Leave the default title, or enter your own.
b. In the Instructions field, enter content to instruct the user on how to use the additional
information section. Leave the default instructions, or enter your own.
11. The job record in The Raiser's Edge for the selected job determines the remaining sections
available to add to the sign-up page. For example, you can create sections for skills and
experience, courses and training, medical information, special needs, interests, or checklist items.
To add a section to the sign-up page, mark its checkbox and, in the Section Title and Instructions
fields, enter the information to appear for the section.
12. In the Navigation frame, select the web page to appear after users submit a volunteer sign-up
request. Click Click here to select a page. The Select a Page screen appears so you can select a
page and click OK. You return to the Edit Part screen.
If you do not select a page, the page selected as the home page in System Options appears.
13. Click Next. The Acknowledgement Email screen appears.
14. Create an acknowledgement email for website users who use the volunteer opportunity form to
submit a volunteer sign-up request. For information about how to design a volunteer
acknowledgement email, see "Design an acknowledgement email for a transaction" on page 201.
Tip: When you edit a Volunteer Opportunity part, you can click Acknowledgement Email on the
action bar to access the Acknowledgement Email screen. For information about how to design an
email to acknowledge a volunteer sign-up request, see "Design an acknowledgement email for a
transaction" on page 201.
15. To save the email, click Save and Close. You return to the Edit Part screen.
16. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Weblog
With the Weblog part, you can collect or share information on your website that pertains to your
organization. This can range from your organization's news to appeals sent to your alumni to links to other
related websites. Given the appropriate security rights, your Blackbaud NetCommunity users and website
users can update the Weblog part.
Design Weblog
1. From the Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Weblog.

.
WEBSITE
119
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this information, click Properties on
the toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the RSS Publishing Properties frame, in the Title field, enter the title of your weblog, such as
"Best Solicitation Practices for Fundraising".
Note: The Title field is optional. However, to save a weblog, you must either enter a title or enter
description information in the Description field.
a. In the Link URL field, enter your website link that news readers such as NewsGator use to
link to your site. This link should direct the website user to your weblog or a general
information page about your organization.
b. In the Description field, enter any additional information, such as "Check weekly for
updates".
To view the information you enter in this field, click XML for the weblog on your site. For
the example, the XML information for your description reads "<description>Check
often for weekly updates</description>". In addition, news readers use the
weblog description information to provide general information about the contents of the
weblog. For more information about the News Reader part in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see
"News Reader" on page 82.
c. In the Copyright field, enter a copyright notice for your weblog, if you have one.
d. In the Editor's Email field, enter your email address or the person who is responsible for the
content of your weblog.
e. To approve weblog posts before they appear on your site, mark Moderated.
4. In the Image Properties frame, click Image beside the Selected Image box. The Select Image
from Image Library screen appears. For information about how to insert an image, see "Insert
Image" on page 24.
5. To share valuable information from another website with your site users, in the Link URL field,
enter the address of the website to link to the weblog.
6. In the Security Rights frame, specify which roles have post and manage rights for the weblog.
a. In the Can Post column, mark the checkbox for each role allowed to post to the weblog.
These roles cannot edit or delete postings. To automatically assign posting rights to all roles,
mark Can Post at the top of the column.
b. In the Can Manage column, mark the checkbox for each role allowed to add, edit, and delete
weblog postings. These roles can approve postings if the list is marked Moderated. To
automatically assign management rights to all roles, mark Can Manage at the top of the
column.
For more information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
120
C HAPTER 2
Web Traffic Reports
Using the Report (Web Traffic) part, you can create reports with statistics about your website's traffic.
Warning: To create a Web Traffic report, you must run Microsoft SQL Server Agent. If you are unsure
whether you run this program, consult your system administrator.
You can add several types of Web Traffic reports:
Site Usage Report -- The Site Usage Report displays the total number of hits each page on your website
received and the percentage of total hits compared to other pages on your site. Web pages are hyperlinked
so you can open them directly from the report.
Page Rank Report -- The Page Rank Report is a small bar graph that displays the number of hits a page
received and its overall rank compared to other pages on your website. You can place this graph on any
page. We recommend you give view rights in Part Security only to those who need to see the statistics.
Page View Summary -- The Page View Summary displays the total number of page views, the average
number of page views, and the average number of page views per visit for all pages in the website. Website
users can filter the report results by date range and group the results displayed in the bar graph by day,
week, or month.
Page Overview Report -- The Page Overview Report displays the total number of page visits and views
for each page viewed. It also includes a bar graph that displays the total number of page visits and views
for each page ID. You can filter the report so it includes only pages with the top 10 number of views or
visitors, the bottom 10 number of views or visitors, or all pages that had views or visitors. Web pages are
hyperlinked so you can open them directly from the report.
Visit Summary -- The Visit Summary displays statistics for website visits during the specified period of
time. The summary includes the total number of visits and average number of visits per day. It also
includes the total length of time visitors spent on the website and the average visit length per visitor. To
calculate the average visit length, the program divides the total length of time of all the visits by the total
number of sessions (individual visits).
Visitor Summary -- The Visitor Summary displays statistics including the total number of website
visitors, the number of unique visitors, the number of one-time visitors, the number of repeat visitors, and
the average number of visits per visitor. The summary also includes the total number of Blackbaud
NetCommunity visitors and the number of unique Blackbaud NetCommunity visitors. Website users can
filter the report results by date range.
This table explains the items included in Web Traffic reports.
Hits
Number of times a page was accessed
Views
Number of times visitors viewed a page
Visits
Number of times users logged into the website
Unique visitors
Number of logged-in users and anonymous visitors (those not logged into the
website) who visited the website
Return Visitors
Number of unique users who visited the website more than once while logged in.
(This excludes return visits by those not logged in.)
Only Visited once
Number of logged-in users and anonymous visitors (those not logged into the
website) who visited the website only once
Design Web Traffic Reports
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Report
(Web Traffic).

.
WEBSITE
121
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information
automatically appears on the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar
or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
If you create a new part, first save the part properties. For more information about part properties,
see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Report Type field, select the type of report to create. Select Site Usage, Page Rank, Page
View Summary, Page Overview, Visit Summary, or Visitor Summary.
To view a pop-up preview of the report, click on the report type. For more information about report
types, see the introduction to "Web Traffic Reports" on page 120.
4. In the Report Title field, select the report title to use.
· To use the report name as the title, select Default.
· To use a custom title, select Other and enter the report title in the field.
5. To display the name of the report above the report, mark Show Report Title.
6. To save the report, click Save and Close. You return to the Report (Web Traffic) design screen.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Layouts
The layout for your template is crucial for your web page. Layout is the design and placement of important
elements for your web page. This includes where you place parts, graphics, and navigation buttons. Web
page layouts can look similar, such as a Programs page and a Projects page, or they can look different, such
as a Login page and a Volunteers page. Make sure you know your audience when you select the elements
for your new layout. It is important to understand what an audience expects and wants from a web page.
The layout of a web page is vital to its success.
When you design a new page layout, a key element is to include similar characteristics from the rest of
your website, so the end result -- the new web page -- is recognizable as one of your organization's
pages. For example, make sure you include buttons, links, images, fonts, and colors that are consistent with
the rest of your website. You can use Cascading Stylesheets (CSS) information to make most of these
customizations for the layout in Stylesheets. For more information about stylesheets, see "Stylesheets" on
page 123.
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a select
number of users for Layouts. We recommend general users not access layouts. Any change can affect
multiple web pages. We strongly encourage only users knowledgeable in all areas of website design and
Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in Layouts.
Create a layout
1. From Web Site, click Layouts. The Layouts screen appears.
2. Click New Layout. The New Layout screen appears.
3. In the Layout Name field, enter a name for your layout, such as "Login". This name helps
Blackbaud NetCommunity users quickly identify the file in Layouts. This name is for internal use
and does not appear on your website.

.
122
C HAPTER 2
4. In the Description field, enter any additional information about the layout, such as "Use for
President's page and Profiles page".
Note: After you save the template, a Templates/Pages using this layout box appears. The
information in the box is a graphic display of your templates and pages that use the layout. If the
layout is not in use, "This layout is not being used" appears.
5. In the Stylesheet field, select the style to use for this layout. For example, to use the Blackbaud
NetCommunity stylesheet, select "System Default". For more information about stylesheets, see
"Stylesheets" on page 123.
6. In the DOCTYPE field, select whether to use XHTML 1.0 Transitional (DOCTYPE) code for the
pages and templates on your website that use this layout.
7. To save your layout, click Next. The Layout Designer screen appears. For information about the
Layout Designer screen, see "Design a layout" on page 122.
Edit layout properties
To search for an existing layout, use the search tools in Blackbaud NetCommunity. For example, at the
top of the Layouts screen, to search for a layout, enter a partial name in the Name field. At the bottom
of the Layouts screen, select the number of layouts on the screen in the Results Per Page field. If you
know the page number in Layouts where your information is stored, select it in the Page field.
1. From Web Site, click Layouts. The Layouts screen appears.
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a
select number of users for Layouts. We recommend general users not access layouts. Any change
can affect multiple web pages. We strongly recommend only users knowledgeable in all areas of
website design and Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in Layouts.
2. For the layout to edit, click Properties in the Actions column. The Layout Properties screen
appears.
3. In the Layout Name, Description, and Stylesheet fields, make the changes as required.
4. In the DOCTYPE field, select whether to use XHTML 1.0 Transitional (DOCTYPE) code for the
pages and templates on your website that use this layout.
5. In the Templates/Pages using this layout box, view the templates and web pages linked to the
layout. The box is for informational purposes only.
6. To save your changes, click Save and Close. You return to Layouts. For information about how to
edit the Layout Designer screen, see "Design a layout" on page 122.
Design a layout
To search for an existing layout, use the search tools in Blackbaud NetCommunity. For example, at the
top of the Layouts screen, to search for a layout, enter a partial name in the Name field. At the bottom
of the Layouts screen, select the number of layouts on the screen in the Results Per Page field. If you
know the page number in Layouts where your information is stored, select it in the Page field.
1. From Web Site, click Layouts. The Layouts screen appears.

.
WEBSITE
123
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a
select number of users for Layouts. We recommend general users not access layouts. Any change
can affect multiple web pages. We strongly recommend only users knowledgeable in all areas of
website design and Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in Layouts.
2. To edit a layout, click Edit in the Actions column. The Layout Designer screen appears.
If you create a new layout, first save the layout properties. For more information about layout
properties, see "Create a layout" on page 121.
3. To add existing content from Parts, click Insert Content Placeholder on the toolbar. A yellow
Content box appears as a placeholder for a part type. You create the part type in "Parts" on
page 39. You can add the part to a template in Layouts or a web page in "Pages" on page 31.
Note: When you update a layout, it is important to include similar characteristics from the rest of
your website. This way the new web page remains recognizable as one of your organization's
pages. For example, include buttons, links, images, fonts, and colors that are consistent with the
rest of your website. You can use Cascading Stylesheets (CSS) information to make most of these
customizations for the layout in Stylesheets. For more information about stylesheets, see
"Stylesheets" on page 123.
4. To edit or view the stylesheet for the layout, click Stylesheet on the action bar. The Edit Stylesheet
screen appears.
5. In the Templates/Pages using this layout box, view the templates and web pages linked to the
layout. The box is for informational purposes only.
Remember, we strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a
select number of users for Layouts. This is very important for editing or viewing stylesheet
information. We recommend general users not access this functionality. Any change can affect
multiple web pages. We strongly recommend only users knowledgeable in all areas of website
design and Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in Layouts.
6. To close the Edit Stylesheet screen, click Save and Close. You return to the Layout Designer
screen.
To cancel any changes you made, click Cancel.
7. To save and close your layout, click Save and Close on the Layout Designer screen. You return to
Layouts.
Stylesheets
Stylesheets create unique elements such as colors, font types and size, and spacing for your website.
Stylesheets, written in Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) format, are easier to use than other methods such as
HTML. Unless you specify a custom stylesheet, your website uses Blackbaud NetCommunity default
stylesheets. You can create custom stylesheets in Stylesheets that override a Blackbaud NetCommunity
default style. When you override elements in stylesheets, we recommend you make changes only once to
update the pages that use the stylesheet. This saves time and helps eliminate mistakes when you update
your website. You use stylesheets when you create layouts in Layouts. In Layouts, you link a stylesheet to
the layout. For more information, see "Layouts" on page 121.
When you design and customize your website, we recommend you test the rendering of your site in
multiple browsers. For example, if your primary browser is Internet Explorer, also test your site with
Mozilla Firefox. If your site renders differently, we recommend you modify your stylesheets so your site
has a similar look and feel in all browsers you test.

.
124
C HAPTER 2
For information about part types and their corresponding style elements, see "Part Type Element Details
for Stylesheets" on page 126.
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a select
number of users for Stylesheets. General users should not have access to stylesheets. Any change can affect
multiple web pages. We strongly recommend only users knowledgeable in all areas of website design and
Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in Stylesheets.
Create a stylesheet
1. From Web Site, click Stylesheets. The Stylesheets screen appears.
2. Click New Stylesheet. The New Stylesheet screen appears.
3. In the Stylesheet Name field, enter a name for your stylesheet, such as "Index Page Stylesheet".
This name helps Blackbaud NetCommunity users quickly identify the file in Stylesheets. This
name is for internal use and does not appear on your website.
4. In the Description field, enter any additional information about the stylesheet, such as "Created
for index web page".
5. In the Stylesheet Security grid, assign View, Edit, Delete, and Change Security rights for the
stylesheet. In the Role column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For more
information about security, see "Security" on page 223.
Note: Stylesheets must be applied in Layouts. For more information, see "Layouts" on page 121.
6. To save your stylesheet, click Next. The Stylesheet Designer screen appears. For information
about the Stylesheet Designer screen, see "Design a stylesheet" on page 125.
Edit stylesheet properties
To search for an existing stylesheet, use the search tools in Blackbaud NetCommunity. For example, at
the top of the Stylesheets screen, to search for a stylesheet, enter a partial name in the Name field. At
the bottom of the Stylesheets screen, select the number of stylesheets on the screen in the Results Per
Page field. If you know the page number in Stylesheets where your information is stored, select it in
the Page field.
1. From Web Site, click Stylesheets. The Stylesheets screen appears.
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a
select number of users for Stylesheets. General users should not have access to stylesheets. Any
change can affect multiple web pages. We strongly recommend only users knowledgeable in all
areas of website design and Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in Stylesheets.
2. For the stylesheet to edit, click Properties in the Actions column. The Stylesheet Properties
screen appears.
3. In the Stylesheet Name and Description fields, make the required changes.
4. In the Stylesheet Security grid, assign View, Edit, Delete, and Change Security rights for the
stylesheet. In the Role column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For more
information about security, see "Security" on page 223.

.
WEBSITE
125
5. To save your changes, click Save and Close. You return to Stylesheets. For information about how
to edit the Stylesheet Designer screen, see "Design a stylesheet" on page 125.
Design a stylesheet
To search for an existing stylesheet, use the search tools in Blackbaud NetCommunity. For example, at
the top of the Stylesheets screen, to search for a stylesheet, enter a partial name in the Name field. At
the bottom of the Stylesheets screen, select the number of stylesheets on the screen in the Results Per
Page field. If you know the page number in Stylesheets where your information is stored, select it in
the Page field.
1. From Web Site, click Layouts. The Layouts screen appears.
Warning: When you design and customize your website, we recommend you test the rendering of
your site in multiple browsers. For example, if your primary browser is Internet Explorer, we
recommend you also test your site with Mozilla Firefox. If your site renders differently, we
recommend you modify your stylesheets so your site has a similar look and feel in all browsers
you test.
2. To edit an existing stylesheet, click Edit in the Actions column. The Stylesheet Designer screen
appears.
If you create a new stylesheet, first save the stylesheet properties. For more information about
stylesheet properties, see "Create a stylesheet" on page 124.
3. To override the default stylesheet:
a. Click the plus sign to the left of Defaults. The default styles list expands.
Note: The Defaults styles apply to common elements throughout your web pages that use the
stylesheets you select, such as Form Titles and Textboxes.
b. Click an element, such as .BBFormTable. The Cascading Stylesheet (CSS) information
appears on the right side of the screen, such as "border:1pt solid buttonface;".
For information about part types and their corresponding style elements, see "Part Type
Element Details for Stylesheets" on page 126.
c. To override the default style of this element, enter CSS text in the box on the right screen.
4. To override a specific style class:
a. Click the plus to the left of the node, such as Job Board. The list expands.
b. Click an element, such as .JobBoardPostLink:link. The CSS information appears on the
right side of the screen, such as "color:06C;text-decoration:none;". If you override the
.BBFormTable stylesheet in Defaults, your CSS text information appears here as well.
c. To override the style class, enter CSS text in the box on the right screen.
5. To create custom styles and classes:
a. At the end of the tree view, click Custom CSS.
b. In the Custom Styles frame, enter your CSS text for the stylesheet. For example, you can
customize the body of an HTML Document part type or define classes to use throughout the
website.
6. To save your changes, click Save and Close. You return to Stylesheets.

.
126
C HAPTER 2
Part Type Element Details for Stylesheets
This section includes part types and their corresponding style elements. The graphics have meaning in the
way the part type and element appear. For example, if you see dashed lines around an element, this
indicates the styling applies to what is inside that element. For example, the Documents part has a dashed
box around the list of documents. The style BBDocumentDisplayTable applies to the entire list of
documents, not to each item in the list.
Warning: We strongly recommend your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a select
number of users for Stylesheets. General users should not have access to stylesheets. Any change can affect
multiple web pages. We strongly recommend only users knowledgeable in all areas of website design and
Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in Stylesheets.
For each part, styling appears one time for objects that have similar styles. For example, the Documents
part has an <HR> element between each listed document. The styling BBDocumentDisplaySeparator
appears on one <HR>; however, the styling applies to all. Default styles appear first. For example, this
graphic specifies that the element has two CSS classes applied to it -- BBFormTable and
BBDocumentFormTable.
BBFormTable applies first, followed by BBDocumentFormTable. Most elements inherit styling from the
Blackbaud NetCommunity default styles.
Warning: When you design and customize your website, we strongly recommend you test the rendering of
your site in multiple browsers. For example, if your primary browser is Internet Explorer, also test your
site using Mozilla Firefox. If your site renders differently, we recommend you modify your stylesheets so
your site has a similar look and feel in all browsers you test.
Each graphic appears using a small scale. For better viewing, access this section in the Blackbaud
NetCommunity help file under Stylesheets. Graphics appear as a thumbnail in the help file. For a full
screen viewing, click the thumbnail. To print the graphic, select File, Print from the Internet Explorer
menu. To print the full graphic, change your print setting to landscape.
Anonymous Newsletter Subscription

.
WEBSITE
127
Chapter Manager
Class Notes

.
128
C HAPTER 2
Class Notes- list and add\edit
Directory
Discussion Group

.
WEBSITE
129
Discussion Group- topic list and post new topic
Discussion Group- discussion

.
130
C HAPTER 2
Discussion Group- spell check
Discussion Group- post reply
Documents

.
WEBSITE
131
Documents- list
Documents- add\edit

.
132
C HAPTER 2
Donate Form
Donate Form- billing information

.
WEBSITE
133
Donate Form- payment information
Email Forwarding Form
Event Calendar

.
134
C HAPTER 2
Event Calendar- Add Event screen

.
WEBSITE
135
Event Calendar- calendar view
Event Calendar- event list

.
136
C HAPTER 2
Event Calendar- event details
Event Calendar Highlights

.
WEBSITE
137
Event Registration Form
Event Registration Form- registration details

.
138
C HAPTER 2
Event Registration Form- participant information
Event Registration Form- summary
Fundraiser

.
WEBSITE
139
Activity Log
Fundraiser- Home page

.
140
C HAPTER 2
Fundraiser - Join Options screen
Fundraiser- Search for Participant screen

.
WEBSITE
141
Fundraiser Dashboard
Giving History
HTML Editor

.
142
C HAPTER 2
Copy and Paste the following code where you would normally publish HTML content checkbox
Job Board
Job Board- job list

.
WEBSITE
143
Job Board- add\edit job
Job Board- job search
MatchFinder

.
144
C HAPTER 2
MatchFinder- only if you use MatchFinder Online
MatchFinder- only if you use MatchFinder Online

.
WEBSITE
145
MatchFinder- only if you use MatchFinder Online
Membership Form

.
146
C HAPTER 2
Membership Form- current membership

.
WEBSITE
147
Membership Form- membership list

.
148
C HAPTER 2
Membership Form- card information
Membership Form- transaction summary

.
WEBSITE
149
Modals
Use CSS to edit dialog windows in Blackbaud NetCommunity
Personal Notes
Personal Notes- add note

.
150
C HAPTER 2
Personal Notes- manage notes
Personal Notes- Search

.
WEBSITE
151
Poll
Poll- questions and results

.
152
C HAPTER 2
Quick Search and Search
Report (Email)

.
WEBSITE
153
Report (Fundraiser)
Slideshow
Survey

.
154
C HAPTER 2
Survey- questionnaire

.
WEBSITE
155
Survey- response
User Email Preferences Form

.
156
C HAPTER 2
User Interests Form
User Login

.
WEBSITE
157
User Login- new user

.
158
C HAPTER 2
User Photos Form
User Profile Form
Volunteer Opportunity

.
WEBSITE
159
Volunteer Opportunity- job list
Volunteer Opportunity- job details

.
160
C HAPTER 2
Volunteer Opportunity- job sign-up

.
WEBSITE
161
Weblog

.
162
C HAPTER 2

CHAPTER 3
Email
In This Chapter
"Templates" on page 163
"Lists" on page 171
"Messages" on page 177
"Newsletters" on page 190
"Acknowledgements" on page 197
"Invalid Accounts" on page 206
"Email Campaigns" on page 208
"Notifications" on page 216
Email is a quick and inexpensive way to send your messages. Email contains Messages, Newsletters,
Templates, Lists, Acknowledgements, Invalid Accounts, and Email Campaigns. When you create an email
message in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you first create an email template. Next, you create the list of email
recipients. Lastly, you select the type of email to send: message, newsletter, or acknowledgement.
In Invalid Accounts, you can view email address accounts reported as "invalid" by their host internet
service provider (ISP). For example, an ISP may report an email address account as invalid due to a
nonexistent or canceled account. Typical causes of an invalid account occur when the email address
contains a typographical error or the email account is canceled due to inactivity.
Templates
Templates contains the email templates and defaults for the different types of email you can send. You can
use templates to maintain standards between similar types of email. For example, you can have an
organization template with a header and font used to send email to all alumni. On the Email Template
Editor tab, you set defaults for the messages created from the template, such as a bounceback email address
or a forgotten user ID and password. On the Design tab, you design the basic layout for the template,
including any graphics or pictures.

.
164
C HAPTER 3
Warning: It is important your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a select number of
users for Email. Any changes can affect multiple web pages. We strongly encourage users knowledgeable
in all areas of website design and Blackbaud NetCommunity to perform tasks in Email.
When you create a new email message, you can base the message on a template to save time and effort. All
the elements exist in the template. You can change a specific message, but the template provides a good
base to start with and maintains consistency.
Note: In each email you send, you must include links to the page of your website that contains the User
Email Preferences Form and your organization's privacy statement. We recommend you create the links in
the email template.
Design an email template
You do not send email messages or select email recipients from Templates. You send email messages
from Messages and save email recipients as email lists in Lists. For more information about how to
send email messages, see "Messages" on page 177. For more information about email lists, see "Lists"
on page 171.
1. From Email, click Templates. The Templates screen appears.
2. On the action bar, click New Template. The New Template screen appears.

.
E MAI L
165
3. Select the Properties tab.
4. In the Template Name field, enter a name for the email template. Keep in mind you use the
template for all email messages of this type.
5. In the Description field, enter any additional information about the email template. For example,
enter a brief description or any notes about the template.
6. In the Data Source field, select the type of user to receive email you create with the template. The
data source determines which merge fields are available when you create a mailing.
You can select None, Constituents, Subscribers, or NetCommunity Users. For general email
intended for all NetCommunity users, select "NetCommunity Users".
7. In the Default Mailing Options frame, enter a subject for the template in the Subject field. When
you use this template to create an email message, the text you enter here automatically appears in
the subject line of the email to provide the recipient an idea of the message's content. When you
create an individual email message, you can overwrite what you enter here.
Note: Because you do not send email from Templates, the program does not include recipients in
the Send To field in the email template. The program saves the recipients as an email list in Lists.
For more information about email lists, see "Lists" on page 171.
8. In the From Address field, enter the address to appear in the From field on the email.
9. In the Display Name field, enter the name to appear in the From field on the email, such as your
organization's name.
10. To have recipients of the email respond to a different email address than the one you send the
message from, enter the address in the Reply Address field.
11. In the Notifications are to be sent to the following addresses frame, specify whether and where
to receive failure messages. To maintain messages that are not delivered, mark Failures. In the
field next to the checkbox, enter the email address to which to send failure messages.

.
166
C HAPTER 3
Note: Failures are email addresses on the list that do not receive the email sent. A failure can also
be called a non-delivery receipt, bounceback, UnDeliverable, or Delivery Status Notification
(DSN). For information about how the program handles failed email delivery, see "Bounced Email
Management" on page 188.
12. Select the Security tab.
13. In the grid, the Role column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For each user, assign
Send, Edit, Delete, and Change Security rights for the email template. For more information about
security, see "Security" on page 223.
Note: In this case, Edit rights enable the user to change the template and its defaults. To use this
template to create an email message, a user needs only Send rights. If a template is edited, changes
to a template do not affect individual email messages already created based on the template.
14. On the action bar, click Save. The template opens to the Design tab.

.
E MAI L
167
Note: To see the scroll bar on an email template, you must use a screen resolution of greater than
800 x 600.
15. In the bottom pane, enter the default content for all email messages created from this template.
To have personalized information from other Blackbaud programs appear in messages created
from this template, add merge fields.
a. To display the list of available merge fields, click the Merge Fields field on the toolbar. To
expand the list, click the plus sign next to a field category.
b. To add a merge field to the message, select the field from the list. The list closes and the field
appears in the bottom pane.
c. Put fields where you want them to appear in the body of the email. For example, enter "Hello,
Bio.First Name" after it. In the email, "Hello, [recipient's first name]" appears. To move a
field, click and drag it to the new location.
For example, you can create a Linked User Registration email template for messages sent to
existing NetCommunity Users who attempt to register again. In the bottom pane, you can
enter the content required to remind the user he is already a registered user and to provide the
existing user ID and password information.
16. Create links to the pages of your website that contain the User Email Preferences Form and your
organization's privacy statement. You must include these links in each email you send.
17. To format the email template's appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. For more
information, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
18. On the action bar, click Save.
Warning: If you select the Messages tab before you click Save, you lose the information you
entered on the Design tab.
19. To send a message based on the new template, select the Messages tab and click New Message.
The New Message screen appears. For more information about how to send a message, see
"Design an email message" on page 178.
20. To save the email template, click Save on the action bar.
21. To return to Templates, click Return on the action bar.

.
168
C HAPTER 3
View the tabs of an email template
Once you create an email template, you can view its properties and design and any messages created
based on it. If you have applicable security rights, you can also edit the properties and design of the
template. Changes made to the template do not affect individual email messages already created based
on the template.
1. From Email, click Templates. The Templates screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the template to view. You can enter the template's
name or subject or select its data source.
3. Click Go. In the grid, templates that match the entered filter criteria appear.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
4. Next to the template to view, click Click here to edit this Email Template. The email template
Properties screen appears.
5. On the Properties tab, view the properties and security settings entered when the template was
created. To help you navigate through the information, the Properties tab contains the Properties
and Security tabs.

.
E MAI L
169
· On the Properties tab, view the name, description, data source, and default mailing options
entered when the template was created. If the template message contains merge fields, you
cannot change the selected data source.
· On the Security tab, view the security rights assigned to each user of the email template.
6. To view the default content for all email messages based on the template, select the Design tab.
7. To view the messages created based on the template, select the Messages tab.
8. To return to Templates, click Return on the action bar.
View a message created from an email template
1. From Email, click Messages. The Messages screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, in the Template field, select the template for which to view messages.
3. Click Go. In the grid, the messages that use the selected template appear.

.
170
C HAPTER 3
· To view a sent message, select it in the grid and click Click here to view report in the Action
column. The Message Report screen appears. For information about the tabs on this screen, see
"View the tabs of a sent message" on page 182.
· To view a message the program has not yet sent, select it in the grid and click Click here to edit
this Email Message. The Email Editor screen appears. For information about how to edit the
message, see "Design an email message" on page 178.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
4. To return to Email, click Return on the action bar.
Copy an email template
Save yourself time and effort. If you must create a new email template and a similar one exists, you
can copy and tweak the existing template to create the new template rather than start with a blank
screen.
1. From Email, click Templates. The Templates screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the template to copy. You can enter the template's
name or subject or select its data source.
3. Click Go. In the grid, templates that match the entered filter criteria appear.

.
E MAI L
171
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
4. Next to the template to copy, click Click here to copy this Email Template. The Copy of
template screen appears and displays the settings from the existing template.
5. In the Template Name field, enter a unique name for the new template.
6. On the Properties and Security tabs, edit the information as required to design the new template.
For information about how to design an email template, see "Design an email message" on
page 178.
7. On the action bar, click Save. The Design tab appears and displays a layout based on the original
template.
8. Change the layout and design of the new template as required to design the new template. For
information about how to design an email template, see "Design an email message" on page 178.
9. On the action bar, click Save.
10. To return to Templates, click Return on the action bar.
Lists
In Lists, you can use queries from our programs to create and view email lists. You can create multiple
email lists, each one targeted at a different group of your users. For example, in The Raiser's Edge, you
can create a query of all constituents in your database who have an attribute interest of Sports on their
records. In Blackbaud NetCommunity, you can use the query to create an email list of constituents
interested in sports and invite them to your sporting event fundraisers. In the email message, you can
include a link to the page of your website where the recipient can sign up for the event.
In Lists, only individual constituent queries from The Raiser's Edge and imported lists are available for
selection.
You can use static or dynamic queries but not queries that contain "ask at runtime" operators. If the query
is dynamic, the program automatically updates the list in Lists. However, if the query is static, the list does
not automatically update. To update a list that uses a static query, refresh the query in the other program.
For more information about how to create and refresh a query, see the Query section of the help file of the
other Blackbaud program.

.
172
C HAPTER 3
The grid on the Lists screen contains all email lists created in Lists but also those automatically generated
when you send a newsletter. Newsletter lists contain only users who subscribe to the newsletter so the
generated list name is always "[Newsletter Name] Subscribers". You can add, delete, and view email lists
in the grid.
Create an email list
1. From Email, click Lists. The Lists screen appears.
2. Click New List. The Select Data Source screen appears.
3. In the Data Source field, select a record type for the list. The record type determines which
queries are available. You can select "Constituents", "NetCommunity Users", or "Imported Lists".
For example, for lists that include all your users in Blackbaud NetCommunity, select
"NetCommunity Users".

.
E MAI L
173
Note: In the Data Source field, you can select to create a list for a query of constituents. These
records must be individual constituents. Blackbaud NetCommunity does not support email lists of
organization constituents unless they are included in an imported list.
4. Click OK. The New List screen appears.
5. Select the Properties tab. In the Data Source field, the record type selected on the Select Data
Source screen appears.
6. In the List Name field, enter a unique name to distinguish this group for specific email messages,
such as "Class of 1994".
7. In the Description field, enter any additional information. For example, enter a brief description of
who the mailing list includes or the types of email messages this list receives, such as "Class of
1994 Alumni".
When a user creates a new email in Messages and clicks Send to, the program displays all saved
email lists for which the user has security rights.
8. If, on the Select Data Source screen, you select "Constituents" as the source type, the Constituent
Queries frame appears.
· To add a query, click Add Query. The Query Search screen appears so you can select the query
for the email list. For information about how to use the Search screen, see "Search Screen" on
page 24. For a query to appear as a selection, it must first be created in the other program.
To add multiple queries, click Add Query again. You can add queries until you select all queries
required for the email list.
· To replace a query with another, click Change next to the query to replace. The Query Search
screen appears so you can select a different query.
· To remove a query from the list, click Remove next to the query to remove.

.
174
C HAPTER 3
9. If, on the Select Data Source screen, you select "Imported Lists" as the source type, the Load File
frame appears. In the File field, select the comma-separated values (*.csv) file to import for the
email list. To map to the location of the import file, click Browse and use the Choose File screen.
Note: The first row of the imported *.csv file must contain the field names.
Once you select the import file, the Uploaded File Details and Field Mapping frames appear.
a. In the Uploaded File Details frame, the File name field displays the selected import file. To
import a different file, click Replace this file. The Load File frame appears.
b. In the Field Mapping frame, select the fields from the import file to use as the email address
and recipient display name in the email list.
10. Select the Security tab.
11. In the grid, the Role column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For each user, assign
View, Edit, Delete, and Change Security rights for the email list. For more information about
security, see "Security" on page 223.
12. On the action bar, click Save. On the Properties tab, the List Status frame displays information
about the data acquisition from the selected source. You return to Lists.

.
E MAI L
175
View the tabs of an email list
1. From Email, click Lists. The Lists screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the email list to view. You can enter the list's name
or select its data source.
3. Click Go. In the grid, the email lists that the entered criteria appear.
4. Next to the list to view, click Click here to edit this Email List. The list appears.
5. To view the messages created based on the email list:
a. Select the List Messages tab.
b. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the messages to view. You can enter the
message's name or email address. You can also select to view results by the template used.
c. Click Go. The grid displays the messages that meet the criteria.

.
176
C HAPTER 3
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
6. To view the properties and security settings entered when the list was created, select the List
Properties tab. To help you navigate through the information, the List Properties tab contains the
Properties and Security tabs.
· On the Properties tab, view the data source, list name, description, and the queries or load file
entered when the list was created.
· On the Security tab, view the security rights assigned to each user of the email list.
7. If the email list is based on a query of records, the View List tab appears. To view the recipients
included in the list:
a. Select the View List tab.
b. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the record to view. You can enter the record's
display name or email address. You can also select to view results by the source query or
email status or whether to view opt outs.
Note: If you create a new query in another program, you may need to refresh Blackbaud
NetCommunity for it to appear as a selection. To refresh, select View, Refresh from the menu bar.
c. Click Go. The grid displays the records in the list that meet the criteria.

.
E MAI L
177
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
8. To view the email templates created that use the email list:
a. Select the List Templates tab.
b. In the Filter List By frame, enter the name or subject of the template to view.
c. Click Go. The grid displays the templates that meet the criteria.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
9. To return to Lists, click Return on the action bar.
Messages
In Messages, you can add, delete, and view email messages. To ensure consistency and save time, you can
create an email message from an existing email template. You create email templates in Templates. We
recommend only users with Administrator rights create and edit email templates.
You can also use an existing email message to create a new one. To do this, open and copy the existing
email. You can change the copy as required, save it as a new email, and send the message.
Note: On the Messages screen, if Click here to edit this email message appears in the Action column, the
program has not sent the email. Before you send an email, you can edit it in Messages. Click Click here to
edit this email message and make your changes.
With Blackbaud NetAdvocacy, you can download advocacy action data to The Raiser's Edge. This data
includes alerts, email information, and attributes. Blackbaud NetAdvocacy is used with Capwiz
subscription service to include pages on your website where users can send email to influential individuals,
such as Congressional, state, and local officials, to encourage their influence on a specific cause such as
grant funding for a nonprofit. You can use Messages to include links in your alert email from Blackbaud
NetCommunity advocacy functionality. In addition, when you send an advocacy alert email from
Blackbaud NetCommunity, the advocate's actions automatically link to their record in The Raiser's Edge
once the action is complete. For information about how to use Blackbaud NetAdvocacy and Capwiz to set
up action alerts on your site, see your Capwiz Site Control page.

.
178
C HAPTER 3
Design an email message
When you create and design an email in Messages, it is sent only once. You can edit the email before
you send it, but not after.
1. From Email, click Messages. The Messages screen appears.
2. On the action bar, click New Message. The Select Template screen appears.
3. In the Template field, select the template on which to base the email. To decide which template to
use, consider the type of email you intend to write. The selections that appear are categories that
already exist in Templates. For more information about email templates, see "Templates" on
page 163.

.
E MAI L
179
4. Click OK. The New Message screen appears.
Note: To see the scroll bar on an email message, you must use a screen resolution greater than 800
x 600.
5. Click To. The Select Lists screen appears. On the grid, you can view all saved email lists for which
you have security rights. You create and store email lists in Lists. For more information about
Lists, see "Lists" on page 171.

.
180
C HAPTER 3
6. Select the email lists to include on the email.
a. In the Filter List By frame, enter the name of the list to use.
b. Click Go. The grid displays the lists that meet the criteria.
c. The Selected Lists box displays the email lists included on the email. You can include
multiple email lists on the email. To add an email list to the email, select it in the grid on the
left and click Add.
d. Once you select the email lists to include, click OK. You return to the New Message screen.
7. In the Name field, enter a unique name to help identify the email.
8. If you entered a subject on the selected email template, it automatically appears in the Subject
field. You can enter or edit the subject of the email. The text you enter here appears as the subject
line of the email sent to the recipient.
9. In the From Address field, enter the email address to appear in the From field when the recipient
receives the email.
10. In the Issue Date field, the current date and time appear automatically. To change the issue date,
enter the date and time to store as the date you create the email.
11. In the Send After Date field, the current date and time automatically appear.
You can schedule to send the email at a future date. For example, you may be out of the office for
the next month but need to send your regular weekly email during that time. Or you design an
event marketing campaign to send several email messages, designed in advance, as reminders one
week, three days, and the day before the event.
· To send the email at a future date or time, in the Send After Date field, enter the date and time
to send the email. After you design the email, you must still click Send on the action bar.
However, the mailing service does not process the email until the date and time you enter in the
Send After Date field.
· To send the email once you click Send, leave the current date and time in the Send After Date
field. After you design the email and click Send, the mailing service automatically processes the
email.
12. So recipients see a name instead of an email address in the From field on the email, enter it in the
From Name field, such as enter your organization's name.

.
E MAI L
181
13. To view or edit message defaults assigned in the email template, click More Options. Below the
From Address and From Name fields, additional fields appear.
Note: To hide the email details, click Hide Options.
· To have responses from recipients of the email arrive at a different email address from the one
from which you send the message, enter the address in the Reply Address field.
·In the Notifications are to be sent to the following addresses frame, specify whether and
where to receive failure messages. To maintain messages that are not delivered, mark Failures.
In the field next to the checkbox, enter the email address to which to send failure messages.
Note: Failures are email addresses on the list that do not receive the email sent. A failure can also
be called a non-delivery receipt, bounceback, UnDeliverable, or Delivery Status Notification
(DSN). For information about how the program handles failed email delivery, see "Bounced Email
Management" on page 188.
14. The bottom pane displays the email's default content. To format the message's appearance and
layout, use the HTML editor. For more information, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.

.
182
C HAPTER 3
15. To personalize the message with information about the constituent from The Raiser's Edge, add
merge fields.
a. To display the list of available merge fields, click Merge Fields on the toolbar. To expand the
list, click the plus sign next to a field category.
b. To add a merge field to the message, select the field in the list. The list closes and the field
appears in the bottom pane.
c. In the body of the email, put fields where you want them to appear. For example, enter
"Hello, Bio.First Name". In the email, the recipient reads "Hello, [the recipient's first name]".
To move a field, click and drag it to the new location.
16. To save your message, click Save on the action bar.
17. Send the message.
· To send the message now, click Send on the action bar. Depending on the size of the selected
email list, the message may take a few minutes to send. When the program sends the email
message, you return to Messages.
Note: The Send button appears on the action bar only when you select an email list on the Email
Message Recipients screen. For information about email lists, see "Lists" on page 171.
· To send the message at a later time, click Return on the action bar. You return to Messages. The
new email appears at the top of the list. To send the email, click its name in this list. When the
email message opens, click Send on the action bar.
Note: Each email sent contains a text version in addition to its HTML-formatted version. Email
client readers set to display text only show either this text version of the email or its own text
version, generated from the HTML. The text version of the email cannot be altered.
View the tabs of a sent message
1. From Email, click Messages. The Messages screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the message to view. You can enter the message's
name or subject or select its template or data source.
3. Click Go. In the grid, the messages that meet the criteria entered appear.

.
E MAI L
183
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
4. Next to the email for which to view a summary report, click Click here to view report. The
Message Report screen appears.
Note: If Click here to view report does not appear next to an email, the email has not been sent.
5. View the summary and statistics of the message. To help you navigate through the information, the
Message Report screen contains multiple tabs.
· On the Summary tab, view the information in the Delivery Status and Recipient Summary
frames. In the Delivery Status frame, the Status field displays the status of the email, such as
"Completed" or "No Valid Recipients". For more information about the email status, see "Email
Delivery Status" on page 189.
In the Recipient Summary frame, the graph and Recipient Delivery Summary grid display
the total number of recipients targeted to receive the email and how many copies of the email
are sent and not sent.
· On the Messages Sent tab, view the information in the Messages Sent frame. The graph and
Breakdown of Messages Sent grid display how many copies of the email Blackbaud
NetCommunity sent and how many of the sent messages are opened, not opened, and not
delivered.
When a message is delivered and the recipient displays its images or clicks on a link in the
email, it is considered "opened".
When a message is delivered but the recipient does not display its images or click on a link in
the email, it is considered "not opened".

.
184
C HAPTER 3
When a message is sent but cannot be delivered, or "bounces", it is considered "not delivered".
The delivery of an email may fail for multiple reasons, such as a temporary network issue, a full
mailbox, a content filter, or an invalid account. For more information about bounced email, see
"Bounced Email Management" on page 188.
Note: If the delivery of an email fails because the hosting internet service provider (ISP) of the
recipient reports the email address as invalid, the email address automatically appears in Invalid
Accounts. An ISP considers an account as invalid if it does not recognize the email address or
recipient. For information about Invalid Accounts, see "Invalid Accounts" on page 206.
· Blackbaud NetCommunity does not send a message if it recognizes that the recipient selected to
opt out or if the email address is missing or listed in Invalid Accounts. If Blackbaud
NetCommunity has not sent all the copies of the email, the Messages Not Sent tab appears. On
this tab, view the information in the Messages Not Sent frame.
Note: If the Messages Not Sent tab does not appear, the program sent all copies of the email.
The graph and Breakdown of Messages Not Sent grid display how many copies of the email
Blackbaud NetCommunity did not send and how many the program did not send due to
opt-outs, no addresses, and invalid accounts.
Note: To prevent your email address from being blacklisted, Blackbaud NetCommunity does not
send email to an account that is marked invalid. For more information about invalid accounts, see
"Invalid Accounts" on page 206.
· On the Click Throughs tab, view the information in the Page Clicks frame. In the grid, the Page
column displays the web pages linked to the email message. For each linked web page, the
Total Views column displays how many times the page is accessed from the link in the
message. The Unique Viewers column displays how many unique recipients use the link to
access the page. For example, a recipient clicks the link in the email three times to access the
events page on your site. For the events page, the Total Views column increases by three, and
the Unique Viewers column increases by one.
· On the Conversions tab, view how many transactions your organization receives as a result of
the email message. You can view data for donation, event registration, membership, and
advocacy conversions.
For each type of conversion, the Payment Method column displays the payment methods used
in response to the email, such as "CreditCard". For each payment method listed, the Donations
column displays how many transactions received were of this method, and the Total column
displays the sum of those transactions.
6. For additional summary information about your email message, view the Email Status Report. To
generate this report, click Status Report on the action bar. The Email Status Report screen appears
and displays valuable information about your email, such as a "[Prepared]" date and time stamp.

.
E MAI L
185
7. To view who received the message, select the Recipients tab.
8. In the grid, view the address to which the program sends the email for each recipient. You can limit
the addresses that appear in the grid.
a. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the address to view. You can enter the name
of the recipient, email address, or email type.
b. Click Go. In the grid, the addresses that meet the criteria entered appear.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
9. For each email address to which the program sent the email, view the name of the recipient and the
date and time Blackbaud NetCommunity sent the email. Also, view the date and time the email
was open or bounced.
· If an email message cannot be delivered to a recipient, the Bounced column displays the date
and time when the message delivery failed. For more information about bounced email, see
"Bounced Email Management" on page 188.
· If the recipient opens the message and displays its images or clicks on a link in the email, the
Opened column displays the receipt details.
10. To open a constituent record in The Raiser's Edge, click Click here to open this recipient in The
Raiser's Edge in the Actions column beside the user name. To display Click here to open this
recipient in The Raiser's Edge, you must use The Raiser's Edge and Blackbaud NetCommunity
on the same workstation.

.
186
C HAPTER 3
Note: If Click here to open this recipient in The Raiser's Edge does not appear next to the user
name, a constituent record for the user does not exist in The Raiser's Edge, or you do not use The
Raiser's Edge and Blackbaud NetCommunity on the same workstation.
11. If Blackbaud NetCommunity cannot deliver an email, click Click here to view detailed bounce
information in the Actions column to view the bounce error. The Bounce Information screen
appears and displays the exact wording of the bounce error. You can use this information to help
determine the cause of the bounce error. For more information about bounced email, see "Bounced
Email Management" on page 188.
12. To view property information and the content of the message, select the Properties tab.
13. In the Job Details frame, view information about the email message, such as who it was sent to
and from and its sent date.
14. In the Message Content frame, view the body of the email message.
15. To return to Messages, click Return on the action bar.

.
E MAI L
187
Copy an email message
1. From Email, click Messages. The Messages screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the message to copy. You can enter the message's
name or subject or select its template or data source.
3. Click Go. In the grid, the messages that meet the criteria entered appear.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
4. Next to the message to copy, click Click here to copy this Email Message in the Action column.
The Copy of Message screen appears.
Note: To access the Copy of Message screen, you can also open the message to copy and click
Copy Message on the action bar.
5. In the Name field, enter a unique name to identify the new email message.
6. Edit the information as required to design the new message. For information about how to design
an email message, see "Design an email message" on page 178.
7. To save your message, click Save on the action bar.

.
188
C HAPTER 3
8. Send the message.
· To send the message now, click Send on the action bar. Depending on the size of the selected
email list, the message may take a few minutes to send. When the program sends the email
message, you return to Messages.
Note: The Send button appears on the action bar only when you select an email list on the Email
Message Recipients screen. For information about email lists, see "Lists" on page 171.
· To send the message at a later time, click Return on the action bar. You return to Messages. The
new email appears at the top of the list. To send the email, click its name in this list. When the
email message opens, click Send on the action bar.
Note: Each email sent contains a text version in addition to its HTML-formatted version. Email
client readers set to display text only show either this text version of the email or its own text
version, generated from the HTML. The text version of the email cannot be altered.
Bounced Email Management
A "bounced" email is one that is sent but cannot be delivered. The delivery of an email may fail for
multiple reasons, such as a temporary network issue, a full mailbox, a content filter, or an invalid account.
You can view a breakdown of how many sent copies of an email bounced.
· To view a breakdown of how many copies of a sent message bounced, select the Messages Sent tab of
the Message Report tab on the Message Report screen. For information about the Message Report tab,
see "View the tabs of a sent message" on page 182.
· To view a breakdown of how many copies of a sent newsletter issue bounced, select the Issues Sent tab
of the Issue Report tab on the Issue Report screen. For information about the Issues Report tab, see
"View the tabs of a sent newsletter issue" on page 195.
· To view a breakdown of how many copies of a sent acknowledgement bounced, select the
Acknowledgements Sent tab of the Acknowledgements Report tab on the Acknowledgements Report
screen. For information about the Acknowledgements Report tab, see "View the tabs of a sent
acknowledgement email" on page 203.
If a sent email bounces, you can view the bounce error Blackbaud NetCommunity receives. For a message
or newsletter, you can view bounce information on the Recipients tab on the Message Report or Issue
Report screen. For an acknowledgement, you can view bounce information on the Messages tab on the
Acknowledgement Report screen. To view a bounce error of an email, click Click here to view detailed
bounce information in the Actions column. The Bounce Information screen appears and displays the
exact wording of the bounce error. For information about the Recipients tabs, see "View the tabs of a sent
message" on page 182 or "View the tabs of a sent newsletter issue" on page 195. For information about the
Messages tab, see "View the tabs of a sent acknowledgement email" on page 203.
How Blackbaud NetCommunity handles a bounced email depends on the type of delivery failure.
· If the bounce error is caused by a temporary failure, such as a network error, full mailbox, or content
filter, Blackbaud NetCommunity tries to send the email again periodically for at least 24 hours or until
delivery is successful. For a message or newsletter, you can view the latest bounce information on the
Recipients tab on the Message Report or Issue Report screen. For an acknowledgement, you can view
the latest bounce information on the Messages tab on the Acknowledgement Report screen.

.
E MAI L
189
Note: If an email bounces due to a temporary failure, you can click Click here to resend in the Action
column to attempt to send the email again.
· If the bounce error is caused by a permanent failure, such as an unknown user or address, the account is
marked invalid. You can also view bounce information about these accounts in Invalid Accounts. For
information about how to manage your invalid accounts, see "Invalid Accounts" on page 206.
Note: To prevent your email address from being blacklisted, Blackbaud NetCommunity does not send
email to an account that is marked invalid. For more information about invalid accounts, see "Invalid
Accounts" on page 206.
Email Delivery Status
When you send an email from Blackbaud NetCommunity, the program prepares the email and sends it
through the NetCommunity Windows service. The NetCommunity Windows service retrieves any merge
data from other Blackbaud programs, processes the email, and then uploads the email to the Blackbaud
NetCommunity mail server to be sent to its recipients.
After you send an email from Blackbaud NetCommunity, you can view the current status of the sent
message or newsletter issue. To view the delivery status of an email, access its Message Report or Issue
Report screen and select the Summary tab. In the Delivery Status frame, the Status field displays the
current status of the email. For information about the Summary tab, see "View the tabs of a sent message"
on page 182 or "View the tabs of a sent newsletter issue" on page 195.
· "Created" The email is created in Blackbaud NetCommunity and has not yet been sent through the
NetCommunity Windows service.
· "Prepared" The email is in the queue to be processed by the NetCommunity Windows service.
· "Processing" The NetCommunity Windows service is processing the email, including retrieving any
merge data from another Blackbaud program.
· "Processed" The NetCommunity Windows service processed the email, and the email is in the queue
to be uploaded to the mail server.
· "No Valid Recipients" The email cannot be delivered to the selected email list, such as if the list
contains no recipients or no recipients selected have valid email addresses.
· "Uploading" The NetCommunity Windows service is uploading the email to the Blackbaud
NetCommunity mail server.
· "Upload Failed" The NetCommunity Windows service could not upload the email to the mail server.
If the upload fails, the NetCommunity Windows service automatically tries to upload the email again.
· "Accepted" The email successfully uploaded to the mail server and is in the queue to be processed.
· "Active" The mail server is processing the email to prepare it for delivery.
· "Completed" The mail server processed the email, which has been sent or is in the queue to be sent to
the recipients.
Note: When the Status field displays "Completed", the mail server may be in the process of sending the
email to its recipients. Some messages or newsletter issues in the email may not yet be sent.
· "Exception" The email could not be uploaded to the Blackbaud NetCommunity mail server due to an
error when the NetCommunity Windows service processed the email. For Support assistance with
Blackbaud NetCommunity, send an email to bbncsupport@blackbaud.com.

.
190
C HAPTER 3
· "Exception on Server" The email could not be sent due to an error on the Blackbaud NetCommunity
mail server. For Support assistance with Blackbaud NetCommunity, send an email to
bbncsupport@blackbaud.com.
Newsletters
In Newsletters, you can create a newsletter template for each type of newsletter you send by email. For
example, you can create a newsletter in Blackbaud NetCommunity for your alumni and another for your
foundation donors. Within each saved newsletter, you can generate the current issue of the newsletter to
send from the Issues tab. Once you send the issue via email, Blackbaud NetCommunity stores the
newsletter on the Issues tab for reference.
Note: Newsletters are sent only to users who subscribe to the newsletter on the User Email Preferences
Form. For more information about the User Email Preferences Form part type, see "User Email
Preferences Form" on page 110.
To share with users what newsletters are available, we recommend you link the page users are directed to
after they register to the Email Preferences page so they can subscribe to mailings as soon as they register.
You can also include information about newsletters in NetCommunity email messages with a link to the
Email Preferences page.
Warning: It is important your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a select number of
users for Newsletters. Any change can affect multiple web pages. We strongly encourage only users
knowledgeable in all areas of website design and Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in Newsletters.
Design a newsletter
1. From Email, click Newsletters. The Newsletters screen appears.

.
E MAI L
191
2. On the action bar, click New Newsletter. The New Newsletter screen appears.
3. Select the Properties tab.
4. In the Newsletter Name field, enter a unique name to identify the newsletter.
5. In the Description field, enter any additional information, such as a brief description of the
newsletter or notes about the template layout.
Note: In the Default Mailing Options frame, the Send To field is disabled. Blackbaud
NetCommunity automatically generates a mailing list that includes only users who subscribe to the
newsletter on the User Email Preferences Form.
6. In the Subject field, enter a subject for the newsletter. When you create a newsletter from this
template, your entry here automatically appears in the Subject field of the email the user receives.
This provides the recipient with an idea of the content of the email. When you create an individual
newsletter email, you can edit what you enter here. You do not have to enter anything here, but we
recommend it for consistency and to save time when you create newsletter email.
7. In the From Address field, enter the email address to appear in the From field on the email.
8. So recipients of the newsletter can respond to an email address different from the one from which
you send the message, in the Reply Address field, enter the email address to receive responses.
9. In the From Name field, enter the name to appear in the From field of the email. This provides
the recipient with an idea of who sends the newsletter, such as your organization name.
10. In the Notifications are to be sent to the following addresses frame, specify whether and where
you want to receive failure messages. To maintain messages that are not delivered, mark Failures.
In the field next to the checkbox, enter the email address to receive failure messages.

.
192
C HAPTER 3
Note: Failures are email addresses on the list that do not receive the email sent. A failure can also
be called a non-delivery receipt, bounceback, UnDeliverable, or Delivery Status Notification
(DSN). For information about how the program handles failed email delivery, see "Bounced Email
Management" on page 188.
11. To assign the security rights for the newsletter, select the Security tab.
12. In the grid, the Role column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For each user, assign
Send, Edit, Delete, and Change Security rights for the newsletter. For more information about
security, see "Security" on page 223.
Note: In this case, Edit rights enable the user to change the newsletter template and defaults. To
create a newsletter from this template, a user needs only Send rights.
13. On the action bar, click Save. The program saves the information on the New Newsletter screen on
the Properties tab. The Issues and Design tabs appear.
14. To design the content and appearance of the newsletter, select the Design tab.
15. In the bottom pane, enter default content for the newsletter. To have personalized information from
another program appear in the newsletter for each recipient, add merge fields. For example, when
you select the First name field, recipients receive a newsletter addressed directly to them.
a. To display the list of available merge fields, click the Merge Fields field on the toolbar. To
expand the list, click the plus sign next to a field category.

.
E MAI L
193
b. To add a field to the newsletter, select a field from the list. The list closes and the field
appears in the bottom pane.
c. Put fields where you want them to appear in the body of the newsletter. For example, enter
"Hello, Bio.First Name" after it. In the email, the recipient reads "Hello, [his or her first
name]". To move a field, click and drag it to the new location.
16. To format the newsletter's appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. For more information, see
"HTML Editor" on page 6.
17. To save the newsletter, click Save on the action bar.
18. To send an issue of the newsletter, select the Issues tab. For information about how to send an issue
from the Issues tab, see "Design and send an issue of a newsletter" on page 193.
19. To return to Newsletters, click Return on the action bar.
Design and send an issue of a newsletter
1. From Email, click Newsletters. The Newsletters screen appears.
2. To limit the results that appear in the grid:
a. In the Filter List By frame, enter the name or subject of the newsletter to view.
b. Click Go. The grid displays the newsletters that meet the criteria.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
3. Next to the newsletter to view, click Click here to edit this Newsletter in the Action column. The
Issue screen appears.
4. To design a new issue of the newsletter, select the Issues tab.

.
194
C HAPTER 3
5. On the action bar, click New Issue. The New Issue screen appears.
6. In the Name field, enter the name of this issue of the newsletter, such as "The User's Edge for the
week of August 8, 2008".
7. In the Subject field, enter the subject for this issue of the newsletter.
8. In the Issue Date field, today's date and time automatically appears. To edit this information, enter
the date and time to display as the creation date and time of the newsletter.
9. In the Send After Date field, you can schedule the issue to be sent at a future date and time. For
example, you may be out of the office for the next month but need to send your regular weekly
newsletter during that time.
· If you enter a date other than the current date and time, you must still press Send on the action
bar after you design the newsletter. However, the mailing service does not process the message
until the date and time you enter in the Send After Date field.
· If you do not want to schedule this email for a future date, leave the current date and time in the
Send After Date field. When you click Send on the action bar, the program automatically sends
the email.
10. In the Send To field, the newsletter list name automatically appears. The issue will be sent to only
subscribed users.
Note: If recipients do not want to receive your email newsletter, they can unsubscribe from the
email list. To enable a recipient to unsubscribe, use the Formatted Text and Images part type to
create an unsubscribe footer. For more information, see "Formatted Text and Images" on page 70.
11. In the bottom pane, the default newsletter content appears. You can edit content for this issue;
change the layout, design, and text; and add or edit any current articles.
12. To save the issue of the newsletter, click Save on the action bar.
13. To send the issue of the newsletter, click Send on the action bar. The mailing service processes the
message at the date and time entered in the Send After Date field.
Note: Each email sent contains a text version in addition to its HTML-formatted version. Email
client readers set to display text only show either this text version of the email or its own text
version, generated from the HTML. The text version of the email cannot be altered.
14. To return to Newsletters, click Return on the action bar.

.
E MAI L
195
View the tabs of a sent newsletter issue
1. From Email, click Newsletters. The Newsletters screen appears.
2. To limit the results that appear in the grid:
a. In the Filter List By frame, enter the name or subject of the newsletter to view.
b. Click Go. The grid displays the newsletters that meet the criteria.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
3. Next to the newsletter to view, click Click here to edit this Newsletter in the Action column. The
Issues screen appears.
Note: From the Issues screen, you can create a new issue based on the existing issue. On the action
bar, click Copy Issue. The New Issue screen appears so you can begin your new issue. For
information about how to design an issue of a newsletter, see "Design and send an issue of a
newsletter" on page 193.
4. To select the issue of the newsletter to view, select the Issues tab.
5. To limit the results that appear in the grid:
a. In the Filter List By frame, enter the name or subject of the issue to view.
b. Click Go. The grid displays the issues that meet the criteria.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
6. Next to the issue to view, click Click here to view report in the Action column. The Issue Report
screen appears.
Note: If Click here to view report does not appear next to an issue, the program has not yet sent
the issue.
7. On the Issue Report tab, view the summary and statistics of the issue. To help you navigate
through the information, the Issue Report tab contains multiple tabs.
· On the Summary tab, view the information in the Delivery Status and Recipient Summary
frames. In the Delivery Status frame, the Status field displays the status of the issue, such as
"Completed" or "No Valid Recipients". For more information about the email status, see "Email
Delivery Status" on page 189.
In the Recipient Summary frame, the graph and Recipient Delivery Summary grid display
the total number of recipients targeted to receive the issue and how many copies of the issue are
sent and not sent.
· On the Issues Sent tab, view the information in the Issues Sent frame. The graph and
Breakdown of Issues Sent grid display how many copies of the issue Blackbaud
NetCommunity sent and how many of the sent issues are opened, not opened, and not delivered.

.
196
C HAPTER 3
When a newsletter is delivered and the recipient displays its images or clicks on a link in the
email, it is considered "opened".
When a newsletter is delivered but the recipient does not display its images or click on a link in
the email, it is considered "not opened".
When a newsletter is sent but cannot be delivered, or "bounces", it is considered "not
delivered". The delivery of an email may fail for multiple reasons, such as a temporary network
issue, a full mailbox, a content filter, or an invalid account. For more information about bounced
email, see "Bounced Email Management" on page 188.
Note: If the delivery of an email fails because the hosting internet service provider (ISP) of the
recipient reports the email address as invalid, the email address automatically appears in Invalid
Accounts. An ISP considers an account as invalid if it does not recognize the email address or
recipient. For information about Invalid Accounts, see "Invalid Accounts" on page 206.
· Blackbaud NetCommunity does not send an email if it recognizes that the recipient selected to
opt out or if the email address is missing or listed in Invalid Accounts. If Blackbaud
NetCommunity has not sent all the copies of the issues, the Issues Not Sent tab appears. On this
tab, view the information in the Issues Not Sent frame.
Note: If the Issues Not Sent tab does not appear, the program sent all copies of the issue.
The graph and Breakdown of Issues Not Sent grid display how many copies of the issue
Blackbaud NetCommunity did not send and how many were not sent due to opt-outs, no
addresses, and invalid accounts.
Note: To prevent your email address from being blacklisted, Blackbaud NetCommunity does not
send email to an account that is marked invalid. For more information about invalid accounts, see
"Invalid Accounts" on page 206.
· On the Click Throughs tab, view the information in the Page Clicks frame. In the grid, the Page
column displays the web pages linked to the newsletter. For each linked page, the Total Views
column displays how many times recipients access the page from the link in the issue. The
Unique Viewers column displays how many unique recipients use the link to access the page.
For example, a recipient clicks the link in the issue three times to access the events page on your
site. For the events page, the Total Views column increases by three, and the Unique Viewers
column increases by one.
· On the Conversions tab, view how many transactions your organization receives as a result of
the newsletter. You can view data for donation, event registration, membership, and advocacy
conversions.
For each type of conversion, the Payment Method column displays the payment methods used
in response to the newsletter, such as "CreditCard". For each payment method listed, the
Donations column displays how many transactions received were of this method, and the Total
column displays the sum of those transactions.
8. For additional summary information about your email message, view the Email Status Report. To
generate this report, click Status Report on the action bar. The Email Status Report screen appears
and displays valuable information about your email, such as a "[Prepared]" date and time stamp.
9. To view who received the issue, select the Recipients tab.

.
E MAI L
197
10. In the grid, view the address to which the program sends the email for each recipient. You can limit
the addresses that appear in the grid.
a. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the address to view. You can enter the name
of the recipient, email address, or email type.
b. Click Go. In the grid, the addresses that meet the criteria entered appear.
11. For each email address to which the program sent the email, view the name of the recipient and the
date and time Blackbaud NetCommunity sent the email. Also, view the date and time the email
was open or bounced.
· If an email message cannot be delivered to a recipient, the Bounced column displays the bounce
details.
· If the recipient opens the email message, the Opened column displays the receipt details.
12. To open a constituent record in The Raiser's Edge, click Click here to open this recipient in The
Raiser's Edge in the Actions column beside the user name. To display Click here to open this
recipient in The Raiser's Edge, you must use The Raiser's Edge and Blackbaud NetCommunity
on the same workstation.
Note: If Click here to open this recipient in The Raiser's Edge does not appear next to the user
name, a constituent record for the user does not exist in The Raiser's Edge, or you do not use The
Raiser's Edge and Blackbaud NetCommunity on the same workstation.
13. If Blackbaud NetCommunity cannot deliver an issue, click Click here to view detailed bounce
information in the Actions column to view the bounce error. The Bounce Information screen
appears and displays the exact wording of the bounce error. You can use this information to help
determine the cause of the bounce error. For more information about bounced email, see "Bounced
Email Management" on page 188.
14. To view the properties and content of the issue, select the Properties tab.
15. In the Job Details frame, view information such as who the issue was sent to and from and the sent
date.
16. In the Message Content frame, view the body of the issue.
17. To leave the Issue Report screen, click Return on the action bar.
Acknowledgements
You can generate acknowledgement email from part types that contain acknowledgement functionality.
For example, you generate acknowledgements from the Donation Form part. Acknowledgements contains
the default acknowledgement email for Blackbaud NetCommunity. You can use this email as the default
template for acknowledgement email for part types. In addition, you can view acknowledgement email
statistics from Acknowledgements.

.
198
C HAPTER 3
Warning: It is important your organization assigns full Administrator rights to only a select number of
users for Acknowledgements. Any change can affect multiple web pages. We strongly recommend only
users knowledgeable in all areas of website design and Blackbaud NetCommunity perform tasks in
Acknowledgements.
Design a default acknowledgement email
1. From Email, click Acknowledgements. The Acknowledgements screen appears.

.
E MAI L
199
2. Next to the Acknowledgement Defaults email, click Click here to view/edit this
Acknowledgement's properties. The Properties screen appears.
3. Select the Properties tab.
4. In the Default Mailing Options frame, in the From Address field, enter an address to appear in
the From field on the email.
5. To receive responses from recipients of the email at a different email address than the one from
which you send the message, enter the email address in the Reply Address field.
6. In the From Name field, enter the name to appear in the From field on the email. This provides
the recipient with an idea of who sent the message, such as your organization name.
7. In the Notifications are to be sent to the following addresses frame, specify whether and where
to receive failure messages. To track messages that are not delivered, mark Failures. In the field
next to the checkbox, enter the email address to receive failure messages.
Note: Failures are email addresses on the list that do not receive the email sent. A failure can also
be called a non-delivery receipt, bounceback, UnDeliverable, or Delivery Status Notification
(DSN). For information about how the program handles failed email delivery, see "Bounced Email
Management" on page 188.
8. In the Template Security grid, the Role column displays the Blackbaud NetCommunity users. For
each user, assign Send, Edit, Delete, and Change Security rights for the newsletter. For more
information about security, see "Security" on page 223.

.
200
C HAPTER 3
Note: In this case, Edit rights enable the user to change the template and defaults. To be able to
create an email message from this template, a user needs only Send rights.
9. To design the content and appearance of the acknowledgement, select the Content tab.
10. In the box, enter the default text for all acknowledgement email. When you create an
acknowledgement email sent from the Donation Form, Membership Form, or Event Registration
Form part types, this text automatically appears.
11. To format the default content's appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. For more
information, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
Note: You do not add merge fields on the acknowledgement default email template. Merge fields
are available for the individual email message created from donation parts.
12. To save the email, click Save on the action bar.
13. To return to Acknowledgements, click Return on the action bar.

.
E MAI L
201
Design an acknowledgement email for a transaction
You can generate an acknowledgement from part types that contain acknowledgement functionality,
such as the Donation Form part or Event Registration Form part. The acknowledgement appears on
your website after the site user completes a transaction. In addition, this message is automatically sent
in an email to the site user. For the site user to receive an acknowledgement, you must design and
create an acknowledgement email for the part type.
1. On the Edit Part screen, click Acknowledgement Email on the action bar. The Acknowledgement
Email screen appears.
Note: The screen shown above is the Acknowledgement Email screen for a Donation Form part.
Depending on the part type you use, your Acknowledgement Email screen may differ slightly.
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the email.
3. In the Subject field, enter the subject of the email. The text you enter appears as the Subject field
of the email to provide the recipient with an idea of the content of the email message.
4. In the From Address field, enter the email address to appear in the From field on the email.
5. In the From Name field, enter the name to appear in the From field of the email. This provides
the recipient with an idea of who sends the email. For example, enter your organization name.
6. To enter a reply email address or specify whether and where to receive failure notices, click More
Options.

.
202
C HAPTER 3
Note: To hide the email details, click Hide Options.
· To have responses from recipients of the email arrive at a different email address from the one
from which you send the message, enter the address in the Reply Address field.
Note: For a donation acknowledgement, if you use the Receipts task in The Raiser's Edge, you can
generate eReceipts to send to constituents. For more information about eReceipts, see The Raiser's
Edge Mail Guide.
·In the Notifications are to be sent to the following addresses frame, specify whether and
where to receive failure messages. To maintain messages that are not delivered, mark Failures.
In the field next to the checkbox, enter the email address to which to send failure messages.
Note: Failures are email addresses on the list that do not receive the email sent. A failure can also
be called a non-delivery receipt, bounceback, UnDeliverable, or Delivery Status Notification
(DSN). For information about how the program handles failed email delivery, see "Bounced Email
Management" on page 188.
7. In the box, the text from the default acknowledgement email appears. Enter or edit the content of
the email as required. To customize email content, select fields from the Merge Fields drop-down.
To format the email content's appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. For more information
about the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
Note: You can include conditional fields in your acknowledgement email. Conditional fields do
not appear in the final email if they do not apply to the transaction being acknowledged. For
example, for a donation acknowledgement, you can enter "We greatly appreciate <Company
Name>'s support!" If the donation is not from a company, this sentence does not appear in the
final acknowledgement. To identify conditional fields, look for "begin section" and "end section"
indicators. For example, <Corporate.Begin Section> and <Corporate.End Section> indicate
that the sentence with <Company Name> is conditional.
8. To save the email, click Save and Close. You return to the Edit Part screen.
9. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
E MAI L
203
View the tabs of a sent acknowledgement email
1. From Email, click Acknowledgements. The Acknowledgements screen appears.
2. Next to the email to view, click Click here to view report. The email Acknowledgement Report
screen appears.
3. On the Acknowledgement Report tab, view the summary and statistics of the issue of the
newsletter. To help you navigate through the information, the Acknowledgement Report tab
contains multiple tabs.

.
204
C HAPTER 3
· On the Summary tab, the Recipient Summary frame displays the graph and Recipient
Delivery Summary grid to show the total number of recipients targeted to receive the
acknowledgement and how many copies of the acknowledgement are sent and not sent.
· On the Acknowledgements Sent tab, view the information in the Acknowledgements Sent
frame. The graph and Breakdown of Acknowledgements Sent grid display how many copies
of the acknowledgement Blackbaud NetCommunity sent and how many of the sent
acknowledgements are opened, not opened, and not delivered.
When an acknowledgement is delivered and the recipient displays its images or clicks on a link
in the email, it is considered "opened".
When an acknowledgement is delivered but the recipient does not display its images or click on
a link in the email, it is considered "not opened".
When an acknowledgement is sent but cannot be delivered, or "bounces", it is considered "not
delivered". The delivery of an email may fail for multiple reasons, such as a temporary network
issue, a full mailbox, a content filter, or an invalid account. For more information about bounced
email, see "Bounced Email Management" on page 188.
Note: If the delivery of an email fails because the hosting internet service provider (ISP) of the
recipient reports the email address as invalid, the email address automatically appears in Invalid
Accounts. An ISP considers an account as invalid if it does not recognize the email address or
recipient. For information about Invalid Accounts, see "Invalid Accounts" on page 206.
· Blackbaud NetCommunity does not send an email if it recognizes that the recipient selected to
opt out or if the email address is missing or listed in Invalid Accounts. If Blackbaud
NetCommunity has not sent all the copies of the acknowledgement, the Acknowledgements Not
Sent tab appears. On this tab, view the information in the Acknowledgements Not Sent frame.
Note: If the Acknowledgements Not Set tab does not appear, the program sent all copies of the
acknowledgement.
The graph and Breakdown of Acknowledgements Not Sent grid display how many copies of
the acknowledgement Blackbaud NetCommunity did not send and how many were not sent due
to opt-outs, no addresses, and invalid accounts.
Note: To prevent your email address from being blacklisted, Blackbaud NetCommunity does not
send email to an account that is marked invalid. For more information about invalid accounts, see
"Invalid Accounts" on page 206.
· On the Click Throughs tab, view the information in the Page Clicks frame. In the grid, the Page
column displays the web pages linked to the acknowledgement. For each linked page, the Total
Views column displays how many times recipients access the page from the link in the email.
The Unique Viewers column displays how many unique recipients use the link to access the
page. For example, a recipient clicks the link in the acknowledgement three times to access the
events page on your site. For the events page, the Total Views column increases by three, and
the Unique Viewers column increases by one.

.
E MAI L
205
Note: If the acknowledgement does not contain any page links, the Click Throughs tab displays
"This email message does not contain any links".
4. To view who received the acknowledgement, select the Messages tab.
5. In the grid, view the address to which the program sends the email for each recipient. You can limit
the addresses that appear in the grid.
a. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the address to view. You can enter the name
of the recipient, email address, or email type.
b. Click Go. In the grid, the addresses that meet the criteria entered appear.
6. For each email address to which the program sent the email, view the name of the recipient and the
date and time Blackbaud NetCommunity sent the email. Also, view the date and time the email
was open or bounced.
· If an email message cannot be delivered to a recipient, the Bounced column displays the bounce
details.
· If the recipient opens the email message, the Opened column displays the receipt details.
· If the email address is an invalid account, "No Valid Recipients" appears in the Status column.
For information about how to manage invalid accounts, see "Invalid Accounts" on page 206.
7. To open a constituent record in The Raiser's Edge, click Click here to open this recipient in The
Raiser's Edge in the Actions column beside the user name. To display Click here to open this
recipient in The Raiser's Edge, you must use The Raiser's Edge and Blackbaud NetCommunity
on the same workstation.
Note: If Click here to open this recipient in The Raiser's Edge does not appear next to the user
name, a constituent record for the user does not exist in The Raiser's Edge, or you do not use The
Raiser's Edge and Blackbaud NetCommunity on the same workstation.
8. If Blackbaud NetCommunity cannot deliver an acknowledgement, click Click here to view
detailed bounce information in the Actions column to view the bounce error. The Bounce
Information screen appears and displays the exact wording of the bounce error. You can use this
information to help determine the cause of the bounce error. For more information about bounced
email, see "Bounced Email Management" on page 188.
9. To return to Acknowledgements, click Return on the action bar.

.
206
C HAPTER 3
Invalid Accounts
In Invalid Accounts, you can view email address accounts that have been reported as invalid by their
hosting internet service provider (ISP). For example, an ISP may report an email address account as invalid
due to a nonexistent or canceled account. Typical causes of an invalid account occur when the email
address contains a typographical error or the email account is canceled due to inactivity. Accounts that
bounce email for another reason, such as a temporary network issue, a full mailbox, or due to a content
filter, do not appear in Invalid Accounts.
Note: For information about how Blackbaud NetCommunity handles accounts that bounce email but are
still valid, see "Bounced Email Management" on page 188.
To prevent your email address from being blacklisted, Blackbaud NetCommunity does not send email to
an invalid account. For each email address in Invalid Accounts, you can view the bounce error that caused
the ISP to report the account as invalid. If you feel an account is incorrectly marked invalid, you can mark
it as active to include it in a mailing.
View invalid email address account information
1. From Email, click Invalid Accounts. The Invalid Accounts screen appears.
In the grid, email addresses reported as invalid by their hosting ISP appear. For each invalid
account, you can view the bounce statistics. The Count column displays how many bounce errors
you have received for the account. The Create Date column displays when the account was
marked as invalid, and the Update Date column displays when the account's bounce information
was last updated.
2. To limit the email addresses that appear in the grid, in the Filter List By field, enter the email
address to display and click Go.
3. To view more detailed bounce information about an invalid account, click Click here to edit this
Invalid Email Account next to the account. The Invalid Account Viewer screen appears.
4. View the email messages and bounce details of the account.

.
E MAI L
207
·In the Email column, view the subject of the email that bounced at the email address.
·In the Sent Date column, view the date and time when the program sent the message.
· If the message delivery failed, in the Bounce Date column, view the date and time the message
bounced. The Bounce Text column displays the exact wording of the bounce error received
from the hosting ISP.
Note: If an email address is incorrectly marked invalid, you can mark it as valid. For information
about how to mark an invalid account as valid, see "Mark an invalid account as valid" on
page 207.
5. To return to Invalid Accounts, click Return on the action bar.
Mark an invalid account as valid
Blackbaud NetCommunity does not send email to an account that an Internet Service Provider (ISP)
has marked invalid. If you feel an ISP incorrectly marks an email address as invalid, such as a new
email address you include in a mailing before the account is active, you can mark it as valid. Once you
mark it as valid, Blackbaud NetCommunity sends email to it when included in a mailing.
1. From Email, click Invalid Accounts. The Invalid Accounts screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By field, enter the email address to mark as valid and click Go.
3. In the grid, click Click here to edit this Invalid Email Account next to the account. The Invalid
Account Viewer screen appears.
4. On the action bar, click Mark as Valid. You return to Invalid Accounts. In the grid, the email
address no longer appears.

.
208
C HAPTER 3
Email Campaigns
In Email Campaigns, you can create campaigns using email sent to targeted lists. For example, during tax
season, your organization asks its members to donate their tax refunds to help buy food for a rescued
animals living in a shelter. You can create a series of email messages that are tailored for specific
audiences. Using A/B split testing, you can identify which messages are most effective for each email list.
For more information about Email Campaigns, see:
· "Create Campaigns" on page 208
· "Create Appeals" on page 208
Create Campaigns
Campaigns records store related email appeals and their associated email lists and messages. You can
create multiple campaign folders to organize related email campaigns.
Create a new email campaign
1. From Email, click Email Campaign. The Email Campaign page appears.
2. On the action bar, click New Campaign. The New Email Campaign screen appears.
Note: If you need additional space on your computer screen, click Hide Navigation Bar on the
Blackbaud NetCommunity toolbar.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for your email campaign.
4. In the Description field, enter a description about the email campaign, such as the campaign's goal
or theme.
5. To select a folder to store the campaign, click Select Folder. The Save Folder screen appears. If
you do not select a folder, the program saves the campaign in the Email Campaigns folder.
6. In the Project Security grid, you can assign View, Edit, Delete, and Change Security rights for
each of your roles. Blackbaud NetCommunity users are identified in the Role column. For more
information about security, see "Security" on page 223.
7. To save your email campaign and return to the Email Campaign pages, click Save and Close.
Create Appeals
You can create multiple email appeals and test the effectiveness of each message. The Appeal Wizard is a
series of tabs that guides you through creating an appeal. On these tabs, you select the email lists and
messages for the appeal, send test and final email messages, and view the results. You can view message
and target list summary reports to monitor the success of individual messages and target lists. You can also
view the appeal summary report to evaluate the success of all messages and lists associated with the
appeal.

.
E MAI L
209
The flowchart provides an overview of the appeal creation process.
Create an appeal
1. From the Email Campaign page, find the email campaign to add the appeal to. In the upper right
pane, the campaign appears. In the bottom pane, any appeals previously created for the campaign
appears.
· To find a campaign from the Folders tab, select the folder that contains the campaign.
· To find a campaign from the Search tab, search for the campaign by name.
2. Click New Appeal. The Appeal Properties screen appears.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the email appeal.
4. In the Description field, enter a description that identifies the appeal.
5. Click Next. The Appeal Wizard appears and opens to the 1: Target Lists tab. For information about
this tab, see "Complete the 1: Target Lists tab" on page 209.
Complete the 1: Target Lists tab
On the 1: Target Lists tab, you select email lists containing the primary recipients you are targeting for
your appeal. You select email lists saved in Lists; these can be query-based or imported. For more
information about email lists, see "Lists" on page 171.
1. From the 1: Target Lists tab, click Insert Target List. The New Appeal List screen appears.
2. To add an email list, select the list on the left and click Add to move it into the Selected Lists box.
Add each list as required.
3. Click OK. You return to the 1: Target Lists tab. In the grid, the selected lists appear.

.
210
C HAPTER 3
4. In the Action column, view a summary report or the properties of the selected target list. You can
also remove the selected target list from the appeal.
· To view a summary report for the selected target list, click Click to Target List report. The
tabs on this report display the same information as the Target List Results on the Results tab. For
more information, see "Complete the 7: Results tab" on page 213.
· To view the selected target list's properties, click Click here to view/edit this Target List's
properties. On the List Properties tab, view the list's data source and query or import file name.
The List Status box displays whether the program loaded the list successfully or if there are any
errors. On the View List tab, view a list of all recipients included in the list. On the List
Templates tab, view a list of all templates associated with the selected list. On the List Messages
tab, view a list of all messages sent to the selected list.
· To remove the selected target list from the appeal, click Click here to remove this Target List
from this Appeal.
5. In the Data Source column, view the data source for the lists, such as a query of constituents or an
imported list.
6. If a problem exists with a selected list, the error appears in the Loaded Status column. To resolve
the error, exit Email Campaigns and open the email list in Lists, where you can edit the queries that
make up the list or replace the *.csv file that creates an imported list. If the list is imported, you can
also change the field mapping for the email address and the recipient display name. For
information about how to edit a list, see "Lists" on page 171.
Note: Each recipient in a target list receives one email from the appeal. After you add a target list,
you can run a duplicate search to identify any email addresses that appear in more than one target
list. For more information about duplicate searches, see "Search for duplicate email addresses" on
page 216.
7. To select the seed lists that contain the recipients to copy on all test messages, click Next or select
the 2: Seed Lists tab. For information about this tab, see "Complete the 2: Seed Lists tab" on
page 210
To save the appeal and return to the Email Campaigns page, click Return on the action bar.
Complete the 2: Seed Lists tab
On the 2: Seed Lists tab, you select seed lists that contain the recipients to copy on all test messages.
These are typically people in your organization who track the progress of the appeal. On the Lists tab
of the appeal summary report, you can view the statistics for test messages sent to seed lists. Seed lists
are excluded from statistics on all other tabs of the report, such as the Messages Sent and Click
Throughs tab.
1. From an open appeal, select the 2: Seed Lists tab.
2. Click Insert Seed List. The New Appeal List screen appears.
3. To add a seed list, select the list on the left and click Add to move it into the Selected Lists box.
Add each list as required.
4. Click OK. You return to the 2: Seed Lists tab. In the grid, the selected lists appear.
5. In the Action column, you can view a summary report or the properties of the selected seed list.
You can also remove the selected seed list from the appeal.
· To view a summary report for the selected seed list, click Click to Seed List report.

.
E MAI L
211
· To view the selected seed list's properties, click Click here to view/edit this Seed List's
properties. On the List Properties tab, view the list's data source and query or import file name.
The List Status box displays whether the program loaded the list successfully or if there are any
errors. On the View List tab, view a list of all recipients included in the list. On the List
Templates tab, view a list of all templates associated with the selected list. On the List Messages
tab, view a list of all messages sent to the selected list.
· To remove the selected seed list from the appeal, click Click here to remove this Seed List
from this Appeal.
6. In the Data Source column, view the data source for the lists, such as a query of constituents or an
imported list.
7. If a problem exists with a selected list, the error appears in the Loaded Status column. To resolve
the error, exit Email Campaigns and open the email list in Lists, where you can edit the queries that
make up the list or replace the *.csv file that creates an imported list. If the list is imported, you can
change the field mapping for the email address and the recipient display name. For information
about how to edit a list, see "Lists" on page 171.
8. To select the exclusion lists that contain the recipients to exclude from all email sent for this
appeal, click Next or select the 3: Exclusion Lists tab. For information about this tab, see
"Complete the 3: Exclusion Lists tab" on page 211.
To save the appeal and return to the Email Campaigns page, click Return on the action bar.
Complete the 3: Exclusion Lists tab
On the 3: Exclusion Lists tab, you select exclusion lists that contain recipients to exclude from all
email sent for the appeal. Exclusion lists allow you to exclude recipients without editing the existing
target list. For example, if you send a follow-up email to an appeal you sent earlier, you may want to
exclude all recipients who already donated as a result of the previous email.
1. From an open appeal, select the 3: Exclusion Lists tab.
2. Click Insert Exclusion List. The New Appeal List screen appears.
3. To add an exclusion list, select the list on the left and click Add to move it into the Selected Lists
box. Repeat for each list you want to add.
4. Click OK. You return to the 3: Exclusion Lists tab. In the grid, the selected lists appear.
5. In the Action column, view the properties of the selected exclusion list. You can also remove the
selected exclusion list from the appeal.
· To view the selected exclusion list's properties, click Click here to view/edit this Exclusion
List's properties. On the List Properties tab, view the list's data source and query or import file
name. The List Status box displays whether the program loaded the list successfully or if there
are any errors. On the View List tab, view a list of all recipients included in the list. On the List
Templates tab, view a list of all templates associated with the selected list. On the List Messages
tab, view a list of all messages sent to the selected list.
· To remove the selected exclusion list from the appeal, click Click here to remove this
Exclusion List from this Appeal.
6. In the Data Source column, view the data source for the lists, such as a query of constituents or an
imported list.

.
212
C HAPTER 3
7. If a problem exists with a selected list, the error appears in the Loaded Status column. To resolve
the error, exit Email Campaigns and open the email list in Lists, where you can edit the queries that
make up the list or replace the *.csv file that creates an imported list. If the list is imported, you can
also change the field mapping for the email address and the recipient display name. For
information about how to edit a list, see "Lists" on page 171.
8. To create test messages for each target list, click Next or select the 4: Messages tab. For
information about this tab, see "Complete the 4: Messages tab" on page 212.
To save the appeal and return to the Email Campaigns page, click Return on the action bar.
Complete the 4: Messages tab
On the 4: Messages tab, you create test messages for each target list.
1. From an open appeal, select the 4: Messages tab.
2. For all the target lists, create each message.
a. Select a list in the Target List pane and click New Message. The Select Template screen
appears.
b. In the Template field, select an email template for the message. The templates that appear in
the list are those associated with the target lists type. For example, if the target list is based on
a query of constituents, templates with "Constituents" or "Generic" selected in the Data
Source field appear.
c. Click Next. The Email Properties screen appears.
d. In the Name field, enter a unique name to help identify the email.
e. In the Issue Date field, the current date and time appear automatically. To edit the issue date,
enter a different date and time.
f. The bottom pane displays the email's default content. You can use the HTML editor to
change the message's content, appearance, and layout. For more information about the
HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
g. To save the message, click Save and Close. You return to the 4: Messages tab.
3. To set test parameters for each message, click Next or select the 5: Send Tests tab. For information
about this tab, see "Complete the 5: Send Tests tab" on page 212.
To save the appeal and return to the Email Campaigns page, click Return on the action bar.
Complete the 5: Send Tests tab
On the 5: Send Tests tab, you set test parameters for each message. You can test variables for each
message, such as the message's content, subject line, scheduled time of departure, and the name and
email address used for sending. You can also define the sample size for each test message.
1. From an open appeal, select the 5: Send Tests tab.
2. To create test parameters for a message, select a list in the Target List pane and select a message in
the Messages for <Target List> pane.
3. For each message, set the test parameters.
a. In the Test Message Parameters pane at the bottom, the Subject, Send date, and From fields
display the default values from the message's email template. You can enter a new values for
these fields.

.
E MAI L
213
b. In the Sample Size field, specify how many recipients included in the target list are to receive
the test message.
· To send the test message to a percentage of the recipients, select "Percent of list" and enter the
percentage of recipients.
· To send the test message to a specific number of the recipients, select "Recipients" and enter the
number of recipients.
Note: To send the test message to the entire target list, select "Percent of list" and enter "100%", or
select "Recipients" and enter the total number of eligible records in the target list.
c. Specify whether to send the test message now or later.
· To send the test message now, click Send Test Message. The test parameters are disabled, and
the Status displays "Processing" as the email messages process. Once the email is processed,
click Refresh. The Status displays "Sent".
· To save the test parameters and send the test message at a later time, click Save. When you later
open the appeal, you can then click Send Test Message to send the message.
4. To send the message that has the best test results to all remaining recipients for each target list,
click Next or select the 6: Send Final tab. For information about this tab, see "Complete the
6: Send Final tab" on page 213.
To save the appeal and return to the Email Campaigns page, click Return on the action bar.
Complete the 6: Send Final tab
On the 6: Send Final tab, you can send the message with the best test results to all the remaining
recipients, such as those who did not yet receive an email, in a target list. This message is not sent to
any seed list recipients.
1. From an open appeal, select the 6: Send Final tab.
2. Select a target list. In the Results of Test Messages pane on the right, all the test messages for that
list appear.
3. To identify which test message is most successful, select each message and view its results.
4. Select the message to send as the final message to all remaining recipients in that target list and
click Send As Final. A message appears to confirm you want to send the message.
5. Click OK. The Final Status displays "Processing" as the final email messages are sent.
6. Once the email is processed, click Refresh. The Final Status displays "Sent".
7. To view the results for each target list, click Next or select the 7: Results tab. For information
about this tab, see "Complete the 5: Send Tests tab" on page 212.
To save the appeal and return to the Email Campaigns page, click Return on the action bar.
Complete the 7: Results tab
On the 7: Results tab, you can view the results for each target list.
1. From an open appeal, select the 7: Results tab.
2. In the Target Lists box on the left, select a list. In the box on the right, information about the
target list appears. To view information about the list's results, select the applicable tab.

.
214
C HAPTER 3
· To view a pie chart of the percentage of messages that are sent and not sent to the selected list,
select the Summary tab. A table displays the number of sent and not sent messages to the list
and the total number of recipients.
· To view a pie chart of the opened, unopened, and undelivered messages sent to the selected list,
select the Sent tab. A table breaks down the number of opened, unopened, and undelivered
messages by the total number sent email to the list, the percentage of sent email, and the
percentage of total messages.
The % of Sent column displays the percentage of opened and unopened email, excluding those
that are undelivered. The % of Total column includes all email, including the undelivered.
· To view the pages the recipients in the target list access from links in the message, select the
Click Throughs tab.
· To view the transactions generated by the recipients in the target list as a result of the email
message, select the Conversions tab.
· To view summary information about each message sent to the target list, select the Message tab.
To view a summary report about a specific message, click the message's name in the Test
Message column. For more information about the message summary report, see "View a
message summary report" on page 214.
3. To save your appeal, click Save.
4. To return to the Email Campaigns page, click Return.
View a message summary report
The message summary report contains information about a specific email message.
1. From an open appeal, select the 7: Results tab.
2. In the Target Lists box on the left, select a list. Information for that list appears in the box on the
right.
3. To view information about a message, select the Messages tab.
4. To view a summary report for a specific message, click the message's name in the Test Message
column. The report screen appears and displays the Summary tab. The Summary tab contains a
series of tabs you can select to view information about the message's results.
· To view the delivery status of the message, select the Summary tab. A pie chart displays the
percentage of messages sent and not sent and a table displays the total number of messages sent
and not sent.
· To view a pie chart of the opened, unopened, and undelivered messages, select the Messages
Sent tab. A table breaks down the number of opened, unopened, and undelivered messages by
the total number sent email, the percentage of sent email, and the percentage of total messages.
The % of Sent column displays the percentage of opened and unopened email, excluding those
that are undelivered. The % of Total column includes all email, including the undelivered.
· To view the pages the recipients access from links in the message, select the Click Throughs tab.
· To view the transactions generated by the recipients as a result of the message, select the
Conversions tab.

.
E MAI L
215
Note: To view an Email Status Report, click Status Report on the Summary tab. The Email Status
report contains the time and date the program created, prepared, processed, uploaded, and accepted
the message.
5. To view details about the email and preview the message's content, select the Properties tab.
6. To view all the recipients of the message, select the Recipients tab. The grid displays each
recipient's name and email address and the date and time the message was sent. If the message
bounced or was opened, the date and time are also included.
7. To close the message summary report, click OK. You return to the 7: Results tab.
8. To return to the Email Campaigns page, click Return.
View an appeal summary report
The appeal summary report provides a current snapshot of the appeal's results. This report includes
information about all messages sent to lists as part of the appeal.
1. From the Email Campaigns screen, open the saved appeal. The Appeal Wizard screen appears.
2. On the action bar, click Appeal Summary Report. The Appeal Summary Report screen appears.
On this screen, you can select tabs to view information about the email results.
· To view the recipient summary of all messages sent for the appeal, select the Summary tab. A
pie chart displays the percentage of messages sent and not sent and a table displays the total
number of messages sent and not sent.
· To view a pie chart of the opened, unopened, and undelivered messages, select the Messages
Sent tab. A table breaks down the number of opened, unopened, and undelivered messages by
the total number sent email, the percentage of sent email, and the percentage of total messages.
The % of Sent column displays the percentage of opened and unopened email, excluding those
that are undelivered. The % of Total column includes all email, including the undelivered.
· To view a pie chart showing the percentage of messages that were not sent for the appeal
because of opt-outs, no addresses, and invalid accounts, select the Messages Not Sent tab. A
table breaks down the number of opt-outs, no addresses, and invalid accounts by the total
number of messages not sent, the percentage of messages not sent, and the percentage of total
messages.
The % of Not Sent column displays the percentage of messages not sent. The % of Total
column includes all email sent and not sent, including those delivered successfully.
· To view the pages the recipients access from links in messages sent for the appeal, select the
Click Throughs tab.
· To view the transactions generated by the recipients as a result of message sent for the appeal,
select the Conversions tab.
· To view a breakdown of message results for each target list, select the Lists tab. To view a
summary report about a specific target list, click the list's name. The tabs on this report display
the same information as the Target Lists Results on the Results tab. For more information, see
"Complete the 7: Results tab" on page 213.
3. To close the appeal summary report, click OK. You return to the Appeal Wizard screen.

.
216
C HAPTER 3
Search for duplicate email addresses
You can search for email addresses that appear in more than one target list.
1. Access the Search for Duplicates screen.
· From the Email Campaigns screen, click the Duplicate Search button for the appeal to search
for duplicates.
· From the Appeal Wizard screen for the appeal to search for duplicates, click Duplicate Search
on the action bar.
2. Select the Duplicate Search tab.
3. To run the duplicate search, click Start. The Search Status displays "This appeal has been queued
for searching". The amount of time the search is queued can be longer than 30 minutes. These
items determine how long a search is queued:
· The intervals set in the List Acquisition and Refresh frame in Configuration. If you start a
duplicate search while a list is being refreshed, there may be delay because the search cannot
begin until the list refresh is complete. For more information about List Acquisition and
Refresh frame in Configuration, see "Configuration" on page 237.
· The number of list queued for refresh before the search. Those lists must refresh before the
duplicates search can begin.
4. When the search is queued, close the Duplicate Search screen.
5. After the search is complete, open the Duplicate Search screen again. The Search Status displays
"This appeal has been successfully searched" and a grid displays any email lists that contain
duplicate email addresses.
6. To view email addresses that appear in multiple target lists, select the Duplicate Records tab.
7. The grid displays the email addresses that appear in multiple target lists. Using the filter options at
the top of the grid, you can filter the list of duplicates by email address, recipient name, or target
list.
Note: Search results on the Duplicate Records tab are not dynamic. The records that appear in the
grid are those from the last search and any changes made to target lists, such as due to reacquiring,
adding, and removing, since the last search do not appear. To update the search results, click Start
to run the search again.
8. To close the Duplicate Records screen, click Close.
Notifications
A notification is an email message a Team Fundraising solicitor automatically receives when a user
performs a specific action on the website. A solicitor can select to receive notifications when he receives a
new donation, the fundraising team receives a new donation, or a new participant signs up for the team. In
Notifications, you can design and edit the notifications your website users receive.

.
E MAI L
217
Design a new notification email
1. From Email, click Notifications. The Notifications screen appears.
2. On the action bar, click New Notification. The New Site Notification screen appears.
3. On the Notification tab, in the Notification Type field, select the type of notification to create.
· To create a notification a fundraiser solicitor receives when he receives a new donation, select
"Fundraiser Participant Donation Acknowledgement".
· To create a notification a fundraiser team captain receives when the fundraising team receives a
new donation, select "Fundraiser Team Captain Donation Acknowledgement".
· To create a notification a fundraiser team captain receives when the fundraising team receives a
new participant sign-up, select "Fundraiser Team Captain Sign-up Acknowledgement".

.
218
C HAPTER 3
4. Click Create. The Notification Type field is disabled, and the Create Email button appears.
5. Click Create Email. The New Site Notification email template screen appears.
6. In the Name field, enter a unique name to help identify the notification email.
7. In the Subject field, enter or edit the subject of the notification. The text you enter here appears as
the subject line of the notification sent to the recipient.
8. In the From Address field, enter the email address to appear in the From field when the recipient
receives the notification.
9. So recipients see a name instead of an email address in the From field on the notification email,
enter it in the From Name field, such as your organization's name.

.
E MAI L
219
10. To view or edit message defaults assigned in the notification, click More Options. Below the
From Address and From Name fields, additional fields appear.
Note: To hide the email details, click Hide Options.
· To have responses from recipients of the notification arrive at a different email address from the
one from which you send the message, enter the address in the Reply Address field.
·In the Notifications are to be sent to the following addresses frame, specify whether and
where to receive failure messages. To maintain messages that are not delivered, mark Failures.
In the field next to the checkbox, enter the email address to which to send failure messages.
Note: Failures are email addresses on the list that do not receive the email sent. A failure can also
be called a non-delivery receipt, bounceback, UnDeliverable, or Delivery Status Notification
(DSN). For information about how the program handles failed email delivery, see "Bounced Email
Management" on page 188.
11. The bottom pane displays the notification email's default content. To format the email's
appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. For more information, see "HTML Editor" on
page 6.
12. To personalize the email with information about the constituent from The Raiser's Edge, add
merge fields.
a. To display the list of available merge fields, click Merge Fields on the toolbar. To expand the
list, click the plus sign next to a field category.
b. To add a merge field to the email, select the field in the list. The list closes and the field
appears in the bottom pane.
c. In the body of the email, put fields where you want them to appear. For example, enter
"Hello, Bio.First Name". In the email, the recipient reads "Hello, [the recipient's first name]".
To move a field, click and drag it to the new location.

.
220
C HAPTER 3
13. To save the notification email template, click Save and Close. You return to the New Site
Notification screen.
14. Select the Notification tab.
15. In the Display Name field, enter a name to identify the notification so Blackbaud NetCommunity
users can quickly identify it in Notifications. By default, the selection in the Notification Type
field appears. Use this default text, or enter a new name.
16. In the Description field, enter any additional information to identify the notification, such as when
users should use the notification. Default text appears for each notification type. Use this default
text, or enter a new description.
17. To allow users to receive this notification, mark Enabled.
18. Under Specify parts using this notification, the Fundraiser parts eligible to use the notification
appear. For each part to use the new notification, mark its checkbox.
19. To save the notification, click Save and Close. You return to Notifications. In the grid, the new
notification appears.
View the tabs of a notification
1. From Email, click Notifications. The Notifications screen appears.

.
E MAI L
221
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the notification to edit. You can enter the name of
the notification or whether it is enabled.
3. Click Go. In the grid, notifications that match the entered filter criteria appear.
4. Next to the notification to edit, click the pencil. The notification appears.
5. View or edit the notification as required. For information about the Notification and Email
Template tabs and how to design the notification, see "Design a new notification email" on
page 217.
· On the Notification tab, view or edit the notification's display name and description, enable or
disable the notification, or specify the Fundraiser parts to use the notification.
· On the Email Template tab, view or edit the properties of the notification email or the message
the recipient receives with the notification.
Note: When you edit the notification, you can change its name and description, enable or disable
it, and specify which parts use it. However, you cannot change its notification type. To change the
notification type, you must delete the notification and create a new one. For information about how
to delete a notification, see "Delete a notification" on page 222.
6. To save any changes made to the notification, click Save and Close. You return to Notifications.
To return to Notifications without saving any changes, click Cancel.

.
222
C HAPTER 3
Delete a notification
1. From Email, click Notifications. The Notifications screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the notification to edit. You can enter the name of
the notification or whether it is enabled.
3. Click Go. In the grid, notifications that match the entered filter criteria appear.
4. Next to the notification to delete, click the red "X". A message appears to confirm the deletion of
the notification.
5. Click OK. You return to Notifications. The grid no longer displays the notification.

CHAPTER 4
Administration
In This Chapter
"Security" on page 223
"Merchant Accounts" on page 229
"Field Options" on page 234
"System Options" on page 234
"Configuration" on page 237
"Code Tables" on page 242
"User Imports" on page 243
We recommend that only website administrators or those with Supervisor rights in Blackbaud
NetCommunity access Administration. In Roles, you can create user roles to group users by security level.
In Users, you can manage user profiles and assign individual users to roles. You can apply security in
Blackbaud NetCommunity in Administration and throughout the program on each content part, page,
template, and layout. Using Merchant Accounts, you can link a donation part type to a specific merchant
account. In Field Options, you can set default privacy settings for profile information. In System Options,
you can establish settings for the program and your website, such as default pages. In Configuration, you
can enter server information and set options related to your website and overall performance.
Warning: Blackbaud NetCommunity ships with the user name "supervisor" and password "admin". We
recommend you change your Supervisor password immediately and make sure at least one other person in
your organization knows the new password.
Security
It is important to maintain constant security because it protects your website, promotes consistency, and
helps prevent errors. Although there is an Administration section of Blackbaud NetCommunity, you can
also set security rights throughout the program. We recommend only administrators access Administration
and Layouts.

.
224
C HAPTER 4
Warning: Blackbaud NetCommunity is shipped with a user name of "Supervisor" and a password of
"Admin". We recommend you change your Supervisor password immediately and make sure at least one
other person in your organization knows the new password.
You can establish security on multiple levels. In Administration, users with Site Administrator rights can
create user roles and define general rights for these roles in Roles. In addition, you can assign view, edit,
delete, and change security rights for each part that goes into making a web page. You can assign the same
type of security for each web page created in Site Explorer. You also have control over the same types of
rights for the template from which a page or email is created. You set the security for each level in the
piece you design while you create the part, page, or template. Each part, page, and template has its own
Security grid.
You can grant any website user edit rights to a particular page on your website, such as a class page.
Website users with edit rights to a page can access and update the administrative side of Blackbaud
NetCommunity for that page. For example, you create a user role of Class President and grant its members
edit rights to their respective class pages. Class President users can switch to edit mode and access the
administrative side of Blackbaud NetCommunity directly from their class page on the website. They do not
need to have Blackbaud NetCommunity installed on their computers. They can only view and edit pages
and parts to which they have rights. The rest of Blackbaud NetCommunity remains secure. For more
information about how website users can edit the page to which they have rights, see "Toggle Between
Blackbaud NetCommunity and Your Live Website" on page 5.
· To assign specific users to a role group, see "Users" on page 224.
· To create roles to group users by security rights, see "Roles" on page 227.
Users
We recommend only website administrators or those with Supervisor rights in Blackbaud NetCommunity
access Users. In Users, you can add and manage user records for your website. User records contain basic
biographical and user login information. When a user signs up for your website through the User Login,
Personal Page Manager, or Fundraiser parts, the program automatically creates a user record.
To search for a user, use the fields in the Filter List By frame on the Users screen to narrow your search.
You can filter by roles, login, last name, first name, or records to which the user is linked. To narrow the
search to users who are linked only to records in another Blackbaud program or to users who are not linked
to any record, use the Linked to field. If you mark Deleted, the query includes user records that have been
deleted.
To view or edit an existing user record, click the name in the list on the Users screen. To open the user
record in The Raiser's Edge, click the Click here to open this record in The Raiser's Edge button in the
Action column. In the Roles field, select a role to view only users assigned to that role.
In Users, you assign specific users to a role group. You create the roles in Roles. For information about
roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
Create a user record
1. In Administration, click Users. The Users screen appears.
2. Click New User. The New User screen appears.
3. In the Login Name field, enter a login name for the user. The user name you enter must be unique.
4. In the New Password field, enter the password for the user.
5. In the Confirm New Password field, reenter the password.
When you create a new user, the Reminder Phrase field is disabled.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
225
6. In the Time Zone field, select the user's time zone. For example, if the user is located in New
York, select "America/New York (EST) GMT-5:00".
Note: Blackbaud NetCommunity uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as its time standard.
Time zones are expressed as offsets from the UTC. This enables the program to retain time and
date information and display it accurately in multiple time zones.
The time and dates the user sees on your site pages and email in Blackbaud NetCommunity use the
time zone selected here. If no time zone is specified, the default time zone selected in System
Options appears.
7. To enable the user to access all areas of the program, including the ability to set security rights for
others, mark This user has Supervisor rights and can manage Users and Roles. We recommend
only a select few in your organization have Supervisor rights.
8. In the First Name, Middle Initial, and Last Name fields, enter the user's name.
9. If the user has a personal page dashboard, the Fundraiser Participation or Personal Pages grid
appears. To copy a URL link to a user with Administrator rights, click Administer in the
Dashboard column of the grid. Users with Administrator rights for a Fundraiser or Personal Page
Manager part can edit the user's personal page dashboard. The URL link bypasses the login for the
dashboard user so the Administrator can access the page. For more information about the personal
page dashboard, see "Manage Personal Pages" on page 314 or "Manage Fundraiser Pages" on
page 277.
The Fundraiser or Personal Page Manager column displays the part name. In the Page column,
click the Visit link to quickly access the dashboard. To remove the personal page dashboard for the
user, click Delete for Personal Pages.
10. In the Role Membership grid, mark the checkbox for each role to which this user is assigned.
Roles act as security for sections of Blackbaud NetCommunity and the website. When you assign
security rights to various roles, users assigned to those roles are granted that security access. For
example, add a new user who can create content to the Content Authors role. For more information
about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
11. To save and close the user record, click Save on the action bar. You return to Users.
12. To edit the user rights, click the Click here to edit this user button in the Actions column beside
the user name. The User Editor screen appears. The information you entered in this procedure
appears on the User Editor tab. In addition, the Messages and Email Forward tabs appear. For
information about these tabs, see "Edit a user record" on page 225.
Edit a user record
1. To edit a user record, in the list on the Users screen, click the user's first name. The User Editor
screen appears. On the User Editor tab, the information entered when the user was created appears.
For more information about the User Editor tab, see "Create a user record" on page 224.

.
226
C HAPTER 4
Tip: If you mark Allow team captains to manually add new team members or Add
non-anonymous attendees to registrant's during event registration on a Fundraiser part,
<Enter a Login Name for this User> may appear in the Login Name field. On the Users page, in
the Login column, [user account not activated] appears. This indicates the user is a member of a
team, but has not registered for the Fundraiser on your website. For more information, see "Team
Fundraising" on page 273.
If the user has been deleted, a message appears above the login name. For more information about
how to restore a user record, see "Restore a deleted user record" on page 227.
2. If the user is linked to a record in The Raiser's Edge, The Raiser's Edge Linked Record appears
above the name and initial fields, along with address information. You cannot edit these fields.
To break the link between the user and the constituent record in The Raiser's Edge, click Break
Link and Generate a New Signup Transaction. For example, you realize a user is linked to the
wrong constituent record and want to correct the error. When you click Break Link and Generate
a New Signup Transaction, the link is broken and a new pending sign-up transaction appears in
The Raiser's Edge. When you process the sign-up transaction, you can link the user to the correct
constituent record.
3. To view a list of Blackbaud NetCommunity email sent to the user, select the Messages tab.
4. To set up email forwarding for the user, select the Email Forward tab. If a website user sets up his
own email forwarding, to view or change the information, select this tab.
This tab shares email forwarding data with the Email Forwarding Form part. A website user who
accesses the Email Forwarding Form from a page on your website can change addresses you enter
on the Email Forward tab.
5. To enable email forwarding, mark Enabled.
6. In the Information Email Address field, enter the email address the user set up for forwarding.
For example, "MUAlumni_1981".
Your email domain appears after the field. If you have multiple domains, select the one to use.
7. In the Forwarding Address field, enter the user's original email address.
If the user's address changes, enter the new address here. This way, other users are never aware of
the change and continue to use the email forwarding address. If a user changes his own address,
this field updates the information automatically.
8. To save and close the user record, on the action bar, click Save. You return to Users.
View user information added through your website
1. From Administration, click Users. The Users screen appears.
2. Beside the user name for which you want to view information, click the Click here to edit this
user button. The User Editor screen appears.
3. In the Login Name, New Password, Reminder Phrase, and Time Zone fields that appear,
review the information the website user entered on the user login screen.
4. To enable the user to access all areas of the program, including the ability to set security rights for
others, mark This user has Supervisor rights and can manage Users and Roles. We recommend
only a select few in your organization have Supervisor rights.
5. If the user is linked to a record in another Blackbaud program, information from that linked record
appears. You can view information in the First Name, Last Name, Middle Initial, and Address
fields.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
227
If the user is a participant in a fundraiser, the Fundraiser Participation grid appears. You can
view the Fundraiser part name, a link to the user's participant personal page, performance units,
and whether the performance is complete.
If the user is a personal page owner, the Personal Pages grid appears. You can view the Personal
Page Manager part name and a link to the personal page.
6. In the Query Based Membership Last Refreshed On field, the date the query was last refreshed
appears. To refresh the query the user is in, click Refresh Now.
7. In the Role Membership grid, the checkbox is marked for each role this user is assigned. Roles act
as security for sections of Blackbaud NetCommunity and the website. When you assign security
rights to various roles, users assigned to those roles are granted that security access. For example,
add a new user who can create content to the Content Authors role. For more information about
roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
8. To view a list of Blackbaud NetCommunity email sent to the user, select the Messages tab.
9. To save and close the user record, on the action bar, click Save. You return to Users.
Restore a deleted user record
1. To find the deleted user's record, on the Users screen, mark Deleted and click Go. The list displays
all deleted user records.
2. Click the first name of the user to restore. The User Editor screen appears. Above the user's login
name, a message appears to tell you the user is deleted.
3. To restore the record:
· If the user was previously linked to a record in The Raiser's Edge, click undelete. The program
restores the user record and the link to the record in The Raiser's Edge. Above the user's login
name, the deleted user message disappears.
· If the user was not previously linked to a record in The Raiser's Edge, click undelete and
generate a signup transaction. The program restores the user record, and the deleted user
message disappears. In The Raiser's Edge, a new pending sign-up transaction appears. When
you process the sign-up transaction, you can link the user to a constituent record.
4. To save and close the user record, on the action bar, click Save. You return to Users.
Roles
Depending on your role in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you perform different tasks to fulfill your website
needs. For example:
· The Site Administrator may create new web pages from start to finish and assign roles to Blackbaud
NetCommunity users. You can create a Supervisor role with security rights to all areas of Blackbaud
NetCommunity.
· The Director of Special Events may update last year's Golf Tournament web page with this year's
information. Users with Supervisor rights may create a role for Event Managers and grant security
access only to create event registration forms but view all other areas of the program.
· A constituent may be President of the Class of 1980 and have no direct involvement with Blackbaud
NetCommunity or The Raiser's Edge but needs security rights to update the class Home page.
After a newly registered user is accepted in a downloaded transaction, the user is included in queries in
other Blackbaud products. At a minimum, the user is included in the All Constituents query. During this
phase, Blackbaud NetCommunity has a role that needs to be refreshed. For information about role refresh,
see "Role Refresh" on page 228.

.
228
C HAPTER 4
Users with Administrator or Supervisor rights have read and edit rights to all areas of the program. We
recommend only website administrators or users with Supervisor rights in Blackbaud NetCommunity
access Roles.
Note: To search for an existing role, you can use the Name field. To narrow the search to users who are
linked only to records in other Blackbaud programs or to users who are not linked to any record, use the
Linked to field.
In Roles, you create roles so you can group users by security rights. In Users, you assign specific users to a
role group. For information about Users, see "Users" on page 224.
Create a role-based security group
1. In Administration, click Roles. The Roles screen appears.
2. On the action bar, click New Role. The New Role screen appears.
3. In the Role name field, enter a name for this role, such as "Member" or "Website administrator".
4. Assign users to the role.
· To automatically assign users to the role now, in the Base role membership on a query field,
select a query and click Change. The Query Search screen appears. For information about how
to use the Search screen, see "Search Screen" on page 24.
Note: If you just created a query in the other Blackbaud program, you may need to refresh
Blackbaud NetCommunity for it to appear as a selection. To refresh, from the menu bar, select
View, Refresh.
· To assign users individually to the role later, in the Base role membership on a query field,
select "None".
5. In the Grant this role the same content rights as field in the Content Rights frame, select an
existing role group for which to assign the same content rights for the new role group.
6. In the Task Rights frame, mark the checkboxes for areas of the program to which users in this role
group can access. For example, when you mark Has all Page related rights, a user in this role has
full view, edit, delete, and assign security rights for every area of Pages.
7. To save and close the role, on the action bar, click Save. You return to Roles.
Role Refresh
New website members are not part of a query in another Blackbaud program because they have not yet
been downloaded to the product from Blackbaud NetCommunity. New members are immediately granted
anonymous access rights and are referred to as "provisional" members. By default, roles are not assigned
to these registered members but can be assigned on the User Login part. It is important to decide the
content you want your provisional members to access. Without a role assigned, provisional members see
the same content made available to the Everyone role in Blackbaud NetCommunity. These users have the
same access anonymous users have when they visit your Blackbaud NetCommunity website.
After another Blackbaud program accepts a newly registered user in a download transaction, the user is
included in queries in that product. During this phase, Blackbaud NetCommunity has a role that needs to
be refreshed. You can refresh roles using standard role refresh, or on demand by the user.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
229
Standard Role Refresh
Blackbaud NetCommunity refreshes member roles once every 24 hours after a member's last login. If
another Blackbaud program has not accepted the member in a download transaction since the last login,
there is no role to refresh. Once another Blackbaud program accepts the member in a download
transaction, the role refreshes upon the next login, and the 24-hour interval is set to that date and time.
You can modify the role refresh settings for Blackbaud NetCommunity as often as you want. For
information about how to modify the role refresh settings, see "Configuration" on page 237.
Refresh Role By User and On Demand
An Administrator can refresh a user role on demand in Blackbaud NetCommunity. To refresh a user role,
select Administration, Users. This is done on a per-user basis. For more information about user roles, see
"Roles" on page 227.
Merchant Accounts
Using Merchant Accounts, you can link a donation part type, such as the Donation Form, Membership
Form, or Event Registration Form, to a specific merchant account. From the donation part, you can select
the merchant account to use in the Merchant Account frame.
Note: To view the parts with merchant account information, select the Merchant Accounts Usage tab on
the Merchant Accounts screen. To access one of these parts, select Web Site, Parts. For more information
about parts, see "Parts" on page 39.
To process credit card transactions, Blackbaud NetCommunity supports merchant accounts from multiple
credit card processors, including Authorize.Net; BeanStream; International Automated Transactions
Service (IATS), owned by Ticketmaster; Payflow Pro, owned by PayPal (formerly Verisign); and Verus
Card Services, owned by Sage Payment Solutions.
Warning: PayPal has acquired Verisign. If your organization has a Verisign account, PayPal may contact
you to convert to a Payflow Pro account. To ensure the program continues to manage your credit card
transactions smoothly, please contact Blackbaud NetCommunity support when you convert to Payflow
Pro.
Configure an Authorize.Net merchant account
1. In Administration, click Merchant Accounts. The Merchant Accounts screen appears.
2. Select the Merchant Accounts tab.
3. On the action bar, click New Merchant Account. The New Merchant Account screen appears.
4. In the Gateway field, select "Authorize.Net". The fields required to set up an Authorize.Net
merchant account appear.
5. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the account, such as "Authorize.Net account".
6. If you are not ready to make the account available for use on a donation part but want to set it up in
Blackbaud NetCommunity, mark Merchant account is inactive.
7. In the Gateway Country field, select the country for which you use the account to process credit
card transactions.

.
230
C HAPTER 4
8. When you set up an account with Authorize.Net, you receive a vendor login ID and password. In
the Authorize.Net Vendor Login field, enter your vendor ID.
9. In the Authorize.Net Vendor Transaction Key field, enter your password from Authorize.Net.
Regardless of the characters you enter, only bullets appear in this field.
10. In the Confirm Authorize.Net Vendor Transaction Key field, enter the password from
Authorize.Net again. Regardless of the characters you enter, only bullets appear in this field.
11. In the Authorize.Net Vendor Currency Type field, select the currency of the country for which
you use the account to process credit cards transactions.
Note: To support multiple currencies, add a merchant account for each currency you process. Your
merchant account settings are the same, except for the information you enter in the Authorize.Net
Vendor Currency Type and Name fields. To differentiate between accounts, you can include the
currency type in the Name field, such as "Authorize.Net account for Canadian dollars".
12. On the action bar, click Save. You return to Merchant Accounts.
Configure a BeanStream merchant account
BeanStream is Canada's leading provider of authentication and electronic payment processing
solutions. BeanStream supports transactions only in United States or Canadian dollars.
1. From Administration, click Merchant Accounts. The Merchant Accounts screen appears.
2. Select the Merchant Accounts tab.
3. On the action bar, click New Merchant Account. The New Merchant Account screen appears.
4. In the Gateway field, select "BeanStream". The fields required to set up a BeanStream merchant
account appear.
5. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the account, such as "BeanStream account".
6. If you are not ready to make the account available for use on a donation part but want to set it up in
Blackbaud NetCommunity, mark Merchant account is inactive.
7. In the Gateway Country field, select the country for which you use the account to process credit
card transactions.
Warning: BeanStream requires its country abbreviations be two characters. By default,
The Raiser's Edge provides a three-character country abbreviation. For each country for which
you configure a BeanStream account, you must enter a two-character country abbreviation in
The Raiser's Edge. To configure a country abbreviation, click International in The Raiser's Edge
Configuration.
8. When you set up an account with BeanStream, you receive a vendor merchant identification
number. In the BeanStream Vendor Merchant Identification Number field, enter your vendor
ID.
9. In the BeanStream Vendor Currency Type field, select the currency of the country for which
you use the account to process credit cards transactions.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
231
Note: To support multiple currencies, add a merchant account for each currency you process. Your
merchant account settings are the same, except for the information you enter in the BeanStream
Vendor Currency Type and Name fields. To differentiate between accounts, you can include the
currency type in the Name field, such as "BeanStream account for Canadian dollars". BeanStream
supports transactions only in United States or Canadian dollars.
10. On the action bar, click Save. You return to Merchant Accounts.
Configure an IATS/Ticketmaster merchant account
1. From Administration, click Merchant Accounts. The Merchant Accounts screen appears.
2. Select the Merchant Accounts tab.
3. On the action bar, click New Merchant Account. The New Merchant Account screen appears.
4. In the Gateway field, select "IATS". The fields required to set up an IATS/Ticketmaster merchant
account appear.
5. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the account, such as "IATS account".
6. If you are not ready to make the account available for use on a donation part but want to set it up in
Blackbaud NetCommunity, mark Merchant account is inactive.
7. In the Gateway Country field, select the country for which you use the account to process credit
card transactions.
8. When you set up an account with IATS/Ticketmaster, you receive a vendor login and password. In
the IATS Vendor Login field, enter your vendor ID.
9. In the IATS Vendor Password field, enter your password from IATS/Ticketmaster. Regardless of
the characters you enter, only bullets appear in this field.
10. In the Confirm IATS Vendor ID Password field, enter the password from IATS/Ticketmaster
again. Regardless of the characters you enter, only bullets appear in this field.
11. In the IATS Vendor Currency Type field, select the currency of the country for which you use
the account to process credit cards transactions.
Note: To support multiple currencies, add a merchant account for each currency you process. Your
merchant account settings are the same, except for the information you enter in the IATS Vendor
Currency Type and Name fields. To differentiate between accounts, you can include the currency
type in the Name field, such as "IATS account for Canadian dollars".
12. On the action bar, click Save. You return to Merchant Accounts.
Configure a PayPal Payflow Pro merchant account
Blackbaud NetCommunity supports PayPal as a gateway to a Payflow Pro account only. The program
does not support PayPal as a credit card processor.
1. From Administration, click Merchant Accounts. The Merchant Accounts screen appears.
2. Select the Merchant Accounts tab.
3. On the action bar, click New Merchant Account. The New Merchant Account screen appears.
4. In the Gateway field, select the type of Payflow Pro account to set up.
· If we are your organization's Payflow Pro Partner, select "Payflow Pro Blackbaud".

.
232
C HAPTER 4
· If we are not your organization's Payflow Pro Partner, select "Payflow Pro".
5. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the account, such as "Payflow Pro account".
6. If you are not ready to make the account available for use on a donation part but want to set it up in
Blackbaud NetCommunity, mark Merchant account is inactive.
7. If you selected "Payflow Pro" in the Gateway field, the Partner field appears. In this field, enter
the name of your organization's Payflow Pro Partner.
8. When you set up a Payflow Pro account with PayPal, you receive a vendor login and password. In
the Payflow Pro Login field, enter your vendor ID.
9. In the Payflow Pro Password field, enter your password. Regardless of the characters you enter,
only bullets appear in this field.
10. In the Confirm Payflow Pro Password field, enter the password again. Regardless of the
characters you enter, only bullets appear in this field.
11. In the Payflow Pro Currency Type field, select the currency of the country for which you use the
account to process credit cards transactions.
Note: To support multiple currencies, add a merchant account for each currency you process. Your
merchant account settings are the same, except for the information you enter in the Payflow Pro
Currency Type and Name fields. To differentiate between accounts, you can include the currency
type in the Name field, such as "Payflow Pro account for Canadian dollars".
12. PayPal provides the Address Verification Service (AVS) as fraud protection to verify customer
billing addresses submitted through online payment transactions. In the AVS Level field, select
whether to use AVS with the account and at what level.
· To perform no address verification, select "None".
· To accept transactions only when both the street address and ZIP Code match, select "Full".
· To accept transactions when either the street address or ZIP Code match, select "Medium".
· To accept transactions when anything other than the street address or ZIP Code do not match,
select "Light".
13. PayPal provides a Card Security Code (CSC) check as fraud protection to verify the card security
code, called the Card Verification Value (CVV2). The CSC appears only on the credit card itself,
and not on receipts or statements. In the CSC Level field, select whether to use CSC checks with
the account and at what level.
· To perform no CSC check, select "None".
· To accept transactions only when the CSC matches, select "Full".
· To decline transactions only when the CSC does not match, select "Light".
14. In the Credit Cards Accepted frame, mark the checkboxes for the types of credit cards available
for transactions on your Blackbaud NetCommunity website. You can select to accept Visa,
MasterCard, American Express, Discover, JCB, or Diner's Club transactions. Make sure to select
only the credit cards your Internet merchant account is set up to process. By default, an Internet
merchant account processes Visa and MasterCard transactions.
15. When you mark a card type checkbox, the Processor to Use field is enabled. In this field, select
the processor to handle transactions of that credit card type.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
233
Note: These processors have varying support for AVS and CSC. Before you activate your
Blackbaud NetCommunity website, check with PayPal Payflow Pro for the latest information.
· American Express, for use with American Express credit cards only
· EDS Aurora
· FDMS Nashville
·FDMS South
·Nova
· PaymenTech - Salem
· Vital
· Global Payments - Central
· Global Payments - East
16. On the action bar, click Save. You return to Merchant Accounts.
Configure a Verus merchant account
1. From Administration, click Merchant Accounts. The Merchant Accounts screen appears.
2. Select the Merchant Accounts tab.
3. On the action bar, click New Merchant Account. The New Merchant Account screen appears.
4. In the Gateway field, select "Verus". The fields required to set up a Verus merchant account
appear.
5. In the Name field, enter a unique name for the account, such as "Verus account".
6. If you are not ready to make the account available for use on a donation part but want to set it up in
Blackbaud NetCommunity, mark Merchant account is inactive.
7. In the Gateway Country field, select the country for which you use the account to process credit
card transactions.
8. When you set up an account with Verus, you receive a vendor login ID and password. In the Verus
Vendor Merchant Identification Login field, enter your vendor ID.
9. In the Verus Vendor Transaction Key field, enter your password from Verus. Regardless of the
characters you enter, only bullets appear in this field.
10. In the Confirm Verus Vendor Transaction Key field, enter the password from Verus again.
Regardless of the characters you enter, only bullets appear in this field.
11. In the Verus Vendor Currency Type field, select "United States Dollars ($)".
Note: Verus supports transactions only in United States dollars.
12. On the action bar, click Save. You return to Merchant Accounts.

.
234
C HAPTER 4
Field Options
Using Field Options, you can set default privacy settings for profile fields. Privacy settings determine
which profile fields are visible to other members of the community. If a field is Public, all website users
can view it. If a field is Private, only the individual website user can view it.
Warning: We recommend only website administrators or users with Supervisor rights in Blackbaud
NetCommunity access Field Options.
Users can set privacy settings for their profile information in the Profile Display part. The user's settings
override the default privacy settings in Field Options. For example, Home Phone may be marked Public
By Default in Field Options, but users can make their phone numbers private on the Profile Display part.
Set privacy defaults for profile fields
1. From Administration, click Field Options. The Field Options screen appears and lists the profile
fields.
2. All fields are marked Public by Default. To make a profile field private by default, unmark its
checkbox.
3. To save the settings, on the action bar, click Save.
4. To leave Field Options, select your next task in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
System Options
We recommend only website administrators or users with Supervisor rights in Blackbaud NetCommunity
access System Options. System Options contains settings for your website and Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Note: For more information about how to create web pages, see "Pages" on page 31. For more information
about the User Login part, see "User Login" on page 112.
In the Pages frame, you select web pages to set as defaults for the login screen if authorization of a login
fails and a general site default page that can be selected in other areas of the program. To be available for
selection here, these pages must already exist in Site Explorer.
In the Raiser's Edge Options frame, map Blackbaud NetCommunity phone types to phone types in
The Raiser's Edge.
In the Attributes frame, select attributes from other Blackbaud programs to be available for selection
when you create email messages or any type of profile in Blackbaud NetCommunity. To personalize
messages or profile pages, include attribute fields.
In the Interests Attribute field, select the attribute used in The Raiser's Edge to track the interests of your
constituents. When you use the User Interests Form part on a web page, users can enter their interests on
the website, which you can download and store in The Raiser's Edge. You can use constituent interests to
group them by email lists and target mailings or particular web pages.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
235
Note: For more information about attributes in The Raiser's Edge, see the Attributes section under
Constituent Records in the help file in The Raiser's Edge.
The Countries frame contains a list of countries defined in The Raiser's Edge. You can select the
countries to make available in areas of Blackbaud NetCommunity, such as the Donation and Profile
Update pages.
Set system options
1. From Administration, click System Options. The System Options screen appears.
2. In the General frame, enter information about your organization.
a. In the Organization Name field, enter the name of your organization. Below the
Organization Name field, your Organization ID number appears.
b. In the Site URL field, enter the full domain name and address to your organization's
Blackbaud NetCommunity website, such as "http://www.example.com/NetCommunity/".
The program uses the site URL for multiple purposes, including outgoing email and links in
The Raiser's Edge to pages on your website. If your organization points multiple domains to
its website, select one to use for email and links in The Raiser's Edge.
Note: If you change the address in the Site URL field, only subsequent email sent and subsequent
links created in The Raiser's Edge use the new address. The Raiser's Edge does not automatically
update existing links with the new address.
c. In the Time Zone field, specify your organization's default time zone. For example, if your
organization is located in New York, select "America/New York (EST) GMT-5:00".
Note: Blackbaud NetCommunity uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as its time standard,
and time zones are expressed as offsets from the UTC. This enables the program to retain time and
date information and display it accurately in multiple time zones.
The time and dates the user sees on your site pages and email in Blackbaud NetCommunity
use the time zone specified on the User Profile Form part. If the user does not specify a time
zone on the User Profile Form part, the time zone selected in the Time Zone field appears as
the default.
If you do not select a default time zone, the program automatically uses the date and time
zone from the web server.
3. In the Pages frame, select information about your website page defaults.
a. Select the text to appear in the title bar of the web pages.
To display your organization's name in the title bar, mark Show Organization Name.
To display the title you enter for a web page in page properties in Site Explorer, mark Show
Page Display Name. For more information, see "Edit web page properties" on page 32.

.
236
C HAPTER 4
Note: If you do not mark Show Organization Name or Show Page Display Name, "Blackbaud
NetCommunity" appears in the title bar of your web pages.
b. In the Authorization Failed Page field, select an existing page to automatically appear when
a user attempts to log in, but the authorization fails. To be available for selection, the page
must already exist in Site Explorer.
c. In the Home Page field, select an existing page to automatically appear as your website's
Home page.
d. In the Privacy Page field, select an existing page that includes your organization's privacy
statement. In each email you send, you must include a link to the page of your website that
contains the privacy statement. For more information, see "Email" on page 163.
Note: Blackbaud NetCommunity requires that your browser have cookies enabled. For best
practice reasons, we recommend you note this in your privacy statement, in addition to any
security issues.
4. In the Registration and Login Options frames, make your registration and login selections.
a. In the Member Login Page field, select a page of your website to be the default login page.
Selections available are existing web pages. For more information about how to create web
pages, see "Pages" on page 31. For more information about the part, see "User Login" on
page 112.
b. In the Password Minimum Length field, enter the minimum number of characters to allow
for passwords.
c. To make passwords case sensitive, mark Password Case-Sensitive. This checkbox applies
only to new members.
5. In the User Image Options frame, select the settings of the Image Library the website user
accesses. For information about Image Library, see "Image Library" on page 38.
a. To require approval of all images the user uploads to Image Library, mark Require approval
for all images uploaded by users. By default, this checkbox is marked.
Note: When Require approval for all images uploaded by users is marked, images the website user
loads are saved as unapproved. Until an Administrator approves an image, it is visible only to the
user who loaded it. To other users, an unapproved image appears as the standard "Photo Not
Available" graphic.
b. In the Maximum number of images allowed per user field, to limit the number of images a
website user can load to the Image Library, enter a number. To enable the user to load an
unlimited number of images, enter "0".
c. In the Maximum image size field, to limit the file size, enter the number of kilobytes (KB) of
an image a website user can load to the Image Library. To enable the user to load an image of
any file size, enter "0".
d. The Default image category field displays the category of the Image Library selected to
automatically appear. To select another category as the default, click Select Category. On the
Select Category screen, select the category to set as the default and click OK.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
237
6. To integrate the latest code tables from The Raiser's Edge, in the The Raiser's Edge Options
frame, click Reload Code Tables. For example, you enter a new table in The Raiser's Edge. To
immediate integrate the table and not wait for Blackbaud NetCommunity to pull the new table into
the program, click this button.
7. Select the The Raiser's Edge phone type fields to map from the website profile to each Home,
Business, Preferred Email Address, Organization, and Website/URL phone type field. You can
select five additional phone type fields and captions. For example, you want what the website user
enters in the Preferred Email field on the User Profile page to automatically appear as the Email
phone type in The Raiser's Edge. In the Preferred Email Address field, select "Email".
Warning: To avoid email delivery errors, do not change the selected email phone type. If you must
change an email phone type in The Raiser's Edge after it is mapped in Blackbaud NetCommunity
for the website profile, click Reload Code Tables in System Options. Before you send new email,
you must restart NetCommunity Windows Service.
8. In the Attributes frame, mark the checkboxes for the attributes in The Raiser's Edge to make
available in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Depending on the attributes you select Constituent,
Educations, or Interests users on your website can enter data that you can download to The
Raiser's Edge.
For example, if the interest attribute used to signify constituent interests is named Likes &
Interests in The Raiser's Edge, select "Likes & Interests". When you use the User Interest Form
part on a web page, users can enter their interests through the website, which you then download
and store in The Raiser's Edge.
Note: You can use one-per-record attributes with a type of Date, Text, Number, Currency, and
Yes/No in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Table type attributes are available without being marked as
one per record. Fuzzy Date and Constituent Name type attributes are not available in Blackbaud
NetCommunity.
9. In the Countries frame, select the countries to make available in areas of Blackbaud
NetCommunity, such as the Donation and Profile Update pages.
10. To save the settings, on the action bar, click Save.
Configuration
In Configuration, you can enter server information and make selections for your Blackbaud
NetCommunity website and overall performance. With Configuration, you can easily adjust your server
settings without manually editing the Web.config file. We recommend only Administrators or users with
Supervisor rights in Blackbaud NetCommunity access Configuration.
Configure the server and website
1. From Administration, click Configuration. The Configuration screen appears.
Note: If Configuration is local to your web server, you can access the Configuration screen at
http://127.0.0.1/netcommunity/configuration.aspx.
2. In the General frame, configure your organization's website.

.
238
C HAPTER 4
a. In the Line Break Tag field, select the HTML tag to use to define a line break in content you
create in the HTML editor. You can select to use a , <div>, or tag.
For example, if you upgrade from Blackbaud NetCommunity 4.0 or earlier and have styles
applied to paragraph tags in your existing HTML content, you can modify the paragraph tag
used to indicate a line break.
b. Specify whether to require Secured Sockets Layer (SSL) for Client site pages that could
contain sensitive data such as credit card information. To enable SSL on the Client site, mark
Require SSL for pages with sensitive parts.
When you mark this checkbox, the program uses "https" when you build web page URLs that
contain a part that has secure content. These parts include the User Login, Donation Form,
Membership Form, Event Registration Form, Fundraiser, Personal Page Manager, and
Formatted Text and Image (Secured).
c. To make SSL for Administration site pages required, mark Require SSL for all
administration pages. When you mark this checkbox, the program uses "https" for all
administration pages and enables SSL across the entire Administrative site.
d. When the user logs into your website, Blackbaud NetCommunity refreshes, or updates, the
roles the user has on your site. You can specify a period of time after a login in which the user
can log into your site again without a role refresh. In the Update a user's membership roles
field, enter the number of hours to lapse after a login before Blackbaud NetCommunity
refreshes the user's roles when the user next logs in.
If you schedule the Role Refresh interval in the Role Refresh frame, make sure you enter a
membership role update interval greater than the Role Refresh interval.
3. In The Raiser's Edge frame, configure the web service Blackbaud NetCommunity uses to
communicate with your database in The Raiser's Edge.
a. In the URL field, enter the location of the web service.
b. In the Database Number field, enter the number of the database for the web service from the
registry.
c. In the User and Password fields, enter the login and password required to connect to the web
service.
4. Your organization's custom parts may use a custom service. In the Custom Service frame,
configure the service for your custom parts.
a. In the URL field, enter the location of the custom service.
b. In the Database Number field, enter the number of the database for the custom service from
the registry.
c. In the User and Password fields, enter the login and password required to connect to the
custom service.
5. In the Blackbaud Services frame, configure your services hosted by Blackbaud, such as
NetCommunity Windows Service.
a. In the Host Name field, the name of your Blackbaud host appears. Unless Blackbaud Support
instructs you to do so, do not change the URL information.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
239
Warning: Unless instructed to do so by Blackbaud Support, do not change the information in the
Host Name field. If you change this information, you may not be able to process donations or
communicate with constituents.
b. To access the hosted services via HTTPS, mark Connect to the Blackbaud Web Service
Using https. Unless Blackbaud Support tells you otherwise, always mark this checkbox.
c. In the User and Password fields, enter the login and password information as provided by
your Blackbaud Account Manager. If you do not have this information, send an email to
solutions@blackbaud.com or call 1-800-443-9441.
6. In the Spell Check frame, configure how spell check is used in applicable parts, such as the
HTML editor, on your website.
a. In the Dictionary field, select the language for the spell check to use.
b. To specify the words and formats the program should ignore during a spell check, mark the
respective checkboxes. You can select to ignore words that contain only uppercase letters, the
case of words, internet addresses, works that contain numbers, or HTML.
c. In the Custom Dictionary field, enter commonly used special words or phrases for the spell
check to ignore, such as your organization's name.
d. In the Remove From Dictionary field, enter words or phrases to remove from the dictionary.
7. To minimize the need to repeatedly access the database and web services, the program can store
recently accessed items in a cache. In the Cache frame, enter the duration items are stored. If the
program does not retrieve the item from the cache within the set time limit, it is removed from the
cache.
Note: If you do not define the cache settings, the application cache uses the .NET default of
20 minutes.
a. In the Application (minutes) field, enter the duration, in minutes, to store any item that is
placed in the cache while the program is running. If another cache configuration setting
applies to an item, that setting overrides the value you enter here.
b. In the EventItems (minutes) field, enter the duration, in minutes, to store event information
the web service retrieves from The Raiser's Edge.
c. In the Code Tables (minutes) field, enter the duration, in minutes, to store code tables and
table entries the web service retrieves from The Raiser's Edge.
d. In the NewsReader (minutes) field, enter the duration, in minutes, to store Really Simple
Syndication (RSS) or Atom content retrieved for the News Reader part.
e. In the NewsFeed (minutes) field, enter the duration, in minutes, to store RSS content created
by the Weblog part on your website.
f. If your website uses more than one server, or if Blackbaud hosts Blackbaud NetCommunity
for you, to ensure each server's cache is properly maintained, mark Enable database cache
monitoring.
When you mark this checkbox, the Interval (seconds) field is enabled. Enter the interval, in
seconds, at which the monitor checks each cache. We recommend you enter an interval of
120 seconds while you develop your website and 600 seconds after the website is live.
8. In the Email frame, configure the email service provided by the NetCommunity Windows Service.

.
240
C HAPTER 4
a. In the Frequency field, specify the interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows
Service sends email.
To not use the NetCommunity Windows Service to send email, select Never.
To set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service sends email, select
Every [ ] (minutes) and enter the interval, in minutes.
Note: When you set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service sends email,
the interval begins once the previous process run ends. For example, if you set an interval of every
90 minutes and the process itself takes 30 minutes, the process runs 120 minutes after the start of
the previous run.
To schedule the NetCommunity Windows Service to send email once daily, select Daily and
enter the time of day to run the process.
b. In the Log Directory field, enter the location of the directory of the log that records the email
data.
9. In the List Acquisition and Refresh frame, configure how the NetCommunity Windows Service
acquires and refreshes email lists.
a. In the Frequency field, enter the interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows
Service acquires and refreshes the email lists.
To not use the NetCommunity Windows Service to acquire or refresh email lists, select
Never.
To set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service acquires and refreshes
email lists, select Every [ ] (minutes) and enter the interval, in minutes.
Note: When you set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service acquires and
refreshes email lists, the interval begins once the previous process run ends. For example, if you
set an interval of every 90 minutes and the process itself takes 30 minutes, the process runs 120
minutes after the start of the previous run.
To schedule the NetCommunity Windows Service to acquire and refresh email lists once a
day, select Daily at and enter the time of day to run the process.
b. In the Log Directory field, enter the location of the directory of the log that records the list
acquisition and refresh data.
10. In the Role Refresh frame, configure the role refresh settings of the NetCommunity Windows
Service for enhanced performance. When you configure standard role refresh, the program caches
the information rather than load it by a SQL call on every login. For more information about role
refresh, see "Role Refresh" on page 228.
Note: By default, Blackbaud NetCommunity refreshes member roles once every 24 hours after a
member's last login. If another Blackbaud program does not accept the member as part of a
download transaction from Blackbaud NetCommunity since the member's last login, there is no
role to refresh. Once another Blackbaud program accepts the member as part of a download
transaction, the role refreshes upon the next login and the 24-hour interval is set to that date and
time.
a. In the Frequency field, enter the interval to lapse between role refresh processes.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
241
To not use the NetCommunity Windows Service to automatically refresh roles, select Never.
To set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service refreshes roles, select
Every [ ] (hours) and enter the interval, in hours.
Note: When you set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service refreshes
roles, the interval begins once the previous process run ends. For example, if you set an interval of
every 3 hours and the process itself takes 30 minutes, the process runs 3 hours and 30 minutes after
the start of the previous run.
To schedule the NetCommunity Windows Service to refresh roles once a day, select Daily at
and enter the time of day to run the process.
b. In the Log Directory field, enter the location of the directory of the log that records the role
refresh data.
c. In the Log Level field, select "None", "Simple", or "Verbose" as the level of detail to include
in the log.
11. In the Fundraiser Synchronize frame, configure the synchronization of the Fundraiser part
provided by the NetCommunity Windows Service. The synchronization process merges data from
The Raiser's Edge with existing Fund solicitor information in Blackbaud NetCommunity. When
you configure the process, you can set the frequency of the process.
a. In the Frequency field, enter the interval, in hours, to lapse between synchronization
processes. When the Synchronize checkbox is marked on the Fundraiser part, the process
runs at the frequency entered here. By default, the process frequency is 12 hours.
To not run the synchronization process, select Never.
To set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service synchronizes the
Fundraiser part, select Every [ ] (hours) and enter the interval, in hours.
Note: When you set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service synchronizes
the Fundraiser part, the interval begins once the previous process run ends. For example, if you set
an interval of every 3 hours and the process itself takes 30 minutes, the process runs 3 hours and 30
minutes after the start of the previous run.
To schedule the NetCommunity Windows Service to synchronize the Fundraiser part once a
day, select Daily at and enter the time of day to run the process.
b. In the Log Directory field, enter the location of the directory of the log that records the
fundraiser synchronization data.
12. If you integrate Blackbaud NetCommunity with The Raiser's Edge 7.82 or higher, the
The Raiser's Edge Integration Service frame appears. In this frame, configure how the
NetCommunity Windows service sends information to The Raiser's Edge. When you configure
the process, you can set the frequency of the process.
a. In the Frequency field, enter the interval, in hours, to lapse before the NetCommunity
Windows service sends information to The Raiser's Edge.
To not send information to The Raiser's Edge, select Never.
To set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service sends information,
select Every [ ] (minutes) and enter the interval, in minutes.

.
242
C HAPTER 4
Note: When you set an interval to lapse before the NetCommunity Windows Service sends
information to The Raiser's Edge, the interval begins once the previous process run ends. For
example, if you set an interval of every 90 minutes and the process itself takes 30 minutes, the
process runs 120 minutes after the start of the previous run.
To schedule the NetCommunity Windows Service to send information to The Raiser's Edge
once a day, select Daily at and enter the time of day to run the process.
b. In the Log Directory field, enter the location of the directory of the log that records the
interaction with The Raiser's Edge.
13. In the User Imports frame, set how often the program runs the process to import user information.
For more information about the user import process, see "User Imports" on page 243.
· To not import user information into Blackbaud NetCommunity, select Never.
· To set an interval to lapse before the program runs an import process, select Every [ ] (hours)
and enter the interval, in hours.
Note: When you set an interval to lapse before the program runs the import process, the interval
begins once the previous process run ends. For example, if you set an interval of every 3 hours and
the process itself takes 30 minutes, the process runs 3 hours and 30 minutes after the start of the
previous run.
· To schedule the program to run the import process once a day, select Daily at and enter the time
of day to run the process.
14. To save the settings, on the action bar, click Save.
Code Tables
Code tables in Blackbaud NetCommunity are similar to those in other Blackbaud programs. In Code
Tables, you can create a table for event categories and add table entries for each event category type. These
code table entries appear in the Event Category field on the Event Calendar part.
Create a code table
1. From Administration, click Code Tables. The Code Tables screen appears.
2. In the Name column, click Event Calendar Category. The Code Table Editor screen appears.
3. In the text field, enter the first category entry for the code table and click Add New Entry. The
new entry appears in the grid.
4. To continue to add event categories, enter the category entry for the code table and click Add New
Entry for each new category.
5. When all event categories are added, click Return. You return to the Code Tables screen.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
243
User Imports
With User Imports, you can import user information, such as data exported from The Raiser's Edge, to
create new users in Blackbaud NetCommunity. In User Imports, you select the file to import and select
whether to schedule the import for a later date. Only Administrators or users with Supervisor rights in
Blackbaud NetCommunity can access User Imports.
Note: The import file must be a comma-separated values (*.csv) file, and its first row must contain the
field names. To import the user information correctly, each record in the import file must contain the user's
first and last name, email address, and ID. You can also import user names and passwords for all users in
the import file, or Blackbaud NetCommunity can automatically generate this information during the
import.
Create a user import
1. From Administration, click User Imports. The User Imports screen appears.
2. On the action bar, click New User Import. The Properties screen appears.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the user import so Blackbaud NetCommunity users can
quickly identify the information in User Imports.
4. In the Description field, enter any additional information to identify the user import, such as an
explanation of the users imported.
5. Click Next. The User Import Wizard screen appears.

.
244
C HAPTER 4
6. Select the Upload File tab.
7. In the Load File frame, in the File field, enter the path to the *.csv file to import. To map to the
location of the import file, click Browse and use the Choose File screen.
Note: At a minimum, the imported *.csv file must contain the constituent's first and last name,
email address, and system record ID, and its first row must contain the field names. You can export
a *.csv file of this constituent information from The Raiser's Edge. For information about how to
export data from The Raiser's Edge, see The Raiser's Edge Query and Export Guide or the Export
section of the help file in The Raiser's Edge.
8. Click Upload. The Uploaded File Details frame and field mapping grid appear.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
245
Note: In the Uploaded File Details frame, the File Name field displays the selected import file.
To import a different file, click Replace this file. The Load File frame appears.
9. In the field mapping grid, the Import Field column displays the fields required to import users
into Blackbaud NetCommunity. For each import field, in the File Field column, select the field of
the import file from which to import information.
Note: When you upload an import file, the program automatically attempts to match field names in
the import file with the fields required to import to users into Blackbaud NetCommunity. You can
adjust the automatically mapped fields as necessary.
a. In the Last Name and First Name fields, select the field names in the import file that
contains the last and first name of each user.
b. In the Email Address field, select the field name in the import file that contains the email
address for each user.
c. In the Username field, select the field name in the import file that contains the user name for
each user or, to automatically generate user names, select the format to use for the user
names, such as "<Last Name> <First Name>".
If you select a user name format, specify how the user name appears. In the <Last Name>
includes and <First Name> includes fields, select whether to use all characters in the name
or only the first specific number of characters. In the Separate <First Name> and <Last
Name> with field, select the character to separate the first and last names in the user name.
You can select to display a space, a period, a dash, or an underscore, or you can select to
display no separation. Next to the Username field, the Sample field displays how user names
appear with the selected format.
d. To prevent duplicate user names, mark Ensure unique usernames. When you mark this
checkbox, the program adds a number to the end of any user name that already exists in
Blackbaud NetCommunity or is included elsewhere in the import file.
e. In the Password field, select the field name in the import file that contains the password for
each user or, to automatically generate passwords, select "<Autogenerate>".
f. In the The Raiser's Edge System Record ID field, select the field name in the import file
that contains the system record ID for each user.

.
246
C HAPTER 4
10. Select the Preview Import tab or click Next. The Preview Import tab appears.
Note: If you exit the User Import Wizard screen after you upload an import file but before you add
the import to the queue, you can return to the user import from User Imports. On the User Imports
screen, the Status column for the import is blank. For information about how to view a user
import, see "View the tabs of a user import" on page 248.
11. In the Summary of Uploaded File frame, view the total number of records included in the import
file and how many of those records are valid and how many contain exceptions.
12. In the Filter List By frame, enter the exception status of the records to view. You can select to
view all valid records, all exceptions, or all with a specific exception status. To view all records in
the import file, regardless of exception status, leave the Status field blank. For information about
the exception status, see "User Import Exception Reasons" on page 252.
13. Click Go. In the grid, records in the import file that match the entered filter criteria appear. Make
sure the fields are mapped correctly. In the Exception reason column, view the cause for any
exceptions in your import file, such as "This record is already linked to a NetCommunity user".
For more information about user import exceptions and their causes, see "User Import Exception
Reasons" on page 252.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
247
Note: The grid can display up to 50 records at a time. If you import more than 50 records, click
Prev or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
14. Select the Import File tab or click Next. The Import File tab appears.
15. In the Options for Processing Import frame, in the Process scheduling field, select when to
process the user import.
· To add the user import to the queue immediately when you click Queue Import, mark Queue
for processing.
· To add the user import to the queue at a later date when you click Queue Import, mark Queue
for processing on or after and, in the field, click the calendar and select the date to add the
process to the queue.
16. For Send email, select whether to automatically send an email to the new users added during the
import.
· To not automatically send an email to the new users, mark Do not send email after processing
import.
· To automatically send an email to the new users, mark Send email after processing import
using the following email template and, in the field, select the template on which to base the
email. To decide which template to use, consider the type of email you intend to send. The
selections that appear are categories that already exist in Templates and have a data source of
"NetCommunity Users". For more information about email templates, see "Templates" on
page 163.
Note: Regardless of your selection for Send email, when Blackbaud NetCommunity imports the
user information, it automatically creates a NetCommunity user email list that contains the new
users added during the import. You can use this email list to send future email to these users. For
information about email lists, see "Lists" on page 171.
17. Click Queue Import. You return to User Imports.
· If, in the Options for Processing Import frame, you mark Queue for processing, Blackbaud
NetCommunity imports the user information during the next scheduled user import process, as
specified in Configuration.

.
248
C HAPTER 4
· If, in the Options for Processing Import frame, you mark Queue for processing on or after,
Blackbaud NetCommunity imports the user information on or after the selected date, in
accordance with the user import process settings selected in Configuration.
Note: For information about the user import process settings in Configuration, see
"Configuration" on page 237.
View the tabs of a user import
1. From Administration, click User Imports. The User Imports screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the user import to view. You can enter the import's
name or status. For information about the import status, see "User Import Status" on page 251.
3. Click Go. In the grid, user imports that match the entered filter criteria appear.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
4. Next to the user import to view, click Click here to edit this User Import. The User Import
Wizard screen appears.
5. If, on the User Imports screen, the Status column for the user import is blank or "Queued", the
User Import Wizard screen includes the Upload File, Preview Import, and Import File tabs. For
information about how to complete these tabs, see "Create a user import" on page 243.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
249
Note: You cannot change a user import with a status of "Queued". To adjust a user import with a
status of "Queued", such as to correct any exceptions, you must first cancel the user import. For
information about how to cancel a user import, see "Cancel a queued user import" on page 249.
If, on the User Imports screen, the Status column for the user import is "Imported" or
"Exceptions", the User Import Wizard screen includes the Status and Results tabs.
· On the Status tab, view details about the current status of the import, such as the date, time, and
duration of the import; how many records the import contained and how many records imported
successfully and how many did not; and whether Blackbaud NetCommunity sent email to the
imported users.
If the user import contains exceptions, click Download Exceptions to create a *.csv file of the
exceptions. The *.csv file includes a column to explain the reason for each exception. For more
information about user import exceptions and their causes, see "User Import Exception
Reasons" on page 252.
· On the Results tab, view the user information that imported correctly and any exceptions. If
information does not import correctly, the Results tab displays the reason for the exception.
Note: To view the properties of the user import, click Properties on the action bar. The user
import Properties screen appears. You can adjust the name or description of the user import as
required.
6. To return to User Imports, click Return on the action bar.
Cancel a queued user import
You cannot change a user import with a status of "Queued". To adjust a user import with a status of
"Queued", such as to correct any exceptions, you must first cancel the user import.
1. From Administration, click User Imports. The User Imports screen appears.

.
250
C HAPTER 4
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the name of the user import to cancel, or in the Status field,
select "Queued".
3. Click Go. In the grid, user imports that match the entered filter criteria appear.
4. Next to the user import to cancel, click Click here to edit this User Import. The User Import
Wizard screen appears.
5. Select the Import File tab.
6. Click Cancel Import. The user import is removed from the queue and the Queue Import button
appears.
7. Adjust the user import as required. For information about how to create a user import, see "Create
a user import" on page 243.
8. To return to User Imports, click Return on the action bar.

.
A DM INISTRA T I O N
251
Delete a user import
1. From Administration, click User Imports. The User Imports screen appears.
2. In the Filter List By frame, enter the criteria of the user import to delete. You can enter the
import's name or status. For information about the import status, see "User Import Status" on
page 251.
3. Click Go. In the grid, user imports that match the entered filter criteria appear.
Note: The grid can display up to 50 results at a time. If you have more than 50 results, click Prev
or Next to page through the results, or select the page number to view.
4. Next to the user import to view, click Click here to delete this User Import. A message appears
to confirm the deletion of the user import.
5. Click OK. You return to User Imports. The grid no longer displays the user import.
User Import Status
After you create a user import in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you can view its current status in User
Imports. On the User Imports screen, the Status column displays the status of each user import. In the
Filter List By frame, you can also select the status of the user imports to view on the User Imports screen.
· "Imported" Blackbaud NetCommunity imported the user information and successfully added the new
users.
· "Queued" The user import is in the queue to be imported. When you create a user import, you specify
whether to import the users during the next scheduled import process or at a future date.
· "Exceptions" Blackbaud NetCommunity attempted to import the user information but failed, such as if
all records contained errors, or the import file contained no valid records.
· No status If the Status column is blank for a user import, the import is created but not yet in the queue.

.
252
C HAPTER 4
User Import Exception Reasons
After you create a user import in Blackbaud NetCommunity, you can view its exceptions, or records that
do not import correctly, in User Imports. You can also view the reason for each exception.
· Before you add the import to the queue, you can view its exceptions on the Preview Import tab of the
User Import Wizard screen. In the Summary of Uploaded File frame, the Records with exceptions
field displays how many exceptions the import file contains. In the grid, the Exception reason column
explains why each exception will not import.
· After you add the import to the queue, you can view its exceptions on the Status tab of the User Import
Wizard screen. In the Status frame, the Exceptions field displays how many exceptions the import file
contains. To view a *.csv file of the exceptions, click Download Exceptions. The *.csv file includes the
user information that did not import and a column to explain the reason for each exception.
Exceptions can occur for multiple reasons.
· "Required field missing" The import file does not contain one or more required fields.
· "Invalid field value" The email address or system record ID in the import file is invalid or in an invalid
format.
· "This record is already linked to a NetCommunity user" The constituent imported from The Raiser's
Edge is already linked to a user in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
· "Username is used" The user name specified or generated in the user import already exists in
Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Before you add the user import to the queue, you can upload a corrected import file or adjust the field
matching to resolve the exceptions. If you import a file that includes exceptions, Blackbaud
NetCommunity imports only the valid records and ignores the exceptions.

CHAPTER 5
Chapter Management
In This Chapter
"Design and Management Process" on page 254
"Chapter Management: Process Overview" on page 254
When you add chapter management into your Blackbaud NetCommunity website, you create "subsites"
within your site. You can use chapter management to implement a variety of structured segmentation at
organizations. For example, an alumni association can use chapter management to create web pages for
individual alumni classes or the different colleges at a school (for example, College of Architecture). If
your organization has committees with committee chairs, you can implement chapter management for
committee use. Chapter management can also be used to create separate web pages for city, state, or
regional chapters.
Chapter management in Blackbaud NetCommunity is comprised of multiple pieces from the program that,
together, complete the solution. The main piece, the Chapter Manager part, is contained within your
Blackbaud NetCommunity site. However, the Chapter Manager part is structured to group its pages
together in a separate, subsite organization. To begin, review the "Design and Management Process" on
page 254.

.
254
C HAPTER 5
Design and Management Process
This flow chart illustrates the design and management process for chapter management.
Chapter Management: Process Overview
Creating chapter management requires several steps in different areas of Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Step 1 -- Designate individuals for your content manager, data manager, and member roles. See "Chapter
Management Roles" on page 255.
Step 2 -- Plan your Chapter Manager site and educate everyone involved about your plans.
Step 3 -- The web designer creates the necessary parts, pages, templates, and email needed for the
Chapter Manager part type. For example, if the Chapter Page Elements you want to use for the Chapter
Manager do not exist, the web designer creates them. See "Website" on page 29 for information about
"Pages" on page 31, "Parts" on page 39, and "Layouts" on page 121. Also see "Chapter Page Element
Parts" on page 258.
Step 4 -- The Content Manager designs the Chapter Links in Blackbaud NetCommunity. See "Chapter
Links Part" on page 257.

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
255
Step 5 -- The Content Manager designs the Chapter Manager in Blackbaud NetCommunity. See "Design
Chapter Manager" on page 260.
Step 6 -- Managers solicit potential members with an email appeal. The email includes information about
your chapter and a link to the chapter site. See "Manage Chapter Pages" on page 258 and "Step 2: Email
Editor" on page 261.
Step 7 -- Members visit the chapter site. They learn about your chapter and how to become active
members. Members also communicate with your managers and other members of your chapter.
Step 8 -- A Raiser's Edge user downloads updated profile transactions on the NetCommunity page in
The Raiser's Edge. Chapter members do not register for the chapter. Therefore, Blackbaud NetCommunity
does not pass additional data to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge for processing. See
"Changes in The Raiser's Edge" on page 269.
Chapter Management Roles
Three roles exist for users of a Chapter Manager: Content Manager, Data Manager, and Member. Content
Managers and Data Managers are based on Blackbaud NetCommunity roles that you select in Roles.
Members are based on a Raiser's Edge query. In The Raiser's Edge, members are grouped together in a
query. In Blackbaud NetCommunity, you define security for the member query in Roles. As you create the
Chapter Manager part, you select the roles to assign to the Content Manager, Data Manager, and Member.
There is no user sign-up process for Chapter Manager; users are assigned to chapters based on roles.
For information about selecting the roles for your Chapter Manager, see "Add a Chapter" on page 266. For
information about Roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
Content Manager
Every Chapter Manager part has one or more Content Managers. Content Managers select a site web page
template, customize the "Chapter Page Element Parts" on page 258, edit and update content (for example,
news headlines, event calendars, and blogs), and send email to members of the chapter. These email
messages can be for membership or event purposes. Typically, Content Managers are users of the
Blackbaud NetCommunity administration area.
Note: Content Managers and Data Managers are based on Blackbaud NetCommunity roles that you select
in "Roles" on page 227. You can assign different rights to these positions or contain Content and Data
Managers in single role with the rights of both roles.
Data Manager
Every Chapter Manager part has Data Managers. Using the manager Home page on your Blackbaud
NetCommunity site, Data Managers can update a member's profile and process giving history information.
Data Managers also manage membership and event data. Typically, Data Managers are your chapter
managers (for example, a class president).

.
256
C HAPTER 5
Note: Content Managers and Data Managers are based on Blackbaud NetCommunity roles that you select
in "Roles" on page 227. You can assign different rights to these positions or contain Content and Data
Managers in single role with the rights of both roles.
Member
Members are the general users of the Chapter Manager on your site. Individuals in this group can be past
donors to your regional office or alumni class members. Use security to limit this role. Generally,
Members are your chapter site visitors.
Note: Members are in a Raiser's Edge query. In Blackbaud NetCommunity, you assign rights for the
members in "Roles" on page 227.
Anonymous User
Anonymous users can browse chapter site pages if you add a "Menu" on page 78 part that includes a link
to the page that contains the chapter site search. The chapter site search is created in "Step 6: Search Title"
on page 266 of the Chapter Manager part. Because it is the responsibility of a chapter manager to be
involved with your site and communicate to peers by broadcasting email from your site, the identity of the
chapter site visitors is likely known to you.
Note: Anonymous users might want to become members of your chapter site. Make sure to provide a way
for these users to contact your organization about joining. For example, you can add a statement that reads
"Not a member of this chapter and would like to be? Send an email to chapter@yourdomain.com."
Pre-Design Work for Chapter Management
Before creating a Chapter Manager, several key components must exist in Blackbaud NetCommunity. The
web designer creates the Chapter Manager, components are selected and used in the part. Before creating
the Chapter Manager part, make sure the following pieces exist for it:
In The Raiser's Edge, create a query of your members. In Blackbaud NetCommunity, the query is used
to assign rights for the member query role. For more information, see "Chapter Management Roles" on
page 255.
In Blackbaud NetCommunity, establish security for the Content Manager, Data Manager, and Member
positions in Roles. For more information, see "Roles" on page 227.
Create a Chapter Links part to add links on the website menu for managers and members to access a
chapter site. A manager or member views only the links to chapters in which he is a member or
manager. You should create only one Chapter Links part for your Chapter Manager part. For more
information, see "Chapter Links Part" on page 257.
Chapter Page Element part types are used by chapter managers to customize a chapter page on your
site. Chapter Page Elements are combined with other parts to create pages that offer dynamic sections
(Chapter Page Element parts) for chapter managers to customize and static sections (other parts) for
your organization to create elements that cannot be edited by a manager. These pages are designed for
members to communicate with other members and managers and for nonmembers to learn about your

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
257
chapter and hopefully become active members in your chapter. If you select more than one page, you
offer managers a set of chapter pages to customize. For example, if your organization has regional
chapters, you can create multiple web pages for each chapter. Each page contains one or more Chapter
Page Elements to use for the customization of each regional chapter page. For more information, see
"Chapter Page Element Parts" on page 258.
Create a web page that contains a User Email Preferences Form part if one does not already exist. With
this part, a website user can subscribe or unsubscribe from email lists and opt out of email from your
organization. When you create a Chapter Manager, you create an email template that managers use to
generate and send email. The email requires you to create a link to a User Email Preferences Form. For
more information, see "User Email Preferences Form" on page 110.
Create additional web pages for your chapter site. For example, you can create a static web page that
cannot be edited by a chapter manager for each local chapter in your organization. For more
information about creating web pages, see "Pages" on page 31.
Chapter Links Part
Create a Chapter Links part to add links on the website home page for managers and members to click to
access a chapter site. Managers and members view only the links to chapters in which they are members.
For example, Mark is the Data Manager for the Atlanta chapter. He is a part of the Atlanta Data Manager
role that is used for your chapter site. When he logs into your website, the Atlanta chapter link appears on
the menu. You create only one Chapter Links part for your Chapter Manager part. For information about
Chapter Manager, see "Design Chapter Manager" on page 260.
Design Chapter Links
For information about chapter management in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Design and
Management Process" on page 254. For information about the Chapter Manager part, see "Design
Chapter Manager" on page 260.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Chapter
Links.
If you are creating a new part, you must first save part properties. For information about part
properties, see "Create a part" on page 46.
Note: The name, description, type, and security information defaults automatically to the Part
Properties screen after you create the part type. To view this information, click Properties on the
toolbar or in the Action column on the Parts screen.
3. In the Title field, enter a title for your link on your website. For example, enter "Class of 1981".
4. In the Link Text frame, mark the checkbox beside the Text field in which to enter text.
a. If you mark the checkbox and enter text beside Prepend text to the chapter name, the text
appears before the chapter name. For example, if you enter "Class of" and the chapter name
in your Chapter Manager part is "1998," your chapter link appears as "Class of 1998" on your
site.
b. If you mark the checkbox and enter text beside Append text to the chapter name, the text
appears after the chapter name For example, if you enter "chapter" and the chapter name in
your Chapter Manager part is "Atlanta," your chapter link appears as "Atlanta chapter" on
your site.

.
258
C HAPTER 5
5. In the Preview frame, view the text you entered in the previous step. Confirm the Link Text
appears as you want it to on your Chapter Links part.
6. To save this content part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Chapter Page Element Parts
Create Chapter Page Elements to add dynamic and customizable sections to a web page for chapter use.
These web pages communicate the chapter's purpose and facilitate interaction among members. Members
of the chapter visit the page to learn more about the manager's involvement with your chapter and to
become involved in your organization.
When you create a Chapter Manager part, you select the possible web pages with Chapter Page Elements
to include on your site. If you select more than one page, you offer managers a set of chapter pages to
customize. For example, if your organization has multiple regional chapters, you can create one or more
web pages for each chapter. Each page contains one or more Chapter Page Elements to use for the
customization of each regional chapter page.
Note: For information about creating Chapter Page Element types, see "Page Element Types" on page 83.
Web pages using Chapter Page Elements also contain static sections that are other parts in Blackbaud
NetCommunity. Use these sections to create defaults for your organization that appear on every chapter
page. For example, you can include your chapter mission statement on the chapter page. The mission
statement is contained in a Formatted Text and Images part.
Review the following graphic for a web page that uses Chapter Page Elements and other static parts.
Chapter Page Element parts can be one of several element types. The page element types are Action,
Directory, Event Calendar, News, News Reader, Photos, Rich Text, or Text.
For information about creating Chapter Page Element types, see "Page Element Types" on page 83.
Manage Chapter Pages
When you add a Chapter Manager dart to a page on your website, chapter managers can manage chapter
pages. The Home page dashboard provides a central location for chapter managers to monitor their pages.

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
259
The action bar on the Home page dashboard allows chapter managers to navigate between tasks, monitor
and update data, edit chapter pages, send email, and search for chapter members.
· Home - To monitor their pages and perform tasks, chapter managers click Home. From the Home page,
chapter managers can select chapters to manage and click links to visit the chapter home page, design
chapter pages, view and edit chapter members, or send email. This page also displays email statistics
about the number of sent, received, and opened email messages.
· Site Pages - To preview pages and change the layout and content, chapter managers click Site Pages.
Chapter managers can select page templates, add pictures, edit text, or adjust settings such as whether
members can add, edit, and delete events on an Event Calendar. The Site Pages page is available only to
Content Managers. If a Content Manager is a member of more than one chapter site, the manager can
access multiple chapter pages.
· Email - To generate email messages and view statistics, chapter managers click Email. To view email
statistics but not recipients, chapter managers click Email Activity. The Email Activity screen displays
overall email statistics. A bar chart displays statistics for the email message selected in the Select email
to view activity field. Chapter managers can click view email to read the original email message. To
send email messages to chapter members, chapter managers click New Email. From the New Email
screen, chapter managers select email templates and create the content. The Send To field displays the
chapter name, but not individual recipients.
Screen Item
Description
Sent
The number of distinct email messages that have been sent, not
the number times those email messages have been sent. For
example, if two different messages are each sent to five
addresses, the number sent is "2."
Number Recipients
How many times distinct email messages have been received.
In other words, the number of times email messages have been
sent, minus failed deliveries. For example, if two different
messages are each sent to five addresses, the number of
recipients is "10." But if two messages are delivered
unsuccessfully, the number of recipients is "8."
Number Opened
The number of email recipients who opened email messages.
For example, if you two different messages are each sent to five
addresses but only two are opened, the number opened is "2."
Total Sent
The number of times the email message in the Select email to
view activity field was sent.
Opted Out
The number of times the email message in the Select email to
view activity field was not delivered because the recipient
requested not to receive the email message.
Invalid Email
The number of times the email message in the Select email to
view activity field was not delivered because of an invalid
email address.
Opened
The number of times the email message in the Select email to
view activity field was opened.
· Members - To search for chapter members, chapter managers click Members. A query created in The
Raiser's Edge defines the members of a chapter. Chapter managers can search by criteria such as name,
nickname, gender, and birth date. The Members page is available only to Data Managers. If a Data
Manager is a member of more than one chapter site, the manager can access members of multiple
chapters.

.
260
C HAPTER 5
Note: If the Content Manager and Data Manager are contained in the same role, the manager views both
Site Pages and Members on the action bar. If your Content Manager and Data Manager are separate roles,
the Content Manager views Site Pages and the Data Manager views Members.
Design Chapter Manager
To create and design a Chapter Manager, begin with "Step 1: Add Chapter Site Pages" on page 260 and
follow the instructions for the remaining procedures.
Note: For navigational purposes, make sure you have a link on your website for Content and Data
Managers to use that directs the manager to the chapter site. You can add a link using the Chapter Links
part, create a chapter search link for your menu, or add a Chapter Console Link in an Action Chapter Page
Element. For more information about navigating chapter management, see "Design and Management
Process" on page 254.
Step 1: Add Chapter Site Pages
In this step, you select roles for the Content Manager, Data Manager, and Member. Before creating a
Chapter Manager part, you must create the queries for the member role in The Raiser's Edge. Then,
add the security for the role in Blackbaud NetCommunity in "Roles" on page 227.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
If you are creating a new part, you must first save part properties. For more information about part
properties, see "Create a part" on page 46.
Note: After you create the part type, the name, description, type, and security information default
automatically to the Part Properties screen. To view this, click Properties on the toolbar or in the
Actions column on the Pages screen.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Actions column. The Edit Part screen appears for Chapter
Manager and defaults to the Manager tab.
3. To add a chapter site page, click Add Page. A grid appears.
a. In the Page column, select the existing page, with a Chapter Page Element, to display on your
website.
b. In the Display Name field, enter a page reference name that chapter managers can easily
identify. This name does not appear on your site for public viewing. The name appears as a
page option chapter managers use to select their chapter manager page. For example, enter
"Greenville Chapter - Red" in the Display Name field for one page, and enter "Greenville
Chapter - Blue" for a second page. When a manager selects to edit his chapter page, these two
page options appear for the chapter manager to select from.

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
261
c. If this is the default page, select the option in the Home Page column. Each Chapter Manager
part must have a default page.
To remove the page from your site, click Remove in the Action column.
Step 2: Email Editor
1. To create email designs for chapter managers to use for sending email, in the Email Designs
frame, click Add Email.
The new email screen appears.
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the email.
The program uses the personal page owner's email address for the From Address field and the
owner's name for the Name field.
3. In the box, enter the content of the email. To customize email content, select fields in the Merge
Fields field. To format the email content's appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. For more
information about the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
4. To link to a User Email Preferences Form part, click the Insert Hyperlink button on the toolbar. In
the Create Link to Special Page frame, select the User Email Preferences Form for the Chapter
Manager part. If it does not exist, you must create the form in Parts. For more information about
creating a link, see "Create Page Link" on page 25. For more information about creating a User
Email Preferences Form part, see "User Email Preferences Form" on page 110.

.
262
C HAPTER 5
Warning: A link to a User Email Preferences Form part is required for each email design you
create for the Chapter Manager part. This way, members can unsubscribe to the email.
Step 3: Chapter Members
1. In the Directory Title field, enter a name for the directory.
2. In the Search Form frame, in the Split search fields into field, select the number of columns of
search fields to appear in the criteria table. You can display up to five columns.
To process a search while the user browses your Directory page, mark Load unfiltered results
when this part is loaded. When you mark this checkbox, the Directory search processes before
the user enters criteria and clicks Search on your website.
3. In the Results frame, set up how to display search results on your Directory page.
a. In the Show navigation controls field, select where the navigation buttons will appear. When
the Directory search returns results, the navigation buttons appear "Above the results",
"Below the results", or "Both above and below the results".
b. The Directory search can return up to 500 results that match the criteria entered by a site user.
In the Results per page field, select the maximum number of results to appear on a page
when a site user searches the directory. You can display up to 50 results per page.
c. In the No records found message field, enter the message to appear if no records meet the
search criteria the user enters to search the Directory on your website. By default, the
message "No directory entries match your criteria" appears.

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
263
4. Right-click and drag fields from the Profile Fields box on the left and drop them in the Search
Form Fields box on the right. You can also select the field and click the right arrow to move it.
Select fields the user can search by, such as First Name or Last Name.
The attributes available in the Constituent Attributes tree view are selected in "System Options"
on page 234 in Administration. On the website, multiple-value attribute fields, such as
Organization type, become drop-down boxes with the various attributes available as selections.
To arrange the order of fields in the list, click Up and Down.
Note: The fields in the Search Form Fields box and the Listing Fields box do not have to match.
5. To select which fields appear when the search finds a match, right-click and drag fields from
Profile Fields to Listing Fields.
For example, you select to list the member's last name, first name, birth date, address, and whether
or not they want to receive email. In this case, the last name is the link. When results appear, the
last name has a line underneath it and changes color when you move your mouse over it, indicating
it is a link. When a website user clicks the last name link, the published profile information for that
directory member appears.
6. To save the part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
264
C HAPTER 5
Step 4: Profile Editor
If you include a profile editor for the Chapter Manager part, Data Managers can update a member's
profile on your website. The updated profile information downloads to The Raiser's Edge.
1. To include a profile update form for Data Managers, mark Display Profile Update.
Note: Review the table at the end of this procedure to learn about the features on your Chapter
Manager part when you do not mark Display Profile Update and Display Giving History, mark
both checkboxes, or mark one checkbox and not the other.
2. In the Section field, select the type of profile design to create. Your options include Bio, Preferred
Address, Business, Phones and Email, Spouse, Constituent Attributes, Primary Alumni, and
Education Attributes.
Each Section field option includes fields from the corresponding area in The Raiser's Edge. For
example, if you select Spouse, spouse relationship fields appear that are in The Raiser's Edge.
When a user enters spouse information on your website, you can download the information
directly to the spouse fields in The Raiser's Edge.
If you select Constituent Attributes, the constituent attributes that appear on your User Profile
Form can have multiple values. For example, if your Constituent Attribute is "Mentor", a Mentor
field appears with a drop-down arrow on the profile form on your website. The values from the list
are the table entries set up for the attribute in The Raiser's Edge. For Mentor, the values can be
Algebra, Painting, or Construction, for example.

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
265
Warning: For constituent attributes to have multiple table entries on the profile form on your
website, you must first make them accessible from The Raiser's Edge. Click Administration,
System Options on the navigation bar. In the Attributes frame, mark the constituent attribute
checkbox to include in Blackbaud NetCommunity. For more information, see "System Options"
on page 234.
3. In the Heading field, enter the text to appear at the top of your profile design. For example, you
can enter "My Biographical Page" for your biographical profile.
4. Select the fields to appear on your profile design in the grid. For details about the grid, see "Chart:
Display Profile Update and Display Giving History" on page 268.
Step 5: Giving History Editor
If you select to include Giving History in your Chapter Manager part, managers can create a Giving
History list for individual members on the site.
1. To include giving history information, mark Display Giving History.
Note: Review the table in "Step 4: Profile Editor" on page 264 to learn about the features on your
chapter pages when you do not mark Display Profile Update and Display Giving History, mark
both checkboxes, or mark one checkbox and not the other.
2. In the List Name field, enter the name for the Giving History for your website.
3. In the Message box, enter message information to appear below the Giving History name on your
site.
4. In the Filtering Options frame, to select the filters for giving history information, click Modify.
You can narrow results by Gift Types, Campaigns, Funds, and Appeals.
5. To include soft credit gifts in the giving history, mark Include Soft Credits.
6. In the Descriptive Text field, enter the text to display in the giving history to indicate a soft credit
gift. For example, enter "soft credit".

.
266
C HAPTER 5
Step 6: Search Title
Anonymous users can browse chapter site pages if you add a "Menu" on page 78 part to your website
that includes a link to the page containing the chapter site search (created in this step). Results for
anonymous users contain a hyperlink list of chapter names on your website. The chapter site links
direct the anonymous user to the chapter home page. If you prohibit anonymous rights to the home
page in "Roles" on page 227, the anonymous user is directed automatically to the user sign-up page on
your site. This way, you can identify your chapter site users by requiring anonymous users to sign up
for your site if they want to browse your chapter pages.
1. In the Title field, enter the name of the chapter site search. The title you enter appears first on the
chapter search page.
This search is used by members or anonymous users to search for a chapter page. Also, members
can view other chapter members on this screen. If you do not enter a name, Chapter Search appears
as the title for the site search screen.
2. To save the part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Add a Chapter
You can create a new chapter based on an existing chapter. To do this, in the chapter list grid, select the
chapter to edit. In the Actions column, click Click here to copy this chapter. The Copy screen
appears. In the Chapter name field, enter a new chapter name. To return to the Chapters tab, click
Save and Close.
1. At the top of the Edit Part screen, select the Chapters tab.
2. On the action bar, click New Chapter. The Chapter Editor: New Chapter screen appears.
3. In the Chapter field, enter the name of your chapter site. For example, enter "Atlanta". This field
is limited to 40 characters.
4. In the Content Manager Roles frame, click Change to add a role for content managers. The
Select Roles screen appears.
In the Select column beside the roles to add, mark the checkbox beside the role for the Chapter
Manager part and click OK. You return to the Chapter Editor: New Chapter screen. For more
information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
5. Repeat Step 4 for the Data Manager Roles and the Member Roles frames.
Only roles with a Raiser's Edge query selected in the Base role membership on a query field in
Roles appear in the Member Roles frame. Before creating a Chapter Manager part, you must
create queries for the member role in The Raiser's Edge. Then, add the security for the role in
Blackbaud NetCommunity in "Roles" on page 227

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
267
Tip: A Content Manager is responsible for tasks such as selecting templates, customizing Chapter
Page Elements, and updating content. A Data Manager is responsible for tasks such as updating a
member's profile information and processing giving history information. A Member is a chapter
site visitor. For more information, see "Chapter Management Roles" on page 255.
6. To return to the Chapters tab on the Edit Part screen, click Save and Close.
7. To preview the chapter's home page, in the Actions column, click Click here to view this
chapter's home page. The designated Home Page appears. If the Content Manager for the
chapter has edited the home page, his changes appear on the page.
Tip: The chapter Home Page is selected on "Step 1: Add Chapter Site Pages" on page 260.
To close the preview page, click the X in the upper right corner.
8. To save and close the Chapter Manager part, click Save and Close on the Edit Part screen.
Edit a Chapter
1. At the top of the Edit Part screen, select the Chapters tab.
2. To search for an existing chapter, enter a partial name in the Chapter Name field. In the Selected
Roles box, to search for a chapter that contains a specific role, mark the corresponding checkbox
for the role. At the bottom of the chapter list grid, if you know the page number where the chapter
is stored, select it in the Page field.

.
268
C HAPTER 5
Tip: If roles do not appear in the Selected Roles box, click the Select Roles link under the box. A
Select Roles screen appears. Mark the checkbox for the roles you want to appear in the Selected
Roles box. For information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
3. In the chapter list grid, select the chapter to edit.
4. In the Actions column, click Click here to edit this chapter. The Chapter Editor screen appears.
5. Make the changes for the Chapter name field or the Roles frames.
Tip: A Content Manager is responsible for tasks such as selecting templates, customizing Chapter
Page Elements, and updating content. A Data Manager is responsible for tasks such as updating a
member's profile information and processing giving history information. A Member is a chapter
site visitor. For more information, see "Chapter Management Roles" on page 255.
6. To return to the Chapters tab on the Edit Part screen, click Save and Close.
7. To save and close the Chapter Manager part, click Save and Close on the Edit Part screen.
Chart: Display Profile Update and Display Giving History
Review the following chart to learn about the features on your Chapter Manager part when you do not
mark Display Profile Update and Display Giving History, mark both checkboxes, or mark one checkbox
and not the other.
Display Profile
Display Giving
Update checkbox
History checkbox
Feature
marked?
marked?
No
No
Results from member search are not hyperlinked.

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
269
Display Profile
Display Giving
Update checkbox
History checkbox
Feature
marked?
marked?
Yes
Yes
Results from member search are hyperlinked.
When a member name is clicked, the member
profile appears. A manager can update the profile.
Also, the manager can access the member's giving
history by clicking Giving History in the right
corner on the profile page.
Yes
No
Results from member search are hyperlinked.
When the member name is clicked, the member
profile appears. Managers can update the profile.
No
Yes
Results from member search are hyperlinked.
When the member name is clicked, the giving
history for the member appears.
Changes in The Raiser's Edge
Chapter members do not register for the chapter. As explained in "Chapter Management Roles" on
page 255, a user's constituent record must be in a Raiser's Edge query that is contained in a Blackbaud
NetCommunity role. When creating the Chapter Manager part, the role must be selected as either the
Content Manager, Data Manager, or Member role. These steps must be performed by your organization for
a user to access the chapter site. Therefore, Blackbaud NetCommunity data does not pass to the
NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge for downloading.
The only exception occurs when a data manager updates a member's profile. When this happens, a profile
transaction downloads the updated profile information to The Raiser's Edge. For more information, see
"User Profile Updates" on page 345.

.
270
C HAPTER 5

.
C HAPTER M ANAG E M ENT
271

.
272
C HAPTER 5

CHAPTER 6
Team Fundraising
In This Chapter
"Design and Management Process" on page 273
"Team Fundraising: Process Overview" on page 274
Using Team Fundraising, you can generate an interactive web page that drives volunteers, participants,
donors, solicitors, and others to your site. Team Fundraising is used to bring awareness and help raise
funds for a particular cause that typically centers around an event.
For example, your organization assists the medical field with travels to countries to provide free aid and
treatment. You find the medical volunteers, provide training, and raise support for expenses. For the first
time, you are hosting a sailing race complete with captains, teams, and team members to benefit this. You
want to use your website to generate as much energy and volunteer work and as many donations as
possible. Using Team Fundraising, you can designate a Raiser's Edge fund for the event, allow solicitors to
sign up as captains or team members, allow participants to customize web pages for site visitors, and create
a donation page for visitors to make contributions. In addition, you can link events to Team Fundraising
and generate welcome and forgotten password email.
Design and Management Process
Team Fundraising contains numerous features. When you create this section of your site, you should be
prepared to allocate extra time for planning and design. However, once you create and upload Team
Fundraising to your website, it becomes a useful tool that generates awareness, new constituents, new
donations, and new volunteers.

.
274
C HAPTER 6
This flow chart illustrates the design and management process for Team Fundraising.
Team Fundraising: Process Overview
Creating a Fundraiser part requires several steps in different areas of Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Step 1: Designate individuals for your participant, supporter, The Raiser's Edge user, and Blackbaud
NetCommunity web designer roles. See "Team Fundraising Roles" on page 275.
Step 2: Plan your fundraiser and educate everyone involved about your plans. During the planning phase,
determine the team and level hierarchies for your fundraiser.
Step 3: The Blackbaud NetCommunity web designer creates necessary parts, pages, email templates, and
notifications needed for the Fundraiser part. For example, if the Fundraiser Page Elements you want to use
for the Fundraiser do not exist, the web designer creates them. See "Pages" on page 31, "Parts" on page 39,
"Fundraiser Page Elements Parts" on page 276, and "Email" on page 163.
Step 4: The Blackbaud NetCommunity web designer creates and designs the Fundraiser in Blackbaud
NetCommunity. See "Design the Fundraiser Part" on page 280.
Step 5: Participants (solicitors) or individuals sign up on your website as team captains or team members.
See "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
275
Step 6: Participants solicit peers via an email appeal. The email includes information about your
organization, the fundraiser you are hosting, and a link to the participant's page on your site. See
"Messages" on page 177 and "Step 4: Create Email Designs" on page 289.
Step 7: Supporters, people who respond to the participant's email, visit your website. They learn about
your cause and your fundraiser. Supporters often become motivated to participate. A supporter can sign up
as team captain of a new team or team member and can make a donation on your site. These people
become constituents in your database.
Step 8: A user downloads transactions to The Raiser's Edge.
First, Sign-ups download to either link the participant to an existing constituent record in the database or a
new constituent record is created for the participant.
Next, Fundraiser transactions download to The Raiser's Edge to store solicitor and team member
information.
If the site user signed up for an event, event registrations are then downloaded.
If a solicitor updates a record for an individual to which he is assigned, a profile transaction is downloaded.
Lastly, donations are downloaded. For more information about downloading transactions to The Raiser's
Edge, see "Changes in The Raiser's Edge" on page 308.
Team Fundraising Roles
Individuals in a fundraiser serve these four main roles: participant (or solicitor), supporter, The Raiser's
Edge user, and Blackbaud NetCommunity web designer. Before proceeding with further planning and
design, make sure you have individuals to fill these roles.
Participant
The participant is typically a solicitor and can be a team captain or team member. Additionally, the person
can join individually (not as a part of a team), join an existing team, or create a new team establishing
himself as captain. Responsibilities include sending email to peers about the cause and fundraiser,
directing them to your website, soliciting them for donations, and much more. When you create the
Fundraiser part and the participant joins your site, many features appear on your site automatically. The
participant has a Home Page dashboard used for monitoring team and individual goals. He can view the
number of new donations, send an email acknowledgement for each, view higher level team statistics (if
they exist), and view statistics about who made a donation and who opened an email.
Supporter
The supporter is typically contacted by a participant. The contact is made via an email sent from the
participant by Blackbaud NetCommunity. The email contains a link to the participant page for each
individual to make a contribution. After a contribution is made, you download supporters to The Raiser's
Edge. This creates new constituents in your database. Additionally, supporters can search for and locate
existing teams on your site.
The Raiser's Edge User
The Raiser's Edge user ensures several pieces of information exist in The Raiser's Edge before you create
a Fundraiser part. The fund the Fundraiser uses must exist. The Raiser's Edge user can create teams for the
Fundraiser on the Solicitors tab in the fund record. Create any constituent attributes you want to track for
new participants and new supporters. For example, you may want to store T-shirt sizes for new
participants. To link an event to the Fundraiser, this event should already exist in The Raiser's Edge. For
example, to invite all donors from the Fundraiser to your Commodore's Ball, you need an event record in
The Raiser's Edge. Lastly, any Raiser's Edge reports used to analyze Fundraiser results must be created.

.
276
C HAPTER 6
Blackbaud NetCommunity Web Designer
The Blackbaud NetCommunity web designer designs and creates the Fundraiser part in the administration
area of Blackbaud NetCommunity. He creates additional part types that work with the Fundraiser
including Fundraiser Page Elements, Fundraiser Dashboard, and Report (Fundraiser). The designer also
creates the email template used by participants for the Fundraiser. Many other decisions and elements are
needed for a successful Fundraiser. We recommend that the designer carefully reads and follows "Design
the Fundraiser Part" on page 280.
Pre-Design Work for Team Fundraising
Before creating a Fundraiser, several key elements and parts should exist in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
These elements are used as the web designer creates the Fundraiser part. Before creating the Fundraiser,
make sure you have these existing elements and parts for your Fundraiser.
A web page must exist that can display the Fundraiser part. For information about creating pages, see
"Parts" on page 39.
Fundraiser Page Element part types are used by participants to customize a personal web page on your
site. Participants send supporters a link to this Fundraiser page, which is designed for supporters to
learn more about your cause and to make donations. Depending on the purpose of the fundraiser, you
can create more than one Fundraiser page to offer participants a choice. For example, if your school is
hosting a jump rope fundraiser, you can create a Fundraiser page with a boy theme and a page with a
girl theme. You can offer a choice of pages to participants. However, a participant can choose only one
Fundraiser personal page. Fundraiser Page Elements combine with other parts to create pages that offer
dynamic sections (Fundraiser Page Element parts) for participants to customize and static sections
(other parts) for your organization to create elements that participants cannot edit. For more information
about Fundraiser Page Element and how to create them, see "Fundraiser Page Elements Parts" on
page 276.
Note: At least one Fundraiser Page Element must exist before you can create a Fundraiser part.
For a Fundraiser, you must create a welcome email, a forgotten password email, and an
acknowledgement email for donations. A new user can register for your Fundraiser and become a
registrant of your Blackbaud NetCommunity site at the same time. Therefore, while you can design
new email for your Fundraiser as you create it, you might want to design email before. For more
information about how to design email messages, see "Step 4: Create Email Designs" on page 289,
"Step 9: Configure Emails" on page 300, or "Messages" on page 177.
Fundraiser Page Elements Parts
Create Fundraiser Page Elements to add sections to a web page that are dynamic and can be customized for
a participant's (solicitor's) use. These web pages are personal pages for the participant. Supporters visit the
page to learn more about your organization and the participant's involvement with your organization.
When you create a Fundraiser part, you select one or more possible web pages with Fundraiser Page
Elements to include on your site. If you select more than one of these pages, you offer participants a choice
of personal pages. For example, if your school is hosting a jump rope fundraiser, you can create a
Fundraiser page with a boy theme and another with a girl theme.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
277
Web pages using Fundraiser Page Elements also contain static sections that are other parts in Blackbaud
NetCommunity. Use these sections to create defaults to appear on every solicitor's personal page. For
example, you can include your organization's mission statement on the web page. You can place this part
next to a Fundraiser Page Element. If you select the web page when creating a Fundraiser, the part
containing the mission appears on every solicitor's personal page.
Fundraiser Page Element parts can be one of several element types including Action, Comments, Donor
List, Photos, Profile, Rich Text, Team List, Text, or Thermometer.
For information about creating Fundraiser Page Element types, see "Page Element Types" on page 83.
This graphic demonstrates how a web page uses Fundraiser Page Elements and static parts.
Note: To allow donations from Team Fundraising, we recommend that you create a part or element with a
Donate button linking to the donation page. For more information, see "Step 7: Donation Form" on
page 293.
Manage Fundraiser Pages
When you add a Fundraiser part to a page on your website, participants or solicitors can manage
Fundraiser pages. The Home page dashboard provides a central location for them to manage these pages.
The action bar on the Home page dashboard allows participants to navigate between tasks, monitor and
update data, edit the Fundraiser page, send email, maintain email contacts, add and view offline donations,
and manage the Fundraiser team.

.
278
C HAPTER 6
· My Home - To manage the Fundraiser, participants or solicitors can click My Home. From the My
Home page, participants can click links to design and visit their web pages, send email, or view and
enter offline gifts. Status bars on the page display the progress of the participant and team (and subteam,
if one exists). This page also displays statistics about the number of visits a personal Fundraiser page
receives, the date of the last visit, the number of email messages a participant sends, and the number of
have that are opened.
· My Activity - To view statistics about email messages, participants or solicitors click My Activity. To
view a list of email messages, participants select "Emails" on the action bar of the My Activity page. For
each message, details appear about the number of times it was sent, the recipients, and whether it was
opened or forwarded. Participants can sort email messages according to whether they were opened,
unopened, forwarded, or delivered unsuccessfully. To view a list of contacts who received email
messages and offline donors, participants can select "People" on the action bar. For each contact, details
appear about the number of messages received and whether they opened or forwarded messages. For
each offline donor, details appear about when and how much they donated. Participants can sort contacts
and offline donors according to a variety of criteria, including whether they opened email messages,
forwarded email messages, were asked to donate, donated, or were thanked. From the My Activity page,
participants can also click View Email to read the original email messages.
· My Page - To preview Fundraiser pages and change the layout and content, participants or solicitors
click My Page. Participants can select a page template, add pictures, edit text, or adjust settings such the
color for a Thermometer page element. Participants can manage their personal Fundraiser pages from
the My Page page, but team captains can manage the main Team Fundraiser page from the My [Team
Name] page.
· Send Email - To generate email messages, participants or solicitors click Send Email. Participants can
select contacts from the address book or create contacts to add to the address book. After participants
select the contacts, a preview screen displays the names, email addresses, and greetings that will be
used. From this screen, page owners can change greetings or click contact names or email addresses to
change contact information. Participants can select email templates and create the content on the Send
Email page. Team captains can also send team email from the My [Team Name] page. Email messages
sent from the team captain dashboard do not use a Blackbaud NetCommunity email template and are
generated "on the fly" by team captains. These email recipients do not appear when team captains select
People on the action bar of the My Activity page, but email statistics for these messages appear when
team captains select Emails.
· Send Thanks - To generate acknowledgement email messages, participants or solicitors click Send
Thanks. A grid displays donors who have not been thanked for contributions to the participant's
Fundraiser page. Participants can change email addresses and greetings in the grid. The changes are
saved to the address book. To exclude individuals from an acknowledgement, participants can unmark
the checkboxes beside the names. To remove individuals from the list, participants can mark the
checkboxes in the Already Thanked column. Participants can select email templates and create the
content on the Send Thanks page. Once an acknowledgement is sent, the recipients are removed from
the grid.
· Send Invoices - When Support Performance-based Fundraising is marked on the Step 2: Fundraiser
Options screen, participants can raise donations based on per-unit performance such as miles walked in
a walk-a-thon. To generate pledge invoices, participants or solicitors click Send Invoices. This button
appears only when Activity Closed and Pledge Processing are marked on the Step 2: Fundraiser
Options screen and a total is entered in the My Details frame on the My Home page. A grid on the Send
Invoices page displays donors who made per-unit pledges. Participants can change email addresses and
greetings in the grid. The changes are saved to the address book. To exclude individuals from an invoice,
participants can unmark the checkboxes beside the names. To remove individuals from the list,
participants can mark the checkboxes in the Already Collected column. Participants can select email
templates and create the content on the Send Invoices page. Once an invoice is sent, the recipients are
removed from the grid.
For more information, see "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
279
· Address Book - To store email addresses and contact information for solicitations, reminders, and
acknowledgements, participants or solicitors click Address Book. To add contacts, participants click
New Contact. To use *.csv files to import email addresses from programs such as Outlook or Eudora,
participants click Import Contacts. Anyone who joins a team or makes a donation through a
participant's Fundraiser page is also added to the address book. In addition, contact information added
on the Send Email, Send Thanks, or Offline Donations pages is saved to the address book. The address
book displays up to 10 contacts per page, and the number of contacts and number of pages appear below
the grid. The action bar above the grid controls how contacts appear. To display all contacts, participants
click ALL. If there are more than 10 contacts, participants can use the links below the grid to navigate to
additional pages. To view contacts in alphabetic groups, participants click the letters in the action bar.
Contacts are organized by last name and by organization name, which means contacts can appear twice
and participants can search by last name or organization name. To select a contact, participants mark the
checkbox beside the name. To select all contacts on a page, participants mark the checkbox beside the
Name column. To select all contacts in the address book, participants mark the checkbox beside the
Name column and then click the link that appears above the grid. To delete a contact, participants select
the contact and click Delete on the action bar.
Note: If a participant of a previous Fundraiser signs up for a Fundraiser, that participant's address book
automatically imports to the new Fundraiser. This includes individuals added manually to the address book
and those assigned to the participant (or Class Agent).
When creating a Fundraiser, if you mark the Display Solicitor Assignments checkbox in "Step 2:
Fundraiser Options" on page 282, the solicitor assignments appear in the address book. Individuals in
this list integrate from The Raiser's Edge Solicitors tab in the fund record. If you show solicitor
assignments, the View field appears in the address book. Using this field, users can select to view
Personal Contacts or Assigned Constituents. When a solicitor (also called a Class Agent for higher
education) visits the address book, the latest list of assigned solicitors from the fund record in The
Raiser's Edge updates to the address book.
Solicitors are assigned to constituents in The Raiser's Edge on the Relationships tab. For information
about this process, see The Raiser's Edge Solicitors chapter in the Constituent Data Entry Guide.
Tip: You can update the assigned solicitors from The Raiser's Edge with solicitor address books by
synchronizing the fund for the Fundraiser. For more information, see "Step 1: The Raiser's Edge Fund and
Administrator Roles" on page 280.
· Offline Donations - To enter cash or check donations, participants or solicitors click Offline
Donations. When Allow Offline Donation Entry is marked on the Step 2: Fundraiser Options screen,
an Enter Offline Gifts link appears on the My Home page and an Enter New Donation button appears
on the Offline Donations page. Offline gifts count toward participant and team goals. A grid on the
Offline Donations page displays offline donations. For each donation, details such as donor name,
amount, and payment method appear. Participants can edit or delete donations from the grid, and they
can sort according to whether they are pending, accepted, or rejected. When contact information is
added on the Offline Donations page, it is saved to the address book. However, when participants
change contact information on the Offline Donations page, the address book is not updated.
Note: If an offline donation has a status of "Accepted", participants cannot change it from the Offline
Donations page. The "Accepted" status means a user in The Raiser's Edge downloaded the offline
donation. To request a change in The Raiser's Edge, a call must be made to your office.
For more information, see "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282 and "Offline Donations for a Team
Fundraiser" on page 304.

.
280
C HAPTER 6
· My [Team Name] - To manage Fundraiser teams, team captains click My [Team Name]. This button
displays the participant's team name. It appears only for participants or solicitors who are designated as
team captains. From the My [Team Name] page, team captains can click links to design and visit the
main Team Fundraiser page, send email to the team, or add team members. Status bars on the page
display the progress of the team (and subteam, if one exists) and team members. The buttons beside the
team members allow captains to resend Guest Registration emails or remove team members, but team
captains cannot remove members added through an event registration form. The My [Team Name] page
also displays statistics about the number of visits the Fundraiser page receives and the date of the last
visit.
When Allow team captains to add new team members via their dashboards is marked on the Step 2:
Fundraiser Options screen, the Add New [ ] Member link appears on the My [Team Name] page. This
link directs team captains to the Add New Member screen, where they can enter a first name, last name,
and email address and click Add Member.
If all three fields match an existing member of the Fundraiser, then team captains cannot add the
member.
If the name and email address fields match an existing website user who is not a member of the
Fundraiser, then the new member is linked to the user record. The Guest Registration email takes the
user directly to the Participant Login page instead of the New User Login page.
Design the Fundraiser Part
Team Fundraising requires the creation of several pieces from the program before you can create a
Fundraiser, and it is important to understand all of the information leading up to this section.
Warning: We strongly recommend that you read "Team Fundraising: Process Overview" on page 274
before you design the Fundraiser part.
The following procedures explain each step of the Team Fundraiser creation process.
Step 1: The Raiser's Edge Fund and Administrator Roles
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Fundraiser. The first screen displays "Part 1 of 9".

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
281
If you are creating a new part, you must first save part properties. For information about part
properties, see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In The Raiser's Edge Fund field, click Select to select The Raiser's Edge fund to credit donations
for this Fundraiser. The Fund Search screen appears. For information about how to use the search
screen, see "Search Screen" on page 24. The Goal, Start Date, End Date, and Category fields
default from the fund record.
Note: After an individual signs up as a participant or a donation is received, you can no longer
change The Raiser's Edge fund in The Raiser's Edge Fund field.
4. To synchronize the Fundraiser with data from The Raiser's Edge, mark Use Fundraiser
Synchronize schedule. The data updates the next time your Blackbaud NetCommunity Service
runs. You set the service frequency in Configuration in the Fundraiser Synchronize frame. For
more information, see "Configuration" on page 237.
If you plan to include assigned solicitors (see "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282) in your
Fundraiser, you may need to periodically re-synchronize the fund you select in this step. Clicking
Synchronize Now updates any changes made on the Solicitors tab in the fund record. This updates
the list of assigned solicitors in the Address Book. A solicitor (or Class Agent) updates the list
when he or she visits the Address Book. For more information, see the Address Book section in
"Manage Fundraiser Pages" on page 277.
For more information about Raiser's Edge funds, see The Raiser's Edge Campaigns, Funds, &
Appeals Data Entry Guide.

.
282
C HAPTER 6
Tip: If you use The Raiser's Edge 7.83, you can edit the Blackbaud NetCommunity data on a gift
record in The Raiser's Edge for a gift originally from Blackbaud NetCommunity. You can edit the
gift amount, gift date, comments, and solicitor information from Blackbaud NetCommunity. When
you synchronize the Fundraiser, changes made to the data in The Raiser's Edge appear in
Blackbaud NetCommunity. If you edit solicitor information, you cannot distribute the gift to
multiple solicitors. The gift can have only one solicitor.
5. In the Administrator Roles frame, mark the checkbox for each role that needs Administrator
rights for participant dashboards. Users with Administrator rights can edit participant dashboards.
To do this, a Blackbaud NetCommunity user with Supervisor rights must send the web page URL
link from the user record (in Users) to the Administrator. The Administrator (or Supervisor) clicks
the link to access the dashboard and make the necessary modifications.
For information about the participant dashboard, see "Manage Fundraiser Pages" on page 277. For
information about roles and users, see "Security" on page 223.
Step 2: Fundraiser Options
When completing Step 2, it is important to read "Create Team Hierarchy in a Fundraiser Part" on
page 301.
1. On the Fundraiser options screen, you define join options for individuals and teams.
2. To create hierarchical teams with multiple levels for the Fundraiser, click Add Level in the Team
Levels frame. A grid appears so you can create team levels.
a. In the Display Name column, enter the name of the team. For example, enter "Corporate
Sponsor".
b. To allow site users to join the level, mark Allow Join. You must mark at least one Allow Join
checkbox in your existing rows.
Note: Blackbaud NetCommunity does not support solicitors reporting to solicitors.
c. To allow site users to create a team on this level, mark Allow Create.
It is important to understand that unless you mark the Allow Create checkbox in the top row,
you are permitting participants the right to create a team that is a sublevel of the previous row.
For information about team hierarchy in Team Fundraising, see "Create Team Hierarchy in a
Fundraiser Part" on page 301.
d. In the Max Participants column, enter the maximum number of participants for the team. If
there is no maximum number, leave the field blank.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
283
If the maximum number of participants is met, the Join button is disabled for website users
on the Team Fundraiser search page. In addition, the team does not appear in the Create
team under field when a participant selects Create a new team. Also, if the maximum
number of participants is met, the Add New [ ] Member link is disabled for participants on
the team captain dashboard.
Note: If the maximum number of participants is met, you can still add participants on the
Solicitors tab on The Raiser's Edge fund record to increase the number of participants for a team.
To update Blackbaud NetCommunity, synchronize The Raiser's Edge and the Fundraiser. For
information about synchronizing data, see "Step 1: The Raiser's Edge Fund and Administrator
Roles" on page 280.
e. To remove the level from your site, click Remove in the Action column.
f. Repeat steps a. through e. to add more team levels. Each new level represents a sublevel of
the previous team level. You can add up to 10 team levels. For more information about team
hierarchy in Team Fundraising, see "Create Team Hierarchy in a Fundraiser Part" on
page 301.
3. To allow site users to join as individuals, mark Allow Join as Individual. This allows the user to
participate in your organization's fundraiser without being a member of a team.
4. To allow participants to create unique teams that do not follow the team hierarchy defined in the
Team Levels frame, mark Allow Independent Teams. When you mark this checkbox,
participants can also create sublevel teams not defined in the Team Levels frame.
5. In the Minimum Goal field, enter the minimum amount a solicitor must raise for your cause.
6. In the Suggested Goal field, enter the goal for solicitors to raise for your cause. Suggested goal
amounts add up to the total team goal amount. When a participant joins the Team Fundraiser, the
Suggested Goal amount defaults in the Individual Goal field on the signup web page.
7. In the Constituent Code field, select a constituent code to add for anyone not already in your
database who joins. Your website users do not view this information. You download the
information to The Raiser's Edge.
For information about how to select constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see
"Constituent Codes" on page 26.
For more information about downloading information to The Raiser's Edge, see "The Raiser's
Edge NetCommunity Page" on page 329.
8. To display a progress status bar for the user to view during the Team Fundraiser registration, mark
Display Progress Indicator. If the Fundraiser part does not include an event, a three-step progress
bar appears at the top of each Team Fundraiser for the website user.

.
284
C HAPTER 6
Review the following information for registration details.
a. Step 1: Register -- This is the registration page. If you mark the Require Waiver checkbox,
waiver information is included on this page. If the user is a member of your website, this page
does not appear.
b. Step 2: Join Options -- The individual goal amount for a participant appears at the top of the
second page. The amount defaults from the Suggested Goal field. Join options also appear.
For example, Create a new team appears.
c. Step 3: My Dashboard -- After the user completes the first two registration steps, the
participant dashboard page appears. For information about this page, see "Manage Fundraiser
Pages" on page 277.
If the Fundraiser part includes an event, a seven-step progress bar appears at the top of each Team
Fundraiser for the website user. For information about including events for the Fundraiser, see
"Step 8: Create Links to one or more Events" on page 298.
Review the following information for registration details.
a. Step 1: Register -- This is the registration page. If you mark the Require Waiver checkbox,
waiver information is included on this page. If the user is a member of your website, this page
does not appear.
b. Step 2: Join Options -- The individual goal amount for a participant appears at the top of the
second page. The amount defaults from the Suggested Goal field. Join options also appear.
For example, Create a new team appears.
c. Step 3: Event Options -- If you include an event in this Fundraiser part, the Event Options
page appears. If you mark the Exclude the first Event Info/Selection page from
registration checkbox for the event, one Step 3: Event Options page appears. If you do not
mark the checkbox, two Step 3: Event Options pages appear. For more information, see "Step
8: Create Links to one or more Events" on page 298.
d. Step 4: [Participants/Unit Label] -- This page includes event details for the website user and
any additional event registrants. For example, if included for the event, the user can view
price information. In addition, the user selects event attributes on this page. The name you
enter in the Participants/Unit Label field appears on the page in the progress indicator. It
also appears as the page header name. For more information, see "Step 8: Create Links to one
or more Events" on page 298.
e. Step 5: Payment -- This page includes Billing Information and Payment Information for a
user to submit. If the event is free, the Payment Information section does not appear on the
page.
f. Step 6: Confirmation -- A summary of the user's billing and payment information appears on
this page.
g. Step 7: My Dashboard -- After the user views the Step 6: Confirmation page, the participant
dashboard page appears. For information about this page, see "Manage Fundraiser Pages" on
page 277.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
285
9. In the Participant Settings frame, to prevent participants from editing their individual goal on the
Fundraiser Dashboard, do not mark Editable Goal. Marking this checkbox permits participants to
change their goal on the dashboard.
10. To allow a participant to enter offline donations on the participant dashboard, mark Allow Offline
Donation Entry. An Enter Offline Gifts link appears on the participant dashboard. The
participant clicks the link to enter a cash or check donation. If you do not mark this checkbox, a
View Offline Gifts link appears on the participant dashboard.
Note: For information about offline donations and The Raiser's Edge, see "Offline Donations for a
Team Fundraiser" on page 304.
11. In the Add New Member Settings frame, to include an Add New [ ] Member link on the team
captain dashboard, mark Allow team captains to add new team members via their dashboards.
This allows a team captain to add team members on the team captain dashboard. For more
information, see "Manage Fundraiser Pages" on page 277.
To include guest registrants as team members, mark Add non-anonymous attendees to
registrant's team during event registration. For example, Lynn Adamson registers for Team
Blue. When she registers, she includes her husband and son as guest registrants. If you mark this
checkbox, her husband and son also become Team Blue members.
12. To include a waiver solicitors must agree to before participating, mark Require Waiver.
a. In the Title field, enter a title for the waiver section on the web page.
b. In the Agree Caption field, enter the text for the waiver acceptance checkbox. For example,
enter "I agree to the waiver policies."
c. In the Statement box, enter your organization's waiver information.

.
286
C HAPTER 6
13. To raise donations based on participant performance, mark Support Performance-based
Fundraising. For example, if your Fundraiser is based on raising $1 for every mile a participant
walks, mark this checkbox.
If the Support Performance-based Fundraising checkbox is disabled for an existing Fundraiser
part, a performance-based donation already exists for that Fundraiser.
a. In the Unit Name field, enter a name for the object in which performance is based. Using the
walk-a-thon example, you can enter "Miles Walked".
b. When the fundraiser is over, mark Activity Closed if you want to prevent participants from
updating final performance-based values.
c. To download pledges based on performance to The Raiser's Edge, mark the Pledge
Processing checkbox.
For more information about downloading donations, see "Donations" on page 352.
14. To provide solicitors with the ability to update profiles for constituents in The Raiser's Edge, mark
the Display Solicitor Assignments checkbox. When a solicitor updates a profile on the
Fundraiser, the transaction is processed as a profile transaction. For more information, see "User
Profile Updates" on page 345.
a. In the Section field, select the type of profile design you want to create. You can select "Bio",
"Preferred Address", "Business", "Phones and Email", "Spouse", "Constituent Attributes",
"Primary Alumni", and "Education Attributes".

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
287
Each Section field option includes fields from the corresponding area in The Raiser's Edge.
For example, if you select "Spouse", spouse fields from The Raiser's Edge appear. When a
user enters spouse information on your website, you can download the information directly to
the spouse fields in The Raiser's Edge.
If you select "Constituent Attributes", the constituent attributes that appear on your User
Profile Form can have multiple values. For example, if your constituent attribute is "Mentor",
a Mentor field appears with a drop-down arrow on the profile form on your website. The
values from the list are the table entries set up for the attribute in The Raiser's Edge. For
Mentor, the values could be "Algebra", "Painting", or "Construction".
Tip: For constituent attributes to have multiple table entries on the profile form on your website,
you must first make them accessible from The Raiser's Edge. On the navigation bar, click
Administration, System Options. In the Attributes frame, mark the constituent attribute
checkboxes to include in Blackbaud NetCommunity. For more information, see "System Options"
on page 234.
b. In the Heading field, enter the text to appear at the top of your profile design. For example,
enter "My Biographical Page" for your biographical profile.
c. Mark the checkboxes in the grid to include on your profile design. For more information
about the grid, see "Chart: Display Profile Update and Display Giving History" on page 268.
15. To display a giving history for your solicitor, mark Display Giving History.
The Fundraiser giving history can include soft credits.
a. In the List Name field, enter the name for the giving-history list for your website.
b. In the Message box, enter the message to appear below the giving-history name on your site.
c. In the Filtering Options frame, click Modify to select the filters for your giving history. You
can narrow your results by Gift Types, Campaigns, Funds, and Appeals.
d. To include soft credit gifts in the giving history, mark Include Soft Credits.
e. In the Descriptive Text field, enter the text to indicate a soft credit gift in your giving history.
For example, enter "soft credit".

.
288
C HAPTER 6
16. In the Notifications frame, to create a notification for a solicitor, click Create New Notification.
For information about how to create a notification, see "Notifications" on page 216.
Note: A solicitor can select to receive notifications when he receives a new donation. A solicitor
can also select to receive notifications when his team receives a new donation or a new participant
signs up for the team.
a. To edit an existing notification, click Edit in the Action column for the notification you want
to change.
b. To prevent solicitors from receiving a notification, mark the checkbox in the Active for this
Part column for the notification.
Step 3: Select Pages for use as Participant and Team Pages
You must create at least one web page in Site Explorer that contains a Fundraiser Page Element part
before you can make selections on this screen. For more information about the Fundraiser Page
Element part, see "Pre-Design Work for Team Fundraising" on page 276
1. In the Page column, select a web page from the drop-down list. Only pages that contain Fundraiser
Page Elements appear in the list. If no pages appear, you must create them in Site Explorer.
Note: Fundraiser Page Elements are sections for participants to customize. Participants send
supporters email messages directing them to these pages, which are designed for supporters to
learn more about your cause and to make donations. Because you offer a choice for personal web
page designs to participants, a participant can choose only one Fundraiser personal page. Pages
using Fundraiser Page Elements contain dynamic sections for participants to customize and static
sections for your organization to create sections that cannot be edited by a participant. For more
information about the Fundraiser Page Element part type, see "Fundraiser Page Elements Parts" on
page 276.
2. In the Display Name column, enter a page reference name for solicitors to easily identify. This
name does not appear on your site for public viewing. The name appears as an option for solicitors
to select their Fundraiser personal pages. For example, enter "Blue" in the Display Name column
for one page, and "Pink" for a second page. When a solicitor edits the page, these two page options
appear.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
289
3. In the Page Type column, select "Solicitor", "Team", or "Both" to define who can use the page.
4. If this is the default personal web page, mark the checkbox in the Default column. Each
Fundraiser part must have a default page.
5. To remove the page from your Fundraiser, click Remove in the Action column.
6. Click Add Page to add a row to the grid and add a web page. Depending on the purpose of your
Fundraiser, you may add more than one page to offer participants a choice. For example, if your
school is hosting a jump rope fundraiser, you can create a page with a boy theme and a page with a
girl theme.
Step 4: Create Email Designs
1. In the Email Designs frame, click Add Email to create email designs for participants or team
members to use to send personal appeal, acknowledgement, and guest registration email.
The new email screen appears.
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the email template.
The program uses the personal page owner's email address in the From Address field and the
owner's name in the Name field.
3. In the box, enter the content of the email template. To customize email content, select fields from
the Merge Fields drop-down field.
· To direct recipients to the donation page, from the Merge Fields drop-down field select the
Sender Fields, Donation Page Hyperlink merge field for the Appeal/Thank You, Appeal, or
Thank You email template.
· To direct recipients to the Team Fundraiser registration page, from the Merge Fields drop-down
field select the Sender Fields, Registration Page Hyperlink for the Guest Registration email
template.
· To direct recipients to the pledge payment page, from the Merge Fields drop-down field select
the Special Fields, Pledge Payment Link for the Invoice email template.

.
290
C HAPTER 6
4. To format the email content's appearance and layout, use the HTML editor. For information about
the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
5. To save the email template and return to Step 4: Create Email Designs screen, click Save and
Close.
6. A grid appears on the screen with the new email template in the Display Name column. In the
Type column, select the email type for the new template.
· Appeal/Thank You -- To combine the appeal and acknowledgement content in one email, select
Appeal/Thank You. For example, the email can read "Welcome to my Walk-a-Thon page!
Please visit my page to join my team and make a donation to a great cause! Thank you for your
participation." A member receives this email when upon joining a team.
Warning: The Appeal and Thank You email templates are required for the Fundraiser part. To
create one email template for both types, select Appeal/Thank You. To create an individual email
for both types, create two email templates. Select Appeal for the appeal email template and Thank
You for the acknowledgement email template.
· Appeal -- To allow a participant to send a personal appeal email without acknowledgement
information, select Appeal. Email content for this template type may only contain "Welcome"
or "Please visit my page" information.
· Thank You -- To allow a participant to send an acknowledgement email after someone makes a
donation for his team, select Thank You. Email content for this template type may only contain
acknowledgement information.
· Invoice -- To allow a participant to send pledge invoices, select Invoice. Email content for this
template type should include a link to the pledge payment page.
Warning: The Invoice email template is only available for the Fundraiser part when Support
Performance-based Fundraising is marked on the Step 2: Fundraiser Options screen.
· Guest Registration -- This email template is used when a participant adds a new member for the
team on the participant dashboard.
Warning: The Guest Registration email template is required for the Fundraiser part. You cannot
create more than one Guest Registration email template.
When a participant clicks the Add New [ ] Member link on the participant dashboard, the Add
New Member screen appears. The participant completes the screen and clicks the Add Member
button. The new member then receives an email using this template. For more information, see
"Manage Fundraiser Pages" on page 277.
The Guest Registration template is also used if the Automatically add guest participants to team
during event registration checkbox is marked and a registrant includes guest registrants. For
more information, see "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282.
Step 5: Search Page Form Options
1. On this screen, you can define the search form title.
Site visitors use the search form to search for a participant page. In addition, site visitors can view
team members and join a team on this form.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
291
2. Under Search Page Form Options, in the Title field, enter the name of your site search screen. If
you do not enter a name, "Search for Participants" appears as the title for your site search screen.
Step 6: User Login Form
In this procedure, you create a login for your Fundraiser. These login steps are very similar to creating
a User Login part. However, the Fundraiser login remains a feature of the Fundraiser part. To edit this
login, edit the Fundraiser part.
1. In the Captions and Properties frame, enter a title for the user login form and text for the
hyperlink that directs users to the login form. To include forms for new registrations, forgotten
passwords, forgotten user IDs, and join options, enter a title in the Form Title column and a name
in the Hyperlink column, and mark Enabled.
Login and Join Options are required for a Team Fundraiser. Therefore, you cannot unmark Enable
in these rows.
Note: If a user registers for the first time using the Fundraiser login, the user is registered for your
entire Blackbaud NetCommunity site at the same time. Also, when a user logs into your
Fundraiser, the user is logged into your Blackbaud NetCommunity site.
We recommend that you disable new registrations only if you import Raiser's Edge constituents
into Blackbaud NetCommunity. Imported users are registered automatically so they do not need to
register a second time via the User Login part.
If you disable new registrations, the Add New [ ] Member link not available for the team captain
dashboard. For more information about the link, see "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282.

.
292
C HAPTER 6
Note: If you need to edit your Fundraiser login, make sure to edit the Fundraiser part. Fundraiser
logins are not located in a User Login part.
2. In the Constituent Code field, select the constituent code to assign to users who use this form to
sign up on your website. For more information about how to select constituent codes in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
3. In the Additional Fields frame, select the biographical information fields to include on the new
user registration form.
a. In the Additional Fields grid, mark the checkbox in the Include column for each field to
appear on the form. To make the fields required, mark the checkboxes in the Required
column. If the Include checkbox is marked, Address block and Gender are automatically
required.
b. To include attribute fields on your registration form, mark the checkbox in the Include
column for each attribute field to appear on the form. To make the attributes required, mark
the checkboxes in the Required column.
Note: If you know an attribute exists in The Raiser's Edge but do not see it, check "System
Options" on page 234 to make sure the attribute is available in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
These are constituent attributes pulled from The Raiser's Edge. If you need a new attribute for
your part, create it in The Raiser's Edge. For example, you can use a constituent attribute to
track T-shirt sizes for participants. To record this information, create a T-shirt size attribute.
For information about attributes, see The Raiser's Edge Configuration & Security Guide.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
293
Note: When you download sign-up transactions for provisional users using the NetCommunity
page in The Raiser's Edge, data from Additional Fields are not available in the sign-up
transaction. After the sign-up transaction has processed to The Raiser's Edge, data from these
fields are available in the User Profile Updates transactions. Current users joining the Fundraiser
who are logged into the site already (via another User Login part), are prompted to complete any
fields marked as Include. Any roles assigned to your Fundraiser are merged with the existing roles
assigned to the user. For more information about roles, see "Roles" on page 227.
4. In the Role Assignment frame, mark the checkbox in the Member column for roles you want to
assign users signing up through the Fundraiser part.
In this step, you assign roles for new users of your site who have not yet been approved using the
NetCommunity page. Select these roles to target content specifically for unapproved users.
For more information about security, see "Security" on page 223.
Step 7: Donation Form
On this screen, you can define options for online donations given through a Fundraiser part. If you plan
to allow donations from a Fundraiser, we recommend that you create a part or element with a Donate
button that links to the donation page. After you create a Fundraiser part and add it to a web page, a
web page named "[Fundraiser Part Title] - Donate" is generated automatically using the settings you
define on this screen. After you create the part, you must update the Donate button link so it directs
users to the "[Fundraiser Part Title] - Donate" page.
1. In the Constituent Code field, select the constituent code to assign to new donors who are not
already constituents in your database. Donors do not view this information. You download
constituent information to The Raiser's Edge.
For more information about selecting constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see
"Constituent Codes" on page 26.

.
294
C HAPTER 6
2. In the Button Text field, you can enter text that appears on the Donate button or use the default
value, "Donate Now". The button appears at the end of your donation page for the Fundraiser.
3. In the Payment Methods frame, mark the payment types donors can use to make contributions. A
credit card is automatically included as a payment method for donors. Other payment methods are
Direct Debit and Pledge (Bill me later).
4. In the Donor Options frame, mark Allow Corporate gifts to provide the option for a company to
make a donation. When you mark this checkbox, the This donation is on behalf of a company
checkbox appears on your website for a representative from a company to mark.
a. To allow donors to give anonymously, mark Allow Anonymous gifts. When you mark this,
the I prefer to make this donation anonymously checkbox appears on the donor page.
b. To allow donors to enter comments on your site, mark the Allow Comments checkbox. If
you mark this checkbox, comments download to the Attributes tab on a gift record in The
Raiser's Edge.
c. If you mark Allow Matching gifts, the My company will match my gift checkbox appears
on the page. Site visitors can mark My company will match my gift and enter the company
name in the Company field. If you use MatchFinder Online, a Look it up link appears next
to the checkbox. Visitors click the link to access MatchFinder Online and search for the
company. MatchFinder Online contains information about matching gift companies, such as
the minimum and maximum gift details and match ratio. Data from MatchFinder Online
integrates with The Raiser's Edge.
For information about MatchFinder Online purchasing options, send an email to
solutions@blackbaud.com.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
295
For information about downloading matching gift information to The Raiser's Edge, see
"Download donations - single transaction process" on page 354. For information about
matching gifts in The Raiser's Edge, see The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.
5. In the Recurring Gifts frame, mark Allow Recurring gifts to allow donors to contribute regular,
recurring gifts to your organization.
To allow donors to define the frequency of the recurring gift, select General. A Frequency field
appears on your website so donors can select to make a contribution every week, month, quarter,
or year. Once the website user selects a frequency, start and end date fields appear on the web
page.
Note: If a constituent donates a recurring gift and selects a start date that is not today's date, the
transaction downloads to The Raiser's Edge. However, the transaction is not sent to your bank
merchant when the donor submits the recurring gift. The merchant receives the transaction from
batch output you send to your bank for processing. For more information about bank merchants,
see "Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
To define the recurring gift frequency for donors, select Specific. The Custom Frequency frame
appears.
a. In the first field, select "Weekly", "Monthly", "Quarterly", or "Annually" as the frequency. In
the On field, select the day of the week on which you want the recurring gift donated.
b. To add the frequency to the donation page, click Add Frequency.
c. After you click Add Frequency, the Allow Donor to enter Ending Date option appears. To
allow donors to enter the end date for the recurring gift, mark this checkbox.
To add multiple frequency options to the donor web page, repeat steps a. through c.
6. In the Tribute Gifts frame, mark Allow Tribute gifts to create a tribute section on the web page.
Note: Options in the Tribute Gifts frame are for organizations that use Honor/Memorial Tracking
for The Raiser's Edge. If you do not use Honor/Memorial Tracking, do not use these options.
a. To remove the Description field from the tribute section on the web page, mark Hide
Tribute Description field.
b. If you do not mark the Hide Tribute Description field checkbox, in the Description Text
field, enter text to appear at the beginning of the Tribute Information section on the page. For
example, enter "This gift is made in honor of someone special."
c. To allow the donor to select the tribute type, select General.
Mark the checkbox for each tribute type to include in the tribute section. The tribute types
listed are entries from the Tribute Types table in The Raiser's Edge.
d. To apply all gifts to a specific tribute, select Specific.
To select an honor or memorial individual from The Raiser's Edge, click Honor/Memorial.
A search screen appears so you can search for the individual.
In the Tribute field, select the tribute type and description to use. Information in this field
defaults from the Honor/Memorial tab in The Raiser's Edge. The options are a combination
of the data from the Tribute type and Description fields.

.
296
C HAPTER 6
Note: When you include tribute information on the donor page, the Mail a letter on my behalf
checkbox appears automatically on the page. When a donor marks this checkbox, name and
address fields appear for the donor to enter his or her information. You can use this information in
a tribute letter to the honor or memorial.
7. To select giving levels for participants, click Add Giving Level in the Giving Levels frame.
a. In the Display Name field, enter the name of the giving level as you want it to appear on the
website.
b. In the Amount field, enter the gift amount for which the giving level applies. You can enter
the start amount or both the start and end amounts.
c. To include an Other option with a blank $ field on the Donation Form on your website, mark
Allow Other amount.
8. To select an appeal for your gift, click Add Source in the Sources frame. Including this
information provides a way for your organization to track how donors learn about donating to your
organization via the website.
a. To include an appeal, click Add Appeal in the Appeal column. The Appeal Search screen
appears so you can select an appeal. For information about how to use the Search screen, see
"Search Screen" on page 24.
b. In the Display Name field, enter the name of the appeal, as you want it to appear on the
website. By default, the text entered in the Appeal Name field in The Raiser's Edge appears
as the Display Name.
c. If the user does not select an appeal, and this is the appeal in which you want the gift to apply,
mark the checkbox in the Transaction Default column.
For each additional appeal you want to make available on your Fundraiser, click Add Source.
Another row appears in the grid so you can repeat these steps. If you add more than one
appeal, this creates a list of appeals for participants to select from.
9. In the Required Fields frame, mark the checkbox for each donor field you want to make required
on the donation form. To ensure you download complete constituent information into The Raiser's
Edge, we recommend that you make all of these fields required.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
297
10. In the Attributes frame, you can select the gift attribute fields to appear on the donation form.
Mark the checkbox in the Include column for each attribute field to include. To make the
attributes required, mark the checkbox in the Required column.
Note: When you download a gift to The Raiser's Edge, the program may automatically add some
gift attributes to the gift record. These attributes include NetCommunity Comments,
NetCommunity Corporate Donation Contact, NetCommunity Email Source, NetCommunity
Email Source ID, NetCommunity Page, and NetCommunity Page ID. You do not view these gift
attributes in the Attributes frame or on the NetCommunity page. Once the gift is downloaded to
The Raiser's Edge, you can view the information on the gift record.
The program pulls gift attributes from The Raiser's Edge. If you need a new attribute for your part,
create it in The Raiser's Edge.
For information about attributes, see The Raiser's Edge Configuration & Security Guide.
Note: If you know an attribute exists in The Raiser's Edge but do not see it, check "System
Options" on page 234 to make sure the attribute is available in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
11. In the Merchant Account frame, select the merchant account you want to use to process credit
cards. For example, select your IATS account.
Merchant accounts are set up in Administration. For more information, see "Merchant Accounts"
on page 229.

.
298
C HAPTER 6
Step 8: Create Links to one or more Events
1. In the Fund from The Raiser's Edge frame, in the Fund field, click Select to select the Raiser's
Edge fund to which to credit registration fees that you collect.
2. In the Giving Options frame, you can mark Allow Matching gifts to add a My company will
match my gift checkbox to the page. Site visitors can mark My company will match my gift and
enter the company name in a Company field. If you use MatchFinder Online, a Look it up link
appears next to the checkbox. Visitors click the link to access MatchFinder Online and search for
the company. MatchFinder Online contains information about matching gift companies, such as
the minimum and maximum gift details and match ratio. Data from MatchFinder Online integrates
with The Raisers Edge.
For information about MatchFinder Online purchasing options, send an email to
solutions@blackbaud.com.
For information about downloading matching gift information to The Raiser's Edge, see
"Download event registrations - single transaction process" on page 375. For information about
matching gifts in The Raiser's Edge, see The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.
3. In the Captions frame, for each button or label listed, specify the text to appear on the event
registration form. Enter the text in the field next to each screen item in the grid.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
299
4. In the Registration Options frame, select whether to display the event information and selection
as two pages. If you include a second page, the website user selects the events for which he wants
to register on one page and enters registration quantity and pricing information on another page.
To allow the website user to select both events and registration options on one page, mark Exclude
the first Event Info/Selection page from registration.
5. To include an event registration on your web page, click Add Event in the Events frame. The
Event Search screen appears so you can select for an event from The Raiser's Edge. For
information about how to use the Search screen, see "Search Screen" on page 24.
The event you select automatically defaults data in the format of an Event Registration Form part
type. For more information about Event Registration Forms, see "Event Registration Form" on
page 64.
Note: When a Fundraiser is linked to an event, you can establish automatic registrations for a
family. For more information, see "Event Registration for Families" on page 300.
a. In the Attributes frame, mark the checkbox beside the participant attribute you want to
appear in the Display column. To make the attributes required, mark the checkbox in the
Required column. To change the text of the attribute on your registration page, enter the text
to display in the Caption field.
One-per-record attributes with a type of Date, Text, Number, Currency, and Yes/No can be
used in Blackbaud NetCommunity. Table type attributes are available without being marked
as one-per-record. Fuzzy Date and Constituent Name type attributes are not available in
Blackbaud NetCommunity.
b. In the Page Link frame, to add a link to another web page, click Link. The Create Page Link
screen appears. For information about how to create a page link, see "Create Page Link" on
page 25.
6. In the Merchant Account field, select the existing merchant account you want to use for credit
card transactions. For more information about merchant accounts, see "Merchant Accounts" on
page 229.

.
300
C HAPTER 6
Note: If your site contains a Fundraiser Dashboard part, a Go to my dashboard button appears
automatically on the event registration page for your Fundraiser. When a participant clicks the
button, she is directed to her Fundraiser dashboard.
Step 9: Configure Emails
1. On this screen, you create Welcome, Forgotten Password/User ID, and Donation
Acknowledgement email messages. For information about how to create an email, see "Messages"
on page 177.
2. Click Create Welcome Email to create an email to send to team members after they register on
your site. For information about how to create an email message, see "Messages" on page 177.
3. Click Create Forgotten Password/User ID Email to create an email to send to team members
who forget their passwords or user ID. For information about how to create an email message, see
"Messages" on page 177.
4. Click Create Donation Acknowledgement Email to create an email to send to donors after they
make donations on a Team Fundraiser page. The Acknowledgement Email screen appears. For
more information about generating an acknowledgement email, see "Design an acknowledgement
email for a transaction" on page 201.
Note: After you create and save the email in this step, email tasks appear as buttons on the action
bar. To edit an email, click a button for that email.
5. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Event Registration for Families
When you use The Raiser's Edge Event Management, you can establish automatic registrations for a
family only if:
Note: Refer to the information in this section for "Step 8: Create Links to one or more Events" on
page 298.
· The Fundraiser is linked to an event in The Raiser's Edge. For more information, see "Step 8: Create
Links to one or more Events" on page 298.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
301
· The default Personal Page you select contains a link to the Join page on the Fundraiser part. For more
information see "Step 3: Select Pages for use as Participant and Team Pages" on page 288 and
"Fundraiser Page Elements Parts" on page 276.
· You have created a Welcome email (that most likely contains registration fields).
With these existing conditions, a family member, for example, a father, can register himself as a solicitor
and additionally register guests, for example, his spouse or entire family. The solicitor receives a Welcome
email containing event registration information and registration links for each guest. Next, the solicitor
forwards the Welcome email to each guest. After the guest clicks the link in the email and signs up for the
Fundraiser, the registration is valid. The guest is not asked to register for the event because Blackbaud
NetCommunity knows the guest was previously registered. After a successful registration and sign-up, the
guest receives the Welcome email. Guests are added automatically to the solicitor's Address Book. In The
Raiser's Edge, the solicitor is downloaded as a participant on the event record, and the spouse or family
members appear as guests.
Create Team Hierarchy in a Fundraiser Part
In this section, we demonstrate Team Fundraising hierarchy using an example in which participants can
create and join teams under one of three corporate sponsors. Each corporate sponsor is at the highest level
(Level 1). Participants cannot join or create teams at that level. Teams and participants are at the second
level (Level 2). Participants can join and create teams at this level.
Note: Refer to the information in this section for "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282.
In this section, we demonstrate Team Fundraising hierarchy using an example in which participants can
create and join teams under one of three corporate sponsors. Each corporate sponsor is at the highest level
(Level 1). Participants cannot join or create teams at that level. Teams and participants are at the second
level (Level 2). Participants can join and create teams at this level.
In The Raiser's Edge, corporate sponsors, a team, and a participant were added on the Solicitors tab in the
fund record.
Based on data from The Raiser's Edge in this example, team hierarchy on the Fundraiser site will be:
Level 1
Company A
Company B
Company C
Level 2
Team #1
Janet Smith

.
302
C HAPTER 6
Team Fundraising participants can sign up on your Fundraiser site, or you can add team levels and
participants on the Solicitors tab in the fund record.
Note: Solicitors are assigned to constituents in The Raiser's Edge on the Relationships tab. For
information about this process, see The Raiser's Edge Solicitors chapter in the Constituent Data Entry
Guide.
After you add team levels for participants in "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282, in the Team
Levels grid, "Corporate Sponsor" is added in the first row of the Display Name column. Participants
cannot join or create teams at this level. In the second row of the Display Name column, "Team" is added.
Participants can join and create teams at this level.
Based on the Blackbaud NetCommunity data in this example, team hierarchy on the Fundraiser site will
be:
Level 1
Corporate Sponsor
Level 2
Team
Participants can define unique teams and sublevel teams that do not follow the team hierarchy defined in
the Team Levels grid. To allow this, mark the Allow Independent Teams checkbox in "Step 2:
Fundraiser Options" on page 282.
When registering, if a participant selects to join an existing team, the search results grid appears under the
participant search field. These search results depict the team hierarchy created in "Step 2: Fundraiser
Options" on page 282.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
303
In the above graphic, Janet Smith is a member of Team #1. Both Janet and Team #1 are under corporate
sponsor, Company A. Joseph Greene joined through the Fundraiser site as an individual participant. He is
not on a team. Individual participants do not fall under a corporate sponsor, for example, participants do
not fall under a Level 1 hierarchy. After downloading Fundraiser information from the NetCommunity
page to The Raiser's Edge, Joseph Greene will appear on the Solicitors tab in the fund record. A current
user on this screen who wants to join an existing team can join Team #1.
While your use of Team Fundraising may vary from this example, the search results grid defaults the
following information on your Fundraiser site.
Name
Level 1
Level 2
Participant name (can be an
Displays highest level team
Displays team name the
individual name or a group
name the participant belongs to
participant belongs to
team name)
The column hierarchy continues to the right of the page for as many team levels as you create.
Add Help Content for Team Fundraisers
After you complete and save the Fundraiser part, you can reopen the part to add custom text to help users
understand how to use certain features in Team Fundraising. For example, you can create help text that
explains the statistics on the My Activity page of the Home Page dashboard.
Add helplets for a team fundraiser
1. Open a saved Fundraiser part. The Helplets frame appears above Step 1.
2. In the Screen field, select the form to create help text for. For example, you can create help text for
the login and user registration forms, the search screen, and all the pages found in the solicitor's
Home Page dashboard.
3. In the box, enter the text to appear on the form. To format the content's appearance and layout, use
the HTML editor. For more information about the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
4. Once you create help text for the first form, you can select another form type in the Screen field.
Changes are saved automatically for the first form, and an asterisk appears next to the form name
to indicate it has saved help content.
5. To save the part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
304
C HAPTER 6
Offline Donations for a Team Fundraiser
If a donation is not received online for a Team Fundraiser, the gift is called an offline donation. For
example, a cash or check gift is an offline donation. Offline donations can be added for a Team Fundraiser
in Blackbaud NetCommunity in two ways.
· If you mark Allow Offline Donation Entry in "Step 2: Fundraiser Options" on page 282, a participant
clicks the Enter Offline Gifts link on the participant dashboard page to add the offline donation.
If you do not mark this checkbox, a View Offline Gifts link appears on the participant dashboard.
Participants click the link to view offline gifts only. Offline gifts cannot be added from the View Offline
Gifts link.
· The Raiser's Edge user enters the offline donation for the Team Fundraiser in The Raiser's Edge.
When The Raiser's Edge user enters an offline donation in The Raiser's Edge for a Fundraiser, Team
Fundraising reflects the gift in the Fundraiser Dashboard, Report (Fundraiser), and other applicable
areas of Team Fundraising such as a Donor List Fundraiser Page Element part.
When an offline gift has these conditions in The Raiser's Edge, the gift is included in Blackbaud
NetCommunity.
· The Raiser's Edge gift fund must match the Team Fundraising fund.
· The Raiser's Edge gift type must be Cash or Pledge.
· The Raiser's Edge gift must have one or more Team Fundraising solicitors associated with it.
· The Raiser's Edge gift does not have a NetCommunity Page gift attribute. This attribute downloads from
Blackbaud NetCommunity.
· The Raiser's Edge gift can have a NetCommunity Comments gift attribute. The comment appears on the
Donor List for a Fundraiser Page Element.
· The Raiser's Edge gift can be marked Anonymous.
· When you edit an offline gift amount in The Raiser's Edge, the updated gift amount appears on the
Blackbaud NetCommunity website. To view the updated amount, the amount must have been edited in
the Solicitors field on the gift record in The Raiser's Edge.
Note: For offline pledges entered through The Raiser's Edge, the pledge amount appears until a payment is
applied to the pledge. After a payment is applied, the pledge payments display on the Fundraiser, not the
original pledge amount. In addition, the Fundraiser includes online payments for online pledges; it does not
include payments entered in The Raiser's Edge for online pledges.
When you download donations, offline donations download to The Raiser's Edge as Pledge gift records
with one installment. When your organization receives the cash or check payment, the data entry person
can create a Cash payment for the pledge in The Raiser's Edge.
For information about downloading donations, see "Donations" on page 352. For information about gifts
in The Raiser's Edge, see The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.
Fundraiser Dashboard Part
You can add a Fundraiser Dashboard part to quickly display current information about the progress of a
Fundraiser part. You can also create dashboards that link to Fundraiser summary reports.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
305
We recommend you decide which website users can view Fundraiser Dashboard information. For
example, do you want everyone to view the dashboards or just board members? After you decide, add the
part to a page with appropriate security rights for the role in which the users belong. For information about
security, see "Security" on page 223.
You can add these panels to the Fundraiser Dashboard:
Overall Progress Summary -- The Overall Progress Summary provides a comprehensive summary of
donations received from the Fundraiser to date. This panel includes the total amount raised, the total
number and amount of online and offline donations, the average donation amount, the largest single donor
and donation amount, the person credited with the largest donation, and the total personal page hits. You
can click Aggregate Goal or Fund Goal to display in the bar graph the amount raised compared to the
total aggregate or fund goal.
Online Event Registrations -- The Online Event Registrations panel displays the number of individual,
couple, and family registrants for the Fundraiser event and the total amount of entry fees for each type of
registrant.
Top Teams -- The Top Teams panel ranks teams by the top or bottom amount of money raised, emails
sent, or page hits. The panel lists each team's fundraising goal, the amount raised, the number of page hits,
and the number of emails sent. Users can filter the dashboard by the number of teams and whether to show
the top or bottom performing teams. They can also sort the team list by money raised, emails sent, or page
hits.
Top Participants -- The Top Participants panel ranks individual participants by the top or bottom amount
of money raised, emails sent, or page hits. The panel lists each individual's fundraising goal, the amount
raised, the number of page hits, and the number of emails sent. Users can filter the dashboard by the
number of participants and whether to show the top or bottom performers. They can also sort the
participant list by money raised, emails sent, or page hits.
Top Emails -- The Top Emails panel ranks fundraising emails by the top or bottom amount of money
raised. The panel lists the participant's fundraising goal, the amount raised from the email, and the number
of recipients. Users can filter the dashboard by the number of emails and whether to show the top or
bottom performers.
Online/Offline Gift Summary -- The Online/Offline Gifts Summary panel displays the total amount of
Fundraiser donations received online and offline. The panel also includes a pie chart which compares the
percentage of online and offline gifts.
Detailed Gift Summary -- The Detailed Gift Summary panel lists the total amounts received for the
Fundraiser in online and offline gifts. It also includes the amounts of pending, accepted, and rejected
online and offline gifts. The panel also includes a pie chart which compares the percentage of pending,
accepted, and rejected online and offline gifts.
Email Activity -- The Email Activity panel displays the total number of appeal, thank you, and team
emails sent for the Fundraiser.
Design a Fundraiser Dashboard
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Actions column. The Edit Part screen appears for
Fundraiser Dashboard.
If you are creating a new part, you must first save part properties. For more information about part
properties, see "Create a part" on page 46.
3. In the Source field, select the data source for the dashboard. Select an individual Fundraiser or
select "Fundraiser Report" to link the dashboard to a Fundraiser summary report.

.
306
C HAPTER 6
Note: If you are creating a dashboard for a Fundraiser summary report, we recommend that you
name the dashboard "Fundraiser Report Dashboard" or something similar so you will know which
dashboard to select in the Linked Fundraiser Dashboard Page field on the Fundraiser Report
part. Also, we recommend that dashboards created for linking to Fundraiser reports be placed on a
standalone web page that can be navigated to only from the Fundraiser Report part. When a user
clicks the hyperlink for the individual fundraiser reports, that web page appears displaying the
dashboard for the selected report. For more information about Fundraiser reports, see "Fundraiser
Reports" on page 306.
4. In the Panels list, mark the checkbox for each panel to include in the dashboard. For more
information about the types of panels, see "Fundraiser Dashboard Part" on page 304.
5. In the Links box, you can mark Enable `View Activity Log' Link to add a link in the Top
Participants and Top Emails panels to the solicitor's Activity Log.
You can also mark Enable `View Email' Link to add a link in the Top Emails panel users can
click to view the email.
6. In the Color box, you can select colors for the thermometer fill and the chart skin.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Fundraiser Reports
Using the Report (Fundraiser) part, you can create summary or custom reports for your website about the
progress of multiple Fundraiser parts. Using the Summary Report type, you can create a standard report
displaying information graphically in a 3-D bar graph chart, textually in table format, or both. The
Fundraiser Summary section displays summary statistics for multiple Fundraisers including the fundraiser
goal, participant goal, total amount raised, total number of fundraisers, total teams, total participants, and
total donations. If you include the View Details button, website users can view a page that contains
individual reports for each Fundraiser included in the report. If you select a Fundraiser dashboard in the
Linked Fundraiser Dashboard Page field, the headings for the individual reports are hyperlinks the user
can click to view a dashboard about the selected Fundraiser.
Using the Custom Report type, you can customize the report's content and appearance using the HTML
editor and merge fields.

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
307
You can include the same summary statistics as the Summary Report as well as additional details about
donations, top fundraisers, top teams and top participants.
Design Summary Fundraiser Reports
1. From Web site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Actions column. The Edit Part screen appears for Report
(Fundraiser).
3. If you are creating a new part, you must first save part properties. For more information about part
properties, see "Create a part" on page 46.
4. In the Type of Report field, select "Summary Report". Several options appear below on the
screen.
5. In the Fundraiser(s) box, mark the checkbox for each Fundraiser whose information you want to
include in the report.
6. In the Report Options frame, select the format of the report.
· Show Chart -- mark this option to add a 3-D bar graph chart to the report displaying the
Fundraiser Goal, Participant Goal, and Total Raised.
· Show Table -- mark this option to add a textual table of information to the report.
7. In the Linked Fundraiser Dashboard Page field, you can select a Fundraiser dashboard to link to
the report. When a user views the report in detail, the headings for the individual Fundraiser
reports are hyperlinks the user can click to view the dashboard selected in this field.
We recommend that dashboards created for linking to Fundraiser reports be placed on a standalone
web page that can be navigated to only from the Fundraiser Report part. When a user clicks the
hyperlink for the individual fundraiser reports, that web page appears displaying the dashboard for
the selected report.
Note: It is important to select the correct dashboard in the Linked Fundraiser Dashboard Page
field. If you are creating a report for only one Fundraiser, select the dashboard created for the same
Fundraiser part. If you are creating a report that includes multiple Fundraisers, select a dashboard
with "Fundraiser Report" selected in the Source field. Otherwise, the linked dashboard may
display information that does not match the Fundraisers selected for the report. We recommend
that you name your dashboards so you can easily identify which one you should use. For more
information about creating a dashboards, see "Design a Fundraiser Dashboard" on page 305.
8. In the Report Caption Options frame, select the information to include and enter captions for
labels on the report.
·In the Report Caption column, mark the checkbox for each type of information to include in
the report.

.
308
C HAPTER 6
Note: If you marked Show Table or Show Table and Show Chart, all options are enabled for
you to select from. If you marked only Show Chart, the Total Fundraisers, Total Teams, Total
Participants, and Total Donations options are disabled because they do not appear in the chart
view.
If you add a View Details button, users can click this to view a page that contains individual
reports for each Fundraiser included in the summary report. If you selected a dashboard in the
Linked Fundraiser Dashboard field, the headings for the individual reports are hyperlinks the
user can click to view a dashboard about the selected Fundraiser. Once in the detailed view,
users can click Hide Details to view the summary report again.
·In the Report Caption Text column, a default caption appears for each type of information.
You can use the default or enter a different caption in the field.
9. To customize the size and color scheme for the bar graph section, mark Customize Chart. This
enables the formatting fields in the frame.
10. In the height and width fields, specify the size of the chart in pixels.
11. Select the colors to use for the bar graph elements, background, and font.
·Mark Use System Colors to select system defined colors in the fields on the left.
or
·Mark Use Custom Colors to enter RGB color values on the right.
Note: You can customize the table section and its elements using Stylesheets.
12. To save your report part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Design Custom Fundraiser Reports
1. From Web site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Actions column. The Edit Part screen appears for Report
(Fundraiser).
3. If you are creating a new part, you must first save part properties. For more information about part
properties, see "Create a part" on page 46.
4. In the Type of Report field, select "Custom Report". Additional options appear below on the
screen.
5. In the Fundraiser(s) box, mark the checkbox for each Fundraiser whose information you want to
include in the report.
6. In the Custom Report Options box, use the HTML editor to enter and format the report content's
appearance and layout. Add merge fields to customize the Fundraiser information that appears on
the report. For example, to include the number of online donations, drag and drop the
Donations.Number of Online Donations merge field. For more information about using the
HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
7. To save your part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Changes in The Raiser's Edge
These are issues to be aware of after you download Fundraiser part transactions to The Raiser's Edge:

.
TEAM F UNDRA I S I NG
309
· If you move a solicitor to another team in The Raiser's Edge, the next time the solicitor logs into the
Fundraiser part on your site, the solicitor is automatically a part of the new team.
· To properly credit a solicitor with a donation using the Fundraiser part, Fundraiser participant
information is downloaded to The Raiser's Edge before the donation from the part. Donations do not
appear until the Fundraiser is downloaded.
For more information about downloading donations, see "Donations" on page 352.
If a team captain does not exist for a donation, a solicitor is not associated with the donation.
For example, if a solicitor is not selected using the Promote to Captain menu option in The Raiser's
Edge for a team donation, a solicitor is not credited with the donation. For more information about
solicitors and captains in The Raiser's Edge, see The Raiser's Edge Campaigns, Funds, & Appeals Data
Entry Guide.
For information about downloading Fundraiser information to The Raiser's Edge, see "Fundraisers" on
page 352.

.
310
C HAPTER 6

CHAPTER 7
Personal Pages
In This Chapter
"Design and Management Process" on page 312
"Personal Pages: Process Overview" on page 312
Personal pages are personalized pages that supporters can set up on your website to share information
about themselves and about your organization's mission. These pages can be used for a variety of
purposes. For example, a membership organization can provide personal pages to supporters so they can
recruit their family and friends. As another example, a hospital can provide care pages to a patient or a
patient's family to share information about the patient's status and recovery.
Using the Personal Page Manager part, you create web templates that provide the tools page owners use to
create pages. Personal pages can contain several features including blogs, news readers, photo galleries,
report abuse actions, comment boards, and simple or rich text.

.
312
C HAPTER 7
Design and Management Process
This flow chart illustrates the design and management process for personal pages.
Personal Pages: Process Overview
Creating personal pages requires several steps in different areas of Blackbaud NetCommunity:
Step 1: The web designer creates Personal Page Elements in Parts. For information, see "Create Personal
Page Elements" on page 313.
Step 2: The web designer creates web pages containing Personal Page Elements in Site Explorer. For more
information about creating web pages, see "Create a new web page" on page 31.
Step 3: The web designer creates the Personal Page Manager part to define the web pages, options, and
settings available to personal page owners when they create personalized pages. For more information, see
"Design the Personal Page Manager Part" on page 315.
Step 4: The web designer adds the Personal Page Manager part to a page on the website.
Step 5: A website user signs up to be a personal page owner. New page owners use the Home page
dashboard to create and manage content for personal pages. For information, see "Manage Personal Pages"
on page 314.

.
P ERSONAL P AGES
313
Step 6: The Raiser's Edge user downloads personal page requests from Blackbaud NetCommunity to
The Raiser's Edge. For information, see "Personal Pages" on page 352.
Step 7: Website users visit the personal pages to read content, post comments, and give donations.
Create Personal Page Elements
The first step to create personal pages is to create Personal Page Elements. Think of these as "mini-parts"
that can be used only on the web page templates you provide to personal page owners. You can create the
following element types for personal pages: Action, Comments, News, News Reader, Page Links, Personal
Notes, Photos, Profile, Rich Text, or Text. For information about creating specific page element types, see
"Page Element Types" on page 83. For more information about using Personal Page Elements, see "Create
Web Pages" on page 313.
Note: While personal pages support online donations and tributes, they do not include fundraising tools
such as goals and thermometers.
Create Web Pages
The next step is to create the web pages used for personal pages. You will need:
· A web page on your site where you will place the Personal Page Manager part.
· At least one web page that contains Personal Page Elements. These pages are templates that provide the
tools page owners use to create their pages. You can create more than one web page template if you want
to offer page owners templates with different layouts and features.
Web pages using Personal Page Elements can also contain static sections for other parts in Blackbaud
NetCommunity. Use these sections for content or features to appear on every personal page. For
example, you can create a part for your organization's mission statement and add it to your web page
templates so the mission statement appears on every personal page.
This graphic demonstrates how a web page uses Personal Page Elements with static parts. For more
information about creating web pages, see "Pages" on page 31.

.
314
C HAPTER 7
Note: If you allow donations from personal pages, we recommend that you create a part or element with a
Donate button linking to the donation page. For more information, see "Step 6: Donation Form
(Optional)" on page 320.
Manage Personal Pages
When you add a Personal Page Manager part to a page on your website, personal page owners can create
and manage pages. The Home page dashboard provides a central location for personal page owners to
manage their pages.
The action bar on the Home page dashboard allows page owners to navigate between tasks, monitor and
update data, edit personal pages, send email, and maintain email contacts.
· My Home - To manage their pages, personal page owners click My Home. From the My Home page,
page owners can click links to design and visit their web pages or to send email. This page also displays
statistics about the number of visits a personal page receives, the date of the last visit, the number of
email messages a page owner sends, and the number of messages that are opened.
· My Activity - To view statistics about email messages, personal page owners click My Activity. To
view a list of sent email messages, page owners select "Emails" on the action bar of the My Activity
page. For each message, details appear about the number of times it was sent, the recipients, and whether
it was opened or forwarded. Page owners can sort email messages according to whether they were
opened, unopened, forwarded, or delivered unsuccessfully. To view a list of contacts who received email
messages, page owners select "People" on the action bar. For each contact, details appear about how
many messages were received and whether they opened or forwarded the messages. Page owners can
sort contacts according to whether they have opened or forwarded messages. From the My Activity
page, page owners can also click View Email to read the original email messages.
· My Page(s) - To preview their pages and change the layout and content, personal page owners click My
Page(s). Page owners can select page templates, add pictures, edit text, or adjust settings such as
whether to display navigation buttons with a slideshow. If the Personal Page Manager part allows page
owners to create multiple personal pages, they can create additional pages from the My Page(s) page.
When a page owner has multiple pages, one must be designated as the home page for search results and
link to the owner's personal page. If the Personal Page Manager uses a page with Page Links, the
personal page owner must make his pages public for them to appear as links.
· Send Email - To generate email messages, personal page owners click Send Email. Page owners can
select contacts from the address book or create contacts to add to the address book. After page owners
select the contacts, a preview screen displays the names, email addresses, and greetings that will be
used. From this screen, page owners can change greetings or click contact names or email addresses to
change contact information. Personal page owners select email templates and create the content on the
Send Email page.
· Address Book - To store email addresses and contact information, personal page owners click Address
Book. To add contacts, page owners click New Contact. To use a *.csv file to import email addresses
from programs such as Outlook or Eudora, page owners click Import Contacts. When page owners add
contacts on the Send Email page, they are saved to the address book. The address book displays up to 10
contacts per page, and the number of contacts and number of pages appear below the grid. The action
bar above the grid controls how contacts appear. To display all contacts, click ALL. If there are more
than 10 contacts, page owners can use the links below the grid to navigate to additional pages. To view
contacts in alphabetic groups, page owners can click the letters on the action bar. Contacts are organized

.
P ERSONAL P AGES
315
by last name and organization name, which means contacts can appear twice and page owners can
search by last name or the organization name. To select a contact, mark the checkbox beside the name.
To select all contacts on a page, mark the checkbox beside the Name column. To select all contacts in
the address book, mark the checkbox beside the Name column and click the link that appears above the
grid. To delete a contact, select it and click Delete on the action bar.
Design the Personal Page Manager Part
The Personal Page Manager part is a series of forms you use to select the web pages, options, and settings
available to personal page owners when they create a personal page. Once you set up the Personal Page
Manager part, you add the part to a page on your website.
These procedures explain each step of the Personal Page Manager process:
"Step 1: Personal Page Options and Administrator Roles" on page 315
"Step 2: New Community User Options" on page 316
"Step 3: Select Pages for use as Personal Pages" on page 318
"Step 4: Create Email Designs" on page 319
"Step 5: Search Page Form Options" on page 319
"Step 6: Donation Form (Optional)" on page 320
"Step 7: Configure Emails" on page 326
Step 1: Personal Page Options and Administrator Roles
On this screen, you define options available to users when they create a personal page and decide
which roles have administrative rights over personal pages.
1. From Web Site, click Parts. The Parts screen appears.
2. To edit an existing part, click Edit in the Action column. The Edit Part screen appears for Personal
Page Manager. The first screen is "Step 1: Personal Page Options and Administrator Roles".
If you are creating a new part, you must first save part properties. For information about part
properties, see "Create a part" on page 46.

.
316
C HAPTER 7
3. In the Confirmation Prompt field, enter the message that appears when a website user signs up to
create a personal page.
4. In the Constituent Code field, you can select the constituent code assigned to personal page
owners when you download NetCommunity sign-ups to The Raiser's Edge. For information about
constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
5. You can mark Waiver to require site users to agree to a waiver before they can create a personal
page. In the box, enter the waiver's text.
6. In the Administrator Roles frame, mark the checkbox for each role that needs administrative
rights for personal page dashboards. Users with Administrator rights can edit personal page
dashboards. To do this, a Blackbaud NetCommunity user with Supervisor rights must send the web
page URL link from the user record (in Users) to the Administrator user. The Administrator or
Supervisor clicks the link to access the dashboard and make modifications.
For information about the personal page dashboard, see "Manage Personal Pages" on page 314.
For information about roles and users, see "Security" on page 223.
Step 2: New Community User Options
On this screen, you set up the user login forms for personal pages.
1. In the Captions and Properties frame, you can define titles for forms that appear when users sign
up to create personal pages. The user login form is required, but you can also add forms for new
user registrations, forgotten passwords, and forgotten user IDs.
If a user is a member of your website, the site recognizes the user and skips the login page.
a. In the Form Title column, enter titles for the user login, new user registration, forgotten
password, or forgotten user ID forms.
b. In the Hyperlink column, enter text for the hyperlinks that direct users to the user login, new
user registration, or forgotten password/user ID forms.

.
P ERSONAL P AGES
317
c. In the Enabled column, mark the types of forms to add to the user login form. You can add
forms for new user registrations, forgotten passwords, and forgotten user IDs.
Note: When a user signs up through the login on a Personal Page Manager part type, the user
automatically becomes a member of the rest of your website community.
2. In the Constituent Code field, select the constituent code to assign to users who use this
registration form to sign up for your website. For information about constituent codes in
Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
3. In the Additional Fields frame, select the biographical information fields to include on the new
user registration form.
a. In the Additional Fields grid, mark the checkbox in the Include column for each field to
appear on the form. To make fields required, mark the checkboxes in the Required column.
If the Include checkboxes are marked, Address block and Gender are automatically
required.
If you mark Maiden name, Class of, and Birth date as required, the program uses these
fields as search criteria for the automatic matching process in transactions on the
NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. For example, if you mark Maiden name as
required and Angela Myers Johnson signs in, the download transaction checks maiden name
before it makes an automatic match and defaults her name in the RE Constituent column on
the transaction screen.
b. To include attribute fields on your registration form, mark the checkbox in the Include
column for each attribute field to appear on the form. To make the attributes required, mark
the checkboxes in the Required column.
These are constituent attributes pulled from The Raiser's Edge. If you need a new attribute,
create it in The Raiser's Edge. For example, you can use a constituent attribute to track
T-shirt sizes for participants. To track this information, create a T-shirt size attribute. For
information about attributes, see The Raiser's Edge Configuration & Security Guide.
Note: If you know an attribute exists in The Raiser's Edge, but do not see it, check "System
Options" on page 234 to make sure the attribute is available in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
4. In the Role Assignment frame, mark the checkbox in the Member column for each role to assign
to users who sign up through this User Login part. For information about roles, see "Roles" on
page 227.

.
318
C HAPTER 7
Step 3: Select Pages for use as Personal Pages
On this screen, you make web pages available to personal page owners as templates for their personal
pages. You must create at least one web page in Site Explorer that contains a Personal Page Element
part before you can make selections on this screen. For information about the Personal Page Element
part, see "Create Personal Page Elements" on page 313.
1. In the Page column, select a page from the drop-down list of web pages. Only pages with Personal
Page Elements appear in the list. If no pages appear, you must create these in Site Explorer.
2. In the Display Name field, enter a descriptive name to help personal page owners select the web
page template to use. The display name appears as an option for page owners in the Theme field of
the My Page(s) page on the Home page dashboard.
3. To designate a page as the default, mark the checkbox in the Default column. Each Personal Page
part must have a default page.
4. Click Add Page to add rows to the grid and continue adding web pages.
5. In the Maximum Number of Pages field, select the maximum number of personal pages users
can create.
If you allow users to create more than one page and select a Personal Page Element using Page
Links in the Page field, the user's personal pages appear as a list of links on the page. For more
information about Page links, see "Design Page Links for Page Elements" on page 91.
6. To remove a page from the grid, click Remove.

.
P ERSONAL P AGES
319
Step 4: Create Email Designs
On this screen, you create email templates personal page owners can use to send messages about their
page.
1. In the Email Designs frame, click Add Email. The new email template screen appears.
2. In the Name field, enter a name for the email template.
The program uses the personal page owner's email address for the From Address field and the
owner's name for the Name field.
3. In the text box at the bottom, enter the content of the email. You can select fields from the Merge
Fields drop-down so page owners can customize their email content.
4. Use the HTML editor to format the email content's appearance and layout. For more information
about the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
5. Click Save and Close to save the email template and return to the Step 4: Create Email Designs
screen. The new email template appears in the grid.
Step 5: Search Page Form Options
1. On this screen, you can define the search form title.
Site visitors use the search form to search for a personal page.
2. In the Title field, enter the name for the site search form. If you do not enter a name, "Search for
Page Owners" is the default title used.

.
320
C HAPTER 7
Step 6: Donation Form (Optional)
On this screen, you can define options for online donations given through personal pages. If you plan
to allow donations from personal pages, we recommend that you create a part or element with a
Donate button linking to the donation page. After you create a Personal Page Manager part and add it
to a web page, a web page named "[Personal Page Manager] PPM - Donate" is generated
automatically using the settings you define on this screen. After you create the part, you must update
the Donate button link so it directs users to the "[Personal Page Manager] PPM - Donate" page.
1. To allow online donations from personal pages, mark Support Online Donations. Marking this
checkbox enables other options on this screen.
2. In the Constituent Code field, select the constituent code to assign to new donors who are not
already constituents in your Raiser's Edge database. Donors do not view this information. You
download constituent information to The Raiser's Edge. For more information about selecting
constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
3. In the Button Text field, you can enter text that appears on the Donate button or use the default
value, "Donate Now".
4. In the Payment Methods frame, mark the payment types donors can use to make contributions. A
credit card is automatically included as a payment method for donors. Other payment methods are
Direct Debit and Pledge (Bill me later).
5. In the Donor Options frame, mark Allow Corporate gifts to provide the option for a company to
make a donation. When you mark this checkbox, the This donation is on behalf of a company
checkbox appears on your website for a representative from a company to mark.
a. To allow donors to give anonymously, mark Allow Anonymous gifts. When you mark this,
the I prefer to make this donation anonymously checkbox appears on the donor page.
b. To allow donors to enter comments on your site, mark Allow Comments. If you mark this
checkbox, comments download to the Attributes tab on a gift record in The Raiser's Edge.

.
P ERSONAL P AGES
321
c. If you mark Allow Matching gifts, the My company will match my gift checkbox appears
on the page. Site visitors can mark My company will match my gift and enter the company
name in the Company field. If you use MatchFinder Online, a Look it up link appears next
to the checkbox. Visitors click the link to access MatchFinder Online and search for the
company. MatchFinder Online contains information about matching gift companies, such as
the minimum and maximum gift details and match ratio. Data from MatchFinder Online
integrates with The Raiser's Edge.
For information about MatchFinder Online purchasing options, send an email to
solutions@blackbaud.com.
For information about downloading matching gift information to The Raiser's Edge, see
"Download donations - single transaction process" on page 354. For information about
matching gifts in The Raiser's Edge, see The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.
6. In the Recurring Gifts frame, mark Allow Recurring gifts to allow donors to contribute regular,
recurring gifts to your organization.
To allow donors to define the frequency of the recurring gift, select General. A Frequency field
appears on your website so donors can select to make a contribution every week, month, quarter,
or year. Once the website user selects a frequency, start and end date fields appear on the web
page.
Note: If a constituent donates a recurring gift and selects a start date that is not today's date, the
transaction downloads to The Raiser's Edge. However, the transaction is not sent to your bank
merchant when the donor submits the recurring gift. The merchant receives the transaction from
the Raiser's Edge batch output you send to your bank for processing. For more information about
bank merchants, see "Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
To define the recurring gift frequency for donors, select Specific. The Custom Frequency frame
appears.
a. In the first field, select "Weekly", "Monthly", "Quarterly", or "Annually" as the frequency. In
the On field, select the day of the week on which you want the recurring gift donated.
b. To add the frequency to the donation page, click Add Frequency.
c. After you click Add Frequency, the Allow Donor to enter Ending Date option appears. To
allow donors to enter the end date for the recurring gift, mark this checkbox.
To add multiple frequency options to the donor web page, repeat steps a. through c.

.
322
C HAPTER 7
Note: Options in the Tribute Gifts frame are for organizations that use Honor/Memorial Tracking
for The Raiser's Edge. If you do not use Honor/Memorial Tracking, do not use these options.
7. In the Tribute Gifts frame, mark Allow Tribute gifts to create a tribute section on the web page.
a. To remove the Description field from the tribute section on the web page, mark Hide
Tribute Description field.
b. If you do not mark the Hide Tribute Description field checkbox, in the Description Text
field, enter text to appear at the beginning of the Tribute Information section on the page. For
example, enter "This gift is made in honor of someone special."
c. To allow the donor to select the tribute type, select General.
Mark the checkbox for each tribute type to include in the tribute section. The tribute types
listed are entries from the Tribute Types table in The Raiser's Edge.
To allow page owners to select the tribute types available on their personal pages, mark
Allow page owner personalization. Page owners can choose from the tribute types you
marked to include.
d. To apply all gifts to a specific tribute, select Specific.
To select an honor or memorial individual from The Raiser's Edge, click Honor/Memorial.
A search screen appears to search for the individual.
In the Tribute field, select the tribute type and description to use. Information in this field
defaults from the Honor/Memorial tab in the The Raiser's Edge. The options are a
combination of the data from the Tribute type and Description fields.

.
P ERSONAL P AGES
323
Note: When you include tribute information on the donor page, the Mail a letter on my behalf
checkbox appears automatically on the page. When a donor marks this checkbox, name and
address fields appear for the donor to enter his or her information. You can use this information in
a tribute letter to the honor or memorial.
8. In the Designations frame, select which fund designations are available to donors when they make
a gift.
a. In the Display Name column, enter a name for the designation to appear on the personal page
to donors. By default, the text entered in the Fund Name field in The Raiser's Edge appears
as the display name.
b. In the Fund column, click Select to access the Fund Search screen and select the fund. For
information about how to use the Search screen, see "Search Screen" on page 23.
c. Mark the checkbox in the Transaction Default column for the designation to use as the
default if the donor does not select a designation.
d. To add multiple designations, click Add Designation to add additional rows to the grid.
Adding multiple designations creates a list of funds on the personal page for donors to select
from.
e. To allow users to write in a fund other than the ones provided in the previous step, mark
Allow Other designation.
f. To include in the list funds the donor contributed to previously, mark Include Donor's prior
gift designations.
If you mark this option, funds from the donor's last 50 gifts are included in the list.
g. If multiple designations are included in the Designations frame, the Support Multiple
designations checkbox appears. Mark this option to allow users to donate to multiple funds.
When you mark this checkbox, the Add to Cart button is included on the Donation Form of
your website. Users select the multiple funds they want to donate to using a process similar to
purchasing items from an online store.

.
324
C HAPTER 7
9. In the Giving Levels frame, you can select suggested giving levels donors view on the personal
page. Click Add Giving Level to add a giving level to the grid. In the Display Name column,
enter a name for the giving level to appear on the personal page. In the Amount column, enter the
suggested amount. If you mark Allow Other amount, donors can enter an amount other than the
suggested amounts.
10. In the Sources frame, you have the option to add a How did you hear about our site? field to the
donation form. Click Add Source to add a source to the grid. In the Display Name column, enter
a name for the source to appear on the personal page. In the Appeal column, select the appeal. You
can mark the checkbox in the Transaction Default column for the appeal to use as the default if
the donor does not select an appeal.
11. In the Required Fields frame, mark the checkbox for each donor field you want to make required
on the donation form. To ensure you download complete constituent information into The Raiser's
Edge, we recommend that you make all of these fields required.

.
P ERSONAL P AGES
325
12. In the Attributes frame, you can select the gift attribute fields to appear on the donation form.
Mark the checkbox in the Display column for each attribute field to include. To make the
attributes required, mark the checkbox in the Required column. In the Caption column, you can
use the default caption or enter a different caption.
The program pulls gift attributes from The Raiser's Edge. If you need a new attribute for your part,
create it in The Raiser's Edge. For information about attributes, see The Raiser's Edge
Configuration & Security Guide.
Note: If you know an attribute exists in The Raiser's Edge, but do not see it, check "System
Options" on page 234 to make sure the attribute is available in Blackbaud NetCommunity.
13. In the Navigation frame, select the page the user is directed to after making a donation.
14. In the Merchant Account frame, you can select the merchant account you want to use to process
credit cards. For example, select your IATS account.

.
326
C HAPTER 7
Note: Merchant accounts are set up in Administration. For more information, see "Merchant
Accounts" on page 229.
Step 7: Configure Emails
On this screen, you create Welcome, Forgotten Password/User ID, and Donation Acknowledgement
email messages. For information about how to create an email, see "Messages" on page 177.
1. Click Create Welcome Email to create an email to send to personal page owners who create a
new page.
2. Click Create Forgotten Password/User ID Email to create an email to send to page owners who
forget their passwords or user ID.
3. Click Create Donation Acknowledgement Email to create an email to send to donors after they
make a donation on a personal page.
Note: When you edit a saved Personal Page Manager part, the Welcome, Forgotten Password/User
ID, and Donation Acknowledgement email tasks appear as buttons on the action bar. To edit an
email, click the button for that email type.
4. To save your Personal Page Manager, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.
Add Help Content for Personal Pages
After you complete and save the Personal Page Manager part, you can reopen the part to add custom text to
help users understand how to use certain features in personal pages. For example, you can create help text
that explains the statistics on the My Activity page of the Home Page dashboard.

.
P ERSONAL P AGES
327
Add helplets for personal pages
1. Open a saved Personal Page Manager part. The Helplets frame appears above Step 1: Personal
Page Options and Administrator Roles.
2. In the Screen field, select the form to create help text for. For example, you can create help text for
the login and user registration forms, the search screen, and all the pages found in the page owner's
Home Page dashboard.
3. In the box, enter the text to appear on the form. To format the content's appearance and layout, use
the HTML editor. For more information about the HTML editor, see "HTML Editor" on page 6.
4. Once you create help text for the first form, you can select another form type in the Screen field.
Changes are saved automatically for the first form, and an asterisk appears next to the form name
to indicate it has saved help content.
5. To save the part, click Save and Close. You return to Parts.

.
328
C HAPTER 7

CHAPTER 8
The Raiser's Edge
NetCommunity Page
In This Chapter
"NetCommunity Options in The Raiser's Edge" on page 329
"NetCommunity Transactions Overview" on page 335
"NetCommunity Transactions in The Raiser's Edge" on page 337
Information entered by website users downloads to transactions on the NetCommunity page in
The Raiser's Edge. On the NetCommunity page, you approve or reject transactions. Approved transactions
process website user information to records in The Raiser's Edge.
With Blackbaud NetCommunity, additional fields appear in The Raiser's Edge Export. The fields are
located in the Blackbaud NetCommunity Page Stats node. You can use these fields to export
information about your website from The Raiser's Edge. If you have Advanced Reporting, you can run
more detailed reports to analyze and improve your website and solicitations. For more information about
how to view website statistics, see "Web Traffic Reports" on page 120.
NetCommunity Options in The Raiser's Edge
In The Raiser's Edge, the NetCommunity page contains an Options section for various transaction types.
Before you download transactions from Blackbaud NetCommunity to The Raiser's Edge, you should
establish transaction options for the Blackbaud NetCommunity web service, currencies, class note
processing, new constituents, linked user email, matching gift, transaction assignments, and advocacy
information.
To access these options in The Raiser's Edge, click NetCommunity on the Raiser's Edge bar. The
NetCommunity page appears. From the top right corner of the page, click Options. The NetCommunity
Options screen appears.

.
330
C HAPTER 8
Note: If the NetCommunity server was recently rebooted, or if the web.config file was recently modified,
it may take a moment for the NetCommunity page to appear in The Raiser's Edge.
On the NetCommunity Options screen, you can establish and configure many options for the integration
between The Raiser's Edge and Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Warning: For security reasons, when a Raiser's Edge user accesses transactions on the NetCommunity
page, you cannot make changes to Options. If you attempt to open Options, a screen appears notifying you
which users are in transactions. You cannot change options until all users exit transactions. In addition, if a
user in The Raiser's Edge is editing options, a second user can only access Options in read only mode.
When Options are read only, the OK and Cancel buttons are not available.
"Service URL" on page 330
"Currency Configuration" on page 330
"Class Note Processing" on page 331
"New Constituents" on page 331
"Matching Gifts" on page 332
"Linked User Email" on page 333
"Constituent Matching" on page 333
"Transaction Assignments" on page 334
"Advocacy" on page 335
Service URL
To establish the location of your Blackbaud NetCommunity web service, use Service URL. The Raiser's
Edge uses the web service to download transactions from Blackbaud NetCommunity.
Establish options for the web service URL
1. On the NetCommunity Options screen, select Service URL from the tree view on the left. On the
rights, the options for web service URL appear.
2. In the URL field, enter the URL for your Blackbaud NetCommunity web service. Typically, the
format of the URL is http://yourmachinenameorIPaddress/PluginService/MasterService.asmx.
3. To test the connection between The Raiser's Edge and Blackbaud NetCommunity, click Test
Connection.
· If a connection exists, a successful connection message appears.
· If the connection is unsuccessful, make sure you entered the correct URL. To verify the URL,
you can copy the URL entered in the URL field and paste it into a web browser.
4. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.
Currency Configuration
To establish the countries and currencies to use with transactions from Blackbaud NetCommunity, use
Currency Configuration.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
331
Establish options for the currency configuration
1. On the NetCommunity Options screen, select Currency Configuration from the tree view on the
left. On the rights, the options for currencies appear.
2. For each Currency, select a corresponding Country.
Note: The exchange rates for currencies are stored in Configuration in The Raiser's Edge. For
more information about exchange rates in Configuration, see the Configuration & Security Guide
for The Raiser's Edge.
3. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.
Class Note Processing
To establish how to manage information entered by website users through the Class Notes part on your
website, use Class Note Processing.
Note: The constituent code selected in the New Constituents option downloads to the Bio 2 tab of the
constituent record. However, the constituent code does not duplicate if it already exists on the tab.
Establish options for class note processing
1. On the NetCommunity Options screen, select Class Note Processing from the tree view on the
left. On the rights, the options for class notes appear.
2. To enable class note updating, mark Enable class note update processing. When you mark this
checkbox, data that website users enter through a Class Notes part on your website download to a
Notepad in The Raiser's Edge.
3. In the Notepad Type field, select the type of note for which you want to store the data from the
Class Notes part. For example, when you select "Biographical", class notes data downloads to the
Notes tab on a constituent record.
4. To create a new Notepad for each class notes update, mark Create a new notepad for every
change.
5. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.
New Constituents
To establish the constituent code to assign to new constituents from Blackbaud NetCommunity, use New
Constituents. For more information about constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see
"Constituent Codes" on page 26.
In New Constituents, you can also create or select an existing Raiser's Edge default set of values for new
records. When you load a default set into a record, the values you entered for the set can automatically
default into the fields on the record. For example, if most of your constituents are from the same city and
state, you can create an "Address" default set with entries in the applicable address fields.
Establish options for new constituents
1. On the NetCommunity Options screen, select New Constituents from the tree view on the left. On
the rights, the options for sign-up information appear.

.
332
C HAPTER 8
2. In the Constituent Code applied for all new constituents field, select a constituent code to
assign to any downloaded constituent not already in your database in The Raiser's Edge. For more
information about constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on
page 26.
3. In the Default Set applied to all new individuals field, select a default set of values for new
individual records.
To create a new default set for new individual records from Blackbaud NetCommunity, click the
Add New link. The New Default Set screen appears so you can select values for the individual
record default set.
Note: The Default Set applied to all new individuals and Default Set applied to all new
organizations fields appear if you integrate with The Raiser's Edge 7.83. For information about
Raiser's Edge default sets, see The Raiser's Edge Program Basics Guide.
4. In the Default Set applied to all new organizations field, select a default set of values for new
organization records.
To create a new default set for new organization records from Blackbaud NetCommunity, click the
Add New link. The New Default Set screen appears so you can select values for the organization
record default set.
5. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.
Matching Gifts
To establish how to manage matching gift information from Blackbaud NetCommunity, use Matching
Gifts.
Establish options for matching gifts
1. On the NetCommunity Options screen, select Matching Gifts from the tree view on the left. On
the rights, the options for matching gift information appear.
2. In the Constituent Code field, select a constituent code to assign to any new organization not
already in your database in The Raiser's Edge. For more information about selecting constituent
codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
3. In the Relationship Code field, select a relationship code to assign to any new organization not
already in your database in The Raiser's Edge. The relationship code defines the nature of the
association the organization has to the constituent (typically, the donor). For example, assign the
code Employer for matching gift companies.
4. To automatically create matching gift pledges for companies with a relationship to a donor, mark
Constituent business relationships.
Tip: In addition, the [Organization constituent] matches gifts from [individual constituent]
checkbox on the General 2 tab on the relationship record must also be marked in The Raiser's
Edge to automatically create a matching gift pledge. For more information, see The Raiser's Edge
Constituent Data Entry Guide.
5. To automatically create matching gift pledges for companies with a relationship to a donor's
spouse, mark Spouse's business relationships.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
333
6. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.
Linked User Email
To select a Blackbaud NetCommunity email template for which NetCommunity Users is selected in the
Data Source field, use Linked User Email. When you establish this option, the Send Linked User Email
button enables on the Sign-up Requests Transactions screen when the website user is auto-matched to a
record in The Raiser's Edge that is linked to a Blackbaud NetCommunity user. To send a user an email
from the Sign-up Requests Transactions screen, you can click Send Linked User Email.
Establish options for linked user email
1. On the NetCommunity Options screen, select Linked User Email from the tree view on the left.
On the rights, the option for a linked email template appears.
2. In the Email Template field, select the email template specified for NetCommunity Users. This
must be an email template with NetCommunity Users selected in the Data Source field. For more
information about email templates, see "Templates" on page 163.
3. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.
Constituent Matching
The Constituent Matching option determines the automatic search method to download sign-up requests,
donations, event registrations, membership, and advocacies. You can select to search by exact match or for
records in The Raiser's Edge that are marked inactive or deceased.
Establish options for constituent matching
1. On the NetCommunity Options screen, select Constituent Matching from the tree view on the
left. On the rights, the options for assigning NetCommunity page user rights appears.
2. Mark the checkbox beside each field you want to search by. For example, to search by last name
and nickname, mark Last Name and Nickname.
Note: To help eliminate results that include duplicate records, we recommend you mark multiple
search fields.
3. To search by exact criteria, mark Exact Match. For example, you want to search for William
Adamson's record. If you mark this checkbox and search for "Will Adamson", the program does
not return his record because the search looks for an exact match for "William Adamson". If you
unmark the checkbox, the program initiates a "begins with" search which returns the record. We
recommend you use this checkbox to narrow a large list of results.
4. To include inactive constituents in The Raiser's Edge in your search, mark Include Inactive.
5. To include deceased constituents in The Raiser's Edge in your search, mark Include Deceased.
6. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.

.
334
C HAPTER 8
Transaction Assignments
To establish filters and security for new transactions as they default in the download grid, use Transaction
Assignments. Assignments are established by selecting a security group in The Raiser's Edge, a filter
type, and criteria in a series of steps for a transaction type. You can select to enable or disable the
assignments for the current downloads. In addition, use Transaction Assignments to manage transactions
not assigned for processing.
Note: You can apply Transaction Assignments to Sign-up Requests, User Profile Updates, Donations,
Volunteer Requests, Event Registration, Membership, and Advocacy Action transaction types.
Establish options for transaction assignments
1. On the NetCommunity Options screen, select Transaction Assignments from the tree view on the
left. On the rights, the options for assigning NetCommunity page user rights appears.
2. In the Transaction Type to manage field, select the type of download transaction for which you
want to assign filters and security. For example, select Profile Updates or Donations.
3. To enable assignments for current downloads, mark Enable Assignments. If you do not want to
assign filters and security for the transaction, do not mark this checkbox.
4. On the Assignment Filters tab, in the Security Group field, select the security group in
The Raiser's Edge for which you want to apply to the transaction type. For example, you can
select your revenue data entry group for Donations.
To enable options on this tab, you must mark Enable Assignments.
a. In the Filter Type field, select the filter for which you want to limit transactions. For
example, select Donor Last Name Starts With.
Note: Options in the Filter Type field vary depending on the transaction type you select in the
Transaction Type to manage field. For example, the filter options for Donations are Fund, Gift
Type, or Donor Last Name Starts With. The filter option for Sign-up Requests is Donor Last Name
Starts With.
b. In the Criteria box, select specific criteria to filter transactions by based on your selection in
the Filter Type field. For example, if, in the Filter Type field, you select Donor Last Name
Starts With, A through Z appears in the Criteria box. If you select Fund for an applicable
transaction type, your funds in The Raiser's Edge appear in the box.
Note: To select multiple criteria in this box, press SHIFT or CTRL on your keyboard. With the key
pressed, click the additional criteria you need with your mouse.
c. After you complete Steps 1 - 3, click Add. The filter you created appears in the grid at the
bottom.
To remove individual filters, click Remove. To remove all filters for the transaction type,
click Clear All Filters.
5. To manage transactions that are not assigned, select the Transaction Properties tab.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
335
Note: Options on the Transaction Properties tab apply to the transaction type you selected in the
Transaction Type to manage field.
6. In the Unassigned Transactions frame, click the drop down to select the security group in
The Raiser's Edge for which you want to apply unassigned transactions.
An unassigned transaction refers to a transaction that is not considered for processing based on the
filter and security criteria you select in the Transaction Assignments option. For example, a gift
from Robert Zier is downloaded to Donations. The Transaction Assignments filters for
Donations uses Donor Last Name Starts With. However, the letter Z is not assigned to a security
group for processing. Robert Zier's gift is processed by the security group you select in this field.
For users in The Raiser's Edge not in the security group you select in the Specify the default
security group... field, to default unassigned transactions to its own tab, mark Show unassigned
transaction tab. When you mark this checkbox, the Make transactions read-only checkbox
enables. To default unassigned transactions to its own read-only tab, mark this checkbox.
7. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.
Advocacy
If you use Blackbaud NetAdvocacy, to establish how to manage advocacy information from Blackbaud
NetCommunity, use Advocacy.
Establish options for advocacy information
1. If you use Blackbaud NetAdvocacy, on the NetCommunity Options screen, select Advocacy from
the tree view on the left. On the rights, the options for advocacy information appears.
2. In the Constituent Code field, select a constituent code to assign to any downloaded constituent
not already in your database in The Raiser's Edge. For more information about constituent codes
in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.
3. To save your options and return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click OK.
NetCommunity Transactions Overview
The NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge contains multiple sections for various transaction types. To
access the page in The Raiser's Edge, click NetCommunity on the Raiser's Edge bar. The NetCommunity
page appears. If the NetCommunity server was recently rebooted or the web.config file was recently
modified, it may take a moment for the page to appear.
Note: To include the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, you must install certain NetCommunity
files for the workstation. You can install the files on as many workstations as needed. For more
information, see the Blackbaud NetCommunity Installation and Upgrade Guide.
A View field exists on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. In this field, you can select to view
All Transaction Categories, Unaccepted Transactions Only, or Unaccepted Transactions with Counts. If
you select Unaccepted Transactions with Counts, a status appears for the download that informs you how
many new transactions exist.
An Options link also exists on the Netcommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. Before you process data
from Blackbaud NetCommunity to The Raiser's Edge, you should establish options for transactions. For
more information, see "NetCommunity Options in The Raiser's Edge" on page 329.

.
336
C HAPTER 8
Warning: If a Raiser's Edge user is in Options on the NetCommunity page, you cannot access the rest of
the page until the user exits Options.
Required Fields in The Raiser's Edge
In certain situations, required fields in The Raiser's Edge are considered when downloading transactions
from Blackbaud NetCommunity. Other times, they are not considered. Be aware of these situations.
· When you process transactions for sign-ups, donations, volunteer requests, and event registrations in
bulk by marking the Select All checkbox, required fields are not considered. A new constituent record is
created without required data.
Note: This example assumes you did not mark Bypass required fields on the Options tab on a bulk
process screen.
For example, The Raiser's Edge requires that all constituent records contain the attribute "Retirement
Date" with the corresponding date. Bill Smith makes a donation on your website and does not include
his retirement date information. When you download donations, a constituent record for Bill Smith is
created in The Raiser's Edge.
· When you link or create records for sign-ups, profile updates, donations, volunteer requests, event
registrations, memberships, and advocacies, a record is first linked or created using the first name (if
available), last name, email address, and constituent code. After you search for a constituent record in
the database and click Link Constituent (for existing records) or Create New (to create a new record),
the transaction refreshes. From this point, required fields in The Raiser's Edge apply when you
download transactions.
For example, The Raiser's Edge requires constituent records contain the attribute "Retirement Date"
with the corresponding date. Bill Smith makes a donation on your website and does not include his
retirement date. When you open a transaction and search for a record in the database, required fields are
not considered when you click Link Constituent or Create New. After this step is complete, required
fields in The Raiser's Edge apply when you process the transaction to The Raiser's Edge. Because Bill
did not enter the information on your site, you can open his constituent record and manually add the
Retirement Date attribute.
Process Order for Transaction Types
The Fundraiser, Personal Page, and Volunteer Request transaction types require a process order for
downloading new users. For example, you cannot process volunteer information for a new user in the
Volunteer Requests download. First, you must process the new user in Sign-up Requests.
For details about transaction process order for Fundraisers, Personal Pages, and Volunteer Requests
transaction types, review the information in this section.
Fundraisers
You must process Fundraiser transactions in the following order.
· If the participant is a new user, process the transaction for the user in Sign-up Requests.
· If the user made a donation, process the Fundraiser transaction before you process the Donation
transaction. Additionally, if the user submits an event registration, process the Fundraiser transaction
before you process the Event Registration transaction.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
337
Donation and Event Registration transactions do not appear in the download until Sign-up Requests and
Fundraiser transactions are processed.
Personal Pages
When you process volunteer request transactions, if the page owner is a new user, you must first process
the transaction for the user in Sign-Up Requests. Personal Page transactions do not appear in the download
until Sign-Up Request transactions are processed.
Volunteer Requests
You must process Volunteer Request transactions in the following order.
· If the volunteer is a new user, process the transaction for the user in Sign-Up Requests.
· If the volunteer is an existing user and a User Profile Update transaction exists for the volunteer, process
the User Profile Update transaction before you process the Volunteer Request transaction.
Volunteer Request transactions do not appear in the download until new user sign-up transactions are
processed. Volunteer Request transactions for existing users do appear if a User Profile Update
transaction is not processed. However, you should process the User Profile Update before you process
the Volunteer Request.
NetCommunity Transactions in The Raiser's
Edge
After you understand the "NetCommunity Options in The Raiser's Edge" on page 329 and the
"NetCommunity Transactions Overview" on page 335 sections, you can begin processing Blackbaud
NetCommunity transactions in The Raiser's Edge.
Note: You should periodically check the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge for transactions from
the website. To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
Sign-Up Requests
Before you process Sign-Up Requests, you should select options in "NetCommunity Options in
The Raiser's Edge" on page 329. Specifically, you can apply "Transaction Assignments" on page 334 to
Sign-Up Requests. Review that section before proceeding with this section.
There are two main ways to process Sign-up Requests -- single and bulk. We do not recommend
combining steps between these two processes. For example, do not use the Process Transaction button on
the action bar if you are going to download transactions using the bulk process. Read this section entirely
to learn about the information available for both processes.
· Single -- You can select each row individually to match the user with an existing Raiser's Edge record
or add the user as a new record in the database.
· Bulk -- You can select all users and process every transaction at once. If you select to process all
transactions at once, you may need to clean up data in The Raiser's Edge after processing completes.

.
338
C HAPTER 8
Download sign-up requests -- single transaction process
When you use the single transaction process, you select each row individually to match the user with
an existing Raiser's Edge record or add the user as a new record in the database.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Sign-up Requests. The Sign-up
Requests Transactions screen appears.
2. On the Sign-up Requests Transactions tab, select the row to process by clicking in the Sign-up
Information column. The Constituent Linking frame appears on the right and opens to the
Record Linking tab.
Tip: This tab is called Assigned Sign-up Requests Transactions when transaction assignments are
enabled. If transaction assignments do not apply to a transaction, an Unassigned tab appears.
Follow the same steps in this procedure to process transactions on that tab. For information about
transaction assignments, see "Transaction Assignments" on page 334.
The Transaction Date/Status column on the Sign-up Requests Transactions tab defaults the date
the user submitted the transaction on your website. The checked out status also appears in the
column. When a Raiser's Edge user is processing the transaction, Checked out by and Checked
out on information displays. If a Raiser's Edge user is not processing the transaction, Not
Checked Out displays.
3. In the Constituent Linking frame on the right, data from Blackbaud NetCommunity appears in
the Transaction Data box. If your Constituent Matching options match a Raiser's Edge record,
Raiser's Edge data appears in the Linked Constituent box and the Auto-matched indicator
appears. To open the Raiser's Edge record for the user, click Open Constituent.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
339
Tip: If duplicate records are found {Duplicates Found} appears in the Linked Constituent
column. The search method is based on the settings in the Constituent Matching option. For more
information, see "Constituent Matching" on page 333.
If you are sure the website user is the matched Raiser's Edge constituent and do not need to change
the transaction, proceed to the Transaction Constituent Code step. If the records in the
Constituent Linking frame match and you want to review or make changes to the transaction,
click Find Constituent above the Transaction Data box. A screen appears to view additional
data the user submitted on your site.
If the Linked Constituent box is blank, you must link the website user with an existing Raiser's
Edge record or create a new record for the user. For more information, see the next step.
Note: You can send a user an email from Sign-up Requests. For example, you may want to send a
forgotten user ID email to a user who attempts to register again. When the website user is
auto-matched to a Raiser's Edge record that is linked to a Blackbaud NetCommunity user, the
Send Linked User Email button appears. When you click this button, the email template selected
in the Linked User Email option appears for you to send the email. For more information about
the option, see "Linked User Email" on page 333. For more information about email templates, see
"Templates" on page 163.
4. To search for an existing Raiser's Edge constituent, click Find Constituent.

.
340
C HAPTER 8
Tip: If the Linked Constituent box does not have an indicator or if Auto-matched appears above
the box, the Find Constituent button appears. If Linked appears above the box, the Edit Profile
button appears.
A NetCommunity Transaction screen appears.
a. If the user entered information in the applicable section on the sign-up form, the
Biographical, Preferred Address, Primary Business, and Constituent Attributes tabs appear.
On these tabs, mark any fields in the Search Field column in which you want to process a
Raiser's Edge search.
The fields that default with a checkbox in the Search Field column are the fields selected in
the Constituent Matching option.
Note: We recommend you use only the most useful criteria fields to search for a record. Adding
too many criteria information may actually prevent you from locating a record. To unmark all
fields at once, click Clear Search Criteria.
b. To include inactive Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display inactive
constituents.
c. To include deceased Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display deceased
constituents.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
341
d. To search by exact criteria, mark Exact match only. For example, you search for Will
Adamson's record. If you mark the checkbox and search for "William Adamson", the
program does not return his record because the search looks for an exact match for "Will
Adamson". If you unmark the checkbox, the program initiates a "begins with" search which
returns the record. We recommend using this checkbox to narrow a large list of results.
e. To begin the search, click Find Now. Results appear in the grid at the bottom of the screen.
Results in this grid cannot exceed 100 records. Records with Has no valid address marked in
The Raiser's Edge are included in the search results.
f. If a a record matches, select the row and click Link Constituent, Choose Selected
Constituent.

.
342
C HAPTER 8
Tip: If an email template is selected in the Linked User Email option, the Send Linked User
Email button appears. When you click this, the template appears to send an email. For example,
you may want to send a forgotten user ID email to a user who attempts to register again. If you do
not want to send an email, click Close. For more information about the option, see "Linked User
Email" on page 333. For more information about email templates, see "Templates" on page 163.
Note: If you changed any data the user entered in the New Value column, a message appears
notifying you the download transaction has changed. To add the changed data to The Raiser's
Edge, click Yes. If you do not want to add the data to The Raiser's Edge, click No.
If an existing record does not match the sign-up request, click Link Constituent, Create
New Constituent. For information about creating new constituents, see the next step.
5. To create a new record in The Raiser's Edge, click Create New, Create Constituent in the
Constituent Linking frame. Linked appears above the Linked Constituent box to indicate a
record has been created in The Raiser's Edge for the user.
a. To edit data the website user entered, click Create New, Create New and Edit. A screen
appears to compare existing Raiser's Edge data with the user sign-up request information. If
the user entered information in the applicable section of the sign-up form, the Biographical,
Preferred Address, Primary Business, and Constituent Attributes tabs appear. You can
process each tab individually or all at one time.
b. For each field to update on the Raiser's Edge record, mark Process. If you unmark Process
for a field, the data does not download to The Raiser's Edge.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
343
c. Information provided by the user during the sign-up appears in the New Value column. To
edit data a user entered, make changes in the appropriate row in this column.
Tip: New table entries appear in bold. If you have appropriate rights, you can create a new Raiser's
Edge table entry from this screen, or you can click in the row of the New Value column to select
an existing table entry. To keep data consistent, it is important to try to use existing table entries.
d. Select the remaining applicable transaction options for the tab. Once you are done, click Save
and Close. The screen closes and you return to the Constituent Linking frame. Linked
appears above the Linked Constituent box.
6. In the Transaction Constituent Code frame, the constituent code selected on the part defaults in
the field. You can change or remove the constituent code for the transaction in this field. If you
select the same constituent code in the New Constituents option, the constituent code does not
duplicate on the Bio 2 tab in the constituent record. If the constituent codes are different, both
codes download to the new constituent record. For more information about the option, see "New
Constituents" on page 331. For more information about selecting constituent codes in Blackbaud
NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.

.
344
C HAPTER 8
7. To view origin information for the sign-up, select the Details tab. In the NetCommunity Details
frame, information appears such as the NetCommunity User and the NetCommunity Page from
which the transaction was made on the website. In the Transaction Details frame, information
appears such as The Raiser's Edge user that downloaded the transaction to the NetCommunity
page and The Raiser's Edge user currently using the transaction.
8. To process the selected sign-up, click Process Transaction on the action bar.
To save your information, but not process the transaction, click Process Transaction, Save
Changes. You can process the transaction at another time.
9. Repeat this procedure to individually process any sign-up requests on this screen that remain.
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
10. When you finish, click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Download sign-up requests -- bulk process
When you use bulk process, you select to download all sign ups to the The Raiser's Edge and process
every transaction at once. If you select to process everything at once, you need to clean up data in The
Raiser's Edge after processing completes.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Sign-up Requests. The Sign-up
Requests Transactions screen appears.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
345
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
2. To process every transaction on the screen, mark Select All. When you mark this, every row
appears with a checkbox. Unmark the checkbox next to any names you do not want to process to
The Raiser's Edge.
3. Click Bulk Processing. The Process User Sign-up Requests screen appears.
4. On the Processing tab, review bulk properties such as Transactions Selected and Successfully
Checked Out.
5. On the Options tab, you select options for Unlinked Records and Transaction Profile Data in
the bulk process.
a. In the Unlinked Records frame, to attempt constituent matching based on Constituent
Matching options, mark Attempt auto-match to an existing record. For more information,
see "Constituent Matching" on page 333.
b. To create new Raiser's Edge records for the website users, mark Create new Raiser's Edge
record automatically.
c. To ignore Raiser's Edge required fields, mark Bypass required fields. For more information,
see "Required Fields in The Raiser's Edge" on page 336.
d. In the Transaction Profile Data frame, select if you want to Accept Profile Information or
Reject Profile Information from the website user. If you accept the profile information, the
data defaults to the constituent record in The Raiser's Edge.
6. When you finish, on the Process tab, click Process Now. Bulk processing begins.
7. When the process is complete, click Close on the Process New User Sign-ups screen. You return to
the User Sign-up Requests screen.
8. Click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
User Profile Updates
You can update constituent records in The Raiser's Edge with changes website users make to online
profiles. For example, an alumnus may let you know through the website of an address change or graduate
degree information.
Note: The User Profile Updates download also includes profile updates from a User Education Profile
Form part.
You can only process updates for website users that have been previously matched to a Raiser's Edge
record on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. If The Raiser's Edge record has been deleted, the
transaction is invalid and you must reject the profile update.
Before you process profile updates, you should select options in "NetCommunity Options in The Raiser's
Edge" on page 329. Specifically, you can apply "Transaction Assignments" on page 334 to profile
updates. Review that section before proceeding with this section.
Download user profile updates and user education profile updates
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click User Profile Updates. The User Profile
Updates Transactions screen appears.

.
346
C HAPTER 8
2. On the User Profile Updates tab, select the row to process by clicking in the Online User
Information column. Depending on the profile information the user updated, a variety of tabs
appear on the right.
Tip: This tab is called Assigned User Profile Updates when transaction assignments are enabled. If
transaction assignments do not apply to a transaction, an Unassigned tab appears. Follow the same
steps in this procedure to process transactions on that tab. For information about transaction
assignments, see "Transaction Assignments" on page 334.
The Transaction Date/Status column on the Assigned User Profile Updates tab defaults the date
the user submitted the transaction on your website. The checked out status also appears in the
column. When a Raiser's Edge user is processing the transaction, Checked out by and Checked
out on information displays. If a Raiser's Edge user is not processing the transaction, Not
Checked Out displays.
3. If the user updated information in the applicable section on the profile form, the Profile
Information tab on the right can include the Primary Business, Biographical, Education, Preferred
Address, Spouse, Constituent Attributes, and Notes tabs. Beginning with the first tab, mark
Process for each field you want to update on the Raiser's Edge record. If you unmark Process for a
field, the data in Raiser's Edge remains the same.
Tip: To process every field on the tab, mark Select All. When you mark this, every row appears
with a checkbox in the Process column.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
347
Several tabs include process options for downloading the information to The Raiser's Edge. For
more information, see "Process Tabs for Profile Updates" on page 348.
4. Information provided by the user appears in the New Value column. The existing Raiser's Edge
data appears in the Raiser's Edge column. To edit any data a user entered, make changes in the
appropriate row in the New Value column.
Tip: New table entries appear in bold. If you have appropriate rights, you can create a new Raiser's
Edge table entry from this screen, or you can click in the row of the New Value column to select
an existing table entry. To keep data consistent, it is important to try to use existing table entries.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the remaining tabs.
Warning: If you click Process Transaction, Apply Selected Updates, every field marked
Process on the tabs are processed at the same time. For more information about this button, see the
Process Transaction step.
6. To view origin information for the profile update, select the Details tab. In the NetCommunity
Details frame, information appears such as the NetCommunity User and the NetCommunity
Page from which the transaction was made on the website. In the Transaction Details frame,
information appears such as The Raiser's Edge user that downloaded the transaction to the
NetCommunity page and The Raiser's Edge user currently using the transaction.
7. To process the information, click Process Transaction.

.
348
C HAPTER 8
To partially process a transaction, click Process Transaction, Apply Selected Updates. A
partially processed transaction includes the changes for which you have marked Process. If
another profile update for the user downloads to User Profile Updates, data can be overwritten by
the second profile update.
8. Repeat this procedure to process any profile updates on the User Profile Updates Transactions
screen that remain.
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
9. You can delete any transaction you do not want to process. To delete a transaction, select the row
and click Delete Transaction.
A message appears asking if you want to delete it. Click Yes.
10. When you finish, click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Process Tabs for Profile Updates
If the user updated information in the applicable section on the profile form, the Profile Information tab on
the right can include the Primary Business, Biographical, Education, Preferred Address, Spouse,
Constituent Attributes, and Notes tabs. Several tabs include processing options for downloading the
information to The Raiser's Edge. This section includes information about these options for the Primary
Business, Education, Preferred Address, and Notes tabs.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
349
Note: Refer to the information in this section for step 3 in "Download user profile updates and user
education profile updates" on page 345.
Primary Business Tab
On the Primary Business tab, select if you want to Update the primary business with the downloaded
information or Add the downloaded information as a new organization relationship for this
constituent. If you update the information, you can mark the checkbox to Update shared organization
name. If you add the information as an organization relationship, you can Make this new organization
the primary business.

.
350
C HAPTER 8
Education Tab
On the Education tab, mark the Make Primary checkbox. When you mark an education record as primary
in The Raiser's Edge, you are designating the record as the main or most recent education record for the
constituent.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
351
Preferred Address Tab
On the Preferred Address tab, select if you want to Update the preferred address with the downloaded
information or Add the downloaded information as a new address for this constituent. If you add the
information as a new address, you can Make this new address the preferred address. In the Previous
address type field, select an address type for the old address in the Changed From column. If the Update
Shared Address? checkbox appears, the user has a shared address in The Raiser's Edge. To update shared
address information, mark the checkbox.
Notes Tab
On the Notes tab, to edit information a user entered (on the Personal Notes part), click Edit. A Notepad
Details screen appears for you to edit the personal note.

.
352
C HAPTER 8
Fundraisers
If you move a solicitor to another team in The Raiser's Edge, the next time the solicitor logs into your
Fundraiser part type on your website, the solicitor sees she is on a different team. To properly credit a
solicitor with a donation using the Fundraiser part, Fundraiser participant information must be downloaded
to The Raiser's Edge before the donation information from the part is downloaded.
Download fundraisers
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Fundraisers. The Fundraisers screen
appears.
2. In the Fund column, the fund name for the Fundraiser part appears. Review the number of new
and changed teams and solicitors in the Activity column.
3. Double-click the row of information you need (or click the Process Update button). A team and
solicitor tree view appears for the fund.
4. View the team and solicitor changes.
5. To accept these changes, click OK. You return to the Fundraisers screen.
6. Click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Personal Pages
You can download personal page requests from Blackbaud NetCommunity to The Raiser's Edge. The
download process adds a new phone type to the personal page owner's constituent record with a link to the
personal page. Use this process as an approval system to manage who is allowed to have a personal page.
You can reject a personal page request by deleting the request from the process screen. Rejecting a request
deletes the personal page from Blackbaud NetCommunity automatically.
Download personal pages
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Personal Pages. The Personal Page
Requests screen appears. The grid lists each request ready to process.
2. Mark the checkbox in the Process Now column for each personal page request you want to
download.
3. If you want to reject a personal page request, select that request in the grid and click Delete Row.
A message screen appears asking if you want to delete. Click Yes. Rejecting a request also deletes
the personal page from Blackbaud NetCommunity.
4. Click OK. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Donations
Before you process donations, you should select options in "NetCommunity Options in The Raiser's
Edge" on page 329. Specifically, you can apply "Transaction Assignments" on page 334 to donations.
Review that section before proceeding with this section.
If you are about to process donations for a Fundraiser part, you should first process Fundraiser
transactions. Then, download the donations. For more information about Fundraiser transactions, see
"Fundraisers" on page 352.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
353
There are two main ways to process Donations -- single and bulk. We do not recommend combining steps
between these two processes. For example, do not use the Process Transaction button on the action bar if
you are going to download transactions using the bulk process. Read this section entirely to learn about the
information available for both processes.
· Single -- You can select each row individually to match the donor with an existing Raiser's Edge record
or add the donor as a new record in the database.
· Bulk -- You can select all donors and process every donation at once. If you select to process all
donations at once, you may need to clean up data in The Raiser's Edge after processing completes.
When you process transactions, you must make more decisions beyond using the single or bulk process.
For example, you may want to create a batch in The Raiser's Edge to specifically use for donations from
Blackbaud NetCommunity. Or, you may want to create the batch in the Donations transaction. Review the
following diagram for an example of one way to process donations. Before you begin regularly processing
transactions, a best practice decision should be made for your organization.
Assign a batch for transactions
Donation transactions create a gift batch in The Raiser's Edge. You can select to create a new gift batch
or use an existing gift batch to process donations.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Donations. The Donations
Transactions screen appears.
You can also assign a batch for "Event Registrations" on page 374. Follow the steps in this
procedure to select a batch for Event Registrations.
2. From the menu bar, select Tools, Transaction Options. The Transaction Options screen appears.
3. In the Batch Number frame, to assign the batch the next available number in the program, select
Use next available batch number.
If you process transactions individually, the Use next available batch number option creates a new
batch for every individual transaction row.
4. To download the gifts to an existing batch in The Raiser's Edge, select Add records to an existing
batch. Click the binoculars to select the existing batch. If the batch includes a default set, the
values apply to the gifts you include in the existing batch. You cannot select an existing batch that
has already been committed.

.
354
C HAPTER 8
5. To load a default set of values from an existing batch for a new batch, select Load fields and
default values from an existing batch. Click the binoculars to select the existing batch from
which to load the default set. Because you are selecting a default set for a new batch, you can
select from a previously committed batch.
Warning: When you select a default set, only the Defaults tab General values from The Raiser's
Edge Batch load for Blackbaud NetCommunity transactions. Split Gift, Schedule, and
Honor/Memorial values do not load for transactions.
6. To return to the Donations Transactions screen, click OK. To confirm the correct batch number is
assigned to the transaction, view Current Batch Number in the lower left corner of the screen.
Process attributes
For the "Donations" on page 352 and "Event Registrations" on page 374 transaction types, you can
open an attribute screen to view, edit, and process attributes the user selected on your website. On this
screen, you can prevent invalid attributes from downloading to a record in The Raiser's Edge.
1. On the transactions screen, select the Transaction Information tab.
2. In the Gift Attributes box, press F7 on your keyboard. An attributes screen appears. Attributes the
user selected appear in the Values column.
For Event Registrations, in the Event Participation Information box, press F7 to view
participant attributes. For more information, see "Download event registrations - single transaction
process" on page 375.
3. If the user entered an attribute you do not want to download to The Raiser's Edge, unmark the
Process checkbox.
4. To edit an invalid attribute, edit the attribute information in the Values column.
Warning: If the attribute is a table, you must select an existing attribute in the Values column to
process the data to The Raiser's Edge.
5. After you confirm the attributes on the screen are the ones to process to a Raiser's Edge record,
click Save and Close.
Download donations - single transaction process
When you use the single transaction process, you select each row individually to match the donor with
an existing Raiser's Edge record or add the donor as a new record in the database.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Donations. The Donations
Transactions screen appears.
Note: Donation transactions create a gift batch in The Raiser's Edge. From Tools, Transaction
Options, you can select batch options before you process a donation. The batch screen does not
appear until you process the donation. For more information, see Step 14 in this procedure and
"Assign a batch for transactions" on page 353.
2. On the Donations tab, select the row to process by clicking in the Donor Information column.
The Constituent Linking frame appears on the right and defaults to the Record Linking tab.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
355
Tip: This tab is called Assigned Donations when transaction assignments are enabled. If
transaction assignments do not apply to a transaction, an Unassigned tab appears. Follow the same
steps in this procedure to process transactions on that tab. For information about transaction
assignments, see "Transaction Assignments" on page 334.
The Gift Information column displays the donation amount, the gift date, fund, and source (or
appeal). If you support multiple currency types, review the following.
· If a gift amount has been converted to your local currency, the converted amount displays in
"( )" in the Gift Information column.
· Exchange rates are established in Raiser's Edge Configuration. For more information, see
The Raiser's Edge Configuration & Security Guide. To map currency types for Blackbaud
NetCommunity, see "Currency Configuration" on page 330.
· Blackbaud NetCommunity Administration, add an IATS merchant account for each currency
type. For more information about merchant accounts, see "Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
The Transaction Date/Status column on the Donations tab defaults the date the user submitted
the donation on your website. The checked out status also appears in the column. When a Raiser's
Edge user is processing the transaction, Checked out by and Checked out on information
displays. If a Raiser's Edge user is not processing the transaction, Not Checked Out displays.
3. In the Constituent Linking frame on the right, data from Blackbaud NetCommunity appears in
the Transaction Data box. If your Constituent Matching options match a Raiser's Edge record,
Raiser's Edge data appears in the Linked Constituent box and the Auto-matched indicator
appears. To open the Raiser's Edge record for the user, click Open Constituent.

.
356
C HAPTER 8
Tip: If duplicate records are found {Duplicates Found} appears in the RE Constituent column.
The search method is based on the settings in the Constituent Matching option. For more
information, see "Constituent Matching" on page 333.
If you are sure the website user is the matched Raiser's Edge constituent and do not need to change
the transaction, proceed to the Transaction Constituent Code step. If the records in the
Constituent Linking frame match and you want to review or make changes to the transaction,
click Find Constituent above the Transaction Data box. A screen appears to view additional
data the user submitted on your site.
If the Linked Constituent box is blank, you must link the website user with an existing Raiser's
Edge record or create a new record for the user. For more information, see the next step.
4. To search for an existing Raiser's Edge constituent, click Find Constituent.
Tip: If the Linked Constituent box does not have an indicator or if Auto-matched appears above
the box, the Find Constituent button appears. If Linked appears above the box, the Edit Profile
button appears.
A NetCommunity Transaction screen appears.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
357
a. If the user entered information in the applicable section on the donation form, the
Biographical, Preferred Address, and Primary Business tabs appear. On these tabs, mark any
fields in the Search Field column in which you want to process a Raiser's Edge search.
The fields that default with a checkbox in the Search Field column are the fields selected in
the Constituent Matching option.
Note: We recommend you use only the most useful criteria fields to search for a record. Adding
too many criteria information may actually prevent you from locating a record. To unmark all
fields at once, click Clear Search Criteria.
b. To include inactive Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display inactive
constituents.
c. To include deceased Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display deceased
constituents.
d. To search by exact criteria, mark Exact match only. For example, you search for Will
Adamson's record. If you mark the checkbox and search for "William Adamson", the
program does not return his record because the search looks for an exact match for "Will
Adamson". If you unmark the checkbox, the program initiates a "begins with" search which
returns the record. We recommend using this checkbox to narrow a large list of results.
e. To begin the search, click Find Now. Results appear in the grid at the bottom of the screen.
Results in this grid cannot exceed 100 records. Records with Has no valid address marked in
The Raiser's Edge are included in the search results.

.
358
C HAPTER 8
f. If a a record matches, select the row and click Link Constituent, Choose Selected
Constituent.
Note: If you changed any data the user entered in the New Value column, a message appears
notifying you the download transaction has changed. To add the changed data to The Raiser's
Edge, click Yes. If you do not want to add the data to The Raiser's Edge, click No.
If an existing record does not match the donor, click Link Constituent, Create New
Constituent. For information about creating new constituents, see the next step.
5. To create a new record in The Raiser's Edge, click Create New, Create Constituent in the
Constituent Linking frame. Linked appears above the Linked Constituent box. A record has
been created in The Raiser's Edge for the user.
a. To edit data the website user entered, click Create New, Create New and Edit. A screen
appears to compare existing Raiser's Edge data with the donor information. If the user
entered information in the applicable section of the donation form, the Biographical,
Preferred Address, and Primary Business tabs appear. You can process each tab individually
or all at one time.
b. For each field to update on the Raiser's Edge record, mark Process. If you unmark Process
for a field, the data does not download to The Raiser's Edge.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
359
c. Information provided by the user during the donation appears in the New Value column. To
edit data a user entered, make changes in the appropriate row in this column.
Tip: New table entries appear in bold. If you have appropriate rights, you can create a new Raiser's
Edge table entry from this screen, or you can click in the row of the New Value column to select
an existing table entry. To keep data consistent, it is important to try to use existing table entries.
d. Select the remaining applicable transaction options for the tab. Once you are done, click Save
and Close. The screen closes and you return to the Constituent Linking frame. Linked
appears above the Linked Constituent box.
6. In the Transaction Constituent Code frame, the constituent code selected on the Donation Form
part defaults in the field. You can change or remove the constituent code for the transaction in this
field. If you select the same constituent code in the New Constituents option, the constituent code
does not duplicate on the Bio 2 tab in the constituent record. If the constituent codes are different,
both codes download to the new constituent record. For more information about the New
Constituents option, see "New Constituents" on page 331. For more information about selecting
constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.

.
360
C HAPTER 8
7. In the Organization Linking frame, in the Transaction Data box, view organization information
for a corporate gift.
Note: The Organization Linking frame appears only if the donation is a corporate gift.
a. To search for an existing Raiser's Edge organization record, click Find Organization.
b. To create a new organization record in The Raiser's Edge, click Create New. An
Auto-matched indicator appears above the Linked Organization box. A record has been
created in The Raiser's Edge for the organization.
c. To link the new record, click Open Linked. The organization record appears in The Raiser's
Edge. On the Raiser's Edge toolbar, click Save and Close. You return to the Organization
Linking frame. Linked appears above the Linked Organization box.
8. In the Tribute Linking frame, in the Transaction Data box, view tribute information if the
donation was made in honor or memory of another person.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
361
Note: The Tribute Linking frame must meet several conditions to appear. Your organization must
use The Raiser's Edge Honor/Memorial Tracking and you must select to include tributes on the
Donation Form part. Lastly, the website user must submit tribute information on your site for the
frame to appear.
a. To search for an existing Raiser's Edge tribute, click Find Tribute.
The Link Tribute Information screen appears. The Tribute Information from Transaction,
Linked Tribute Information, and Acknowledgee data defaults from the website.
b. In the Honor/Memorial field, click the binoculars to search for an existing Raiser's Edge
honor/memorial record.
c. In the Tribute field, select a tribute type from The Raiser's Edge.
d. In the Acknowledgee box, to link the acknowledgee to a Raiser's Edge relationship record,
press F7. A screen appears for you to link to an existing record in The Raiser's Edge. If the
acknowledgee does not have an existing record, return to the Link Tribute Information
screen. When you click OK on this screen, a new relationship record is created for the
acknowledgee.
After you link the acknowledgee to a Raiser's Edge record, acknowledgee information
appears in the Linked Record box.
e. To return to the Tribute Linking frame, click OK. Tribute data from The Raiser's Edge
appears in the Linked Tribute box. Linked appears above the box.

.
362
C HAPTER 8
f. To create a new tribute record in The Raiser's Edge, click Create New Tribute. Linked
appears above the Linked Tribute box. A record has been created in The Raiser's Edge for
the tribute.
9. In the Fund Linking frame, in the Transaction Data box, view the fund information for the
donation. If there is a match for the fund the user entered on your website, a link is established to
the Raiser's Edge fund in the Linked Funds box.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
363
If the Transaction Data column lists multiple funds, the donor made a split gift. To view split gift
details, click Find Funds. A Gift Fund Details screen appears with Fund, Description, and
Amount information.
a. If the fund is not matched, click Find Funds to search for an existing Raiser's Edge fund. The
Gift Fund Details screen appears.
b. In the Fund column, press F7 on your keyboard. The Open screen appears.
c. Search for the fund to link to the transaction. If the fund does not exist, click Add New to
create a new fund record in The Raiser's Edge.
d. To return to the Fund Linking frame, click OK. Fund data from The Raiser's Edge appears
in the Linked Funds box and a Linked indicator appears above the box.
10. If the donation is a direct debit transaction, the Bank Linking frame appears. In the Transaction
Data box, view the bank information for the donation.
If there is a match for the bank the donor entered, a link is established to the Raiser's Edge bank in
the Linked Bank box and a Linked indicator appears above the box.
Tip: Bank information downloads to the Relationship tab on the constituent record.
a. If the bank is not matched, click Find Bank to search for an existing Raiser's Edge bank. The
search screen appears.
b. Search for the bank to link to the direct debit. If the bank does not exist, click Add New to
create a new bank in The Raiser's Edge.

.
364
C HAPTER 8
c. To return to the Bank Linking frame, click OK. Bank data from The Raiser's Edge appears
in the Linked Bank box. Linked appears above the box.
11. In the Matching Gift Linking frame, in the Transaction Data box, view matching gift
information for the donation.
The program attempts to link the matching gift company name with an existing Raiser's Edge
organization record. Due to potential data entry inconsistencies, make sure the correct company is
in the Transaction Data box.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
365
a. Depending on how you add matching gifts to The Raiser's Edge, do one of the following to
process the matching gift data from the website.
If the user did not enter a company, and if you are aware the user works for one, select a
matching gift company. Click Manage Matching Gifts. On the Matching Gift Pledges
screen, click Add.
If the company does not have an organization record in your Raiser's Edge database, create
one.
If the donor entered a company name but you do not use MatchFinder Online, search to see if
the company has a record in The Raiser's Edge. Click Manage Matching Gifts. The
Matching Gift Pledges screen appears. To select a Matching Gift Company from your
Raiser's Edge database, click the ellipsis. If the company does not have an organization
record in your database, create one.

.
366
C HAPTER 8
Enter the Pledge amount. After the organization is associated with a Raiser's Edge record,
the Add this company as an organization relationship for checkbox enables. Mark this to
add the company as a relationship record for the donor. To include additional matching gifts,
in the Additional Matching Gift Pledges frame, click Add.
If a donor enters a company and you use MatchFinder Online, check if the company has a
record in The Raiser's Edge. Click Manage Matching Gifts. The Matching Gift Pledges
screen appears with additional features. To select the Matching Gift Company from your
Raiser's Edge database, click the ellipsis. If the company does not have an organization
record in your database, create one. To access MatchFinder Online and review the company's
matching information, click Lookup. Enter the Pledge amount. After the organization is

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
367
associated with a Raiser's Edge record, you can select to Update this company with details
from MatchFinder Online. To add the company as a relationship record for the donor in The
Raiser's Edge, mark Add this company as an organization relationship for. To view the
company's matching details from MatchFinder Online, click Details. To include additional
matching gifts, in the Additional Matching Gift Pledges frame, click Add.
b. To return to the Matching Gift Linking frame, click OK. Linked appears above the Linked
Matching Gifts box. If you created a new record, an organization record has been created in
The Raiser's Edge for the matching gift. For more information about matching gifts in The
Raiser's Edge, see the The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.
12. To view gift attribute information, select the Transaction Information tab. In the Gift Attributes
frame, view attributes. For information about processing attributes, see "Process attributes" on
page 354.

.
368
C HAPTER 8
Tip: If this tab does not appear, the user did not select attributes on the donation page.
When you download a gift to The Raiser's Edge from Blackbaud NetCommunity, some gift
attributes may add automatically to the gift record. These attributes include NetCommunity
Comments, NetCommunity Corporate Donation Contact, NetCommunity Email Source,
NetCommunity Email Source ID, NetCommunity Page, and NetCommunity Page ID. You do not
view these gift attributes on the Transaction Information tab. Once the gift is downloaded to The
Raiser's Edge, you can view the information on the gift record.
13. To view origin information for the donation, select the Details tab. In the NetCommunity Details
frame, information appears such as the NetCommunity User and the NetCommunity Page from
which the transaction was made on the website. In the Transaction Details frame, information
appears such as The Raiser's Edge user that downloaded the transaction to the NetCommunity
page and The Raiser's Edge user currently using the transaction.
14. To download the donation, click Process Transaction.
To save your information but not process the transaction, click Process Transaction, Save
Changes. You can process the transaction at another time.
The message "Batch # [ ] was created. Do you want to open the batch now?" appears.
Note: The batch number is determined by the selection from the Tools, Transaction Options
menu. In Transaction Options, you can select to create a new batch or use an existing batch for
donations. For more information, see "Assign a batch for transactions" on page 353.
15. To view the gift in batch, click Yes. The batch screen appears. After you view the gift, to close the
batch, click Close. You must commit a batch to process gifts to The Raiser's Edge records. For
more information, see the The Raiser's Edge Batch Guide.
If you do not want to view the gift in the batch, click No.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
369
16. You return to the Donations Transactions screen. To confirm the donation was included in the
correct batch, view the Current Batch Number indicator in the lower left corner on the
Donations Transactions screen.
17. Repeat this procedure to process other individual transactions on the Donations Transactions
screen.
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
18. You can delete a donation you do not want to process. To delete a transaction, select the row and
click Delete Transaction.
A message appears asking if you want to delete it. Click Yes.
Download donations - bulk process
When you use bulk process, you select to download all donors as new records in The Raiser's Edge
and process every donation at once. If you select to process everything at once, you may need to clean
up data in The Raiser's Edge after processing completes.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Donations. The Donations
Transactions screen appears.
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
2. To process every transaction on the screen, mark Select All. When you mark this, a checkbox
appears for every row. Unmark the checkbox next to any names you do not want to process to The
Raiser's Edge.

.
370
C HAPTER 8
To delete donations you do not want to process, mark the box beside the rows you do not want to
process. Click Delete Selected. A message appears asking if you are sure you want to delete the
donations. Click Yes.
3. Click Bulk Processing. The Process Online Donations screen appears.
4. On the Processing tab, review bulk properties such as Transactions Selected and Successfully
Checked Out.
5. On the Options tab, you select options for Batch Number, Unlinked Records, and Transaction
Profile Data in the bulk process.
a. In the Batch Number frame, select how to process the bulk donations to Raiser's Edge
Batch.
· To create a new batch that uses the next available batch number in The Raiser's Edge, select Use
the next available batch number.
Note: These batch options also appear from the Tools, Transaction Options menu. For more
information, see "Assign a batch for transactions" on page 353.
· To download the gifts to an existing batch in The Raiser's Edge, select Add records to an
existing batch. Click the binoculars to select the existing batch. If the batch includes a default
set, the values apply to the gifts you include in the existing batch. You cannot select an existing
batch that has already been committed.
· To load a default set of values from an existing batch for a new batch, select Load fields and
default values from an existing batch. In the field below, click the binoculars to select the
existing batch from which to load the default set. Because you are selecting a default set for a
new batch, you can select from a previously committed batch.
b. In the Unlinked Records frame, to attempt constituent matching based on the options in
Constituent Matching, mark Attempt auto-match to an existing record. For more
information, see "Constituent Matching" on page 333.
c. To create a new Raiser's Edge record for the donor, mark Create new Raiser's Edge record
automatically.
d. To ignore Raiser's Edge required fields, mark Bypass required fields. For more information,
see "Required Fields in The Raiser's Edge" on page 336.
e. In the Transaction Profile Data frame, select if you want to Accept Profile Information or
Reject Profile Information from the donor. If you accept the profile information, the data
defaults to the constituent record in The Raiser's Edge.
6. When you finish, on the Process tab, click Process Now. Bulk processing begins.
7. When the process completes, the message "Batch # [ ] was created. Do you want to open the batch
now?" appears.
8. Click Yes. The batch screen appears.
9. On the toolbar, click Commit. The Commit Gift Batch screen appears.
10. Click Commit Now. A summary screen appears.
11. To close the batch, click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, and
gift information is updated in The Raiser's Edge.
For more information about the Commit Gift Batch screen, see The Raiser's Edge Batch Guide.
12. Click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
371
Volunteer Requests
Volunteer Requests downloads information from the Volunteer Opportunity part on your website to
The Raiser's Edge. Volunteer transaction data downloads to the Volunteer tab on a constituent record (if
you use The Raiser's Edge Volunteer Management).
Before you process volunteer registrations, you should select options in "NetCommunity Options in
The Raiser's Edge" on page 329. Specifically, you can apply "Transaction Assignments" on page 334 to
volunteer registrations. Review that section before proceeding with this section.
There are two main ways to process Volunteer Requests -- single and bulk. We do not recommend
combining steps between these two processes. For example, do not use the Process Transaction button on
the action bar if you are going to download transactions using the bulk process. Read this section entirely
to learn about the information available for both processes.
· Single -- You can select each row individually to match the user with an existing Raiser's Edge record
or add the user as a new record in the database.
· Bulk -- You can select all users and process every transaction at once. If you select to process all
transactions at once, you may need to clean up data in The Raiser's Edge after processing completes.
Download volunteers -- single transaction process
When you use the single transaction process, you select each row individually to process volunteer
registrations to The Raiser's Edge.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Volunteer Requests. The Volunteer
Requests Transactions screen appears.
2. On the Volunteer Requests Transactions tab, select the row to process by clicking in the Volunteer
Information column. Volunteer tabs appear on the right.
Tip: This tab is called Assigned Volunteer Requests Transactions when transaction assignments
are enabled. If transaction assignments do not apply to a transaction, an Unassigned tab appears.
Follow the same steps in this procedure to process transactions on that tab. For information about
transaction assignments, see "Transaction Assignments" on page 334.
The Transaction Date/Status column on the Volunteer Requests Transactions tab defaults the
date the user submitted the request on your website. The checked out status also appears in the
column. When a Raiser's Edge user is processing the transaction, Checked out by and Checked
out on information displays. If a Raiser's Edge user is not processing the transaction, Not
Checked Out displays.

.
372
C HAPTER 8
3. On the Volunteer Information tab, review, edit (in the Transaction Value column), and process
the volunteer data on the General tab. If the user submitted applicable information on the volunteer
page, the Courses and Training, Special Needs, Job Assignments, and Checklist tabs also appear.
For information about including these tabs on the volunteer form on your website, see "Volunteer
Opportunity" on page 115. For information about volunteers in The Raiser's Edge, see The
Raiser's Edge Volunteer Management Guide.
4. In the Volunteer Type field, the volunteer type selected on the part defaults in the field. You can
change or remove the type for the transaction in this field.
5. In the Constituent Code field, the constituent code selected on the part defaults in the field. You
can change or remove the constituent code for the transaction in this field. For more information
about selecting constituent codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on
page 26.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
373
6. To view a summary of the job request, click the Requested Job Information tab. Information on
this tab includes information such as the Name, Category, and Description of the job request.
7. To view origin information for the volunteer, select the Details tab. In the NetCommunity Details
frame, information appears such as the NetCommunity User and the NetCommunity Page from
which the transaction was made on the website. In the Transaction Details frame, information
appears such as The Raiser's Edge user that downloaded the transaction to the NetCommunity
page and The Raiser's Edge user currently using the transaction.
8. To process the selected volunteer registrations, click Process Transaction on the action bar.
To partially process a transaction, click Process Transaction, Apply Selected Updates. A
partially processed transaction includes the changes for which you have marked Process. If
another registration for the volunteer downloads to Volunteer Requests, data can be overwritten by
the second registration.
9. Repeat this procedure to individually process the remaining volunteer requests on this screen.

.
374
C HAPTER 8
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
10. When you finish, click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Download volunteer requests -- bulk process
When you use bulk process, you select to process every volunteer registration at once. If you select to
process everything at once, you need to clean up data in The Raiser's Edge after processing completes.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Volunteer Requests. The Volunteer
Requests Transactions screen appears.
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
2. To process every transaction on the screen, mark Select All. When you mark this, every row
appears with a checkbox. Unmark the checkbox next to any names you do not want to process to
The Raiser's Edge.
3. Click Bulk Processing. The Process Online Volunteer Requests screen appears.
4. On the Processing tab, review bulk properties such as Transactions Selected and Successfully
Checked Out.
5. When you finish, click Process Now. Bulk processing begins.
6. When the process is complete, click Close on the Process Online Volunteer Requests screen. You
return to the Volunteer Requests Transactions screen.
7. Click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Event Registrations
Before you process event registrations, you should select options in "NetCommunity Options in
The Raiser's Edge" on page 329. Specifically, you can apply "Transaction Assignments" on page 334 to
event registrations. Review that section before proceeding with this section.
When a constituent, member, or alumnus(a) registers for an event on the website you download the
information from Blackbaud NetCommunity to The Raiser's Edge. A transaction for The Raiser's Edge
updates event and participant records.
Event registrations with a gift, such as an event fee, create a batch in The Raiser's Edge. You can select to
create a new batch or use an existing batch to process gifts. For more information, see "Assign a batch for
transactions" on page 353.
There are two main ways to process Event Registrations -- single and bulk. We do not recommend
combining steps between these two processes. For example, do not use the Process Transaction button on
the action bar if you are going to download transactions using the bulk process. Read this section entirely
to learn about the information available for both processes.
· Single -- You can select each row individually to match the registrant with an existing Raiser's Edge
record or add the registrant as a new record in the database.
· Bulk -- You can select all registrants and process every transaction at once. If you select to process all
registrants at once, you may need to clean up data in The Raiser's Edge after processing completes.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
375
When you process transactions, you must make decisions beyond using the single or bulk process. For
example, you may want to create a batch in The Raiser's Edge to specifically use for event registration
donations from Blackbaud NetCommunity. Or, you may want to create the batch in the Event Registrations
transaction. Review the following diagram for an example of one way to process event registration
donations. Before you begin regularly processing transactions, a best practice decision should be made for
your organization.
Download event registrations - single transaction process
When you use the single transaction process, you select each row individually to match the registrant
with an existing Raiser's Edge record or add the registrant as a new record in the database.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Event Registrations. The Event
Registrations Transactions screen appears.
Note: Event Registration transactions create a gift batch in The Raiser's Edge. From Tools,
Transaction Options, you can select batch options before you process a registration. The batch
screen does not appear until you process the registration. For more information, see Step 10 in this
procedure and "Assign a batch for transactions" on page 353.
2. On the Event Registrations Transactions tab, select the row to process by clicking in the Donor
Information column. The Constituent Linking frame appears on the right and defaults to the
Record Linking tab.

.
376
C HAPTER 8
Tip: This tab is called Assigned Event Registrations Transactions when transaction assignments
are enabled. If transaction assignments do not apply to a transaction, an Unassigned tab appears.
Follow the same steps in this procedure to process transactions on that tab. For information about
transaction assignments, see "Transaction Assignments" on page 334.
The Gift Information column displays the donation amount, the gift date, fund, and source (or
appeal). If you support multiple currency types, review the following.
· If a gift amount has been converted to your local currency, the converted amount displays in
"( )" in the Gift Information column.
· Exchange rates are established in Raiser's Edge Configuration. For more information, see
The Raiser's Edge Configuration & Security Guide. To map currency types for Blackbaud
NetCommunity, see "Currency Configuration" on page 330.
· Blackbaud NetCommunity Administration, add an IATS merchant account for each currency
type. For more information about merchant accounts, see "Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
The Transaction Date/Status column on the Event Registrations Transactions tab defaults the
date the user submitted the donation on your website. The checked out status also appears in the
column. When a Raiser's Edge user is processing the transaction, Checked out by and Checked
out on information displays. If a Raiser's Edge user is not processing the transaction, Not
Checked Out displays.
3. In the Constituent Linking frame on the right, data from Blackbaud NetCommunity appears in
the Transaction Data box. If your Constituent Matching options match a Raiser's Edge record,
Raiser's Edge data appears in the Linked Constituent box and the Auto-matched indicator
appears. To open the Raiser's Edge record for the user, click Open Constituent.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
377
Tip: If duplicate records are found {Duplicates Found} appears in the RE Constituent column.
The search method is based on the settings in the Constituent Matching option. For more
information, see "Constituent Matching" on page 333.
If you are sure the website user is the matched Raiser's Edge constituent and do not need to change
the transaction, proceed to Transaction Constituent Code step. If the records in the Constituent
Linking frame match and you want to review or make changes to the transaction, click Find
Constituent above the Transaction Data box. A screen appears to view additional data the user
submitted on your site.
If the Linked Constituent box is blank, you must link the website user with an existing Raiser's
Edge record or create a new record for the user.
4. To search for an existing Raiser's Edge constituent, click Find Constituent.
Tip: If the Linked Constituent box does not have an indicator or if Auto-matched appears above
the box, the Find Constituent button appears. If Linked appears above the box, the Edit Profile
button appears.
A NetCommunity Transaction screen appears.
a. If the user entered information in the applicable section on the event registration form, the
Biographical, Preferred Address, and Primary Business tabs appear. On these tabs, mark any
fields in the Search Field column in which you want to process a Raiser's Edge search.
The fields that default with a checkbox in the Search Field column are the fields selected in
the Constituent Matching option.

.
378
C HAPTER 8
Note: We recommend you use only the most useful criteria fields to search for a record. Adding
too many criteria information may actually prevent you from locating a record. To unmark all
fields at once, click Clear Search Criteria.
b. To include inactive Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display inactive
constituents.
c. To include deceased Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display deceased
constituents.
d. To search by exact criteria, mark Exact match only. For example, you search for Will
Adamson's record. If you mark the checkbox and search for "William Adamson", the
program does not return his record because the search looks for an exact match for "Will
Adamson". If you unmark the checkbox, the program initiates a "begins with" search which
returns the record. We recommend using this checkbox to narrow a large list of results.
e. To begin the search, click Find Now. Results appear in the grid at the bottom of the screen.
Results in this grid cannot exceed 100 records. Records with Has no valid address marked in
The Raiser's Edge are included in the search results.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
379
f. If a a record matches, select the row and click Link Constituent, Choose Selected
Constituent.
Note: If you changed any data the user entered in the New Value column, a message appears
notifying you the download transaction has changed. To add the changed data to The Raiser's
Edge, click Yes. If you do not want to add the data to The Raiser's Edge, click No.
If an existing record does not match the donor, click Link Constituent, Create New
Constituent. For information about creating new constituents, see the next step.
5. To create a new record in The Raiser's Edge, click Create New, Create Constituent in the
Constituent Linking frame. Linked appears above the Linked Constituent box. A record has
been created in The Raiser's Edge for the user.
a. To edit data the website user entered, click Create New, Create New and Edit. A screen
appears to compare existing Raiser's Edge data with the donor information. If the user
entered information in the applicable section of the event registration form, the Biographical,
Preferred Address, and Primary Business tabs appear. You can process each tab individually
or all at one time.
b. For each field to update on the Raiser's Edge record, mark Process. If you unmark Process
for a field, the data does not download to The Raiser's Edge.

.
380
C HAPTER 8
c. Information provided by the user during the donation appears in the New Value column. To
edit data a user entered, make changes in the appropriate row in this column.
Tip: New table entries appear in bold. If you have appropriate rights, you can create a new Raiser's
Edge table entry from this screen, or you can click in the row of the New Value column to select
an existing table entry. To keep data consistent, it is important to try to use existing table entries.
d. Select the remaining applicable transaction options for the tab. Once you are done, click Save
and Close. The screen closes and you return to the Constituent Linking frame. Linked
appears above the Linked Constituent box.
6. In the Transaction Constituent Code frame, the constituent code selected on the part defaults in
the field. You can change or remove the constituent code for the transaction in this field. If you
select the same constituent code in the New Constituents option, the constituent code does not
duplicate on the Bio 2 tab in the constituent record. If the constituent codes are different, both
codes download to the new constituent record. For more information about the New Constituents
option, see "New Constituents" on page 331. For more information about selecting constituent
codes in Blackbaud NetCommunity, see "Constituent Codes" on page 26.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
381
7. In the Matching Gift Linking frame, in the Transaction Data box, view matching gift
information for the donation.
The program attempts to link the matching gift company name with an existing Raiser's Edge
organization record. Due to potential data entry inconsistencies, make sure the correct company is
in the Transaction Data box.
a. Depending on how you add matching gifts to The Raiser's Edge, do one of the following to
process the matching gift data from the website.
If the user did not enter a company, and if you are aware the user works for one, select a
matching gift company. Click Manage Matching Gifts. On the Matching Gift Pledges
screen, click Add.

.
382
C HAPTER 8
If the company does not have an organization record in your Raiser's Edge database, create
one.
If the donor entered a company name but you do not use MatchFinder Online, search to see if
the company has a record in The Raiser's Edge. Click Manage Matching Gifts. The
Matching Gift Pledges screen appears. To select a Matching Gift Company from your
Raiser's Edge database, click the ellipsis. If the company does not have an organization
record in your database, create one.
Enter the Pledge amount. After the organization is associated with a Raiser's Edge record,
the Add this company as an organization relationship for checkbox enables. Mark this to
add the company as a relationship record for the donor. To include additional matching gifts,
in the Additional Matching Gift Pledges frame, click Add.
If a donor enters a company and you use MatchFinder Online, check if the company has a
record in The Raiser's Edge. Click Manage Matching Gifts. The Matching Gift Pledges
screen appears with additional features. To select the Matching Gift Company from your
Raiser's Edge database, click the ellipsis. If the company does not have an organization
record in your database, create one. To access MatchFinder Online and review the company's
matching information, click Lookup. Enter the Pledge amount. After the organization is

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
383
associated with a Raiser's Edge record, you can select to Update this company with details
from MatchFinder Online. To add the company as a relationship record for the donor in The
Raiser's Edge, mark Add this company as an organization relationship for. To view the
company's matching details from MatchFinder Online, click Details. To include additional
matching gifts, in the Additional Matching Gift Pledges frame, click Add.
b. To return to the Matching Gift Linking frame, click OK. Linked appears above the Linked
Matching Gifts box. If you created a new record, an organization record has been created in
The Raiser's Edge for the matching gift. For more information about matching gifts in The
Raiser's Edge, see the The Raiser's Edge Gift Records Guide.

.
384
C HAPTER 8
8. To view event attribute information, select the Transaction Information tab. In the Gift Attributes
frame, view attributes. In the Participant Information frame, view the event for which the
participant registered and participant attributes. For information about processing attributes, see
"Process attributes" on page 354.
When you download an event registration to The Raiser's Edge from Blackbaud NetCommunity,
the Online registrant? participant attribute adds automatically to the participant record. You do not
view this attribute on the Transaction Information tab. Once the event registration is downloaded
to The Raiser's Edge, you can view the information on the participant record. Online registrant?
appears in the Category column, Yes appears in the Description column, and NetCommunity
appears in the Comments column.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
385
9. To view origin information for the event registration, select the Details tab. In the NetCommunity
Details frame, information appears such as the NetCommunity User and the NetCommunity
Page from which the transaction was made on the website. In the Transaction Details frame,
information appears such as The Raiser's Edge user that downloaded the transaction to the
NetCommunity page and The Raiser's Edge user currently using the transaction.
10. To process the registration, click Process Transaction.
To save your information but not process the transaction, click Process Transaction, Save
Changes. You can process the transaction at another time.
The message "Batch # [ ] was created. Do you want to open the batch now?" appears.
Note: The batch number is determined by the selection from the Tools, Transaction Options
menu. In Transaction Options, you can select to create a new batch or use an existing batch for
donations. For more information, see "Assign a batch for transactions" on page 353.
11. To view the gift in batch, click Yes. The batch screen appears. After you view the gift, to close the
batch, click Close. You must commit a batch to process gifts to The Raiser's Edge records. For
information, see the The Raiser's Edge Batch Guide.
If you do not want to view the gift in the batch, click No.

.
386
C HAPTER 8
12. You return to the Event Registrations Transactions screen. To confirm the gift was included in the
correct batch, view the Current Batch Number indicator in the lower left corner on the Event
Registrations Transactions screen.
13. Repeat this procedure to process other individual transactions on the Event Registrations
Transactions screen.
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
14. You can delete a registration you do not want to process. To delete a registration, select the row
and click Delete Transaction.
A message appears asking if you want to delete it. Click Yes.
Download event registrations - bulk process
When you use bulk process, you select to download all registrants as new records in The Raiser's Edge
and process every registration at once. If you select to process everything at once, you need to clean up
data in The Raiser's Edge after processing completes.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Event Registrations. The Event
Registrations Transactions screen appears.
Tip: To make sure you have the latest information from the website, click Refresh.
2. To process every transaction on the screen, mark Select All. When you mark this, a checkbox
appears for every row. Unmark the checkbox next to any names you do not want to process to
The Raiser's Edge.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
387
To delete registrations you do not want to process, mark the box beside the rows you do not want
to process. Click Delete Selected. A message appears asking if you are sure you want to delete the
registrations. Click Yes.
3. Click Bulk Processing. The Process Online Event Registrations screen appears.
4. On the Processing tab, review bulk properties such as Transactions Selected and Successfully
Checked Out.
5. On the Options tab, you select options for Batch Number, Unlinked Records, and Transaction
Profile Data in the bulk process.
a. In the Batch Number frame, select how to process the bulk donations to Raiser's Edge
Batch.
· To create a new batch that uses the next available batch number in The Raiser's Edge, select Use
the next available batch number.
Note: These batch options also appear from the Tools, Transaction Options menu. For more
information, see "Assign a batch for transactions" on page 353.
· To download the gifts to an existing batch in The Raiser's Edge, select Add records to an
existing batch. Click the binoculars to select the existing batch. If the batch includes a default
set, the values apply to the gifts you include in the existing batch. You cannot select an existing
batch that has already been committed.
· To load a default set of values from an existing batch for a new batch, select Load fields and
default values from an existing batch. In the field below, click the binoculars to select the
existing batch from which to load the default set. Because you are selecting a default set for a
new batch, you can select from a previously committed batch.
b. To create a query of participants in this bulk process, mark Create participant query. We
recommend creating a query of processed transactions for your records. The query appears in
The Raiser's Edge Query.
c. In the Unlinked Records frame, to attempt constituent matching based on the options in
Constituent Matching, mark Attempt auto-match to an existing record. For more
information, see "Constituent Matching" on page 333.
d. To create a new Raiser's Edge record for the donor, mark Create new Raiser's Edge record
automatically.
e. To ignore Raiser's Edge required fields, mark Bypass required fields. For more information,
see "Required Fields in The Raiser's Edge" on page 336.
f. In the Transaction Profile Data frame, select if you want to Accept Profile Information or
Reject Profile Information from the donor. If you accept the profile information, the data
defaults to the constituent record in The Raiser's Edge.
6. When you finish, on the Process tab, click Process Now. Bulk processing begins.
7. When the process completes, the message "Batch # [ ] was created. Do you want to open the batch
now?" appears.
Note: You can assign a batch number to the bulk process. For more information, see "Assign a
batch for transactions" on page 353.
8. Click Yes. The batch screen appears.

.
388
C HAPTER 8
9. On the toolbar, click Commit. The Commit Gift Batch screen appears.
10. Click Commit Now. A summary screen appears.
11. To close the batch, click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Information is updated in The Raiser's Edge.
For more information about the Commit Gift Batch screen, see The Raiser's Edge Batch Guide.
12. Click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Polls
You can store responses to a poll on your website as an attribute on the Attributes tab of a constituent
record in The Raiser's Edge.
Download poll responses
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Polls. The Poll Updates screen appears.
2. In the Poll field, select the poll to process.
In the Poll Summary frame, poll questions and response percentages appear.
In the middle of the screen, a line states "This poll is associated with the following attribute:". If
this is the first time you are downloading this poll's responses, you must create a new attribute for
it in The Raiser's Edge and link it. You cannot select an existing attribute. Once the poll results
have been downloaded and an attribute defined, the next time you download poll results, the
associated attribute appears in this line and you cannot make changes.
For example, it may say "Survey". Once this download process is complete, you can find a
constituent's response to this particular poll by looking for the Category of Survey on the
Attributes tab of the constituent record.
3. At the bottom of the screen, check the Poll Details frame.
a. If there are no new responses for the selected poll, it says "No new response". You can either
proceed to the last step in this procedure or select another poll in the Poll field to check
results.
b. If there is a new response to the selected poll, it says so in the Poll Details frame. To process
the response, click Process. A message appears telling you the number of new responses
processed.
4. Click OK. You return to the Poll Updates screen.
5. Click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. The poll response
appears on the Attributes tab of the respondent's constituent record.
Class Notes
Alumni add notes to their class notes page on your website to keep in touch with one another and update
classmates on their lives. When alumni add information to a class notes page and it is approved, you are
notified in Class Notes on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge. You can download this
information to a notepad in The Raiser's Edge. For example, an alumnus mentions in his class notes he got
a new dog. If you store class note updates, you create a note on the Notes tab of his constituent record.
Keeping track of constituent class notes is another way to know your donors better.
Before downloading class notes, you should select download options for class notes in "Class Note
Processing" on page 331. Review that section before proceeding with this procedure.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
389
Download class note updates
If you mark the Require Approval checkbox when creating the Class Notes part, users with edit rights
must approve class notes on the web page before they can be viewed or downloaded.
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Class Notes. The Class Notes screen
appears.
2. Review the processing information. For example, if you have a new class note, "1 class note
update(s) processed" appears. Because class notes are approved in Blackbaud NetCommunity,
class note information downloads to The Raiser's Edge automatically. No further action is required
to download the class note. Class notes are stored on the Notes tab of a constituent record.
Advocacy Actions
Before you process advocacy transactions, you should select options in "NetCommunity Options in
The Raiser's Edge" on page 329. Specifically, you can apply "Transaction Assignments" on page 334 to
advocacy transactions. Review that section before proceeding with this section.
With Blackbaud NetAdvocacy, you can download advocacy action data to The Raiser's Edge. This data
includes alerts, email information, and attributes (if there is a source email).
The number of actions that process to The Raiser's Edge constituent record equals the number of email
recipients. For example, if John Smith sends an advocacy email to Senator James Mahan and Senator
Marianne Jones, two action records are added to John Smith's constituent record. These action records in
The Raiser's Edge contain the Message ID number and Delivery method created when a user sends an
advocacy alert. Examples of a delivery method includes mail, email, or fax. Both direct action alert email
and tell-a-friend email download to The Raiser's Edge.
For information about advocacy data field mapping, see "Advocacy Actions Field Mapping" on page 391.
Download advocacies
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Advocacy Actions. The Advocacy
Actions screen appears.
2. Names appear in a grid with the checkbox marked in the Process Now column. Unmark the
checkbox next to any names you do not want to process in The Raiser's Edge.
3. The RE Constituent column lists Raiser's Edge constituent information. The Advocate
information column includes information from the website. If the advocate was logged into the
website when the advocacy was submitted, his constituent record information appears in the RE
Constituent column. If information does not appear, you must manually link the data in the
Advocate information column to the data in the RE Constituent column by finding the existing
constituent record in The Raiser's Edge or creating a new record for a new constituent.
Tip: If duplicate records are found {Duplicates Found} appears in the RE Constituent column.
The search method is based on the settings in the Constituent Matching option. For more
information, see "Constituent Matching" on page 333.
4. If there is no constituent information in the RE Constituent column, press F7 on your keyboard in
the RE Constituent column. A transaction screen appears.
a. If the user entered the applicable section on the membership form, the Biographical and
Preferred Address tabs appear. On these tabs, mark any fields in the Search Field column in
which you want to process a Raiser's Edge search.

.
390
C HAPTER 8
The fields that default with a checkbox in the Search Field column are the fields selected in
the Constituent Matching option.
Note: We recommend you use only the most useful criteria fields to search for a record. Adding
too many criteria information may actually prevent you from locating a record. To unmark all
fields at once, click Clear Search Criteria.
b. To include inactive Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display inactive
constituents.
c. To include deceased Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display deceased
constituents.
d. To search by exact criteria, mark Exact match only. For example, you search for Will
Adamson's record. If you mark the checkbox and search for "William Adamson", the
program does not return his record because the search looks for an exact match for "Will
Adamson". If you unmark the checkbox, the program initiates a "begins with" search which
returns the record. We recommend using this checkbox to narrow a large list of results.
e. To begin the search, click Find Now. Results appear in the grid at the bottom of the screen.
Results in this grid cannot exceed 100 records. Records with Has no valid address marked in
The Raiser's Edge are included in the search results.
f. If a record matches, select the row and click Link Constituent, Choose Selected
Constituent.
Note: If you changed any data the user entered in the New Value column, a message appears
notifying you the download transaction has changed. To add the changed data to The Raiser's
Edge, click Yes. If you do not want to add the data to The Raiser's Edge, click No.
g. If an existing record does not match the advocate, click Link Constituent, Create New
Constituent.
h. For each field you want to update on the Raiser's Edge record, mark Process. If you unmark
Process for a field, the data does not process to The Raiser's Edge.
i. Information provided by the user during the advocacy action appears in the New Value
column. To edit data a user entered, make changes in the appropriate row in this column.
Tip: New table entries appear in bold. If you have appropriate rights, you can create a new Raiser's
Edge table entry from this screen, or you can click in the row of the New Value column to select
an existing table entry. To keep data consistent, it is important to try to use existing table entries.
j. Select the remaining applicable transaction options for the tab. Once you are done, click Save
and Close. The screen closes and you return to the RE Constituent column.
5. In the Action taken column, review the details of the email sent by the website user. The column
contains information about the email such as the alert title, date, and subject.
6. In the Recipients column, you can view the name and number of email recipients. For example,
you may view your state senator's name or town council member names in this column.
Blackbaud NetAdvocacy email recipient names are stored in the action record Recipient Name
field.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
391
7. Next, you can assign an issue to the advocate using the Issue column on the Advocacy
Transactions screen.
In the Issue column, click the drop-down arrow and select the issue associated with the advocate.
Options available in the Issue column depend on information entered in the Issue table in
The Raiser's Edge. The options are also tied to the "alert ID" in Capwiz, so when an issue is
selected, all records with the same "alert ID" are automatically associated with the same issue.
However, you can manually change any issue.
For more information about the Issue table, see The Raiser's Edge Configuration & Security
Guide.
8. To create an action query of the processed action transactions, mark the Create a query of action
records added checkbox. We recommend creating a query of processed transactions for your
records. The query appears in The Raiser's Edge Query.
9. Click OK.
10. Click Close. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
Advocacy Actions Field Mapping
Review the following table for information about advocacy data in The Raiser's Edge action records. This
table applies to action records created after processing advocacy data from Capwiz and Blackbaud
NetCommunity to The Raiser's Edge.
Capwiz data
Action record field
Advocacy date
Action date
Advocacy time
Start time
Alert title
Alert title
Issue
Issue
Action type
Delivery method
Name
Recipient name
Message ID
Message ID
Message title
Not stored in The Raiser's Edge
Message
Not stored in The Raiser's Edge
Email ID
NetCommunity Email Source ID action attribute
(if there is a source email)
Email subject
NetCommunity Email Source action attribute (if
there is a source email and if the email has a subject)
Memberships
Before you process membership transactions, you should select options in "NetCommunity Options in
The Raiser's Edge" on page 329. Specifically, you can apply "Transaction Assignments" on page 334 to
membership transactions. Review that section before proceeding with this section.
If you include the Membership form on your website and allow members to join and renew their
memberships online, you must process the online transactions on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's
Edge. When you process membership transactions, a gift batch is created in The Raiser's Edge, and a
membership record is created or updated.
You can manually override Raiser's Edge transactions and you must manually link any unresolved donors
and gift of membership recipients to Raiser's Edge records. If a membership category is deleted before the
batch is created, you can select a new category during the download/update database process.

.
392
C HAPTER 8
Warning: Membership transactions require more interaction and thought than other transactions. You may
need to think about certain transactions and manually make adjustments to the membership record during
the download process, according to your organization's policies.
Download memberships
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Memberships. The Process
Membership Transaction screen appears.
2. Names appear in a grid with the checkbox marked in the Process Now column. Unmark the
checkbox next to any names you do not want to process in The Raiser's Edge.
3. The RE Constituent column lists Raiser's Edge constituent information. The Donor information
column includes information from the website. If the member was logged into the website when
the membership transaction was submitted, his constituent record information appears in the RE
Constituent column. If information does not appear, you must manually link what is in the Donor
information column to what is in the RE Constituent column by finding the existing constituent
record in The Raiser's Edge or creating a new record for a new constituent.
Tip: If duplicate records are found {Duplicates Found} appears in the RE Constituent column.
The search method is based on the settings in the Constituent Matching option. For more
information, see "Constituent Matching" on page 333.
4. If there is no constituent information in the RE Constituent column, press F7 on your keyboard in
the RE Constituent column. A transaction screen appears.
a. If the user entered the applicable section on the membership form, the Biographical and
Preferred Address tabs appear. On these tabs, mark any fields in the Search Field column in
which you want to process a Raiser's Edge search.
The fields that default with a checkbox in the Search Field column are the fields selected in
the Constituent Matching option.
Note: We recommend you use only the most useful criteria fields to search for a record. Adding
too many criteria information may actually prevent you from locating a record. To unmark all
fields at once, click Clear Search Criteria.
b. To include inactive Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display inactive
constituents.
c. To include deceased Raiser's Edge records in your search, mark Display deceased
constituents.
d. To search by exact criteria, mark Exact match only. For example, you search for Will
Adamson's record. If you mark the checkbox and search for "William Adamson", the
program does not return his record because the search looks for an exact match for "Will
Adamson". If you unmark the checkbox, the program initiates a "begins with" search which
returns the record. We recommend using this checkbox to narrow a large list of results.
e. To begin the search, click Find Now. Results appear in the grid at the bottom of the screen.
Results in this grid cannot exceed 100 records. Records with Has no valid address marked in
The Raiser's Edge are included in the search results.

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
393
f. If a record matches, select the row and click Link Constituent, Choose Selected
Constituent.
Note: If you changed any data the user entered in the New Value column, a message appears
notifying you the download transaction has changed. To add the changed data to The Raiser's
Edge, click Yes. If you do not want to add the data to The Raiser's Edge, click No.
g. If an existing record does not match the member, click Link Constituent, Create New
Constituent.
h. For each field you want to update on the Raiser's Edge record, mark Process. If you unmark
Process for a field, the data does not process to The Raiser's Edge.
i. Information provided by the user during the membership form appears in the New Value
column. To edit data a user entered, make changes in the appropriate row in this column.
Tip: New table entries appear in bold. If you have appropriate rights, you can create a new Raiser's
Edge table entry from this screen, or you can click in the row of the New Value column to select
an existing table entry. To keep data consistent, it is important to try to use existing table entries.
j. Select the remaining applicable transaction options for the tab. Once you are done, click Save
and Close. The screen closes and you return to the RE Constituent column.
5. The RE Membership Recipient column lists gift of membership information in The Raiser's
Edge. You must manually link the individual in the Membership Recipient column to a new or
existing constituent record in The Raiser's Edge. To do so, click in the RE Membership
Recipient column and press F7. You link and create records for this column using the same steps
explained in this procedure for the RE Constituent column. For more information, see step 4.
Tip: To open a Raiser's Edge record for a membership recipient, click Open Recipient. Records
can only open for the rows with a name in the RE Membership Recipient column.
The Membership Recipient column shows gift of membership information entered by the user on
your website.
6. The RE Membership column shows the membership transaction type that took place on the
website. For example, join or renew.
a. If the column is blank, you must manually link to information on the membership record.
Even if information appears in the RE Membership column, you may still need to manually
adjust information on the membership record. For example, Blackbaud NetCommunity has
no way of knowing that a switch from one category to another is an upgrade or downgrade.
You must manually select the appropriate membership transaction type.
To do so, click in the RE Membership column and press F7. The Link Membership
Information screen appears
b. Make any necessary changes to the membership, according to your organization's policies for
membership transactions. For example, select to add the transaction as a renewal or a new
membership and click Yes.

.
394
C HAPTER 8
Think about the information in the Membership Request column and what it means to your
organization. For example, a "join" in the Membership Request column may actually be a
renewal. Blackbaud NetCommunity does not know that a member who clicks Join on the
website already has a record in your Raiser's Edge database and would actually be considered
a "renewal" by your organization.
To view the membership record, click View Membership.
In the bottom frame, expiration or lifetime membership information defaults from
The Raiser's Edge, based on the membership category and business rules.
c. Click OK. You return to the Membership Transactions screen.
d. To return to the transaction screen, click Save and Close.
7. Review the information in the Gift column. This column displays the donation amount, the gift
date and time, and fund.
If you support multiple currency types, review the following information.
· If a gift amount has been converted to your local currency, the converted amount displays in
"( )" in the Gift column. The Currency column displays the currency type of the donated gift.
· Exchange rates are established in Raiser's Edge Configuration. For more information, see
The Raiser's Edge Configuration & Security Guide. To map currency types for Blackbaud
NetCommunity, see "Currency Configuration" on page 330.
· In Blackbaud NetCommunity Administration, add an IATS merchant account for each currency
type. For more information about merchant accounts, see "Merchant Accounts" on page 229.
8. In the Matching Gift column, press F7. The Matching Gift Pledges screen appears.
· If the donor did not enter a company in the Matching Gifts section on your website, the
Matching Gift Pledges frame appears. You can select a matching gift company if you are aware
the donor works for one. To do this, click Add. If the company does not have an organization
record in your Raiser's Edge database, you must create one.
· If the donor entered a company name, but you do not use MatchFinder Online, the Add this
matching pledge frame appears on the screen. Click the ellipsis button to select the Matching
Gift Company from the Raiser's Edge database. If the company does not have an organization
record in your database, you must create one. Enter the Pledge amount. After the organization
is associated with a Raiser's Edge record, the Add this company as an organization
relationship for checkbox enables. Mark this to add the company as a relationship record for
the donor. To include additional matching gifts, click Add in the Additional Matching Gift
Pledges frame.
Note: Blackbaud NetCommunity attempts to link the matching gift company name with an
existing Raiser's Edge organization record. Due to potential data entry inconsistencies, make sure
the correct company is in the Matching Gift Company field.
· If a donor enters a company and you use MatchFinder Online, the Add this matching pledge
frame appears on the screen with additional features. Click the ellipsis button to select the
Matching Gift Company from the Raiser's Edge database. If the company does not have an
organization record in your database, you must create one. To access MatchFinder Online and
review the company's matching information, click Lookup. Enter the Pledge amount. After the
organization is associated with a Raiser's Edge record, you can select to Update this company

.
T HE R AISER 'S E DGE N ET C OMMUNI T Y P AGE
395
with details from MatchFinder Online. You can also add the company as a relationship record
for the donor in The Raiser's Edge by marking Add this company as an organization
relationship for. To view the company's matching details from MatchFinder Online, click
Details. To include additional matching gifts, click Add in the Additional Matching Gift
Pledges frame.
Tip: If the Details button is disabled, the donor did not use MatchFinder Online to select a
matching company. You can enable the button by clicking Lookup to add a matching gift from
MatchFinder Online.
To close the Match Gift Pledges screen, click OK. You return to the transactions screen. For
more information about matching gifts in The Raiser's Edge, see the The Raiser's Edge Gift
Records Guide.
9. At the bottom of the screen, mark the Create query of memberships added or renewed
checkbox. We recommend creating a query of processed membership transactions for your
records. The query appears in The Raiser's Edge Query.
10. Click OK. A message appears telling you the donation batch is being created.
When the batch is created, the membership transactions are created in the records. Even if the
batch is never committed or is deleted, the membership transactions exist. The batch contains the
gifts linked to the membership. You must commit the batch to process the gifts.
11. A message appears telling you the batch number and asks if you want to open the batch. To open
the batch and view it now, click Yes. If you click No, you can view the batch later in The Raiser's
Edge Batch. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.
For more information about the batch screen, see The Raiser's Edge Batch Guide.
Surveys
You can download survey responses from Blackbaud NetCommunity to The Raiser's Edge. Only
responses from Raiser's Edge constituents who logged into the website are downloaded.
The Surveys link appears on the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge only if you have survey
responses ready to download. You can create constituent queries in The Raiser's Edge to view or report on
survey responses. For more information about creating surveys, see "Survey" on page 105.
Download survey responses
1. From the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge, click Surveys. A message screen appears
displaying the number of survey responses that downloaded.
If you clicked Clear Responses on a Survey Part, an additional transaction appears in the
transaction and is included in the total download count. When the download processes, prior
responses to the cleared survey are deleted from constituent records. For more information about
clearing responses, see "Survey" on page 105.
2. Click OK. You return to the NetCommunity page in The Raiser's Edge.

.
396
C HAPTER 8

.
I NDEX
397
Index
explained 12
chapter management
dashboard 6
design chapter manager part 8
explained 1
integration with The Raiser's Edge 17
manage home page features 6
A
pre-design 4
roles 3
acknowledgement
chapter management roles
create the default 36
anonymous user 4
acknowledgement report tab
content manager 3
view after sending acknowledgement 41
data manager 3
action
explained 3
design page elements types 55
member 4
action bar 5
chapter manager
administration
design
explained 1
add chapter 14
field options 12
add chapter site pages 8
security 1
edit chapter 15
users 2
email editor 9
administrator, see Blackbaud NetCommunity User
giving history editor 13
advocacy
members 10
actions field mapping 63
profile editor 12
download 61
search title 14
set options 7
design part 8
anonymous newsletter subscription 20
explained 12
design 20
chapter page element
explained 12
explained 12
anonymous user role 4
chapter page element parts, design 6
appeal
chapter site, manage home page features 6
create 47
class note processing 3
create email message 50
class notes
search for duplicate email addresses 54
download 61
testing emails 50
explained 12
attributes
code tables 20
donations 26
comments
Authorize.net
design page elements types 57
configure for merchant accounts 7
configuration 15
configuring servers and Web sites 15
constituent code
B
field 26
constituent code field 26
BeanStream
constituents
configure for merchant accounts 8
set options for matching 5
blacklisted accounts 44
setting options 3
bounce errors 44
content manager 3
buttons 5
content manager role 3
copy
email template from existing template 8
C
create
email list 10
campaigns, email 46
CSS menu design 51
change user ID/password
currency configuration 3
design 21
current membership page, design 45
explained 12
learn about 20
chapter links
design 5

.
398
I NDEX
D
fundraisers 24
memberships 64
dashboard
personal pages 24
team fundraising 52
poll responses 60
data entry user 3
sign-up requests in bulk 16
data manager role 3
sign-up requests single transaction 10
design
survey responses 67
chapter links 5
user profile updates 17
chapter manager part 8
volunteer requests in bulk 46
chapter page element parts 6
volunteer requests single transaction 43
fundraiser dashboard 53
duplicate
fundraiser page element parts 24
search in appeals 54
fundraiser part 28
fundraiser roles 23
personal page manager
E
configure email 16
donation form 10
edit
email 9
user profiles 3
new community user options 6
education profile updates
pages for use as personal pages 8
download 17
personal page options 5
element parts, chapter page 6
search page form options 9
email
design tab
acknowledgement 35
view for email template 6
activity 53
detail gift summary 53
appeals
directory
appeal
design 22
email 46
design page elements types 58
bounce error 44
explained 12
campaigns 46
learn about 22
exclusion list 49
discussion group
explained 1
design 24
invalid accounts 44
explained 13
newsletter 28
learn about 24
preferences form
manage 25
learn about 82
documents
results report 51
design 26
search for duplicate addresses in appeals 54
explained 13
seed list 48
learn about 26
targeted lists 47
donation form
testing appeals 50
design 27
email activity report 32
explained 13
email calendar
learn about 27
explained 13
personal page manager, design 10
email forwarding form
donations
explained 13
download in bulk 41
email preferences form
download single transaction 26
design 82
gift batches in The Raiser's Edge 25
email report
process attributes 26
learn about 31
donor list
email reports
design page elements types 59
design 32
download
explained 13
class notes 61
email revenue summary 31
donations in bulk 41
event calendar
donations single transaction 26
design 33
education profile updates 17
design page elements types 60
event registrations in bulk 58
learn about 32
event registrations single transaction 47
event calendar group

.
I NDEX
399
design 35
H
explained 13
learn about 35
home page
event calendar highlights
chapter management 6
design 35
HTML editor 6
explained 14
hyperlink
learn about 35
insert 25
event registration form
design 36
explained 14
I
learn about 36
event registrations
IATS
download in bulk 58
configure for merchant accounts 9
download single transaction 47
image
events
inserting 24
code tables 20
saving 10
exclusion email list 49
update 11
export fields 1
uploading 10
Image Library
explained 2, 10
F
import users 21
insert image 24
field options 12
integrate with
filter list by 5
Raiser's Edge, The 1
formatted text and images
integration
design 43
fundraiser 56
explained 14
integration tasks
learn about 42
overview 2
formatted text and images (secured)
invalid email accounts 44
explained 14
issue report tab
frame
view after sending newsletter 33
explained 14
fundraiser
download 24
J
explained 14
integration 56
job board
pre-design work 24
design 44
roles 23
explained 15
fundraiser dashboard 52
learn about 43
design 53
explained 14
fundraiser page element
L
explained 14
fundraiser page element parts, design 24
layouts
fundraiser reports
create 93
design custom 56
design 94
design summary 55
edit properties 94
explained 14
explained 3
learn about 54
learn about 93
fundraising, team 21
linked user email options 5
linking pages 25
list
G
create 10
list messages tab
general procedures 5
view for email list 13
giving history
list templates tab
explained 15
view for email list 13
guess pass page, design 48
lists

.
400
I NDEX
excluding emails 49
create newsletter 28
seed 48
explained 28
targeted email 47
subscribing anonymously 20
notes
personal 69
M
notifications
create 55
Macromedia Flash File
delete 60
explained 15
overview 54
manage home page features 6
view tabs 58
manage personal pages 4
matching gifts
setting options 4
O
member role 4
membership form
online event registration 53
explained 15
online/offline gift summary 53
learn about 45
options, parts 11
membership page, current
organizing pages 3
design 45
overall progress summary 53
memberships
download 64
process transactions in Raiser's Edge, The 63
P
menu
explained 15
page elements types
learn about 50
action 55
menu part type definitions
comments 57
design 50
directory 58
merchant accounts 7
donor list 59
configure for Authorize.net 7
event calendar 60
configure for BeanStream 8
news 61
configure for IATS 9
news reader 62
configure for PayPal 9, 11
overview 55
message report tab
personal notes 63
view after sending message 20
photos 64
messages
profile 66
copy 25
rich text 67
create message 16
team list 67
explained 15
text 68
view tabs 20
thermometer 69
messages tab
page links
view for email template 6
design page elements types 63
page overview report 92
page rank report 92
N
page view summary 92
pages
navigation bar 4
create 3
navigation button
edit properties 4
design 52
edit web page design 5
explained 15
explained 3
learn about 52
linking 25
news
Site Explorer 3
design page elements types 61
part type elements
news reader
stylesheets 98
design 54
part types 12
design page elements types 62
participant role 23
explained 15
parts
learn about 54
create 18
newsletter
edit 19

.
I NDEX
401
explained 3
Q
PayPal
configure for merchant accounts 9, 11
queries in searches 24
personal notes
quick search part
design 69
design 74
design page elements types 63
explained 16
explained 15
learn about 73
learn about 69
personal page element
explained 15
R
personal page elements 3
personal page manager
Raiser's Edge, The
adding helplets 16
changes from chapter management 17
design
Raiser's Edge, The role 23
configure email 16
refresh roles 6
email 9
renew page, design 46
new community user options 6
report
pages for use as personal pages 8
email results 51
personal page options 5
report (email)
search page form options 9
design 32
explained 16
learn about 31
homepage dashboard 4
report (Fundraiser)
learn about 1
design custom 56
managing personal pages 4
design summary 55
process overview 2
learn about 54
personal pages
report (web traffic)
download 24
design 92
photos
learn about 92
design page elements types 64
required fields for The Raiser's Edge 8
plug-in options
restore
advocacy 7
user profiles 5
class note processing 3
rich text
constituent matching 5
design page elements types 67
currency configuration 3
role
linked user email 5
anonymous user 4
matching gifts 4
chapter management 1, 3
new constituents 3
content manager 3
service URL 2
create role-based security groups 6
transaction assignments 6
explained 5
poll
fundraiser 23
explained 16
member 4
poll responses
participant 23
download 60
Raiser's Edge, The 23
pre-design
team fundraising 23
chapter management 4
Web designer, for Blackbaud NetCommunity 24
team fundraising 24
role refresh 6
privacy defaults, set 12
profile
design page elements types 66
S
profile display
design 72
save image 10
explained 16
search part
learn about 71
design 75
properties tab
explained 16
view for email list 13
learn about 74
view for email template 6
search screen 24
searching 24
security 1

.
402
I NDEX
security groups 6
pre-design 24
seed list 48
role
sent acknowledgements
participant 23
view tabs 41
Raiser's Edge user 23
sent messages
supporter 23
view 20
Web designer, for Blackbaud NetCommunity
sent newsletter
24
view tabs 33
roles 23
servers
search page form options 38
configuring 15
select pages for use as participant and team pages
set
36
field options 12
user login form 39
sign-up requests
team list
download in bulk 16
design page elements types 67
download single transaction 10
templates
Site Explorer 3
create 7
explained 2
design 8, 2
site usage report 92
edit properties 8
slideshow
explained 2, 1
design 76
Site Explorer 3
explained 16
view message 7
learn about 76
view properties 6
stylesheets
testing emails 50
create 96
text
design 97
design page elements types 68
edit properties 96
thermometer
explained 3, 95
design page elements types 69
part type elements 98
toggle betwwen websites 5
subscribing anonymously to newsletters 20
toolbar 4
survey
top emails 53
design 78
top participants 53
explained 16
top teams 53
learn about 77
transaction assignments 6
surveys
transaction page, design 48
download responses 67
system options 12
U
T
uploading images 10
user education profile form
targeted content
design 80
design 79
explained 17
explained 16
learn about 80
learn about 79
user email preferences form
targeted email lists 47
explained 17
team fundraising
user interests form
configure email 48
explained 17
create email designs 37
user login
dashboards 52
design 84
design fundraiser part 28
explained 17
donation form 41
learn about 84
explained 21
user photos form
fundraiser options 30
explained 17
integration 56
user profile form
link to Blackbaud Enterprise fund and
design 86
Administrator roles 28
explained 18
matching gifts
learn about 86
create links to events 46
user profile updates

.
I NDEX
403
download 17
learn about 90
users 2
Website Overview 2
create user profiles 2
delete 2
development user 2
edit records 3
explained 1
import 21
restoring records 5
view user information 4
V
view
user information 4
view list tab
view for email list 13
visit summary 92
visitor summary 92
volunteer opportunity
design 88
explained 18
learn about 87
volunteer requests
download in bulk 46
download single transaction 43
W
Web designer role 24
web page layouts
create 93
design 94
edit properties 94
explained 3
learn about 93
web page templates 8
create 7
edit properties 8
Site Explorer 3
web pages
create 3
edit designs 5
edit properties 4
explained 3
templates 2
web service URL 2
Web sites
configuring 15
web traffic report
design 92
explained 18
learn about 92
weblog
design 90
explained 18

.
404
I NDEX

corporate headquarters
international contacts
about Blackbaud
Blackbaud, Inc.
Blackbaud Europe Ltd
Blackbaud is the leading global provider
2000 Daniel Island Drive
11 York Road
of software and related services designed
Charleston, SC 29492
London
specifically for nonprofit organizations.
USA
SE1 7NX
Approximately 16,000 organizations use one
Web
www.blackbaud.com
Phone
+44 (0) 20 7921 9600
Phone
843.216.6200
Fax
+44 (0) 20 7921 9601
or more of Blackbaud products and consulting
Fax
843.216.6100
38 Queen Street
services for fundraising, financial management,
Glasgow
Web site management, school administration,
support
G1 3DX
Scotland
and ticketing. Blackbaud's solutions include
Review the Customer Support Guide for information
The Raiser's Edge®, Team Approach®, The
about our online resources and support procedures.
Phone
+44 (0) 141 575 0000
Download the Customer Support Guide from our
Fax
+44 (0) 141 575 0999
Financial EdgeTM, The Education EdgeTM, The
Web site's Support Overview.
Patron Edge®, Blackbaud®NetCommunityTM,
http://support.blackbaud.com
Web
www.blackbaud.co.uk
Email
solutions@blackbaud.co.uk
The Information EdgeTM, WealthPointTM,
admin@blackbaud.co.uk
ProspectPointTM, and donorCentricsTM, as
documentation
support@blackbaud.co.uk
well as a wide range of consulting, analytical,
We welcome your comments and suggestions about
our user guides and help files. In the subject line of
Support (UK Local Rate)
and educational services. Founded in 1981,
your email, please include the product name and
0845 658 8500
Blackbaud is headquartered in Charleston,
version number.
Support (From Outside UK)
+44 (0) 141 575 0801
South Carolina and has operations in
documentationcomments@blackbaud.com
The Patron Edge Support (UK Local Rate)
Cambridge, Massachusetts; Toronto, Ontario;
0845 658 8580
Glasgow, Scotland; London, England; and
sales
The Patron Edge Support (From Outside UK)
+44 (0) 20 7921 9600
Sydney, Australia.
Contact us for more information about our products
and services.
Blackbaud Gift Aid
Email
solutions@blackbaud.com
Phone
01580 892235 (UK Local Rate)
Phone
800.443.9441
+44 (0) 1580 892235 (From
Fax
843.216.6111
Outside UK)
forms
Blackbaud Pacific Pty Ltd.
ABN 73 095 925 170
Contact Blackbaud Forms to learn about preprinted
Suite 4, 561-577 Harris Street
material designed specifically for Blackbaud
Ultimo NSW 2007
software. Learn more about our checks, Business and
Australia
Development Office forms, membership cards, Patron
Mailing Address
Edge tickets, and more.
PO Box K736
Web
http://forms.blackbaud.com
Haymarket NSW 1240
Phone
866.422.3676
Australia
Web
www.blackbaud.com.au
Email
sales@blackbaud.com.au
support@blackbaud.com.au
administration@blackbaud.com.au
Freecall 1800 688 910
Australia
0800 444 712
New Zealand
800 6162 205
Singapore
Phone
+61 2 9211 7366
Fax
+61 2 9211 7607
REV - 031507
© 2007, Blackbaud Inc.
This manual is for informational purposes only. Blackbaud makes no warranties, expressed or implied, in this summary. The
information contained in this document represents the current view of Blackbaud, Inc., on the items discussed as of
the date of this publication.
All Blackbaud product names appearing herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of Blackbaud, Inc. The names of actual
companies and products appearing herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

Document Outline

Table of Contents